Fire Alarm System Guide

Honeywell
XLS 3000 / XLS 140-2 (E)

Fire Detection and Alarm System Guide
Contents
1.0 Fire Alarm Control Panels

1.1 XLS 3000
1.2 XLS 140-2 (E)
2.0 Voice Control Systems

2.1 Digital Voice Command
2.2 Amplifiers
2.3 Emergency Telephone & Accessories
3.0 Accessories
3.1 Displays
3.2 Control and Network Modules
3.3 Power Supplies
3.4 Cabinets
3.5 Printers
4.0 Eclipse Intelligent Devices

4.1 Heat / Smoke Detectors
4.2 Input / Output Modules
4.3 Manual Call Points
4.4 Detector Accessories
5.0 Flashscan Intelligent Devices

5.1 Heat / Smoke Detectors
5.2 Manual Call Points
5.3 Detector Accessories
5.4 Relay and Output Control Modules
5.5 Release Control Modules
6.0 Detectors for Hazardous Areas

6.1 Intrinsically Safe Detectors
6.2 Intrinsically Safe MCPs
6.3 Explosion Proof Detectors
7.0 Audio / Visual Devices

7.1 Speaker Strobes
7.2 Horns
7.3 Bells
7.4 Sounders
8.0 Programming, Integration and Graphics

8.1 Programming Tool
8.2 EBI - Integration Platform
8.3 Fireman Graphics
8.4 Gateways
9.0 Standards / Approvals and Factory

9.1 ISO Factory Certification
9.2 FM
9.3 UL
9.4 References
XLS_3000_Inside Pages.indd 1
5/18/10 11:05:47 PM
5/18/10 11:05:48 PM
CONTACT INFORMATION
+971 4 807 3200
+971 4 881 6202
Projects and Sales:

Daniel Claridge
+971 50 662 1829
daniel.claridge@honeywell.com
Keshav Alur (Industrial)
+971 50 646 2913
keshav.alur@honeywell.com
Tamer Ammar (OEM)
+971 50 818 4971
tamer.ammar@honeywell.com
Marketing:
Vivek Gadgay
+971 50 661 9499
vivek.g@honeywell.com
Training and Technical Support:

Maher Ajouz
+971 50 818 0743
maher.ajouz@honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:05:48 PM
Fire Alarm Control Panel
1.0 Fire Alarm Control Panels

XLS 3000
XLS 140-2 (E)
XLS3000
Intelligent Addressable
Fire Alarm System
General
The Honeywell XLS3000 is an intelligent Fire Alarm Control
Panel designed for medium- to large-scale facilities. Fire emergency detection and evacuation are extremely critical to life
safety, and the XLS3000 is ideally suited for these applications.
The XLS3000 is part of the XLS Series of products from Honeywell. The XLS3000 is ideal for virtually any application because
it features a modular design that is configured per project
requirements. With one to ten Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs),
the XLS3000 supports up to 3,180 intelligent addressable
devices.
Information is critical to fire evacuation personnel, and the
XLS3000s large 640-character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
presents vital information to operators concerning a fire situation, fire progression, and evacuation details.
The Eclipse line of detectors and modules introduces a new
concept in fire detection. Because the devices are all individually
intelligent, they have the ability to communicate directly with one
another. For years the fire alarm industry has demanded peerto-peer communication between networked control panels. The
XLS3000 is the first to offer peer-to-peer communication
between the detection and notification devices. This new concept in detection technology offers unparalleled response time,
distributed intelligence and outstanding reliability.
The XLS3000 supports the FireWatch Series internet monitoring module IPDACT-2 and permits monitoring of alarm signals
over the Internet, saving the monthly cost of two dedicated business telephone lines. Although not required, the secondary
telephone line may be retained providing backup communication over the public switched telephone line.
A host of other options are available, including single- or multichannel voice; firefighters telephone; LED, LCD, or PC-based
graphic annunciators; fire or integration networking; advanced
detection products for challenging environments, and many
additional options.
Features
Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th edition.
One to ten isolated intelligent Signaling Line Circuits (SLC)
Style 4, 6 or 7.
Up to 159 detectors and 159 modules per SLC, 318 devices
per loop/3,180 per FACP or network node.
Large 16 line, 640 character LCD backlit display or use
display-less as a network node.
Network options:
High-speed network for up to 200 nodes (XLS3000,
XLS140-2, XLS140, XLS-NCA/-NCA2 Network Annunciator, or XLS-DVC).
Standard network or up to 103 nodes (XLS140, XLS140-2,
XLS3000, XLS-NCA/-NCA2 Network Annunciator, or XLSDVC, and Honeywell Enterprise Buildings Integrator
[EBI]). Up to 54 nodes when XLS-DVC is used in network
paging.
Built-in Alarm, Trouble, Security, and Supervisory relays.
VeriFire Tools online/offline program option.
Application code is saved in Flash memory.
With built-in Degraded Mode operation, the system is capable of general alarm if a fire alarm condition is present even if
the CPU fails.
7070covh.jpg
XLS3000s, XLS-DVC audio option at right

4,000 event history file in nonvolatile memory, plus a separate 1,000-event alarm-only file.
Alarm Verification selection per point.
Autoprogramming, walk test, positive alarm sequence, and
time scheduling.
Support for Eclipse Detector Protocol.
Backwards compatible with FlashScan and CLIP SLC
devices.
Optional universal 2,040-point DACT.
FM6320 approved Gas Detection System with TC809C1004
module and any FM listed gas detector.
EIA-232 printer port; EIA-485 annunciator port.
Honeywell SMART maintenance reporting.
Description
SIGNALING LINE CIRCUITS
The Honeywell XLS3000 Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm
System supports up to ten isolated intelligent signaling line circuits with Style 4, 5, or 7. Each of the 10 circuits can have up to
159 detectors (any mix of ion, photo, laser photo, thermal, or
multi-sensor) and 159 modules (Addressable pull stations, normally open contact devices, two-wire smoke, notification, or
relay) with a total of 318 device per loop/3,180 per FACP or network node. Actual circuit loading is dependant on SLC communication protocol.
Weekly Occupancy Schedules allow changing sensor sensitivity
by time of day, and day of week. An optional 2,040 point digital
alarm communicator transmitter (DACT) is available for use with
central monitoring stations. Annunciator support, including custom graphics, is provided via an EIA-485 annunciator port. An
EIA-232 printer port is also provided. The history file has a
4,000 event capacity in nonvolatile memory, plus a separate
1,000 event alarm-only file. Advanced history filters allow sorting
by event, time, date, or address. Alarm verification selection can
be done per point, with tally. Autoprogramming and Walk test
reports are provided. The panel includes positive alarm
sequence (PAS) Presignal functionality. Timer options include
Silence Inhibit and Auto Silence.
Field programmability, with check and compare, is provided on a
PC with the Verifire Tools program. Up to 1,000 powerful Boolean logic equations can be used. Non-alarm points are provided
for lower priority functions. Remote ACK/Signal Silence/System
reset/Drill can be done via monitor modules. The XLS3000 supports the SCS Series smoke control system in both HVAC or
FSCS modes.
Figure 1 shows some of the sample system options.
5/18/10 11:05:48 PM
DISPLAY
The XLS3000 display is a backlit LCD with 640-character display and a program keypad. The display allows up to nine users,
each with a password and selectable access levels. The display
has 11 LED indicators:
Power
Supervisory
Point Disabled
Fire Alarm
System Trouble
CPU Failure
Pre-Alarm
Other Event
Controls Active
Security
Signals Silenced
There are also five membrane switch controls: Acknowledge,
Signal Silence, Drill, System Reset, and Lamp Test.
TC840C1000 COPTIR
ADVANCED MULTI-CRITERIA DETECTOR
Detects all four major elements of a fire (smoke, heat, CO,
and flame).
Automatic drift compensation of smoke sensor and CO cell.
High nuisance-alarm immunity.
Six sensitivity levels.
TC809C1004 GAS DETECTION MODULE:
FLASHSCAN
At the heart of the XLS3000 is a set of detection devices and
device protocol FlashScan. FlashScan is an all-digital protocol that gives superior precision and high noise immunity.
As well as giving quick identification of an active input device,
this new protocol can also activate many output devices in a
fraction of the time required by competitive protocols. This high
speed also allows the XLS3000 to have the largest device per
loop capacity in the industry 318 points yet every input and
output device is sampled in less than two seconds. Up to 159
outputs can be activated in less than 5 seconds. The microprocessor-based FlashScan detectors have bicolor LEDs that can
be coded to provide diagnostic information, such as device
address during Walk Test.
The multicolor LEDs blink the device address during a Walk
Test. FlashScan operates with a fully digital, high-precision protocol. The multi-detector algorithm involves nearby detectors in
the alarm decision, and the FlashScan device also utilizes drift
compensation.
The FlashScan protocol incorporates nine levels of pre-alarm

XLS intelligent sensing, each of which can be manually
adjusted. Several programmable devices are available:
Ion 0.5 to 2.5%/foot obscuration.

Photo 0.5 to 2.35%/foot obscuration.
Laser (Pinnacle) 0.02 to 2.0%/foot obscuration.
Acclimate 0.5 to 4.0%/foot obscuration.
h7070blok.wmf
Interface to industry-standard linear scale 4-20 mA sensors.

Five programmable thresholds
FM Approved, Class 6320 (Stationary Gas Sensors/Detectors)
FlashScan Exclusive
World-Leading Detector Protocol
Figure 1 XLS3000 Sample System Options

NOTE: XLS3000-CPU firmware version 14.0 (and higher) can support LCD-160 on the RDP port, or LCD-80 in terminal mode, but not
both at the same time.
Page 2 of 8 3/12/2010 74-4034-4
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:05:50 PM
COPTIR 1.0 to 4.0%/foot obscuration.

The FlashScan has a self-optimizing pre-alarm, automatic
detector sensitivity testing, and two levels of maintenance alert.
It also provides programmable activation of sounder/relay bases
during alarm or pre-alarm. The Read Status displays the level of
detector cleanliness.
Intelligent Sensing
Intelligent sensing is a set of software algorithms that provide
the XLS3000 with industry-leading smoke detection capability.
These complex algorithms require many calculations on each
reading of each detector, and are made possible by the very
high-speed microcomputer used by the XLS3000.
Drift Compensation and Smoothing. Drift compensation
allows the detector to retain its original ability to detect actual
smoke, and resist false alarms, even as dirt accumulates. It
reduces maintenance requirements by allowing the system to
automatically perform the periodic sensitivity measurements
required by NFPA 72. Smoothing filters are also provided by
software to remove transient noise signals, usually caused by
electrical interference.
electric, TC907 Ionization, TC908 Thermal, S464H manual pull

stations, TC909 single and dual input modules, TC910N supervised and TC910R unsupervised control relay modules.
Circuit Isolation
All Eclipse devices include built-in fault isolation modules to
improve system survivability in the event of a field wiring short
circuit which would normally disable the entire loop. This feature
is normally made available only as an option in competing systems though the use of additional hardware. By incorporating
this feature directly into the base product, installation labor and
material cost are reduced.
Device Auto-Adressing and Location Identification

The fault isolators are also important to the Eclipse devices as
they are used during system commissioning to locate the position of devices on the circuit relative to each other and the control panel. Using this information, the control panel can then
automatically assign device addresses, eliminating a normally
labor intensive portion of the start up process. Device locations
and addresses are then uploaded to the Verifire Tools programming tool and displayed in a graphical format for use by the
installer or service person.
Maintenance Warnings. When the drift compensation performed for a detector reaches a certain level, the performance of
the detector may be compromised, and special warnings are
given. There are three warning levels: (1) Low Chamber value;
(2) Maintenance Alert, indicative of dust accumulation that is
near but below the allowed limit; (3) Maintenance Urgent, indicative of dust accumulation above the allowed limit.
Device Replacement
Sensitivity Adjust. Nine sensitivity levels are provided for alarm

detection. These levels can be set manually, or can change
automatically between day and night. Nine levels of pre-alarm
sensitivity can also be selected, based on predetermined levels
of alarm. Pre-alarm operation can be latching or self-restoring,
and can be used to activate special control functions.
SMART
Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm. Each detector may be set for SelfOptimizing pre-alarm. In this special mode, the detector
learns its normal environment, measuring the peak analog
readings over a long period of time, and setting the pre-alarm
level just above these normal peaks.
If an Eclipse field device needs to be replaced for service purposes, the control panel automatically locates the replacement
device, determines its device type and then downloads the
required programming information, including device address
and operating parameters without operator intervention.
With the Honeywell System Maintenance and Reporting Tool

(SMART), another first in the industry, the XLS3000 system is
capable of reporting the maintenance history of each field
device, thus simplifying the Testing and Inspection requirements
mandated by NFPA. When a device exceeds the NFPA testing
limits, the user is alerted by an indication on the control panel
that service should be performed. This feature can be used by
owners and building inspectors alike to insure that proper maintenance is being performed on the system.
Cooperating Multi-Detector Sensing. A patented feature of

intelligent sensing is the ability of a smoke sensor to consider
readings from nearby sensors in making alarm or pre-alarm
decisions. Without statistical sacrifice in the ability to resist false
alarms, it allows a sensor to increase its sensitivity to actual
smoke by a factor of almost two to one.
Using Verifire Tools, the owner or service company can run

reports that list the devices in need of testing, as well as predictive reports to list devices that will be coming due in the next 30,
60 or 90 day interval, thus eliminating repeat service calls.
ECLIPSE
AUTOPROGRAM
In addition to supporting FlashScan protocol, the XLS3000 also

supports the new Eclipse device series and communication protocol from System Sensor. This technological introduction brings
an advancement to the Honeywell XLS3000 that is yet
unmatched in the industry in distributed processing and system
response time.
Autoprogram is a timesaving feature of the XLS3000. It is a

special software routine that allows the XLS3000 to learn what
devices are physically connected and automatically load them in
the program with default values for all parameters. Requiring
less than one minute to run, this routine allows the user to have
almost immediate fire protection in a new installation, even if
only a portion of the detectors are installed.
Response
Field Programming Options
Eclipse improves on the patented FlashScan protocol by further

distributing the decision making process down to the device
level. Eclipse sensors and alarm modules are able to broadcast
their condition directly to the output devices on the same loop,
eliminating the need for the control panel to process the alarm
events and send individual output commands to the field
devices. Output devices such as control modules are pre-programmed with response sequences stored directly in the field
device. With this communication method, all output devices on a
circuit can respond simultaneously to the alarm input within 250
ms of activation.
VeriFire Tools
VeriFire Tools is an offline programming and test utility that can
greatly reduce installation programming time, and increase confidence in the site-specific software. It is Windows based and
provides technologically advanced capabilities to aid the
installer. The installer may create the entire program for the
XLS3000 in the comfort of the office, test it, store a backup file,
then bring it to the site and download from a laptop into the
panel.
Device Technology
The system will release on any of ten independent hazards.

There are three options of sophisticated cross-zone sensing.
There is a delay timer and adjustable discharge timers, and
there are four options for Abort.
Eclipse devices (TC900 series) are available in the traditional

line of detection and control products including: TC906 Photo-
www.honeywell.com
RELEASING SERVICE
74-4034-4 3/12/2010 Page 3 of 8
5/18/10 11:05:52 PM
EMERGENCY VOICE AND FIREFIGHTERS TELEPHONE
4.5 A (maximum). Mounts in the bottom left hand section (battery row) of a XLS-CAB-4 enclosure. See 85-3057.
The XLS3000 has digital message generation, hard-wired voice

control options, and a Firefighters telephone option. The voice
message is powered by 50 or 75 Watt high efficiency amplifiers
(DAA Series). There is an optional backup tone generator and
amplifier available. For the Emergency Voice feature, the newly
introduced Digital Voice Command provides eight channels of
one-way alarm broadcast and five channels of two-way communications with remote fire telephones (see data sheet 74-4033).
AMPS-24E: Main power supply and battery charger for the

XLS3000. One required for each XLS3000 CPU. Charges 25 to
200 AH batteries. Primary input power: 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,
2.25 A. Mounts in the bottom left hand section (battery row) of a
XLS-CAB-4 enclosure. See 85-3057.
XLS3000-CPU
The control panel electronics are contained on one printed circuit board (PCB) that holds the central processing unit
(XLS3000-CPU). The XLS3000-CPU can be purchased with or
without keypad and display; connections are identical on both
versions.
Ordering Information
CONFIGURATION GUIDELINES
Stand-alone and network systems require a main display. On
single-CPU systems (one XLS3000), the display option is the
XLS3000-CPUD. On network systems (two or more networked
fire panel nodes), at least one XLS-NCA2 is required. Options
listed as follows.
MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS

XLS3000-CPUD: XLS3000 with display.
character display with keypad.
Includes CPU, 640
XLS3000-CPUND: XLS3000 without display.

only.
Includes CPU
AMPS-24: Main power supply and battery charger for the

XLS3000. One required for each XLS3000 CPU. Charges 25 to
200 AH batteries. Primary input power: 110/120 VAC, 50/60 Hz,
XLS-ELCM-320: Loop Control Module, Eclipse Protocol. Provides one Eclipse SLC. XLS3000 supports up to five XLSELCM-320 and five XLS-ELEM-320 expanders for a total of ten
SLCs. See 85-3056.
XLS-ELEM-320: Loop Expander Module, Eclipse Protocol.
Expands an XLS-ELCM-320. Cannot be used to expand an
LCM-320. See 85-3056.
LCM-320: Loop Control Module, CLIP/FlashScan Protocol.
Provides one CLIP/FlashScan SLC. XLS3000 supports up to
five LCM-320 and five LEM-320 expanders for a total of ten
SLCs. See 85-3056.
LEM-320: Loop Expander Module, CLIP/FlashScan Protocol.
Expands an LCM-320. Cannot be used to expand an XLSELCM-320. See 85-3056.
NETWORKING OPTIONS
XLS-NCA2: Network Control Annunciator. One required per
XLS-NET. Provides annunciation and control of all points on
XLS-NET. See 74-4045.
NCM-W, NCM-F: Network Communications Modules. Wire and
multi-mode fiber versions available. One required for each network node (XLS3000, XLS140, XLS140-2, XLS-DVC, BACNET
GATEWAY, FNA) on XLS-NET. Mounts in a standard chassis
position or on a BMP-1 plate. See 85-3007.
XLS-NCM-EBI-W: Network Control Module, Wire. Used in applications where the FNA (Fire Network Adaptor) is mounted
remotely next to an EBI server. The XLS-NCM-EBI-W mounts
h6856cn2.wmf
Network Diagram
Figure 2 XLSNET Block Diagram

Page 4 of 8 3/12/2010 74-4034-4
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:05:52 PM
inside the EBI server (in an PCI slot) and communicates with the
FNA. See 85-3007.
XLS-NCM-EBI-F: Network Control Module, Multi-Mode Fiber.
Used in applications where the FNA (Fire Network Adaptor) is
mounted remotely next to an EBI server. The XLS-NCM-EBI-F
mounts inside the EBI server (in an PCI slot) and communicates
with the FNA. See 85-3007.
HS-NCM-W/MF/SF/WMF/WSF/MFSF: High-speed network
communications modules. Wire, single-mode fiber, multi-mode
fiber, and media conversion models are available. See 74-4082.
RPT-W, RPT-F, RPT-WF: Repeater board with wire connection
(RPT-W), fiber connection (RPT-F), or allowing a change in
media type between wire and fiber (RPT-WF). See 85-3007.
Q7055B1039. FNA (Fire Network Adaptor). Used to connect
XLS-NET or a standalone XLS3000 to Honeywell EBI. Requires
one NCM-W/F or one XLS-NCM-EBI-W/F. See 74-4017.
BACNET-GW-3: BACnet interface for the XLS3000 or XLS-NET.
Allows the XLS3000 to be connected to any BACnet capable
application (subject to local AHJ approval). See 85-3067.
XLS-GW-EM-3: XLSNET Gateway, embedded. See 74-5084 .
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES & BATTERIES

BAT Series Battery: Batteries, 12V, Sealed Lead-Acid. AMPS24 is compatible with 25 AH to 200 AH batteries. See 85-3072.
BB-100: Battery Enclosure. Holds up to two 100 AH batteries.
BB-200: Battery Enclosure. Stores up to 200 AH batteries.
EOL-CR / CW: End of line relay plate. Required for certain
Canadian Applications. See 85-3062.
XLS-LBB: Battery Enclosure, Black. Holds two 60 AH batteries
or one 100 AH battery.
RM-1: Remote paging microphone series. See 85-3053.

AFAWS Series: Fire fighters remote telephone enclosure. See
85-3052.
ACT-2: Audio Coupling Transformer. See 85-3065.
EQ Series Cabinets: EQ series cabinets will house amplifiers,
power supplies, battery chargers and control modules. EQ cabinets are available in three sizes, B through D. 85-3110.
TC810T1000: Firephone Control Module connects a remote
firefighter telephone to a centralized telephone console. Reports
status to panel. Wiring to jacks and handsets is supervised. See
74-4077.
PRINTERS, ACS DEVICES & PERIPHERALS

XLS-PRN-6: 80-column desktop dot matrix printer. See 853073.
ACM-24AT: ACS annunciator provides 24 LEDS with control
buttons for annunciation and control of points.
Can be
expanded up to 96 points with AEM-24AT expanders. Active/
Alarm LEDs can be programmed by point to be red, green or
yellow; the Trouble LED is always yellow. Mounts on a DP-DISP
or ADP-4B. See 85-3004.
AEM-24AT: Same LED and switch capabilities as ACM-24AT;
expands the ACM-24AT to 48, 72, or 96 points (24 points per
AEM-24AT). Mounts on a DP-DISP or ADP-4B. See 85-3004.
ACS annunciator provides 48 programmable LEDS for annunciation of points. Can be expanded up to 96 points with an
AEM-48A expander. Active/Alarm LEDs can be programmed by
point to be red, green or yellow; the Trouble LED is always yellow. Mounts on a DP-DISP or ADP-4B. See 85-3004.
Mounts on a DP-DISP or ADP-4B. See 85-3004.
XLS-LBBR: Battery Enclosure, Red. Holds two 60 AH batteries

or one 100 AH battery.
ACS Relay Module. Used to provide up to 8 remote form C contacts. Can be located up to 6,000 ft (1828.8 m) from the panel.
See 85-3046.
APS2-6R: Auxiliary power supply. Provides two 24 VDC circuits, each rated for 3.0 Amps in alarm and 2.0 Amps continuous. Commonly used for the operation of peripheral audio/
visual devices or any other application requiring 24VDC. See
85-3050.
LCD-160: Remote Annunciator. Mimics the XLS3000 Display.

Mounts in an XLS-ABS-2D(R), XLS-ABS-4D(R), XLS-ABF-2B,
XLS-ABF-4B enclosure, or a DP-DISP, or ADP-4B dress plate.
See 85-3058.
ACPS-610: 6.0 amp or 10 amp addressable charging power

supply. See 85-3109.
HPF24S6: 24 VDC NAC Remote Power Supply, 6A. Provides
built-in NAC synchronization. 120 VAC only. UL LISTED.
HPF24S6C: Same as HPF24S6, but ULC LISTED.
HPF24S6E: Same as HPF24S6, but 240 VAC.
HPF24S8: 24 VDC NAC Remote Power Supply, 8A. Provides
built-in NAC synchronization. 120 VAC only. UL LISTED.
HPF24S8C: Same as HPF24S8, but ULC LISTED.
HPR24S8E: Same as HPF24S8, but 240 VAC.
AUDIO OPTIONS
XLS-DVC Digital Audio System: XLS-DVC Digital Voice System. Networkable or standalone with a XLS3000. See 74-4033.
DAA-50 Series, DAA-75 Series: XLS-DVC Digital Audio Amplifiers. Used with the XLS-DVC digital voice system, these amplifiers communicate via the digital audio look to provide 8
channels of audio messaging and 5 channels of fire fighter's
telephone communication over a single twisted pair of wire or
fiber pair. See 74-4032 and 85-3121.
XPIQ: Intelligent Audio Transponder. Requires a FlashScan
SLC loop. Provides up to four 25 W programmable amplifiers.
Used with the XLS-DVC-EM with the DVC-AO Analog Audio
option board. See 74-4045.
AA-30, AA-100, AA-120: Traditional Audio Amplifiers. Amplifies
a low level audio signal to high level audio at 30, 100 or 120
Watts. Used with the XLS-DVC-EM when the DVC-AO Analog
Audio Option is used. See 85-3044.
www.honeywell.com
LCD-80: LCD Remote Annunciator. 80-character, backlit LCD

display. Mounts up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m) from panel. 85-3066.
SCS Series: Smoke control station. Used for UL listed smoke
control applications. See 85-3048.
UZC-256: Universal Zone Coder provides non-interfering successive zone coding. Field programmable via laptop software.
Mounts on a CHS-4 series chassis within XLS3000.
LDM-32: Lamp Driver module. Used to drive custom graphic
annunciators. Mounts in a standard chassis position or inside a
graphic annunciator. See 85-3042.
DPI-232: Direct Panel Interface. Specialized modem for extending EIA-232 serial data links to remotely located control panels
and/or peripherals. Mounts in a standard chassis position. See
85-3006.
COMMUNICATORS (DACTS) AND TRANSMITTERS

UDACT: Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter.
Provides up to 636 channels. See 85-3049.
411 Series: 411 Series Slave Digital Alarm Communicator
Transmitters. See 85-3063.
411 UDAC: 411UDAC Standalone Digital Alarm Communicator/
Transmitter. Features remote upload and download capabilities.
See 85-3064.
TM-4 Transmitter: Transmitter Module used for municipal box
trip. Includes three reverse-polarity circuits and one municipal
box circuit. Mounts in a standard chassis position. See 853005.
74-4034-4 3/12/2010 Page 5 of 8
5/18/10 11:05:53 PM
COMPATIBLE INTELLIGENT DEVICES

unit
of
XP6-MA: FlashScan six-zone interface module; connects

intelligent alarm system to two-wire conventional detection
zone. See 85-3070.
reflector
of
XP6-R: FlashScan six-relay (Form-C) control module. See 853071.
BEAMHK: Heating kit for transmitter/receiver

TC847A1004below. See 74-3940.
BEAMHKR: Heating kit for use
TC847A1004 below. See 74-3940.
with
the
BEAMLRK: Long-range accessory kit, TC847A1004 below. See

74-3940.
BEAMMRK: Multi-mount kit, TC847A1004 below. See 74-3940.
BEAMSMK: Surface-mount kit, TC847A1004 below. See 743940.
TC847A1004: Intelligent beam smoke detector with integral
sensitivity test. See 74-3940.
TC840C1000: FlashScan COPTIR Advanced Multi-Criteria
Detector. See 74-5070.
TC807B1059: Low-profile FlashScan ionization detector.
TC807B1059: Low-profile FlashScan photoelectric detector.
TC806B1076: Low-profile FlashScan photoelectric detector
with 135F (57C) thermal.
TC808B1041: FlashScan thermal detector 135F (57C).
TC808B1058: FlashScan thermal detector 135F (57C) with
rate-of-rise.
TC808B1066: FlashScan 190F (88C) high-temperature thermal detector.
DNR: InnovairFlex low-flow non-relay duct-detector housing
(order TC806DNR separately).
Replaces TC806D1049/
TC806D1056. See 74-4076.
DNRW: Same as above with NEMA-4 rating, watertight. See
74-4076.
TC806DNR: Low-profile intelligent photoelectric sensor,

remote test capable. For use with DNR(W).
TC806DNRCDN: Same as TC806DNR but with ULC listing.
TC840M1021: FlashScan Acclimate low-profile multi-sensor
detector.
TC846A1013: FlashScan Pinnacle laser photo detector.
B224RB: Low-profile relay base. See 85-3043.
14507371-005: Isolator base for low-profile detectors. See 853043.
XP10-M: FlashScan ten-input monitor module. See 85-3068.
ENCLOSURES, CHASSIS & DRESS PLATES

XLS-CAB-4 Series Enclosure: XLS3000 mounts in a standard
CAB-4 Series enclosure. Backbox and door ordered seperately;
requires XLS-BP2-4 battery plate. A trim ring option is available
for semi-flush mounting. See 85-3002.
CHS-M3: Chassis for XLS3000 CPU for all applications unless
the XLS-DVC is used with fire fighter's telephones. Mounts in
the top row of a XLS-CAB-4 series enclosure.
CA-2: Chassis for XLS3000 CPU when XLS-DVC is used with
fire fighter's telephone. Mounts in the top two rows of a XLSCAB-4 series enclosure. See 74-4033.
DP-DISP: Display dress plate. Used whenever a CHS-M3 is
used. Covers the top row of a XLS-CAB-4 series enclosure.
ADP-4B: Annunciator dress plate. Mounts in rows 2, 3 or 4 of a
XLS-CAB-4 series enclosure. Used with ACS series annunciators.
BMP-1: Cover Plate. Used with the DP-DISP or ADP-4B whenever an annunciator position is unused and needs to be covered.
DP-1B: Solid Blank plate. Used to cover rows 2, 3 or 4. Used
when the installed equipment does not require user interaction
(such as audio amplifiers).
XLS-BP2-4: Battery Plate. Covers the battery row.
required for each XLS3000 system.
One
CHS-4L: Standard Chassis, Low Profile. Used in rows 1 through

4. Commonly used for AA series amplifiers.
CHS-4N: Standard Chassis, High Profile. Used in rows 1
through 4. Commonly used for APS-6R power supplies and
other peripherals such as NCMs, LCMs, etc.
CHS-6: Chassis used with the XP6 and XP10 Multi Modes.
Mounts up to six modules in any XLS-CAB-4 series row.
AUDIO VISUAL DEVICES (RECOMMENDED)
14507371-001: Low-profile base. Standard U.S. style. See 853043.
P2 & P4 Series: SpectrAlert Advance Wall Horn/Strobes. See

85-0304 or 85C-0304 (Canada).
14506414-002: European-style, 4" (10.16 cm) base. See 853043.
CH Series: SpectrAlert Advance Wall Chimes. See 85-0306 or

85C-0306 (Canada).
B200SR: Intelligent sounder base, Temporal 3 or Continuous

tone. See 85-3043.
SP2 Series: SpectrAlert Wall Speaker/Strobes, Wall Mount.

See 85-0302.
TC809A1059: FlashScan monitor module. See 74-3993.

TC809D1004: FlashScan dual monitor module. See 74-3993.
SP2C Series: SpectrAlert Ceiling Speaker/Strobes, Ceiling

Mount. See 85-3101.
TC841A1000: FlashScan two-wire detector monitor module.

See 74-3993.
SP200 Series: SpectrAlert Speakers. See 85-0301.
TC809B1008: FlashScan miniature monitor module. See 743993.
PA400 Series: SpectrAlert PA400 Series Mini Sounders. See

85-3083.
TC809C1004: FlashScan 4-20 mA protocol monitor module.
PF24V Series: Exit Point Directional Sounder. Used to mark

perimeter exits. See 85-3059.
TC810S1000: FlashScan releasing control module. See 745068.
SSM Series: Standard Fire Alarm Bells. See 85-3107.
TC810N1013: FlashScan NAC control module. See 74-3995.

TC810R1024: FlashScan relay module. See 74-3995.
S464G1007: Manual pull station, addressable (CLIP/FlashScan). See 74-3365.
S464H1006: Manual pull station, addressable (Eclipse). See 744014.
TC811A1006: Isolator module. See 77-4555.
XP6-C: FlashScan six-circuit supervised control module. See
85-3069.
Page 6 of 8 3/12/2010 74-4034-4
MISCELLANEOUS
R-10, R-20, EOLR Series: Multi-Voltage conventional relays,
UL Fire rated. Used for a variety of fire applications. See 853111.
FM Series: FM Series Magnetic Door Holders. See 85-3095.
IPDACT-2/2UD,
Internet Monitoring Module: Mounts in
IPENC enclosure. Connects to primary and secondary DACT
telephone output ports for internet communications over customer-provided ethernet connection. Requires compatible Teldat VisorALARM Central Station Receiver. Can use DHCP or
static IP. .
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:05:53 PM
IPCHSKIT: IP Communicator Chassis Mounting Kit. For mounting an IPDACT-2 onto the panel chassis or CHS-4 series chassis. Use IPENC for external mounting applications.
IPSPLT: Y-adaptor option allow connection of both panel dialer
outputs to one IPDACT-2 cable input.
www.honeywell.com
IPENC: External enclosure for IPDACT, includes IPBRKT

mounting bracket; Red. For Black order IPENC-B.
74-4034-4 3/12/2010 Page 7 of 8
5/18/10 11:05:54 PM
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
System Capacity
Intelligent Signaling Line Circuits.............. 1 expandable to 10

Intelligent detectors ............................................ 159 per loop
Addressable monitor/control modules ................ 159 per loop
Programmable software zones ............................... over 2000
ACS annunciators
per XLS3000-CPU..................... 32 address x 64 or 96 points
NOTE: The XLS3000-CPU can support up to 96 annunciator
address points per ACM-24/-48.
Specifications
Model: XLS3000 Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm System
Primary Input Power:
AMPS-24: 110-120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 Amps maximum.

AMPS-24E: 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.25 Amps maximum.
DC Output:
24 VDC: Up to 4.5 Amps
5 VDC: Up to 1.0 A.
Total Output Power: 24V, 4.5 A in alarm.
Temperature Ratings: Ambient: 32F to 120F (0 to 49C).
Humidity Ratings: 10 to 93% RH, non-condensing.
System Capacity:
Intelligent Signaling Line Circuits: 1, expandable to 10.
Intelligent Detectors: 159 per loop.
Addressable Monitor/Control Modules: 159 per loop.
Programmable Software Zones: over 2,000.
ACS Annunciators per XLS3000-CPU: 32 address x 64 or
96* points.
*NOTE: The XLS3000-CPU can support up to 96 annunciator
address points per ACM-24/-48.
Standards and Codes: The XLS3000 Intelligent Addressable

Fire Alarm is designed to comply with the following standards:
NFPA 72 Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station, Proprietary,

and Emergency Voice/Alarm Fire System Requirements.
Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 864 (Fire), 9th
Edition.
Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 1076 (Burglary).
Temperature and Humidity Ranges

This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0
49C/32 120F and at a relative humidity 93% 2% RH (noncondensing) at 32C 2C (90F 3F). However, the useful
life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges
and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and
its peripherals be installed in an environment with a normal room
temperature of 15 27C/60 80F.
Agency Listings and Approvals

These listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in
this document. In some cases, certain modules or applications
may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be
in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL Listed: S470
ULC Listed: S470
MEA: 232-06-E Vol 2
FDNY: COA#6031
CSFM: 7170-1130:256 (Commercial)
FM Approved
FM6320 Approved. Class 6320 for Gas Detection
City of Chicago
City of Denver
PSB Corporation
This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific
applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice.
SMART, Eclipse, XPEDITE, EBI, and Pinnacle are all trademarks; and Acclimate, Filtrex, FlashScan, NION, NOTIFIER, System Sensor,
VeriFire, and VIEW are all registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.
2010 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited.
Automation and Control Solutions

Honeywell International Inc.
Honeywell Limited-Honeywell Limite
1985 Douglas Drive North
35 Dynamic Drive
Golden Valley, MN 55422
Scarborough, Ontario M1V 4Z9
www.honeywell.com
74-4034-4 Rev. 03-10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
U.S. Registered Trademark
2010 Honeywell International Inc.
Page 8 of 8
5/18/10 11:05:54 PM
XLS140-2(E)
Fire Alarm Control Panel
General
In stand-alone or network configurations, Honeywells XLS140-2
meets virtually every application requirement.
The FireWatch Series internet monitoring modules IPDACT-2

and IPDACT-2UD permit monitoring of alarm signals over the
Internet, saving the monthly cost of two dedicated business telephone lines. Although not required, the secondary telephone
line may be retained providing backup communication over the
public switched telephone line.
NOTE: Unless called out with a version-specific E at the end of
the part number, XLS140-2 refers to models XLS140-2 and
XLS140-2E; similarly, XLS140-CPU2 refers to models XLS140CPU2 and XLS140-CPU2E.
Features
One, expandable to two, isolated intelligent Signaling Line
Circuit (SLC) Style 4, 6 or 7.
Up to 159 detectors (any mix of ion, photo, thermal, or multisensor) and 159 modules (Addressable pull stations, normally open contact devices, two-wire smoke, notification, or
relay) per SLC. 318 devices per loop/636 per FACP or network node.
Standard 80-character display, 640-character large display,
or display-less (a node on a network).
Network options:
High-speed network for up to 200 nodes (XLS3000,
XLS140-2, XLS140, XLS-NCA/-NCA2 Network Annunciator, or XLS-DVC).
Standard network for up to 103 nodes (XLS140, XLS1402, XLS3000, XLS-NCA/-NCA2 Network Annunciator, or
XLS-DVC, and Honeywell Enterprise Buildings Integrator [EBI]). Up to 54 nodes when DVC is used in network
paging.
6.0 amp switch mode power supply with four Class A/B builtin Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC). Selectable System
Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex strobe synchronization.
Built-in Alarm, Trouble, Security, and Supervisory relays.
VeriFire Tools online or offline programming utility. Upload/
Download, save, store, check, compare, and simulate panel
databases. Upgrade panel firmware.
Autoprogramming and Walk Test reports.
Optional universal 636-point DACT.
80-character remote annunciators (up to 32).
EIA-485 annunciators, including custom graphics.
Printer interface (80-column and 40-column printers).
History file with 800-event capacity in nonvolatile memory,
plus separate 200-event alarm-only file.
Alarm Verification selection per point, with tally.
Autoprogramming and Walk Test reports.
Presignal/Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS).
Silence inhibit and Auto Silence timer options.
March time/temporal/California two-stage coding/strobe synchronization.
XLS140-2.jpg
Designed with modularity and for ease of system planning, the

XLS140-2 can be configured with just a few devices for small
building applications, or for a large campus or high-rise application. Simply add additional peripheral equipment to suit the
application.
Field-programmable on panel or on PC, with VeriFire ToolsUni program check, compare, simulate.
Full QWERTY keypad.
Battery charger supports 18 200 amp hour batteries.
Non-alarm points for lower priority functions.
Remote ACK/Signal Silence/System Reset/Drill via monitor
modules.
Automatic time control functions, with holiday exceptions.
Surface Mount Technology (SMT) electronics.
Extensive, built-in transient protection.
Powerful Boolean logic equations.
XLS-NCA2 640-CHARACTER DISPLAY FEATURES:

Backlit, 640-character display.
Supports SCS Series smoke control system in both HVAC or
FSCS modes (XLS140-2 not UL-Listed for FSCS).
Printer and CRT EIA-232 ports.
EIA-485 annunciator and terminal mode ports.
Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, and Security relays.
FLASHSCAN INTELLIGENT FEATURES:
Poll up to 318 devices in less than two seconds.

Activate up to 159 outputs in less than five seconds.
Multicolor LEDs blink device address during Walk Test.
Fully digital, high-precision protocol (U.S. Patent 5,539,389).
Manual sensitivity adjustment nine levels.
Pre-alarm intelligent sensing nine levels.
Day/Night automatic sensitivity adjustment.
Sensitivity windows:
Ion 0.5 to 2.5%/foot obscuration.
Photo 0.5 to 2.35%/foot obscuration.
Laser (Pinnacle) 0.02 to 2.0%/foot obscuration.
Acclimate 0.5 to 4.0%/foot obscuration.
COPTIR 1.0 to 4.0%/foot obscuration.
Drift compensation (U.S. Patent 5,764,142).
Degraded mode in the unlikely event that the XLS140CPU2 microprocessor fails, FlashScan detectors revert to
degraded operation and can activate the XLS140-CPU2 NAC
circuits and alarm relay. Each of the four built-in panel circuits
includes a Disable/Enable switch for this feature.
Multi-detector algorithm involves nearby detectors in alarm
decision (U.S. Patent 5,627,515).
5/18/10 11:05:54 PM
Automatic detector sensitivity testing (NFPA-72 compliant).

Maintenance alert (two levels).
Self-optimizing pre-alarm.
Low-temperature warning signal at 40F 5F (4.44C

2.77C).
TC840C1000 COPTIR
ADVANCED MULTI-CRITERIA DETECTOR
Detects all four major elements of a fire (smoke, heat, CO,

and flame).
Automatic drift compensation of smoke sensor and CO cell.
High nuisance-alarm immunity.
Six sensitivity levels.
TC846A1013 PINNACLE LASER SMOKE DETECTION

TECHNOLOGY:
Revolutionary spot laser design.
Advanced
intelligent sensing algorithms differentiate
between smoke and non-smoke signals (U.S. Patent
5,831,524).
Addressable operation pinpoints the fire location.
No moving parts to fail or filters to change.
Early warning performance comparable to the best aspiration
systems at a fraction of the lifetime cost.
TC840M1021 ACCLIMATE
LOW-PROFILE INTELLIGENT MULTI-SENSOR:
Detector automatically adjusts sensitivity levels without operator intervention or programming. Sensitivity increases with
heat.
Microprocessor-based technology; combination photo and
thermal technology.
FlashScan or CLIP (standard polling of each intelligent
device) mode compatible.
Sample
System
Options
Page 2 of 8 12/16/2009 85-3128-2
RELEASING FEATURES:
Ten independent hazards.
Sophisticated cross-zone (three options).
Delay timer and Discharge timers (adjustable).
Abort (four options).
Low-pressure CO2 listed.
VOICE AND TELEPHONE FEATURES:
Up to eight channels of digital audio.

50 and 75 watt digital amplifiers (DAA series).
Solid-state digital message generation.
Firefighter telephone option.
30- to 120-watt high-efficiency amplifiers (AA Series).
Backup tone generator and amplifier option.
Multichannel voice transponder (XPIQ).
HIGH-EFFICIENCY OFFLINE SWITCHING

3.0 AMP POWER SUPPLY (6.0 A IN ALARM):
120 VAC (XLS140-2); 240 VAC (XLS140-2E).
Displays battery current/voltage on panel (with display).
FlashScan, Exclusive
World-Leading Detector Protocol
At the heart of the XLS140-2 is a set of detection devices and
device protocol FlashScan (U.S. Patent 5,539,389). FlashScan is an all-digital protocol that gives superior precision and
high noise immunity.
In addition to providing quick identification of an active input
device, this new protocol can also activate many output
h7111blk.wmf
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:05:55 PM
devices in a fraction of the time required by competitive protocols. This high speed also allows the XLS140-2 to have the
largest device per loop capacity in the industry 318 points
yet every input and output device is sampled in less than
two seconds. The microprocessor-based FlashScan detectors
have bicolor LEDs that can be coded to provide diagnostic
information, such as device address during Walk Test.
Intelligent Sensing
Intelligent sensing is a set of software algorithms that provides
the XLS140-2 with industry-leading smoke detection capability. These complex algorithms require many calculations on
each reading of each detector, and are made possible by the
high-speed microcomputer used by the XLS140-2.
Drift Compensation and Smoothing: Drift compensation
allows the detector to retain its original ability to detect actual
smoke, and resist false alarms, even as dirt accumulates. It
reduces maintenance requirements by allowing the system to
automatically perform the periodic sensitivity measurements
required by NFPA 72. Smoothing filters are also provided by
software to remove transient noise signals, such as those
caused by electrical interference.
Maintenance Warnings: When the drift compensation performed for a detector reaches a certain level, the performance
of the detector may be compromised, and special warnings
are given. There are three warning levels: (1) Low Chamber
value; (2) Maintenance Alert, indicative of dust accumulation
that is near but below the allowed limit; (3) Maintenance
Urgent, indicative of dust accumulation above the allowed limit.
Sensitivity Adjust: Nine sensitivity levels are provided for
alarm detection. These levels can be set manually, or can
change automatically between day and night. Nine levels of
pre-alarm sensitivity can also be selected, based on predetermined levels of alarm. Pre-alarm operation can be latching or
self-restoring, and can be used to activate special control functions.
Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm: Each detector may be set for
Self-Optimizing pre-alarm. In this special mode, the detector
learns its normal environment, measuring the peak analog
readings over a long period of time, and setting the pre-alarm
level just above these normal peaks.
Cooperating Multi-Detector Sensing: A patented feature of
intelligent sensing is the ability of a smoke sensor to consider
readings from nearby sensors in making alarm or pre-alarm
decisions. Without statistical sacrifice in the ability to resist
false alarms, it allows a sensor to increase its sensitivity to
actual smoke by a factor of almost two to one.
Field Programming Options

Autoprogram. This timesaving feature is a special software
routine. The FACP learns what devices are physically connected and automatically loads them in the program with
default values for all parameters. Requiring less than one
minute to run, this routine allows the user to have almost
immediate fire protection in a new installation, even if only a
portion of the detectors are installed.
Keypad Program Edit (with KDM-R2) The XLS140-2 has the
exclusive feature of the product line of program creation and
editing capability from the front panel keypad, while continuing to provide fire protection. The architecture of the
XLS140-2 software is such that each point entry carries its
own program, including control-by-event links to other points.
This allows the program to be entered with independent perpoint segments, while the XLS140-2 simultaneously monitors
other (already installed) points for alarm conditions.
www.honeywell.com
VeriFire Tools is an offline programming and test utility that

can greatly reduce installation programming time, and
increase confidence in the site-specific software. It is Windows-based and provides technologically advanced capabilities to aid the installer. The installer may create the entire
program for the XLS140-2 in the comfort of the office, test it,
store a backup file, then bring it to the site and download from
a laptop into the panel.
Placement of Equipment
in Chassis and Cabinet
The following guidelines outline the XLS140-2s flexible system
design.
Rows: The first row of equipment in the cabinet mounts in the
chassis shipped with the CPU.. Mount the second, third, or
fourth rows of equipment in a CHS4 series chassis or, for Digital Voice Command products, in CA-1 or CA-2. (For XLS-DVC
and DAA components see XLS-DVC Manual; for DVC-AO
applications, see AA Series Installation Manual).
Wiring: When designing the cabinet layout, consider separation of power-limited and non-power-limited wiring as discussed in the XLS140-2 Installation Manual.
Positions: A chassis offers four basic side-by-side positions
for components; the number of modules that can be mounted
in each position depends on the chassis model and the size of
the individual module. There are a variety of standoffs and
hardware items available for different combinations and configurations of components.
It is critical that all mounting holes of the XLS140-2 are
secured with a screw or standoff to ensure continuity of Earth
Ground.
Layers: The CPUs chassis accepts four layers of equipment,
including the control panel. The XLS140-CPU2 fills three positions (left to right) in the first-installed layer (the back of the
chassis); its integral power supply occupies the center two
positions in the next two layers; the optional display occupies
(the left) two positions at the front, flush with the door. Some
equipment, such as the XLS-NCA2, may be mounted in the
dress panel directly in front of the control panel. The XLSNCA2 can be used as a primary display for the XLS140-2 (use
NCA/640-2-KIT) by directly connecting their network ports
(required in Canadian stand-alone applications); see XLSNCA2 data sheet for mounting options (74-4045).
Expansion: Installing an LEM-320 Loop Expander Module
adds a second SLC loop to the control panel. The LEM-320 is
mounted onto the XLS140-CPU2, occupying the middle-right,
second (back) slot on the chassis.
Networking: If networking two or more control panels, each
unit requires a Network Control Moduleor High-Speed Network Control Module(see Network Options on page 6).
These modules can be installed in any option board position
(see manual), and additional option boards can be mounted in
front of the network control modules.
KDM-R2 Controls and Indicators

Program Keypad: QWERTY type (keyboard layout, see figure).
12 LED indicators: Power; Fire Alarm; Pre-Alarm; Security;
Supervisory; System Trouble; Signals Silenced; Points Disabled; Control Active; Abort; Pre-Discharge; Discharge.
Keypad Switch Controls: Acknowledge/Scroll Display; Signal
Silence; Drill; System Reset; Lamp Test.
85-3128-2 12/16/2009 Page 3 of 8
5/18/10 11:05:57 PM
LCD Display: 80 characters (2 x 40) with long-life LED

backlight.
AUDIO OPTIONS
XLS-DVC-EM: Digital Voice Command, digital audio processor with message storage for up to 32 minutes of standard
quality (4 minutes at high quality) digital audio. Capable of
playing up to eight simultaneous messages when used with
DAA Series amplifiers. See 74-4033.
DVC-KD: Keypad for local annunciation and controls; status
LEDs and 24 user-programmable buttons.See 74-4033.
DVC-AO: DVC Analog Output board provides four analog output circuits for use with AA or XPIQ Series amplifiers. Fourchannel operation supported.See 74-4033.
7111blok.wmf
DAA-5025: 50W, 25 Vrms Digital Audio Amplifier assembly

with DAA-PS power supply board, shipped mounted to its
chassis. See 74-4032.
Configuration Guidelines
Stand-alone and network systems require a main display. On
single-CPU systems (one XLS140-CPU2/-CPU2E), display
options are the KDM-R2 or the XLS-NCA2. On network systems (two or more networked fire panel nodes), at least one
XLS-NCA2 is required. Other options listed as follows:
KDM-R2: 80-character backlit LCD display with QWERTY programming and control keypad. Order two BMP-1 blank modules and DP-DISP2 mounting plate separately. Requires top
row of a cabinet. Required for each stand-alone 80-character
display system. The KDM-R2 may mount in network nodes to
display local node information as long as at least one XLSNCA2 is on the system to display network information.
XLS-NCA2: Network Control Annunciator, 640 characters. On
single XLS140-CPU2/-CPU2E systems, the optional XLSNCA2 can be used as the Primary Display for the panel and
connects directly to the XLS140-CPU2/-CPU2E. On network
systems (two or more networked fire panel nodes), one network display (XLS-NCA2) is required for every system. On network systems, the XLS-NCA2 connects to (and requires) a
standard Network Control Module or High-Speed Network
Control Module. Mounts in a row of FACP node or in two
annunciator positions. Mounting options include the DPDISP2, ADP-4B, or in an annunciator box, such as the XLSABS-2D. In CAB-4 top-row applications, a DP-DISP2 and two
BMP-1 blank modules are required for mounting. Required for
XLS140-2 applications employing the XLS-DVC-EM and DAA
series amplifiers. See 74-4045.
XLS140-CPU2: Central processing unit with integral 3.0 amp
(6.0 A in alarm) power supply for an XLS140-2 system.
Includes CPU factory-mounted on a chassis; one Signaling
Line Circuit expandable to two; installation, programming and
operating manuals. Order one per system or as necessary (up
to 103 network nodes) on a network system.
XLS140-CPU2E: Same as XLS140-CPU2 but requires 240
VAC, 1.5 amp, (3.0 A in alarm).
NCA/640-2-KIT: Bracket installation kit required to mount
XLS-NCA2 to the XLS140-CPU2/-640CPU2Es standard
chassis.
DP-DISP2: Dress panel for top row in cabinet with XLS140CPU2/CPU2E installed.
ADP2-640: Dress panel for middle rows with XLS140-CPU2/
CPU2E.
BMP-1: Blank module for unused module positions.
XLS-BP2-4: Battery plate, required.
Page 4 of 8 12/16/2009 85-3128-2
DAA-5070: 50W, 70.7 Vrms Digital Audio Amplifier assembly

chassis. See 74-4032.
with DAA-PS power supply board. Shipped mounted to its
chassis (no battery charger on DAA-7525 power supply
board). See 85-3121.
CHS-BH1: Battery chassis; holds two 12.0 AH batteries.
Mounts one the left side of DAA chassis. See 74-4032.
CA-1: Chassis, occupies one tier of a XLS-CAB-4 Series
enclosure. The left side accommodates one XLS-DVC and a
DVC-KD (optional); and the right side houses a CMIC-1 microphone and its well (optional). See 74-4033.
CA-2: Chassis assembly, occupies two tiers of a XLS-CAB-4
Series enclosure. The left side accommodates one XLS-DVC
mounted on a half-chassis and one XLS-NCA2 or BP-CA2
mounted on a half-chassis. The right side houses a microphone/handset well. The CA-2 assembly includes CMIC-1
microphone. XLS-ADDR Series doors with two-tier visibility
are available for use with the CA-2 configuration: XLS-ADDRB4, XLS-ADDR-C4, XLS-ADDR-D4 (below).
CFFT-1: Chassis to mount firefighters telephone and one ACS
annunciator in a CAB-4 row. Includes TELH-1 firefighters
handset for the XLS-DVC, chassis, phone well and mounting
hardware. Order DP-CFFT dress panel separately.
DP-CFFT: CFFT-1 dress panel. Requires BMP-1 if no ACS
annunciator is installed.
TELH-1: Firefighters Telephone Handset for use with the XLSDVC when mounted in the CA-2 chassis. See 74-4033.
XLS-ADDR-B4: Two-tier-sized door designed for use with the
CA-2 chassis configuration. XLS-ADDR Series doors are similar
to XLS-CAB-4 Series DR doors, but a clear window space
exposes the top two tiers of the XLS-CAB-4 enclosure. Use an
SBB-B4 backbox with the XLS-ADDR-B4. See 74-4033, 853002.
XLS-ADDR-C4: Three-tier-sized door, designed for use with the
SBB-C4 backbox with the XLS-ADDR-C4. See 74-4033, 853002.
XLS-ADDR-D4: Four-tier-sized door designed for use with the
SBB-D4 backbox with the XLS-ADDR-D4. See 74-4033, 853002.
NOTE: Use XLS-ADDR-B4/C4/D4 when CA-2 chassis is installed
in top two rows with XLS-NCA2 or BP-CA2. Use standard door
when CA-2 is not installed in top two rows.
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:05:57 PM
DPA-1: Dress panel, used with the CA-1 chassis when configured with a XLS-DVC, DVC-KD, and CMIC-1. See 74-4033.
DPA-2B: Dress panel used with CA-2 chassis assembly.
VP-2B: Dress panel, required when CA-2 chassis is installed in
the top two cabinet rows.
DPA-1A4: Dress panel, used with the CA-1 chassis when the
CMIC-1 is not used. Provides mounting options on right two
bays for two ACS annunciators, or for blank plates. See 744033.
BP-CA2: Blank plate for CA-2 chassis.
CMIC-1: Optional microphone and microphone well assembly
used with the CA-1 chassis.
RM-1/RM-1SA: Remote microphone assemblies, mount on
ADP-4 (RM-1) dress panel or CAB-RM/-RMR (RM-1SA) standalone cabinets. See 85-3053.
XLS-CM-T: Firephone Control Module connects a remote firefighter telephone to a centralized telephone console. Reports
status to panel. Wiring to jacks and handsets is supervised.
AA-30: Audio Amplifier, 30 watts. Switch-mode power. Includes
amplifier and audio input supervision, backup input, and automatic switchover, power supply, cables. See 85-3044.
AA-120/AA-100: Audio Amplifier provides up to 120 watts of 25
VRMS audio power for the XLS140-2. The amplifier contains an
integral chassis for mounting to a CAB-B4, -C4, or -D4 backbox
(consumes one row). Switch-mode power. Includes audio input
and amplified output supervision, backup input, and automatic
switchover to backup tone. Order the AA-100 for 70.7 VRMS systems and 100 watts of power. See 85-3044.
XPIQ: The XPIQ quad intelligent voice transponder for distributed multichannel voice evacuation systems, an integrated
audio amplification and distribution subsystem controlled by
FACP. Capable of playing up to four simultaneous messages.
Accepts up to four 25-watt amplifiers..
POWER SUPPLIES, STANDARD CABINETS

ACPS-610: 6.0 or 10 Amp addressable charging power supply.
See 85-3109.
APS2-6R: Auxiliary power supply. Provides two 24 VDC circuits, each rated for 3.0 Amps in alarm and 2.0 Amps continuous. Commonly used for the operation of peripheral audio/
visual devices or any other application requiring 24VDC. See
85-3050.
HPF24S6/8: Remote six-amp and eight-amp power supplies
with battery charger. See DH-1061
CHS-4: Chassis for mounting up to four APS-6Rs.
CHS-4L: Low-profile four-position Chassis. Mounts two AA-30
amplifiers or one AMG-E and one AA-30.
DP-1B: Blank dress panel. Provides dead-front panel for
unused tiers; covers DAA-series or AA-series amplifier.
XLS-CAB-4 Series Enclosure: XLS140-2(E) mounts in a
standard CAB-4 Series enclosure. Backbox and door ordered
seperately; requires XLS-BP2-4 battery plate. A trim ring
option is available for semi-flush mounting. See 85-3002.
EQ Series Cabinets: EQ series cabinets will house amplifiers,
power supplies, battery chargers and control modules. EQ cabinets are available in three sizes, B through D. See 85-3110.
COMPATIBLE DEVICES, EIA-232 PORTS

XLS-PRN-6: 80-column printer. See 85-3073.
VS4095/5: Printer, 40-column, 24V. Mounted in external backbox.
COMPATIBLE DEVICES, EIA-485 PORTS

ACS: Annunciator Control Modules ACM/AEM-24AT and ACM/
AEM-48A; remote serial annunciator/control systems. See 853004.
www.honeywell.com
ACM-24AT: ACS annunciator up to 96 points of annunciation

with Alarm or Active LED, Trouble LED, and switch per circuit.
Active/Alarm LEDs can be programmed (by powered-up switch
selection) by point to be red, green, or yellow; the Trouble LED is
always yellow. See 85-3004.
AEM-24AT: Same LED and switch capabilities as ACM-24AT,
expands the ACM-24AT to 48, 72, or 96 points. See 85-3004.
ACM-48A: ACS annunciator up to 96 points of annunciation
with Alarm or Active LED per circuit. Active/Alarm LEDs can be
programmed (by powered-up switch selection) in groups of 24 to
be red, green, or yellow. Expandable to 96 points with one AEM48A. See 85-3004.
AEM-48A: Same LED capabilities as ACM-48A, expands the
ACM-48A to 96 points. See 85-3004.
XLS-LCD-80/XLS-FDU-80: 80-character, backlit LCD display.
Mounts up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m) from panel. Up to 32 per
FACP. See XLS-FDU-80 (85-3066).
LDM: Lamp Driver Modules LDM-32, LDM-E32, and LDM-R32;
remote custom graphic driver modules. See LDM data sheet 853042.
ACM-8R: Remote Relay Module with eight Form-C contacts.
Can be located up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m) from panel on four
wires. See ACM-8R data sheet 85-3046.
SCS: Smoke control stations SCS-8, SCE-8, with lamp drivers
SCS-8L, SCE-8L; eight (expandable to 16) circuits. See SCS
data sheet 85-3048.
TM-4: Transmitter Module. Includes three reverse-polarity circuits and one municipal box circuit. Mounts in panel module
position (single-address-style) or in CHS2-M2 position. See 853005.
UDACT: Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter, 636
channel.
UZC-256: Programmable Universal Zone Coder provides positive non-interfering successive zone coding. Microprocessorcontrolled, field-programmable from IBM-compatible PCs
(requires optional programming kit). Up to 256 programmable
codes. Mounts in BB-UZC or other compatible chassis (purchased separately). See 85-3045.
COMPATIBLE INTELLIGENT DEVICES

BEAMHK: Heating kit for transmitter/receiver
TC847A1004 below. See 74-3940.
BEAMHKR: Heating kit for use
TC847A1004 below. See 74-3940.
unit
of
with the reflector
of
BEAMLRK: Long-range accessory kit, TC847A1004 below. See

74-3940.
BEAMMKR: Multi-mount kit, TC847A1004 below. See 74-3940.
BEAMSMK: Surface-mount kit, TC847A1004 below. See 743940.
sensitivity test. See 74-3940.
TC840C1000: FlashScan COPTIR Advanced Multi-Criteria
Detector. See 74-5070.
TC807B1059: Low-profile FlashScan ionization detector.
TC806B1076: Low-profile FlashScan photoelectric detector.
See 74-1941.
TC806B1084: TC806B1076 plus dual electronic thermistors
that add 135F (57C) fixed-temperature thermal sensing. See
74-1941.
TC806B1084: Low-profile FlashScan photoelectric detector with
135F (57C) thermal.
TC808B1041: FlashScan thermal detector 135F (57C).
TC808B1058: FlashScan thermal detector 135F (57C) with
rate-of-rise.
85-3128-2 12/16/2009 Page 5 of 8
5/18/10 11:05:58 PM
TC808B1066: FlashScan 190F (88C) high-temperature thermal detector.

DNR: InnovairFlex low-flow non-relay duct-detector housing
(order TC806B1076 separately).
Replaces TC806D1049/
TC806D1056. See 74-4076.
DNRW: Same as above with NEMA-4 rating, watertight. See
74-4076.
TC840M1021: FlashScan Acclimate low-profile multi-sensor
detector.
TC846A1013: FlashScan Pinnacle laser photo detector.
NETWORK OPTIONS
NCM-W, NCM-F: Network Communications Modules. Wire and
multi-mode fiber versions available. One required for each network node (XLS3000, XLS140, XLS140-2, XLS-DVC, BACNET
GATEWAY, FNA) on XLS-NET. Mounts in a standard chassis
position or on a BMP-1 plate. See 85-3007.
fiber, and media conversion models are available. See 744082.
B224RB: Low-profile relay base. See 85-3043.
RPT-W, RPT-F, RPT-WF: Repeater board with wire connection

(RPT-W), fiber connection (RPT-F), or allowing a change in
media type between wire and fiber (RPT-WF). See 85-3007.
14507371-005: Isolator base for low-profile detectors. See 853043.
FNA: Fire Network Adapter. Connects to an XLSNET network

to provide a TCP/IP interface to an EBI.
14507371-001: Low-profile base. Standard U.S. style. See 853043.
XLS-GW-EM-3: XLSNET Gateway, embedded. See 74-5084 .
TC846A1005: Low-profile Pinnacle laser photo detector.
14506414-002: European-style, 4" (10.16 cm) base. See 853043.

B501BH-2: Sounder base, includes B501 base above.
Replaces B501BH. See 85-3043.
B501BHT-2: Temporal tone sounder base. Replaces B501BHT.
See 85-3043.
B200SR: Intelligent sounder base, Temporal 3 or Continuous
tone. See 85-3043.
TC809A1059: FlashScan monitor module.
TC809D1004: FlashScan dual monitor module.
TC841A1000: FlashScan two-wire detector monitor module.
TC809B1008: FlashScan miniature monitor module.
TC810S1000: FlashScan releasing control module.
TC810N1013: FlashScan NAC control module. See 74-3995.
TC810R1024: FlashScan relay module. See 74-3995.
S464G1007: Manual pull station, addressable (CLIP/FlashScan). See 74-3365.
S464H1006: Manual pull station, addressable (Eclipse). See 744014.
TC811A1006: Isolator module.
XP6-C: FlashScan six-circuit supervised control module. See
85-3069.
XP6-MA: FlashScan six-zone interface module; connects intelligent alarm system to two-wire conventional detection zone.
See 85-3070.
XP6-R: FlashScan six-relay (Form-C) control module. See 853071.
XP10-M: FlashScan ten-input monitor module. See 85-3068.
Page 6 of 8 12/16/2009 85-3128-2
OTHER OPTIONS
IPDACT-2/2UD Intenet Monitoring Module: Mounts in IPENC
enclosure. Connects to primary and secondary DACT telephone
output ports for internet communications over customer-provided ethernet connection. Requires compatible Teldat VisorALARM Central Station Receiver. Can use DHCP or static IP.
See DN-60408.
IPCHSKIT: IP Communicator Chassis Mounting Kit. For

mounting an IPDACT-2/2UD onto the panel chassis or CHS-4
series chassis. Use IPENC for external mounting applications.
IPENC: External enclosure for IPDACT, includes IPBRKT
mounting bracket; Red. For Black order IPENC-B.
IPSPLT: Y-adaptor option allow connection of both panel dialer
outputs to one IPDACT-2/2UD cable input.
DPI-232: Direct Panel Interface, specialized modem for
extending serial data links to remotely located FACPs and/or
peripherals. See 85-3006.
LEM-320: Loop Expander Module. Expands each 140-2 to two
Signaling Line Circuits.
BAT Series: Batteries. XLS140-2 utilizes two 12 volt, 18 to 200
AH batteries. This series of products replaces the previous PS
Series.
XLS-LBB: Battery Box (required for batteries larger than 25
AH).
XLS-LBBR: Same as above but red.
411: Slave digital alarm communicator. See 85-3063.
BB-UZC: Backbox for housing the UZC-256 in applications
where the UZC-256 will not fit in panel enclosure. Black; for red,
order BB-UZC-R.
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:05:58 PM
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
System Capacity
Intelligent Signaling Line Circuits ............... 1 expandable to 2

Intelligent detectors ........................................... 159 per loop
Addressable monitor/control modules ................ 159 per loop
Programmable software zones ........................................... 99
Special programming zones ............................................... 14
LCD annunciators per XLS140-CPU2/-CPU2E
and XLS-NCA2 (observe power) ........................................ 32
ACS annunciators
per XLS140-CPU2/-CPU2E............ 32 addresses x 64 points
ACS annunciators
per XLS-NCA2....................... 32 addresses x 64 or 96 points
NOTE: The XLS-NCA2 supports up to 96 annunciator address
points per ACM-24/48.

49C/32 120F and at a relative humidity 93% 2% RH
(noncondensing) at 32C 2C (90F 3F). However, the
useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic
components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that
this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment
with a normal room temperature of 15 27C/60 80F.
Specifications
Primary input power, XLS140-CPU2 board: 120 VAC, 50/60

Hz, 3.0 A. XLS140-CPU2E board: 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,
1.5 A.
Total output 24 V power: 6.0 A in alarm.
NOTE: The power supply has a total of 6.0 Amps of available
power. This is shared by all internal circuits.
Standard notification circuits (4): 1.5 A each.
Resettable regulated 24V power: 1.25 A.
Two non-resettable regulated 24V power outputs:
1.25 A
0.50 A.
Non-resettable 5V power: 0.15 A.
Battery charger range: 18 AH 200 AH. Use separate cabinet for batteries over 25 AH.
Float rate: 27.6 V.
Cabinet Specifications
Systems can be installed in CAB-4 Series cabinets (four sizes
with various door options, see 85-3002). Requires XLS-BP2-4
Battery Plate.

The listings and approvals below apply to the basic XLS140-2
control panel. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed
by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL Listed: S470
ULC Listed: S7564, S7566
FM Approved
MEA: 128-07-E Vol. 3
FDNY: Certificate #6030
CSFM: 7165-1130:265; 7170-1130:264
Standards
The XLS140-2 complies with the following UL Standards and
NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Systems requirements:
UL 864, 9th Edition (Fire).
UL 1076 (Burglary).
LOCAL (Automatic, Manual, Waterflow and Sprinkler Supervisory).
AUXILIARY (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) (requires
TM-4).
REMOTE STATION (Automatic, Manual, Waterflow and
Sprinkler Supervisory) (requires TM-4).
PROPRIETARY (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow).
Not applicable for FM.
EMERGENCY VOICE/ALARM.
OT, PSDN (Other Technologies, Packet-switched Data Network)
Pinnacle is a trademark; and Acclimate, FlashScan, VeriFire, and VIEW are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Microsoft and
Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Echelon is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation. IBM is a registered trademark
of IBM Corporation. LEXAN is a registered trademark of GE Plastics, a subsidiary of General Electric Company.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3128-2 Rev. 12-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 8 of 8
5/18/10 11:05:58 PM
Voice Control Systems
2.0 Voice Control Systems

Digital Voice Command
Amplifiers
Emergency Telephone & Accessories
XLS-DVC Series
Digital Voice Command
General
The XLS-DVC may be networked with XLS140, XLS140-2, or

XLS3000 panels via XLS-NET with an XLS-NCA2, or used in
a standalone panel configuration with an XLS3000 or
XLS140-2 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). When used as an
Audio Command Center with Emergency Paging capability,
the optional DVC-KD Keypad Display is required.
NOTE: Unless otherwise noted, the term XLS-DVC refers to the
XLS-DVC-EM, XLS-DVC-EMF, and XLS-DVC-EMSF models.
Features
Programmable from NUP port using XPEDITE with:
XLS-DVC-EM: up to 32 minutes of standard quality or 4
minutes of high quality digital audio storage of userselected/created messages and tones. Supports twistedpair wire media.
XLS-DVC-EMF: Same as XLS-DVC-EM, except supports
multi-mode fiber-optic media.
XLS-DVC-EMSF: Same as XLS-DVC-EM, except supports single-mode fiber-optic media.
Up to 1000 audio sequences.
Message prioritization.
Equations support flexible programming for distribution of
messages.
Electrically isolated digital audio ports for direct connection
with up to 32 DAA amplifiers. Style 4 or 7 configurations
supported.
DCC (Display and Control Center) capabilities when used
with optional DVC-KD.
FireFighters Telephone Communications to local FFT riser
on DVC, 32 local DAA FFT risers, and FFT communication
to additional command stations via XLS-NET.
Local paging microphone option.
Remote microphone option.
Broad All-Call functionality when used with DVC-KD (DVCKeyboard Display): All Call, Page Active Evac Areas, Page
Active Alert Areas, Page Inactive Areas.
Auxiliary input for 12 Vp-p analog low-level audio sources.
Includes user audio level adjustment feature.
Auxilary input accepts external audio sources such as telephone paging or background music. Hi impedance input
accepts 600 ohm, line level, 1.0 VRMS, or 1.41 Vp-p low
h7045pho2.jpg
The XLS-DVC is the heart of an integrated, full-featured Audio

Command Center. The XLS-DVC Digital Voice Command
combines the capabilities of a powerful digital audio processor,
an event-driven audio message generator, and a router.
Designed for use with DAA series Digital Audio Amplifiers,
each XLS-DVC supports a dedicated audio network with up to
eight channels of audio, five channels of firefighters telephone, and control and supervision for up to 32 DAA series
amplifiers. Twisted-pair wire, multi-mode fiber, or single-mode
fiber media options are supported. Larger audio systems
incorporating hundreds of amplifiers can be created by networking additional XLS-DVC units via XLS-NET.
XLS-DVC-EM
Shown using CA-2 mounting option,
XLS-CAB-C4, and XLS-ADDR-C4 door.
Associated XLS-NCA2 supports XLS-NET applications.

Multiple audio command centers supported via XLS-NET.
Distribution of one channel of standard-level paging audio
on XLS-NET.
Three standalone, non network mode options:
XLS3000 (NUP to NUP) digital and analog.
XLS140-2 (NUP to NUP) analog.
XLS140-2 with XLS-NCA2 (NUP to NUP to NUP) digital
and analog.
Push-to-talk relay.
Isolated alarm bus input, to be used for backup activation of
alarm messages when normal digital communication is lost.
Installation Options
The XLS-DVC provides flexible installation options based on
two chassis options: the CA-1 or the CA-2 (one-row or two-row
audio chassis). Both these chassis mount into size B, C, or
D XLS-CAB-4 Series cabinets. The CA-2 must be installed in
the top two rows of the cabinet. The DPA-1 dress panel is
used with chassis CA-1. The DPA-2B dress panel is required
for the CA-2 chassis.
NOTE: For XLS140-2/XLS-DVC applications using DAA series
amplifiers, an XLS-NCA2 is required to annunciate DAA
events.
Specifications
24 VDC power (TB1): 24 VDC, 1.0 A, non-resettable,
power-limited by the source. Recommended wiring: 14 to
18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821 mm) twisted-pair.
Digital audio ports, wire media, A and B (TB2, TB3):
Maximum distance per segment is 1900 feet (579.12 m) on
Belden 5320UJ (18 AWG, TP) FPL cable: 18 AWG (0.821
mm) twisted-pair, foil-shielded, power-limited. Consult wiring documentation provided in document P/N 52916ADD:C
Addendum to XLS-DVC and DAA Manuals.
Digital audio ports, single- and multi-mode fiber-optic
RXA TXA RXB and TXB (J100 J101 J102 and J103):
5/18/10 11:05:59 PM
9/125 micrometers. Attenuation of cabling between two

nodes (fiber-optic circuits are point-to-point) must not
exceed the following maximum attenuations: 4.2 dB for
multi-mode with 50/125 micrometer cable @ 850 nm. 8.0
dB for multi-mode with 62.5/125 micrometer cable @ 850
nm. 5.0 dB for single-mode with 9/125 micrometer cable @
1300 nm.
Auxiliary input A (AUX A, TB4): Signal strength from lowlevel analog audio input: maximum 1.0 VRMS, or 1.41 Vp-p.
Optional supervision is selectable through programming.
Recommended wiring: 18 AWG (0.821 mm) twisted-pair;
max. 14 AWG (2.08 mm). Auxiliary input must be in the
same room as the XLS-DVC.
Remote microphone interface (TB9): Recommended wiring: 14 to 18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821 mm) twisted-pair. Powerlimited. Maximum distance between remote microphone
and DVC: 1000 feet (300 m).
Push-to-talk interface (TB10): Dry contact. Recommended wiring: 14 to 18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821 mm) twistedpair.
Alarm bus (TB12): Power-limited by source. Recommended wiring: 14 to 18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821 mm) twistedpair.
FFT riser (TB13): Power-limited output. Class A (Style Z) or
Class B (Style Y) operation. Style Y two-wire connections
require a 3.9K ohm, 1/2 watt resistor (P/N K-3.9K). Maximum wiring resistance (including individual telephone zone
to last handset) permitted is 50 ohms, 10,000 feet (3048 m)
maximum wiring distance at 12 AWG (3.31 mm) to last
handset.
Auxiliary input B (AUX B, TB14): Signal strength from
low-level analog audio input: 12 Vp-p nominal, 15 Vp-p maximum. Optional supervision is selected through programming. Recommended wiring: 14 to 18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821
mm) twisted-pair.
Optional DVC-AO analog audio output circuits (TB5,
TB6, TB7, and TB8): Supervised, power-limited outputs.
Signal strength: +12 Vp-p nominal, +15 Vp-p maximum. Recommended wiring: 18 AWG (0.821 mm) twisted-pair; max.
14 AWG (2.08 mm). Maximum impedance: 66 ohms.
Standards and Codes

The Digital Voice Command XLS-DVC-EM, XLS-DVC-EMF,
and XLS-DVC-EMSF comply with the following standards:
NFPA 72 2002 National Fire Alarm Code.
Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 864, 9th edition.
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) ULC-S527-99
Standard of Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems.
Listings and Approvals

The listings and approvals below apply to theXLS-DVC-EM,
XLS-DVC-EMF, and XLS-DVC-EMSF Digital Voice Command.
In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain
approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL Listed: file S470.

ULC Listed: file S470.
CSFM approved: file 7165-1130:256, 7165-1130:265.
MEA approved: file 232-06-E Vol. 2 (except fiber audio
components) (XLS3000); file 317-01-E Vol. 4 (XLS140).
FDNY: COA#6030 (XLS140-2).
City of Chicago approved: High Rise, Class 1, Class 2.
City of Denver approved.
PSB Corporation approved (Singapore).
Page 2 of 6 07/15/2009 74-4033-2
Product Line Information

XLS-DVC-EM: Digital Voice Command, digital audio processor
with message storage for up to 32 minutes of standard quality
(4 minutes at high quality) digital audio. Supports twisted-pair
wire media.
XLS-DVC-EMF: Digital Voice Command, digital audio processor with message storage for up to 32 minutes of standard
quality (4 minutes at high quality) digital audio. Supports multimode fiber-optic ports, requires DAA-5025F, or DAA-5070F, or
DAA-7525F.
XLS-DVC-EMSF: Digital Voice Command, digital audio processor with message storage for up to 32 minutes of standard
quality (4 minutes at high quality) digital audio. Supports single-mode fiber-optic ports, requires DAA-5025SF, or
DAA-5070SF, or DAA-7525F.
DVC-KD: Keypad for local annunciation and controls; status
LEDs and 24 user-programmable buttons.
DVC-AO: Optional DVC Analog Output board provides four
analog output circuits for use with AA or XPIQ Series amplifiers. Four-channel operation supported.
CA-1: Chassis, occupies one tier of a XLS-CAB-4 Series
enclosure. The left side accommodates one XLS-DVC and a
DVC-KD (optional); and the right side houses a CMIC-1 microphone and its well (optional).
CMIC-1: Optional microphone and microphone well assembly
used with the CA-1 chassis.
CA-2: Chassis assembly, occupies two tiers of a XLS-CAB-4
Series enclosure. The left side accommodates one XLS-DVC
mounted on a half-chassis and one XLS3000 or XLS-NCA-2
mounted on a half-chassis. The right side houses a microphone/handset well. The CA-2 assembly includes a microphone. DPA-2B dress plate is required (below); the VP-2B
Vent Plate is also required for top row configurations. XLSADDR Series doors with two-tier visibility are available for use
with the CA-2 configuration: XLS-ADDR-B4, XLS-ADDR-C4,
XLS-ADDR-D4 (below).
DPA-2B: Dress plate required for CA-2 chassis assembly.
VP-2B: Vent plate required for cabinet configurations where
the DPA-2B is used for the top two row position.
TELH-1: Firefighters Telephone Handset for use with the XLSDVC when mounted in the CA-2 chassis. Order separately.
XLS-ADDR-B4: Two-tier-sized door designed for use with the
CA-2 chassis configuration. XLS-ADDR Series doors are similar to XLS-CAB-4 Series DR doors, but a clear window space
SBB-B4 backbox with the XLS-ADDR-B4 (see specification
data sheet 85-3002).
XLS-ADDR-C4: Three-tier-sized door designed for use with
the CA-2 chassis configuration. XLS-ADDR Series doors are
similar to XLS-CAB-4 Series DR doors, but a clear window
space exposes the top two tiers of the XLS-CAB-4 enclosure.
Use an SBB-C4 backbox with the XLS-ADDR-C4 (see specification data sheet 85-3002).
XLS-ADDR-D4: Four-tier-sized door designed for use with the
CA-2 chassis configuration. XLS-ADDR Series doors are similar to XLS-CAB-4 Series DR doors, but a clear window space
SBB-D4 backbox with the XLS-ADDR-D4 (see specification
data sheet 85-3002).
DPA-1: Dress panel, can be used with the CA-1 chassis when
configured with an XLS-DVC, DVC-KD, and CMIC-1.
DPA-1A4: Dress panel, used with the CA-1 chassis when the
CMIC-1 is not used. Provides mounting options on right two
bays for two ACS annunciators, or for blank plates.
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:05:59 PM
ACT-4: Audio-coupling transformer. Used to electronically isolate DVC-AO analog risers.

ACT-25, ACT-70: Audio-coupling transformers. Used with AA30 or DAA-series amplifiers to drive thousands of amplifiers in
large system applications.
chassis. Supports twisted-pair wire media. See 74-4032. (For
multi-mode fiber-optic media order DAA-5025F. For singlemode fiber-optic media order DAA-5025SF.)
DAA-5070: 50W, 70.7 Vrms Digital Audio Amplifier assembly

chassis. Supports twisted-pair wire media. See 74-4032. (For
with DAA-PS power supply board. Shipped mounted to its
chassis (no battery charger on DAA-7525 power supply
board). Supports twisted-pair wire media. See 85-3121. (For
Standalone XLS3000 with XLS-DVC
DAA
TC810T1000
DAA
XLS3000-CPUD
DAA
TC810T1000
DIGITAL
AUDIO
LOOP
AUX Input A
or
AUX Input B
External Audio
Source
DAA
RM-1
DAA
TC810T1000
SLC
7045dia1-09.jpg
TC810T1000
www.honeywell.com
DAA
TC810T1000
74-4033-2 07/15/2009 Page 3 of 6
5/18/10 11:06:00 PM
Networked XLS-DVC with XLS-NCA2

XLS-NCA2
DAA
XLS-DVC,
DVC-KD
Digital
Audio
Loop
DAA
XLS-NET
TC810T1000
SLC
FACP NODE
FFT Connection Options for DAA/FFT Risers
XLS-NET
XLS-NCA2
DAA
Digital
Audio
Loop
Page 4 of 6 07/15/2009 74-4033-2
DAA
7045dia2-09.jpg
DVC,
DVC-KD
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:06:00 PM
Standalone XLS140-2 with XLS-DVC

SLC
XLS-NCA2
XLS-DVC
TC810T1000
TC810T1000
XLS140-2
(Displayless)
FFT Riser (From XLS-DVC)
Digital Audio
Loop
DAA
FFT Riser (From DAA)
DAA
7045dia4.jpg
TC810T1000
www.honeywell.com
TC810T1000
74-4033-2 07/15/2009 Page 5 of 6
5/18/10 11:06:02 PM
Standalone XLS140-2 with DVC-AO
XLS140-2
XLS-DVC
DVC-AO
DVC-KD
SLC
4 ANALOG AUDIO
CIRCUITS (from DVC-A0)
CLASS A RETURN
(optional)
XPIQ
AA-AMP
CONTROL
MODULE
7045dia5.jpg
XPEDITE is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc. ST is a registered trademark of AT&T.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-4033-2 Rev. 07-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 6 of 6
5/18/10 11:06:48 PM
DAA-50 Series
Digital Audio Amplifiers
General
The DAA-50 Series Amplifiers are multi-featured Digital
Audio Amplifiers designed for audio networks of up to 32 DAA
amplifiers terminating at a XLS-DVC Digital Voice Command.
Each DAA is capable of accessing and processing one of up to
eight audio channels on the XLS-DVC audio loop, amplifying
the signal, and distributing it via four Class B or two Class A
outputs at 50 watts. DAA-50 amplifiers can store backup alarm
and trouble messages, and provide an adjustable background
music input. An optional Firefighter's telephone riser on each
DAA-50 amplifier supports FFT communications riser. Each
DAA-50 incorporates a powerful digital signal processor, a
charging power supply, a 50 watt amplifier, built-in audio NAC
outputs, and a chassis which mounts in a single row of XLSCAB-4 and EQ Series cabinets. An optional battery chassis
mounts two 12.0 AH batteries in the same standard chassis
row.
Features
50 W total output power at 25 VRMS (DAA-5025 series) or
70.7 VRMS (DAA-5070 series).
Multiple versions provide connection options for twisted-pair
wire, single-mode fiber, and multi-mode fiber media.
Two Class A high-level audio outputs; or alternately, four
Class B outputs supported. Outputs dynamically share the
50 W - the total power can be dedicated to a single output if
required.
FireFighters Telephone Riser supports 7 active firefighter
telephones. Release 3.0 and higher supports optional configurations: direct connection for up to 7 firefighter telephones, or connection to multiple TC810T1000(CDN)
modules.
Audio output activation via network control-by-event equations resident within the XLS-DVC.
Two digital audio ports support Style 4 or 7 configurations.
Auxiliary input for 12 Vp-p analog low-level audio.
Auxiliary input for 1 VRMS, to be used for background
music input, an interface with a telephone paging source, or
other compatible audio sources. Audio levels can be
adjusted by end user. Continuous supervision for active
DAA output circuits.
Programmable through VeriFire Tools.
Up to two minutes of standard quality backup digital message storage (from a VeriFire Tools message library, or created by the installer) for use in the event of communication
loss.
Power supply and battery charger capable or supporting up
to 55 AH batteries.
Battery charger disable provides battery sharing option for
one or more DAA-50 amplifiers or with a charging power
supply.
Relay contacts that will activate on a trouble condition provide an option for redundant annunciation to a local panel.
7046pho1.jpg
Installation
The DAA arrives from the factory already installed on its chassis. The DAA mounts in one tier of any XLS-CAB-4 Series or
EQ Series cabinet; the DAA tier can be covered using a DP-1B
dress panel, ordered separately (XLS-CAB-4 Series only).
Batteries for the DAA may be installed in any of the following
configurations:
In a CHS-BH1 optional battery chassis. The CHS-BH1 battery chassis will hold two 12.0 AH batteries, and mounts on
the left side of the DAA chassis, so that the DAA and batteries are contained in a single cabinet tier.
In the battery row (bottom) of the XLS-CAB-4 Series cabinet, or in the bottom row of an EQ Series cabinet.
In a cabinet adjacent to the cabinet that holds the DAA, with
connections in conduit. External battery charging is supported.
Specifications
DAA-PS POWER SUPPLY BOARD
AC power (TB1): 115 - 120 VAC, 60 Hz input, 4.5 A maximum; or for "E" versions, 220 - 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz input,
2.3 A maximum. Recommended wiring: 12 to 14 AWG
(1.6 mm O.D.) with 600 VAC insulation
Battery connections (TB3): Supplied cable connections to
batteries.
DAA-5025/70 BOARDS
mm) twisted-pair, unshielded, power-limited. For approved
cable types, see wiring documentation, P/N 52916ADD:C
Approved Wire Cables for Digital Audio Loops. Electrically
isolated ports support Style 4 or 7 wiring.
Digital audio ports, "F" versions: Digital audio loop connectors A and B support multi-mode fiber. Maximum attenuation is 4.2 dB for multi-mode with 50/125 micrometer cable
@ 850 nm; 8.0 dB for multi-mode with 62.5/125 micrometer
cable @ 850 nm.
Digital audio ports, "SF" versions: Digital audio loop connectors A and B support single-mode fiber. Maximum attenuation is 5.0 dB for single-mode with 9/125 micrometer
cable @ 1300 nm.
Alarm bus (TB4): Power-limited by source. Recommended
wiring: 14 to 18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821 mm) twisted-pair.
Trouble bus (TB5): Dry contact. Recommended wiring: 14
to 18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821 mm) twisted-pair.
5/18/10 11:06:50 PM
FFT riser (TB13): Power-limited output. Class A (Style Z)

or Class B (Style Y) operation. Style Y two-wire connections
require a 3.9K ohm, 1/2 watt resistor (P/N R-3.9K). Maximum wiring resistance (including individual telephone zone
handset.
Auxiliary input A (AUX A, TB9): Signal strength from lowlevel analog audio input: 1 VRMS maximum. Optional
supervision (selected through programming). Recommended wiring: 14 to 18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821 mm) twistedpair. Auxiliary input must be in the same room as the DAA.
Auxiliary input B (AUX B, TB8): Signal strength from lowlevel analog audio input: 12 Vp-p nominal, 15 Vp-p maximum.
Optional
supervision
(selected
through
programming). Recommended wiring: 14 to 18 AWG (2.08
to 0.821 mm) twisted-pair.
Speaker circuits (TB10, TB11, TB12, and TB13): Powerlimited outputs. 50 watts dynamically shared among the
four outputs. Supervision determined by programming.
Recommended wiring: 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to 0.821 mm)
twisted-pair.
End-of-line resistors: For Class A: 10K ohm, 1/2 watt, P/N
R-10K. For Class B: 20K ohm, 1/2 watt, P/N R-20K.
Standards and Codes

The DAA-50 Series Digital Audio Amplifiers comply with the
following standards:
Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 864; 9th Edition.
Part 15 Class A of the conducted and radiated emissions as
required by FCC.

These listings and approvals apply to the basic DAA-50 Series
Digital Audio Amplifiers. In some cases, certain modules may
not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in
process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL Listed: file S635
ULC Listed: file S635
CSFM approved: file 7170-1130:255; 7165-1130:256
(XLS3000); 7170-1130:264; 7165-1130:265 (XLS140-2)
FDNY: COA# 6025; COA#6026
City of Chicago approved: High Rise, Class 1, Class 2
City of Denver approved
PSB Corporation approved (Singapore)

DAA-5025: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 25 VRMS), assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, shipped mounted to its
chassis.
DAA-5025F: Digital Audio Amplifier (50W, 25 VRMS), multimode fiber, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board,
shipped mounted to its chassis.
DAA-5025SF: Digital Audio Amplifier (50W, 25 VRMS), singlemode fiber, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board,
DAA-5070: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 70.7 VRMS), assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, shipped mounted to its
chassis.
DAA-5070F: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 70.7 VRMS), multimode fiber, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board,
DAA-5070SF: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 70.7 VRMS), single-mode fiber, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board,
220-240VAC VERSIONS
DAA-5025E: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 25 VRMS, 240
VAC), assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, shipped
mounted to its chassis.
DAA-5025EF: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 25 VRMS), multimode fiber, 240 VAC, assembly with DAA-PS power supply
board, shipped mounted to its chassis.
DAA-5025ESF: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 25 VRMS), single-mode fiber, 240 VAC, assembly with DAA-PS power supply
DAA-5070E: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 70.7 VRMS,
240VAC), assembly with DAA-PS power supply board,
DAA-5070EF: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 70.7 VRMS), multimode fiber, 240 VAC, assembly with DAA-PS power supply
DAA-5070ESF: Digital Audio Amplifier (50 W, 70.7 VRMS),
single-mode fiber, 240 VAC, assembly with DAA-PS power
supply board, shipped mounted to its chassis.
ACCESSORIES
DP-1B: Dress panel; covers one tier of XLS-CAB-4 Series
cabinet.
Mounts on the left side of DAA chassis.
ACT-25, ACT-70: Audio-coupling transformers. Used with AA30 or DAA-series amplifiers to drive thousands of amplifiers in
large system applications.
VeriFire is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-4032-2 Rev. 05-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:06:50 PM
DAA-75 Series
Digital Audio Amplifiers
General
The DAA-75 Series Amplifiers provide 75 watts of audio. Up
to 32 DAA series amplifiers, can be connected to the DAL (digital audio loop) on one XLS-DVC Digital Voice Command unit.
DAA-75 series amplifiers can be mixed with DAA-50 series
amplifiers on the same DAL.
Each DAA-75 is capable of accessing and processing one of
up to eight audio channels on the XLS-DVC audio loop, amplifying the signal, and distributing it via four Class B or two Class
A outputs at 75 watts. DAA-75 amplifiers can store backup
alarm and trouble messages, and provide an adjustable background music input. An optional Firefighter's telephone riser on
the DAA-75 supports local and network FFT communications. Each DAA incorporates a powerful digital signal processor, a 75 watt amplifier, built-in audio NAC outputs, and a
chassis which mounts in a single row of either XLS-CAB-4 or
EQ Series cabinets.
The DAA-75 does not charge batteries; therefore a separate
listed charging power supply must be used in conjunction with
the backup batteries.
Features
75 W total output power at 25 VRMS.
Multiple versions provide connection options for twisted-pair
wire, single-mode fiber, and multi-mode fiber media.
Two Class A high-level audio outputs; or alternately, four
Class B outputs supported. Outputs dynamically share the
75 W - the total power can be dedicated to a single output if
required.
FireFighters Telephone Riser supports 7 active firefighter
telephones. Release 3.0 and higher supports optional configurations: direct connection for up to 7 firefighter telephones, or connection to multiple TC810T1000(CDN)
modules.
Audio output activation via network control-by-event equations resident within the XLS-DVC.
Two digital audio ports support Style 4 or 7 configurations.
Auxiliary input for 12 Vp-p analog low-level audio.
Auxiliary input for 1 VRMS, to be used for background
music input, an interface with a telephone paging source, or
other compatible audio sources. Audio levels can be
adjusted by end user. Continuous supervision for active
DAA output circuits.
Programmable through VeriFire Tools.
Up to two minutes of standard quality backup digital message storage (from a VeriFire Tools message library, or created by the installer) for use in the event of communication
loss.
Multiple DAA-75 can share batteries supported by a single
charging power supply.
Relay contacts that will activate on a trouble condition provide an option for redundant annunciation to a local panel.
60257cov.jpg
Installation
The DAA-75 arrives from the factory already installed on its
chassis. The DAA-75 mounts in one tier of any XLS-CAB-4
Series cabinet; the DAA tier can be covered using a DP-1B
dress panel, ordered separately. The DAA-75 may also be
installed in one tier of an EQ series cabinet. No dress plate is
used for EQ cabinet installations. DAA-75 series amplifiers
(wire versions) may be installed in adjacent rows of a XLSCAB-4 series cabinet for non-continuous duty applications
(background music is a continuous-duty application). The EQ
series cabinets supports DAA-75 series amplifiers installed in
adjacent rows for continuous as well as non-continuous duty
applications.
Specifications
DAA-PS POWER SUPPLY BOARD
AC power (TB1): 115 - 120 VAC, 60 Hz input, 4.5 A maximum; or for "E" versions, 220 - 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz input,
2.3 A maximum. Recommended wiring: 12 to 14 AWG (1.6
mm O.D.) with 600 VAC insulation.
Battery connections (TB3): Supplied cable connections to
batteries.
DAA-7525 BOARDS
mm) twisted-pair, unshielded, power-limited. For approved
cable types, see wiring documentation, P/N 52916ADD: C
Approved Wire Cables for Digital Audio Loops. Electrically
isolated ports support Style 4 or 7 wiring.
Digital audio ports, "F" versions: Digital audio loop connectors A and B support multi-mode fiber. Maximum attenuation is 4.2 dB for multi-mode with 50/125 micrometer cable
@ 850 nm; 8.0 dB for multi-mode with 62.5/125 micrometer
cable @ 850 nm.
Digital audio ports, "SF" versions: Digital audio loop connectors A and B support single-mode fiber. Maximum attenuation is 5.0 dB for single-mode with 9/125 micrometer
cable @ 1300 nm.
Alarm bus (TB4): Power-limited by source. Recommended
wiring: 14 to 18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821 mm) twisted-pair.
Trouble bus (TB5): Dry contact. Recommended wiring: 14
to 18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821 mm) twisted-pair.
FFT riser (TB13): Power-limited output. Class A (Style Z)
or Class B (Style Y) operation. Style Y two-wire connections
require a 3.9K ohm, 1/2 watt resistor (P/N R-3.9K). Maximum wiring resistance (including individual telephone zone
5/18/10 11:06:51 PM

handset.
Auxiliary input A (AUX A, TB9): Signal strength from lowlevel analog audio input: 1 VRMS maximum. Optional
supervision (selected through programming). Recommended wiring: 14 to 18 AWG (2.08 to 0.821 mm) twistedpair. Auxiliary input must be in the same room as the DAA.
Auxiliary input B (AUX B, TB8): Signal strength from lowlevel analog audio input: 12 Vp-p nominal, 15 Vp-p
maximum. Optional supervision (selected through programming). Recommended wiring: 14 to 18 AWG (2.08 to
0.821 mm) twisted-pair.
Speaker circuits (TB10, TB11, TB12, and TB13): Power
limited outputs. 75 watts dynamically shared among the
four outputs. Supervision determined by programming.
Recommended wiring: 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to 0.821 mm)
twisted-pair.
End-of-line resistors: For Class A: 10K ohm, 1/2 watt, P/N
R-10K. For Class B: 20K ohm, 1/2 watt, P/N R-20K.
Standards and Codes

The DAA-75 Series Digital Audio Amplifiers comply with the
following standards:
Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 864, 9th Edition.
Part 15 Class A of the conducted and radiated emissions as
required by FCC.

DAA-7525: Digital Audio Amplifier (75 W, 25 VRMS), assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, shipped mounted to its
chassis.
DAA-7525F: Digital Audio Amplifier (75 W, 25 VRMS), multimode fiber, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board,
DAA-7525SF: Digital Audio Amplifier (75 W, 25 VRMS), single-mode fiber, assembly with DAA-PS power supply board,
220-240 VAC MODELS

DAA-7525E: Digital Audio Amplifier (75 W, 25 VRMS, 240
VAC), assembly with DAA-PS power supply board, shipped
mounted to its chassis.
DAA-7525EF: Digital Audio Amplifier (75 W, 25 VRMS), multimode fiber, 240 VAC, assembly with DAA-PS power supply
DAA-7525ESF: Digital Audio Amplifier (75 W, 25 VRMS), single-mode fiber, 240 VAC, assembly with DAA-PS power supply
ACCESSORIES
DP-1B: Dress panel; covers one tier of XLS-CAB-4 Series
cabinet.
Mounts on the left side of DAA chassis.
ACT-25: Audio-coupling transformers. Used with DAA-series
amplifiers to drive thousands of amplifiers in large system
applications.

These listings and approvals apply to the basic DAA-75 Series
Digital Audio Amplifiers. In some cases, certain modules may
not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in
process. Consult factory for latest listing status.

CSFM listing: 7165-1130:256
FDNY: COA# 6025; COA#6026
VeriFire is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3121-1 Rev. 05-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:06:51 PM
3224a30.wmf
AA Series
Audio Amplifiers
Description
The AA series audio amplifiers provide traditional high level
audio technology for use with Honeywells integrated voice evacuation systems. The AA Series is compatible with classic audio
systems such as the AMG-1 as well as the XLS-DVC (Digital
Voice Command Series) when used with the DVC-AO analog
audio option.
Three models are available: the AA-30 (30 watts @ 25 Vrms),
the AA-120 (120 watts @ 25 Vrms) and the AA-100 (100 watts
@ 70.7 Vrms). All use power-switching technology to reduce
production of heat and permit mounting in either 19" (48.26 cm)
racks or in standard Honeywell cabinets (wall mount). All include
power supply, battery switch-over control, amplifier supervision,
and backup amplifier switch-over control.
AA-30 Audio Amplifier
Provides up to 30 watts of 25 Vrms audio power.

Low-power standby mode for low battery drain.
Includes grouped or one-to-one backup amplifier switching
bus.
Battery input and brownout switch-over control.
High-efficiency switched regulation.
Plug-in terminal strips and cable connectors for ease of
installation.
10-position level adjustment and indicator LEDs.
High-fidelity sound quality.
Class A output wire supervision option.
Power-limited per UL requirements and NFPA as dictated by
NEC Article 760.
Mounts in a standard CAB-3/CAB-4, or EQ Cabinet Series
enclosure.
240 VAC version option (AA-30E).
Features of the AA-120/AA-100

AA-120 provides up to 120 watts of 25 Vrms audio power.
AA-100 provides dual outputs of up to 100 watts of 70.7 Vrms
audio power (combined outputs not to exceed 100 watts).
Low-power standby mode for low battery drain.
Includes grouped or one-to-one backup amplifier switching
bus.
Battery input and brownout switch-over control.
High-efficiency switched regulation.
Plug-in terminal strips and cable connectors for ease of
installation.
10-position level adjust and indicator LEDs.
Separate mounting chassis is not required (integral chassis
for mounting in a CAB-3/CAB-4 Series or EQ Cabinet Series
enclosure).
Includes a built-in automatic backup tone generator (slow
whoop or high/low).
Power-limited per UL requirements and NFPA as dictated by
NEC Article 760.
240 VAC option (AA-100E/AA-120E)
Indicators and Controls
3224a120.wmf
Features of the AA-30
AA-100/AA-120 Audio Amplifier
Normal Level ...................................................... Green LED.

Incorrect Level ................................................... Yellow LED.
Amplifier Trouble ................................................ Yellow LED.
Speaker Trouble ................................................. Yellow LED.
Brown Out/AC Failure ........................................ Yellow LED.
Battery Supervision ........................................... Yellow LED.
AC Overload Protection ................................ Circuit Breaker.
Battery Overload Protection ........................................ Fuse.

In some cases, certain modules or applications may not be
listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL Listed: S624
ULC Listed: CS118/CS733/CBP696 Vol. VII
MEA: 232-06-E Vol. II; 317-01-E4
CSFM: 7170-1130:235; 7170-1130:255
BSA (AA-30)
FM Approved
City of Chicago
City of Denver
Level Adjustment ..................................... 10 position switch.
5/18/10 11:06:51 PM
Wiring Connections
Signal
Wires
In/Out
Terminals
Connector
AC Power
In + Out
Yes (Fixed)
No
Battery
In = Out
Yes (Fixed)
No
Audio Input
2 + Shield
In + Out
Yes (Plug)
Yes (Dual)
Audio Output
2 + Shield
Out
Yes (Plug)
Yes
Audio Return
(for integral supervision)
2 + Shield
In
Yes (Plug)
Yes
Backup Amp
2 + Shield
In + Out
Yes (Plug)
Yes (Dual)
Trouble Bus
In + Out
Yes (Plug) Output Only
Yes (Dual)
Specifications
AA-30
AA-120/AA-100
Rated Output
30 watts RMS
120 watts RMS (AA-120)

100 watts RMS (AA-100)
Output Voltage
25 VRMS
25 VRMS (AA-120)
70.7 VRMS (AA-100)
Total Harmonic Distortion at 1 KHz
0.5%
4.0%
Frequency Response (+3, -1 dB)
220 - 22,000 Hz
170 - 7,500 Hz
Supply Voltage
120 V, 60 Hz
(AA-30E: 220/240 V, 50Hz)
120 V, 60 Hz
(AA-100E/AA-120E: 220/240 V, 50 Hz)
120 VAC Power Consumption
Standby: 208 mA
Alarm: 0.9 A
Standby: 306 mA
Alarm: 1.85 A
220/240 V Power Consumption
Standby: 120 mA
Alarm: 0.5 A
Standby: 160 mA
Alarm: 0.925 A
24 VDC (Battery) Power Consumption
Standby: 21 mA
Alarm: 3.4 A
Standby: 51 mA
Alarm: 7.3 A (AA-120); 6.5 A (AA-100)
Height
7.0 in. (17.78 cm)
7.0 in (17.78 cm)
Width
8.5 in (21.59 cm)
19.0 in. (48.26 cm)
Depth
4.3 in. (10.92 cm)
4.5 in. (11.43 cm)
Weight
6.0 lbs. (13.22 kg)
16.0 lbs. (35.27 kg)
Dimensions

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3044-1 Rev. 08/07

August 2007
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
85-3044-1
5/18/10 11:06:52 PM
XPIQ
Quad Intelligent Audio Transponder
General
6823xpiq.jpg
The XPIQ Quad Intelligent Audio Transponder is for distributed multichannel voice evacuation systems, playing up to four
simultaneous messages. It is an integrated audio amplification
and distribution subsystem controlled by an FACP (Fire Alarm
Control Panel) via the SLC (Signaling Line Circuit). The XPIQ
can direct up to four low-level audio signals from the risers to
four audio amplifiers. The amplified audio signals are then
directed to up to four integrated, continuously supervised
speaker circuits. The XPIQ is compatible with Honeywell XLS3000 and XLS-140 Series of fire alarm control panels.
NOTE: The XPIQ can also be used with Legacy panels. Please
refer to the XPIQ manual for more information.
XPIQ (shown without cabinet cover)
XPIQ-MB Features
Four Class B speaker circuits (Class A with XPIQ-CA).
Accepts four audio riser channels from XPIQ-AIB4 option
board.
Four amplifier slots.
Continuously supervised amplifiers and speakers.
All-call local page capability with optional RM-1(SA) remote
microphone and XPIQ-RMI.
Two independent user-configurable tone generators either for
riser backup or as a main tone source.
Supports routing of all-call page from single remote microphone to other XPIQ-MBs in the same cabinet.
Background music input terminal block.
Ten-position background music volume-control switch.
Multiple variations of backup configurations:
1 to 1 backup.
2 to 1 backup.
3 to 1 backup.
2 to 2 backup.
1 to 1 external backup (backup amplifier in another XPIQ).
Supports backup amplifier sharing between two or more
XPIQs within the same cabinet.
Includes four Class B or two Class A notification appliance
circuits or telephone circuits.
Ring tone on firefighter telephone circuits.
Supervised firefighter telephone riser input with in and out
terminals.
XPIQ-PS(E) power supply control/supervision that includes
AC, battery, and charger monitoring.
AC trouble delay option (none, 8-hour delay, 16-hour delay).
Ground fault detection.
Easy software upgrading and programming accomplished by
downloading from PC via serial port.
Nonvolatile memory for storing configuration data.
Pluggable terminal blocks for field wiring.
Accessory trouble input.
Specifications
XPIQ-PS AND XPIQ-PSE POWER SUPPLIES
AC power:
XPIQ-PS: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3.5 A.
XPIQ-PSE: 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.75 A.
Batteries or battery-backed-up DC source (secondary source
input TB2):
Input voltage range: 20.4 to 28 VDC.
Battery trouble voltage: less than or equal to 22 VDC.
Maximum current @ 20.4 VDC at full load (four 25-watt
amplifiers): 9.0 A.
Protection (overcurrent, reverse-polarity): 15.0 A automotive
minifuse.
24-volt lead-acid battery charger (TB2):
Float charge (battery fully charged): 27.6 VDC.
Maximum charging current: 1.4 A.
Minimum capacity: 12 AH.
Maximum capacity: 25 AH (48-hour charging period), 12 AH
(24-hour charging period).
XPIQ-MB MOTHERBOARD
Speaker circuits TB1, TB2, TB3, TB4:
Output: Power-limited.
Operation: Class B (Style Y) circuits or Class A (Style Z) with
XPIQ-CA converter module.
Field-wiring supervision: continuous (On and Off state).
Nominal ELR value for Style Y: 4.7 K ohms.
Minimum allowed leakage resistance of a speaker circuit
(Style Y without ELR or Style Z with wiring disconnected from
XPIQ-CA): 45 K ohms.
FFT riser/NAC source input TB9:
Maximum allowed FFT/NAC riser voltage: 30 VDC.
FFT/NAC circuits TB5, TB6, TB7, TB8:
Ouput: power-limited.
Operation: 4 Class B (Style Y) circuits or 2 Class A (Style Z).
Nominal ELR value for Style Y: 47 K ohms.
Maximum voltage drop @ 2 A on NAC output: 0.5 VDC.
NAC output current: 2.0 A.
5/18/10 11:06:53 PM
Nominal FFT handset DC resistance: 1.2 K ohms.

Minimum allowed leakage resistance of an FFT/NAC zone
(Style Y without ELR or Style Z with return wiring disconnected): 150 K ohms.
Background music input TB11:
Input voltage level: 1 Vp (peak voltage).
Input impedance: 75 K ohms.
XPIQ-SLI SIGNALING LINE INTERFACE

All screw terminal blocks accept wire up to 12 AWG (3.31
mm).
Compatible with CLIP and FlashScan protocols.
Average SLC current: 1.0 mA.
SLC isolation: 500 VDC, limited by transient protection components to 40 VDC.
Contact rating, local Alarm relay TB11: 2.0 A @ 32 VDC
(resistive).
Maximum length of local SLC loop wiring: 2,000 ft. (600 m).
Maximum number of detectors/modules on the local SLC
loop output: 64.
Maximum resistance of the local SLC (from any device to the
FACP): 50 ohms.
XPIQ-AIB4/AIB1 AUDIO INPUT BOARD

(4 CHANNEL/1 CHANNEL)
mm).
Nominal input voltage: 3.5 Vp (peak voltage).
XPIQ-AA25 AUDIO AMPLIFIER, 25 W
Built-in short-circuit and thermal-shutdown protection.

Nominal (sinusoidal) output voltage: 25 VRMS.
Nominal (sinusoidal) output power: 25 W.
Nominal (sinusoidal) output current: 1.0 A.
XPIQ-AA2270 AUDIO AMPLIFIER, 22 W
Built-in short-circuit and thermal-shutdown protection.

Nominal (sinusoidal) output voltage: 70.7 VRMS.
Nominal (sinusoidal) output power: 22 W.
Nominal (sinusoidal) output current: 310 mA.
XPIQ-RMI REMOTE MICROPHONE INTERFACE

mm).
Supply output voltage for RM-1(SA) TB2-1 (+24V), TB2-2
(common): 19 28 VDC.
Nominal audio level: 2.5 VRMS.
Four-Channel XPIQ Distributed Audio Block Diagram
Page 2 of 4 02/27/09 74-4078
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:06:54 PM
COMBINED CHARACTERISTICS
AMG, XPIQ-AIB4(1), and XPIQ-AA25: frequency response
350 Hz to 6 kHz.
AMG, AA-30, ACT-2, XPIQ-AIB4(1), and XPIQ-AA25: frequency response 450 Hz to 3.8 kHz (UL); 400 Hz to 4 kHz
(ULC).
RM-1(SA), XPIQ-AIB4(1), and XPIQ-AA25: frequency
response 350 Hz to 7 kHz.
RM-1(SA), XPIQ-RMI, and XPIQ-AA25: frequency response
350 Hz to 10 kHz.
Background music input (TB10) and XPIQ-AA25: frequency response 250 Hz to 12 kHz.
CABINET SPECIFICATIONS
The XPIQ mounts in any standard XLS-CAB-4 Series cabinet.
Refer to XLS-CAB-4 (85-3002) Series data sheet for specifications.
LED Indicators
LEDs located on XPIQ-MB motherboard:
System Trouble; yellow LED turns on for system-related
trouble.
AC Fail; yellow LED turns on when AC is lost (all other nonessential LEDs will turn off to conserve batteries).
Battery Trouble; yellow LED turns on for low or no battery
voltage.
Charger Trouble; yellow LED turns on for charger failure.
FFT/NAC Riser Trouble; yellow LED turns on for FFT riser
loss.
Telephone Trouble (Circuits 1 4); yellow LED for each circuit turns on for wiring trouble.
Speaker Trouble (Circuits 1 4); yellow LED for each circuit
turns on for wiring trouble.
Speaker Zone On (Circuits 1 4); one green LED for each
circuit turns on when active.
Earth Fault; yellow LED turns on for ground fault condition.
LEDs located on XPIQ-PS power supply:
On Line; green LED turns on to indicate that AC power is
applied.
Boost On; green LED turns on during battery tests and when
amplifiers are used during AC failure.
LEDs located on XPIQ-SLI signaling line interface board:
On Line; green LED turns on to indicate SLC communication
presence.
Trouble/Test; yellow LED turns on steady for SLC communication trouble.
7-Segment; displays the range of addresses programmed on
the XPIQ-MB.
LEDs located on XPIQ-AA25 audio amplifier:
Trouble; yellow LED indicates: Short (overcurrent) (on
steady); Gain Test Failed (blinking).
Status; green LED indicates if amplifier is Primary (on
steady) or Backup (blinking).
LEDs located on XPIQ-AIB1/4 audio input board:
Channel 1 through 4 Trouble; one yellow LED for each
channel turns on for channel signal loss trouble.
Channel 1 through 4 On; one green LED for each channel
turns on to indicate channel condition: channel is Ready (on
steady) or Active (blinking).
Controls and Switches

Controls and switches located on XPIQ-MB mother-board:
SW1 Earth Fault Detection; enables or disables the detection of a ground fault.
www.honeywell.com
SW2 Phone Circuits 1 & 2 Wiring Selection; select 2W for

two-wire Class B (Style Y) or 4W for four-wire Class A (Style
Z) circuit wiring.
SW3 Phone Circuits 3 & 4 Wiring Selection; select 2W for
two-wire Class B (Style Y) or 4W for four-wire Class A (Style
Z) circuit wiring.
SW4 Music Source Volume Control.
Jumpers JP1 & JP2; used to enable or disable software
upgrade for the XPIQ-MB.
Controls and switches located on XPIQ-SLI signaling line interface board:
SW1 Rotary Switch; used to set ones digit of starting
address on the SLC.
SW3 Rotary Switch; used to set tens/hundreds digit of starting address on the SLC.
SW2 Push-Button Switch; used to verify addresses on the
XPIQ.
Jumpers JP1 & JP2; used to enable or disable downloading
programming to the XPIQ-SLI.
Architectural/Engineering Specifications
Specifications of these and all Honeywell products are available
from Honeywell.
XPIQ-MB: Motherboard; required for each XPIQ installation.
Mounts in a standard CAB-3/-4 Series cabinet. 5.3 lbs / 2.4 kg
XPIQ-PS: Power supply; required for each XPIQ installation.
120 VAC. Mounts in same cabinet as the XPIQ-MB. 2.6 lbs /
1.18 kg
XPIQ-PSE: Power supply; 240 VAC version of XPIQ-PS. 2.6 lbs
/ 1.18 kg
XPIQ-SLI: Signaling line interface board; required for each
XPIQ installation. data communication interface between the
XPIQ-MB and the SLC of an FACP. The XPIQ-SLI uses the
standard rotary, decimal addressing switch. The number of
addresses utilized by the XPIQ-SLI depends on the number of
channels, speaker zones, telephone zones, and other options
selected during configuration by the installer. A seven-segment
display is used to indicate the address range used. The XPIQSLI can be wired in Style 4, 6, or 7. Mounts onto the XPIQ-MB.
0.3 lb / 0.14 kg
XPIQ-AIB4: Audio interface board; optional four-channel audio
input board that receives and processes up to four low-level
audio signals for the XPIQ system. XPIQ-AIB4 or XPIQ-AIB1
required when there is an external low-level audio riser signal
input. It is not required for non-voice system operation, in which
the XPIQ motherboard generates tones. Mounts onto the XPIQMB. 0.4 lb / 0.18 kg
XPIQ-AIB1: Audio interface board; same as the XPIQ-AIB4 but
receives and processes one low-level audio signal. 0.3 lb / 0.14
kg
XPIQ-AA25: Audio amplifier; 25 watts of power at 25 VRMS.
One fully supervised and power-limited speaker circuit on the
mother-board for each audio amplifier. Up to four XPIQ-AA25s
may be mounted on an XPIQ-MB. 1 lb / 0.45 kg Pictured at right.
XPIQ-AA2270: Audio amplifier; 22 watts of power at 70.7
VRMS. One fully supervised and power-limited speaker circuit on
the motherboard for each audio amplifier. Up to four XPIQAA2270s may be mounted on an XPIQ-MB. Compatible with
Rev. H and higher of the XPIQ-MB and Rev. C and higher of the
XPIQ-CA. 1.5 lbs / 0.68 kg.
XPIQ-CA: Class A converter; converts all speaker circuits (up
to 4 XPIQ-AA25) from Class B (Style Y) to Class A (Style Z).
One XPIQ-CA per XPIQ-MB. 0.2 lb / 0.09 kg
74-4078 02/27/09 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:06:54 PM
XPIQ-RMI: Remote microphone interface; optional interface

board with a connection for the RM-1 or RM-1SA. 0.1 lb / 0.05
kg
RM-1/RM-1SA: Remote microphone. See RM-1 data sheet 853053 for specifications and ordering information.
PK-XPIQ: Programming software for the XPIQ transponder.
Includes Windows 95/98/2000 compatible CD-ROM and programming cable.
CHS-PS: Power supply mounting kit; optional kit used to mount
the XPIQ-PS(E) in a location other than the bottom of the XLSCAB-3/-4 Series cabinet (e.g., the second row).
CHS-BH: Battery mounting kit; optional kit used to mount the
XPIQ batteries in a location other than the bottom of the XLSCAB-3/-4 Series cabinet (e.g., the second row).
CAB-4 Series Cabinets: XPIQ can mount in any of the XLSCAB-4 Series cabinets. See XLSCAB-4 (85-3002) Series data
sheets for ordering information and specifications.


The listings and approvals below apply to the basic XPIQ. In
some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain
DP-1: Blank dress plate; covers unused cabinet tiers.

VP-1: Vent plate, covers open space on top of XLSCAB-4
Series cabinets.
BAT Series: Batteries; XPIQ-PS battery charging circuit range
is 12 to 26 AH. See BAT Series data sheet 85-3072 ordering
information and specifications.
UL listed: S635
ULC: S635
FM approved
CSFM: 6911-0028:211
MEA: 317-01-E; 345-02-2; 447-00-E
FlashScan is a registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-4078 Rev. 02-09

3/9/09
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
5/18/10 11:06:55 PM
ACT-2
Audio Coupling Transformer
General
The ACT-2 Audio Coupling Transformer is used with the
DVC-AO/RM-1 and AA-30, AA-100, or AA-120 to provide a
means to drive multiple amplifiers in large audio system applications. It provides the following functions:
Attenuates high-level amplifier output to create low-level
input for additional amplifiers.
Isolates input from output.
Provides CMNR (Common Mode Noise Rejection).
Suitable Configurations
To drive AA-120/120E, AA-100, and/or AA-30/30E audio
amplifiers: The ACT-2 provides electrical isolation between its
input and output and attenuates the signal from high-level
audio to low-level audio. Ground fault detection is not provided
for output wiring on the ACT-2. Up to 40 audio amplifiers may
be fed by the output of an ACT-2 as long as the wiring does not
exceed 200 feet (61 meters), 18 to 12 AWG (0.78 to 3.1 mm).
The DVC-AO/RM-1 low-level signal is first fed into a single
AA-30 amplifier. The high-level output of this amplifier will support a Class A or Class B wiring arrangement and can be fed
to the input of up to 500 ACT-2 units. The outputs of each of
the 500 ACT-2 transformers may then be used to feed a lowlevel audio signal to the input of as many as 40 additional AA
Series amplifiers. The output of an ACT-2 supports Class B
wiring only. Where Class A wiring is required, all amplifiers
served by an ACT-2 must be housed in the enclosure containing the ACT-2.

UL Listed: S635.
MEA: 128-07-E Vol. 3; 317-01-E-4 (correction); 232-06-E
Vol. 2.
CSFM: 7170-1130:264; 7170-1130:255; 7170-1130:235.
FM Approved.

ACT-2: Audio Coupling Transformer. Includes installation
manual. Mounts to AA Series amplifier.
5/18/10 11:06:55 PM

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3065-1 Rev. 09-09

September 2009
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:06:56 PM
AFAWS Series
Emergency Telephone Stations
and Telephone Accessories
General
These Emergency Telephone Stations provide a reliable
means of communication for firefighters and other personnel.
Features
Heavy-duty construction.
Keylock or thumb-latch.
Push-to-talk switch on telephone handset.
Doors fit either recessed or surface enclosures.
Red baked-enamel finish.
Armored cable or standard telephone coiled cord.
Available with or without a break-glass door feature.
Master station connection LED indicator.
Applications
Stations feature a locked door design, with either a breakglass or non-break-glass feature. When a locked door is not
required, an optional thumb catch allows for fast, safe entry
into the housing.
The telephone handsets are available with either standard
coiled cord or a durable security-type armored cable.
The hook configuration consists of two Form-C switches which
permits a variety of wiring uses. The handset rests on a handsome chrome cradle which actuates the switch mechanism.
Installation
Either recessed or surface enclosures may be used with these
Emergency Telephone Stations. If a recessed enclosure is
used, the telephone assembly must be a model designed for
recessed enclosures. The same is true of surface enclosures.
6135cov.jpg

UL: S635
ULC: CS118/CS733
CSFM: 7300-0028:193
MEA: 82-98-E (AFAWS-TELA)
City of Chicago approved: Class 1, Class 2
6135lock.jpg
6135lach.jpg
Solid doors on surface-mount models with

Keylock (left) and Latch (Right) closures.
5/18/10 11:06:56 PM
AFAWS Product Line Information
TELEPHONE RECEPTACLES
The front door, backbox, and telephone assembly for AFAWS

Series telephone stations must be ordered separately.
FPJ: Firemans Phone Jack
HANDSET AND HOOKSWITCH ASSEMBLIES

AFAWS-TELC: Telephone with Coiled Cord Assembly
AFAWS-TELA: Telephone, Armored Cord Assembly
TELEPHONE STATION ENCLOSURES

AFAWS-BX
Backbox
15 (381.0mm)H x 8-3/8 (212.85mm)W x 3-3/8 (85.73mm)D
AFAWS-LS
Latch Door for Surface-Mount
15-3/16 (385.60mm)H x 8-9/16 (217.45mm)W
AFAWS-LR
Latch Door for Recessed-Mount
16-3/16 (411.00mm)H x 9-9/16 (242.85mm)W
AFAWS-KS
Keylock Door for Surface-Mount
15-3/16 (385.60mm)H x 8-9/16 (217.45mm)W
AFAWS-KR
Keylock Door for Recessed-Mount
16-3/16 (411.00mm)H x 9-9/16 (242.85mm)W
BRKG-N
Breakglass Insert
Includes a tempered glass plate, a hammer attached to a
chain, and a screw to attach the hammer to the trim ring.
Receptacle is semi-flush mounted with a

single-gang box (box is not furnished with
receptacle). The receptacle has a single
phone jack mounted on an attractive, single-gang, stainless steel plate. Colorcoded wires, 6 inches long, are prewired
to the jack to enable fast and accurate
wiring to the system.
RPJ-1: Remote Page Jack
Receptacle is semi-flush mounted with a
single-gang box (box is not furnished with
receptacle). The receptacle has a single
phone jack mounted on an attractive single-gang steel plate with a red paint finish. The RPJ-1 is used to provide a
remote All Call page to the speaker circuits. See panel manuals for specific
installation and operation details. Colorcoded wires, 6 inches long, are prewired
to the jack to enable fast and accurate
wiring to the system.
0083ph2-1.tif
6135rpj1.jpg
EMERGENCY TELEPHONE CABINETS

FHSC-R: Storage Cabinet for 6 FHS Firemans handsets;
recessed mounting.
6135ccph.wmf
FHSC-S: Storage Cabinet for 6 FHS Firemans hansets; surface mounted.
CABINET DIMENSIONS
6135bkbx.wmf
AFAWS-TELC
AFAWS-BX
AFAWS-TELA
Dimensions
Pictured Below
FHSC-R
Recessed Mount
FHSC-S
Surface Mount
Dimension A
Dimension B
Dimension C
Dimension D
Dimension E
3.25 (82.6mm)
3.25 (82.6mm)
17 (432mm)
17 (432mm)
13.375 (340mm)
13.375 (340mm)
18.312 (465mm)
17.312 (440mm)
14.625 (371mm)
13.625 (346mm)
PORTABLE FIREMANS TELEPHONE HANDSET

FHS: Firemans Handset.
0083ph11.tif
This handset comes with a

coiled cord. The attached plug
fits Firemans Phone Jack,
model FPJ and RPJ-1, allowing
firefighters to make direct communication with a central control area
6135FHSC.wmf

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60021:A
85-3052 Rev. 10/06

October 2006
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:06:57 PM
RM-1 Series
Remote Microphone and Cabinets
RM-1, RM-1SA, CAB-RM, CAB-RMR
GENERAL
The RM-1 Series Remote Microphone provides a costeffective microphone interface for paging to selected speaker
zones. The Power and Trouble LEDs provide easy-to-understand visual indications of its status. Various mounting
options are available. The microphone assembly can be
mounted in a small, compact enclosure or located in a comprehensive paging command center.
The RM-1 Series remote microphone can be utilized with the
XLS3000 and XLS140 Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACPs) as
well as the XLS-DVC Digital Voice Command Center.
FEATURES
Automatic gain control circuit.

Supervised microphone.
Form-C trouble contacts.
Form-C contacts activated when microphone is in use.
Power On LED.
Trouble LED.
Pluggable terminal blocks.
Low-level audio (LLA) IN and THRU screws.
XLS-CAB-4 SERIES INSTALLATION
Do NOT mount the RM-1 in front of an AA-100/AA-100E

or AA-120/AA-120E; there is not enough room to shut the
door of the cabinet if it is placed in front of one of these
audio amplifiers.
Do NOT mount the RM-1 in the first position to the right of
an AA-30/AA-30E; there is not enough room for the RM-1
wiring in this position. An RM-1 can fit only in the far-right
position of a row if an AA-30/AA-30E is in the far-left position of the same row. However, an RM-1 can fit into either
of the two left positions of the row if the AA-30/AA-30E is
in the far-right position of that row.
See page 2 for illustrations of mounted units.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirements: 20 mA primary, non-fire alarm current; 66 mA when microphone is activated; 20 mA secondary,
non-fire alarm current.
Operating voltage: 17 to 26.4 volts.
PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION

RM-1: Remote microphone assembly for mounting on an
ADP-4B dress panel.
6728rmsa.cdr
The RM-1 can mount to the back of an ADP-4B dress panel

inside a XLS-CAB-4 Series cabinet. It can be mounted in any
of the four positions on the dress panel, with the following
exceptions:
CAB-RM: Stand-alone cabinet, gray.

CAB-RMR: Stand-alone cabinet, red.
AGENCY LISTINGS AND APPROVALS

These listings and approvals apply to the RM-1 Series
Remote Microphone. In some cases, certain modules may
not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be
UL: S635
ULC: CS118/CS733 Vol. 12
City of Denver
City of Chicago
MEA: 327-94-E Vol.III 317-01-E (XLS140)
CSFM: 7170-1130:255 and 7165-1130:256 (XLS3000),
7170-1130:235 (XLS140)
FM: Approved (RM-1, RM-1SA)
RM-1SA: Remote microphone assembly for mounting in a

CAB-RM(R), for remote applications.
5/18/10 11:06:57 PM
RM-1 MOUNTING & CABINET DIMENSIONS

AT RIGHT: RM-1SA (right) and
in CAB-RM or CAB-RMR.
6728mt2.wmf
6728rmsa.wmf
6728mt1.wmf
BELOW: RM-1 (left) and on

ADP-4B dress panel.
6728rm1.wmf
CAB-RM/CAB-RMR
DIMENSIONS inches (mm)
6728cab.wmf
DEPTH WITHOUT DOOR
HEIGHT/WIDTH WITHOUT DOOR

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60003:A
85-3053 Rev. 12-06
4/29/10
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:06:58 PM
EQ Cabinet
Equipment Backboxes
with Ventilated Locking Doors
GENERAL
EQ Series cabinets provide an effective solution for applications that require distributed components such as power supplies, amplifiers, and multiple I/O modules. The EQ Series
provides superior ventilation for devices such as amplifiers and
field power supplies, ample room for wire or fiber-optic media
between each row, and a space efficient package that allows
for the consolidation of multiple system components in a single
enclosure.
EQCab.jpg
Equipment cabinets use a perforated blank door for enhanced

ventilation, and do not support the mounting of backbox
mounted dress plates. Therefore these cabinets are not appropriate for equipment that would be normally accessed by a
system operator such as control equipment, annunicators, or
remote microphones.
EQ cabinets share the same external dimensions as the familiar CAB 4 Series cabinets. EQ Series cabinets differ in that
they do not include a separate battery row. See illustrations
below for examples of EQ cabinet row spacing.
SPECIFICATIONS
Equipment cabinets are fabricated from 16-gauge steel.
The cabinet assembly consists of two basic parts: a backbox and a locking door. Cabinets are available in black.
The key-locked door is provided with a pin-type hinge, two
keys and the necessary hardware to mount the door to the
backbox.
The backbox has been engineered to provide ease-of-entry
for the installer. Knockouts are positioned at numerous
points to aid the installer in bringing a conduit into the
enclosure with a minimum of hardship.
Right- or left-hand hinges, selectable in the field. Door
opens 180.
Cabinets are arranged in 3 standard sizes, B (two tiers)
through D (four tiers). See Ordering Information.
Trim ring options are available for semi-flush mounting.
EQUIPMENT COMPATIBLE FOR USE IN EQ

SERIES CABINETS
AA-30 Audio Amplifiers

ACPS-610 Power Supply
AMPS-24 Power Supply
DAA-50 Series Amplifiers
DAA-75 Series Amplifiers
XP6-C Modules
XP6-MA Modules
XP6-R Modules
XP10-MA Modules

These listings and approvals below apply to the EQ cabinet. In
some cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed
by certain approval agencies, or listing may be process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL Listed: S635, S470
ULC Listed: S635, S470
CSFM:
7165-1130:265
(XLS140-2),
(XLS3000)
FDNY: COA #6031, #6039 (XLS140-2)
7165-1130:256
ORDERING INFORMATION
A complete cabinet assembly consists of: a door, a backbox,
and an optional semi-flush trim ring. For each cabinet
required, order one "EQDR" door and one "EQBB" backbox.
The optional trim ring is an attractive "picture frame"-style
black metal ring.
TWO TIERS, "B" SIZE:

EQDR-B4: Door assembly, vented door, two tiers, BLACK.
EQBB-B4: Backbox assembly, two tiers, BLACK.
TR-B4: Semi-flush-mount trim ring, two tiers.
THREE TIERS, "C" SIZE:

EQDR-C4: Door assembly, vented door, three tiers, BLACK.
EQBB-C4: Backbox assembly, three tiers, BLACK.
TR-C4: Semi-flush-mount trim ring, three tiers.
5/18/10 11:06:58 PM
FOUR TIERS, "D" SIZE:
EQBB-D4: Backbox assembly, four tiers, BLACK.
EQDR-D4: Door assembly, vented door, four tiers, BLACK.
TR-D4: Semi-flush-mount trim ring, four tiers.
CABINET DRAWINGS AND FEATURES

Top knockout:
Inner 1.375" (3.49)
Outer 1.750" (4.45)
24-1/8" (61.28)
24" (60.96)
(10.16)
4"
5-5/32" 2-1/16"
(13.1)
(5.24)
1-5/8"
(4.13)
16" (40.64)
11-1/2"
(29.21)
2"
1 (5.08)
11"
(2.54)
(27.94)
37-1/32"
(94.06)
11"
(27.94)
45-3/4"
(116.21)
45-7/8"
(116.52)
5/16" dia.
(0.79)
5/16" dia.
(0.79)
19-1/2" (49.53)
2-1/4"
(5.72)
(cm)
eqcab-d.wmf
EQDR-D4
Page 2 of 4 1/7/10 85-3110
2-1/4"
(5.72)
EQBB-D4 Box
1-7/8
(4.699)
2-5/8"
(6.604)
Four lower knockouts
Inner 0.875" (2.22)
Outer 1.125" (2.86)
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:06:59 PM
Top knockout:
Inner 1.375" (3.49)
Outer 1.750" (4.45)
24-1/8" (61.28)
24" (60.96)
(10.16)
4"
5-5/32"
(13.1)
1-5/8"
(4.13)
16" (40.64)
2-1/16
(5.2324)
11-1/2"
(29.21)
2"
28-3/32"
(71.36)
1 (5.08)
11"
(2.54)
(27.94)
37-1/4"
(94.62)
37-1/8"
(94.3)
5/16" dia.
(0.79)
5/16" dia.
(0.79)
19-1/2" (49.53)
2-1/4"
(5.72)
2-1/4"
(5.72)
(cm)
eqcab-c.wmf
1-7/8
(4.699)
EQBB-C4 Box
EQDR-C4
2-5/8
(6.604)
Three lower knockouts
Inner 0.875" (2.22)
Outer 1.125" (2.86)
Top knockout:
Inner 1.375" (3.49)
Outer 1.750" (4.45)
24-1/8" (61.28)
(10.16)
4"
24" (60.96)
5-5/32" 2-1/16
(13.1) (5.2324)
1-5/8"
(4.13)
16" (40.64)
11-1/2
(29.21)
19-3/4
(50.24)
28-5/8"
(72.71)
5/16" dia.
(0.79)
28-1/2"
(72.39)
5/16" dia.
(0.79)
19-1/2" (49.53)
2"
(5.08)
1
(2.54)
2-1/4"
(5.72)
(cm)
60229cab2.wmf
1-7/8
(4.699)
2-1/4" (5.72)
EQDR-B4
www.honeywell.com
EQBB-B4 Box
2-5/8
(6.604)
Two lower knockouts
Inner 0.875" (2.22)
Outer 1.125" (2.86)
85-3110 1/7/10 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:06:59 PM
Top knockout:
Inner 1.375" (3.49)
Outer 1.750" (4.45)
5-5/32" 2-1/16"
(13.1)
(5.24)
6857ko.wmf
11-1/2"
(29.21)
2"
1 (5.08)
11"
(2.54)
(27.94)
11"
(27.94)
45-3/4"
(116.21)
cab4keyhole.wmf
Mounting Hole
60229side.wmf
Top View of Backbox
1-17/20
(4.699)
2-9/16"
(6.51)
Four lower knockouts
Inner 0.875" (2.22)
Outer 1.125" (2.86)
Side View of Backbox

(EQBB-D4)

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3110 Rev. 01/10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
5/18/10 11:08:54 PM
AFL-RM, AFL-TM,
AFL-RS, AFL-TS
6980cov1.jpg,
Audio Fiber Link Modules

General
The AFL-TS/AFL-TM (single- or multi-mode transmitters) and
AFL-RS/AFL-RM (single- or multi-mode receivers) are Audio
Fiber Link Modules that distribute low-level audio signals via
fiber-optic media.
6980cov2.JPG
h6980cov2.JPG
The AFL-TS/-TM transmitter accepts low-level audio signals

from the DVC-AO. The AFL-TS/-TM then converts the lowlevel audio signals to modulated light, which is transmitted
through fiber-optic cable. The AFL-RS/-RM receiver accepts
that modulated light at the other end of the fiber-optic cable,
then converts the modulated light to low-level audio to feed
AA-30, AA-100, AA-120, or XPIQ amplifiers, or (if required) the
next daisy-chained AFL-TS/-TM.
Audio Fiber Link (AFL) modules are powered from nonresettable 24 DVC output from power supplies that are listed for fire
protective signaling service.
Applications
Installation
Audio Fiber Link modules may be used in systems where:
The AFL transmitters or receivers may be mounted in a CHS-4

or CHS-4L chassis, which in turn mounts into a CAB-3 or
CAB-4 Series cabinet. When mounting AFL modules on the
CHS-4 and CHS-4L, adequate clearance above the board is
required. Mounting AFL modules onto the outer position of the
CHS-4 is possible only if the AFL board is mounted with components facing inward. AFL modules attach to CHS-4 and
CHS-4L chassis via screws to PEM standoffs or studs.
The use of wire media is not possible due to security

requirements.
Fiber-optic cable is already installed and available for lowlevel audio distribution.
Significant distances between DVC-AO and remote amplifier cabinets dictate the use of fiber.
High-intensity electromagnetic fields of audible frequencies
could be coupled to low-level audio over wire.
Both distance and physical location of remote cabinets
require the use of star topology.
Up to 50 AFL transmitters maybe be connected to the output
of a DVC-AO.
A maximum of ten amplifiers may be fed from AFL receiver
output; and a maximum of ten AFL transmitters may be fed
by a single AFL receiver.
The maximum series connection of audio fiber links is two
AFL transmitters/receiver pairs deep.
APPLICATION NOTES:
A system requiring many fiber links may also require larger
batteries and external chargers. Please refer to the
POWER REQUIREMENTS section on page 2.
AFL transmitters should be powered by the 24 VDC ULlisted power supply connected to the same reference (battery negative) as the audio signal source (DVC-AO, AFL
receiver).
Class A low-level audio riser cannot be implemented when
using AFL modules.
Any combination of up to 50 AFL transmitters and AA-30,
AA-100, and AA-120 series amplifiers may be connected to
the output of any one DVC-AO. All of the AFL-transmitters
must remain in the same cabinet as the DVC-AO.
Once audio system installation is complete, the audio gain
level must be adjusted. See Installation Document 52230
for instructions.
FIber Optic Link

The attenuation of fiber-optic cablins between the AFL transmitter of receiver must not exceed a 10 dB limit. See Installation Document 52230 for formulas to establish limits in the
system design stage. The actual attenuation can be measured
end-to-end with standard fiber-optic test equipment, using a
signal wavelength of 850 nanometers.
The following are supported by Audio Fiber Link:
Connectors: ST-style
Fiber type: multi-mode for AFL-TM and AFL-RM; singlemode for AFL-TS and AFL-RS.
Core size: 62.5/125 micrometers for multi-mode; or 9/125
micrometers for single-mode.
Wavelength: 850 nanometers for multi-mode; or 1300
nanometers for single-mode.
Maximum attenuation of fiber-optic link between AFL-TS/TM and AFL-RS/-RM cannot exceed 10 dB.
Power Requirements
Operating Voltage: 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Current for AFL-TS/-TM: 130 mA
Current for AFL-RS/-RM: 120 mA
Battery calculations: Refer to fire panel instructions.
5/18/10 11:08:56 PM

AFL-TS: Audio fiber link single-mode transmitter. Includes
transmitter, mounting bracket and hardware, and instruction
manual.
AFL-TM: Audio fiber link multi-mode transmitter. Includes transmitter, mounting bracket and hardware, and instruction manual.
AFL-RM: Audio fiber link multi-mode receiver. Includes receiver,
mounting bracket and hardware, and instruction manual.
AFL-RS: Audio fiber link single-mode receiver. Includes receiver,

mounting bracket and hardware, and instruction manual.
Application Example
POWER
GND +24V
_
SHIELD
AUDIO
AFL-TS
Fiber Optic cable

to another AFL-Rx
in a remote
cabinet
Single-Mode Fiber
Fiber-Optic Audio Transmitter
AFL-Tx
FIBER
POWER
GND +24V
_
SHIELD
AUDIO
AFL-TS
Single-Mode Fiber
FIBER
GND +24V
POWER OLI
_
SHIELD
AUDIO
AFL-RS
Single-mode Fiber
Fiber-Optic Audio Receiver
AFL-Tx
FIBER
POWER
AFL-Rx
GND + 24V
_
SHIEL D
AUDIO
AFL-TS
Single-Mode Fiber
FIBER
Fiber Optic cable

to another AFL-Rx
in a remote
cabinet
AFL-Tx
P3
AA-100/A100E
or
AA-120/AA-120E
DVC-AO
P3
P3
AA-100/AA-100E
or
AA-120/AA-120E
AA-30/AA-30E
AA-30/AA-30E
AA-100/AA-100E
or
AA-120/AA-120E
Compatible
Power Supply
Compatible
Power Supply
Remote Amplifier Cabinet

NOTE:
P8
P3
AFLappexamplea.wmf
P3
P8
Main Control Panel Cabinet

Origin of the main Audio Riser
This drawing is not intended to accurately represent a proper fiber bend radius.
Refer to the specifications from the fiber manufacturer for the correct bend radius.
The Compatible Power Supply should be a Regulated, Power-Limited Power Supply
UL/ULC-listed for Fire Protective Signal Use.
ST-style is a registered trademark of AT&T.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3119 Rev. 05-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
85-3119
5/18/10 11:08:56 PM
Notes
Accessories
3.0 Accessories
Displays
Control and Network Modules
Power Supplies
Cabinets
Printers
LCD-160
Liquid Crystal Display
General
The LCD-160 is a 640-character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
annunciator and remote control for the XLS3000 Fire Alarm
Control Panel (FACP). The LCD-160 will mimic the top portion
(160 characters) of the XLS3000s 640-character display. This
provides the event and preprogrammed custom messages as
displayed on the main panel. The full screen contains soft key
functions, and can display other panel information.
LCD-160 Features
640-character Liquid Crystal Display with backlit control.
On-board input, output, and status indicators to support
diagnostics.
Software upgrades and foreign-languages character sets
via serial port from a panel or other device using the
Remote Data Port (RDP) interface. Upgrades do not require
the replacement of any programmable devices.
Rubberized keypad.
Input for XLS-AKS-1B key switch.
Fits in two ACS annunciator module locations.
Display and Control Center (DCC) participation/indication.
RDP Interface
Any communication between the control panel and any RDP
device, such as the LCD-160, occurs over an RDP interface.
RDP interface communication is supervised by the FACP
and the LCD-160.
RDP bus can drive up to 32 RDP devices. The FACP must
be at one end of the bus; the last RDP device on the circuit
must have an enabled end-of-line resistor.
Each LCD-160 on the bus requires a non-resettable 24
VDC power connection. The power circuit is inherently
supervised and a loss of power registers as a communication failure at the control panel.
The LCD-160 can be powered by a regulated remote power
supply listed for fire-protective signaling use. If the 24 VDC
power comes from a non-power-limited source, it must
remain separate from the power-limited RDP bus.
Specifications
Input supply voltage (TB2): Regulated, filtered 24 VDC via
non-resettable power supply interface listed for fire-protective
signaling use. Sources can be: panels with integrated power
supplies, main power supplies (AMPS-24, etc.), auxiliary
power supplies (APS-6R, etc.); or a compatible accessories
output. If RDP devices are to be powered by separate power
supplies, a common reference connection must be established.
Current draw: Standby current: 0.300 A with backlight on,

0.075 A with backlight off. Alarm current: 0.325 A with backlight on, all LEDs active.
RDP BUS WIRING SPECIFICATIONS

Wiring distance: 4000 feet (1219.2 m) at 18 AWG (0.78
mm) between the panel and the last device on the RDP bus
(subject to systems power restrictions).
Wiring size: 18 to 12 AWG (0.78 to 3.1 mm) twisted-pair
cable, with characteristic impedance of 120 ohms 20%.
Wire resistance: Limit total wire resistance to 100 ohms on
the RDP bus, and 10 ohms on the RDP device power circuit.
Unloaded resistance between RDP connectors must be
greater than 1K ohm. A remote power supply is required if total
power wiring resistance exceeds 10 ohms.
NOTES: 1) DO NOT RUN CABLE adjacent to, or in the same conduit as: 120 VAC service; noisy electrical circuits that are powering mechanical bells or horns; audio circuits above 25 Vrms; motor
control circuits; SCR power circuits; or non-power-limited circuits.
2) Refer to LCD-160 Manual, document no. 51850, if RDP devices
are to be mounted in SEPARATE CABINETS or powered by
REMOTE POWER SUPPLIES.
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY RANGE:
Data communications port (TB1): Power-limited RDP interface.
5/18/10 11:08:57 PM
LCD-160 Interface and Indicators
Security: Scroll/display a list of associated events.
The liquid crystal display is 40 characters wide and 16 lines

deep, and displays all programming screens and other information. The keypad is functional only when an entry is
requested by the system. Enter or change fields and issue
commands on the display by using the two types of keys on
the keypad: fixed function and soft keys.
Fixed function keys are the ten keys labeled on the front of
the LCD-160, operating at all times on all screens unless otherwise noted. With both an active command center and DCC
enabled at the panel, Acknowledge, Signal Silence, System
Reset, and Drill require permission before they can be processed.
Acknowledge: Press to respond to any event or trouble signal. If enabled, silences the LCD-160 piezo sounder. Sends an
acknowledge message to the panel.
Signal Silence: Press to send a system silence command to
the panel, with the particular silencing action information
stored at the FACP. Verification screen appears on networked
displays.
System Reset: Press to send a system reset command to
the panel, with the particular reset action information stored at
the FACP. Verification screen appears on networked displays.
Drill: Press (hold for two seconds) to activate all silenceable
fire output circuits.
Lamp Test: Press to test the LED indicators and the piezo, or
display firmware version numbers.
Fire Alarm: Scroll/display a list of associated events.
Supervisory: Scroll/display a list of associated events.

Trouble: Scroll/display a list of associated events.
Other Event: Scroll between prealarm and disabled events.
For complete information on key functions and effects on different panels, refer to the LCD-160 Manual and panel manuals.
Soft keys are the six keys to the right and left of the display.
Use them to select commands that appear on the display for
each different screen. Refer to the screens in the LCD-160
Manual for descriptions of the applicable soft keys.
STATUS LED INDICATORS

Power (green) illuminates when AC power is within normal
operating limits.
Fire Alarm (red) illuminates when at least one fire alarm event
exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged.
Pre-Alarm (red) illuminates when at least one pre-alarm event
Security (blue) illuminates when at least one security event
Supervisory (yellow) illuminates when at least one supervisory event exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged.
System Trouble (yellow) illuminates when at least one trouble event exists. It will flash if any of these events are unacknowledged.
Other Event (yellow) (future release).
6940bord.wmf
LCD-160
Page 2 of 4 HON-60001:A 85-3058 12/01/06
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:08:58 PM
Signals Silenced (yellow) illuminates if notification appliances have been silenced. It flashes if some, but not all, of the
NACs have been silenced.
Point Disabled (yellow) illuminates when at least one device
has been disabled. It will flash until all disabled points have
been acknowledged.
Controls Active (green) illuminates when the LCD-160
assumes control of the node as a primary display.
DIAGNOSTIC LED INDICATORS

Status, LED11 (green), blinks when the LCD-160 is on. Visible to the installer/troubleshooter only.
Receive, LED12 (green), blinks when data is received from
the panel. Visible to the installer/troubleshooter only.
Transmit, LED13 (green), blinks when data is transmitted to
the panel. Visible to the installer/troubleshooter only.
Microfail, LED14 (yellow), illuminates if the microcontroller
fails. Visible to the installer/troubleshooter only.
Event Handling and the Display and Control

Center
UL and ULC require that when multiple command and control
centers are installed, only one operator at any location can be
in control at any given time for functions such as acknowledge,
silence, and reset. This is called the Display and Control Center (DCC). DCC operation provides a mechanism to pass net-
RDP Bus Wire Runs
work control to alternate network control centers. This protocol

allows for a request for control from another networked
panel, which will be accepted or rejected from the current
DCC. A 15-second time-out allowance provides for an automatic passing of control in the event there is no response from
the original DCC. If the XLS3000 panel associated with an
LCD-160 has been programmed to participate in DCC, all
remote displays with Local Control ON will automatically participate.

These listings and approvals apply to the LCD-160. In some
cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed by
certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL: S635
ULC: CS100
City of Denver
City of Chicago
MEA: 232-06-E, Vol. 2
CSFM: 7165-1130:256,7170-1130:255

LCD-160: 640-character Liquid Crystal Display annunciator.
BACKBOXES
The following backboxes can be surface- or semi-flushmounted to provide an enclosure for remote mounting. Use
with 1/2" (1.27 cm) conduit in the provided knockouts.
XLS-ABS-2D (black) and XLS-ABS-2DR (red): surface- or
semi-flush enclosure for remote mounting. Mounts an LCD160 directly to the enclosures hinged dress plate. The XLSABS-2D and XLS-ABS-2DR do NOT support the installation of
the XLS-AKS-1B key-switch or XLS-APJ-1B phone jack. Not
for use in Canadian applications. Optional trim ring TR-ABS2D
for semi-flush mounting. Dimensions, box: 12.0" (30.480 cm)
H x 12.0" (30.480 cm) W x 3.797" (9.644 cm) D (NOTE: The
black XLS-ABS-2D is slightly deeper). Dimensions, door:
12.0" (30.480 cm) H x 12.0" (30.480 cm) W x 1.250" (3.175
cm) D.
XLS-ABS-4D (black) and XLS-ABS-4DR (red): surface- or
semi-flush enclosure for remote mounting. Mounts an LCD-
Sample Screen:
Point Event Display
www.honeywell.com
HON-60001:A 85-3058 12/01/06 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:08:58 PM
160 and two annunciators directly to the enclosures hinged

dress plate. The XLS-ABS-4D and XLS-ABS-4DR do NOT
support the installation of the XLS-AKS-1B key-switch or XLSAPJ-1B phone jack. Dimensions, box: 11.97" (30.40 cm) H x
19.87" (50.47 cm) W x 3.5" (8.89 cm) D. Dimensions, door:
11.97" (30.40 cm) H x 19.87" (50.47 cm) W x 1.250" (3.175
cm) D.
locks are included. For dimensions and further information,

see data sheets for XLS-CAB-4 Series.
XLS-ABF-2B: black flush enclosure for remote mounting.

Mounts an LCD-160 directly to the enclosures dress plate. Not
for use in Canadian applications. Includes a painted black
metal trim plate [11" (27.94 cm) high x 10.625" (26.99 cm)
wide] and adhesive-backed annunciator label. 9.938" (25.24
cm) high x 9.188" (23.34 cm) wide x 3.75" (9.525 cm) deep.
ADP-4B: Annunciator Dress Panel-4B (black) for cabinet

mounting of an LCD-160. LCD-160 mounts directly to the
dress panel, which hinge-mounts to the tier of a CAB-4 Series
backbox.
XLS-ABF-4B: black flush enclosure for remote mounting of

one LCD-160 and two annunciator modules directly to the
enclosures dress plate. Knockouts are provided for use with 1/
2" (1.27 cm) conduit. Includes a painted black metal trim plate
[11" (27.94 cm) high x 19.375" (49.21 cm) wide] and an annunciator label. 9.938" (25.24 cm) high x 17.75" (45.09 cm) wide x
2.5" (6.35 cm) deep.
XLS-CAB-4: are surface- or semi-flush-mounted, in sizes to
accommodate one to four rows of equipment plus batteries (up
to two 25 AH batteries). Four sizes are available. Doors are
ordered separately, and feature reversible hinges to mount
doors on the left or right side. Doors also open a full 180. Key-
ACCESSORIES
DP-DISP: Dress Panel Display for cabinet mounting of an
LCD-160. LCD-160 mounts directly to the dress panel, which
hinge-mounts to the top tier of a CAB-4 Series backbox.
TR-ABS2D: (black) optional trim ring for semi-flush mounting

XLS-ABS-2D(R).
VP-2B (black) and VP-2: Vented Dress Panel for use with the
ADP-4B dress panel installed in the top tier of a CAB-4 Series
cabinet. It covers the gap between the dress panel and top of
the cabinet.
XLS-AKS-1B (black): Annunciator Key Switch provides
access security for the control switches on the LCD-160. Keyswitch kit includes key, hardware, and an annunciator label.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60001:A
85-3058 Rev. 12-06
4/29/10
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
5/18/10 11:08:59 PM
XLS-LCD2-80
Liquid Crystal Display
General
The XLS-LCD2-80 is an 80-character, backlit LCD display
annunciator for the Honeywell XLS140 and XLS NCA fire
alarm control panels, or the XLS-NCA/XLS-NCA-2 network
control annunciator. XLS-LCD2-80s may be connected onto
the four-wire EIA-485 terminal port.
HWLCD2-80.jpg
The XLS-LCD2-80 mimics the XLS140 and XLS-NCA displays. Up to 32 XLS-LCD2-80s can annunciate and provide
remote reset, acknowledge, drill and silence of the control
panel from remote locations.
NOTE: The XLS-LCD2-80 can also be used with Legacy panels
that supported the LCD-80. Please refer to the XLS-LCD2-80
manual for more information.
Features
80-character backlit Liquid Crystal Display (20 characters x
4 lines).
Control switches for System Acknowledge, Signal Silence
Drill and System Reset.
Mounts up to 6000 foot segments between units
Local piezo sounder with alarm/trouble resound.
Displays all analog, addressable points.
Displays device type identifiers.
Device and zone custom alpha labels.
Time/date and Device address.
XLS-LCD2-80 mounts with any CHS-4 chassis slot.

Flush/surface/panel mount option.
No programming necessary. XLS-LCD2-80 displays time,
date, and custom messages received from the panel or network annunciator
XLS-LCD2-80 is 8.25" (20.96 cm) high, 4.375" (11.11 cm)
wide, and 1.75" (4.45 cm) deep.
Up to 32 XLS-LCD2-80s may be used on one EIA-485 circuit.
NOTE: Must have sufficient regulated 24 volt power.
6,000 ft (1828.8 m)
Maximum wire length between each LCD2-80
EIA-485
(2 wires)
24 VDC
(2 wires)
EIA-485 return (2 wires)
XLS3000, XLS140-2, XLS140 connecting to XLS-LCD2-80
5/18/10 11:08:59 PM
The XLS-ABF-1DB Backbox
The XLS-ABF-1DB is a semi-flush-mount backbox for the

XLS-LCD2-80 Series Annunciator. The XLS-ABF-1DB mounts
one XLS-LCD2-80. It includes an attractive smoked-glass door
with keylock.

may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may
be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
Dimensions, BOX only:
9.938" (25.24 cm) high, 4.625" (11.75 cm) wide, 2.5" (6.35 cm)
deep.
Dimensions, DOOR only:
10.713" (27.21 cm) high, 6.0" (15.24 cm) wide, 0.75" (1.9 cm)
deep.
UL Listed: S470
ULC Listed: S635
FDNY: COA# 6039
CSFM: 7165-1130:265
FM Approved
Related Options
XLS-ABF-1DB: Semi-flush box with alternative smoked-glass
door, any keylock.
ADP-4B: Annunciator Dress Plate, black. Allows panel
mounting of up to four LCD2-80 modules in a CAB-4 Series
cabinet.
XLS-ABF-1B: Annunciator Flush Box, 9.938" (25.24 cm)
high, 4.625" (11.75 cm) wide, and 2.5" (6.35 cm) deep. OrderAKS-1B key switch if desired. Can also be mounted in XLSABF-2B or XLS-ABF-4B annunciator backboxes.
XLS-ABS-1TB: Deep Surface Backbox (mounts one XLSLCD2-80).
AKS-1B: Key Switch (black) to enable/disable controls when
mounted in XLS-XLS-ABS-1TB.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-5091 Rev. 01-10

January 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:09:00 PM
XLS-ELCM-320, XLS-ELEM-320,
LCM-320, and LEM-320
Loop Control and Expander Modules
General
6881PHO1LCM.JPG, 6881PHOLEM.JPG
The XLS-ELCM-320 and the LCM-320 Loop Control Modules,

and the XLS-ELEM-320 and the LEM-320 Loop Expander
Modules provide the XLS140/XLS140-2 and XLS3000 Fire
Alarm Control Panels (FACPs) with Signaling Line Circuits
(SLCs). The XLS140/XLS140-2 supports one LEM-320; the
XLS3000 supports up to five XLS-ELCM-320s or LCM-320s
and five XLS-ELEM-320s or LEM-320s. The LEM-320 module
is used to expand the XLS140/XLS140-2 to a second loop,
and to expand each XLS-ELCM-320/LCM-320 used on the
XLS3000 each XLS3000 XLS-ELCM-320 or LCM-320 supports an expansion XLS-ELEM-320 or LEM-320. The LCM320/LEM-320 support FlashScan protocol and the XLSELCM-320 and XLS-ELEM-320 support Eclipse protocol.
Features
Up to 12,500 feet (3,810 m) on a Class B (Style 4) SLC loop
(twisted-unshielded).
Built-in degraded mode increases survivability.
Very simple installation plug-in style.
Permits multiple loops in small enclosure.
Loop Control
Module
Loop Expander
Module

Specifications
Voltage: 24 VDC nominal, 27.6 VDC maximum.
Maximum loop length: The maximum wiring distance of an
SLC using 12 AWG (3.1 mm) twisted-pair wire is 12,500 feet
(3810 m) per channel. For a twisted-unshielded pair, 12 AWG
(3.1 mm) to 18 AWG (0.78 mm):
LCM-320: Loop Control Module (CLIP/FlashScan protocol).

Adds SLCs to XLS3000; XLS3000 supports up to five LCM320s and five LEM-320s.
LEM-320: Loop Expander Module (CLIP/FlashScan protocol).
Expands each LCM used on the XLS3000; expands XLS140/
XLS140-2 to two loops.
Distance with 12 AWG: 12,500 ft (3,810 m).

Distance with 18 AWG: 3,225 ft (983 m).
50 ohms maximum per length of Style 6 & 7 loops.
50 ohms maximum per branch for Style 4 loop.
See SLC wiring manual for latest information on acceptable wire types and distances.
Maximum current: for LCM-320 & XLS-ELCM-320: 130 mA;
for LEM-320 & XLS-ELEM-320: 100 mA; for single SLC
loop: 400 mA maximum.
XLS-ELCM-320: Loop Control Module (Eclipse protocol).

Adds SLCs to XLS3000.
NOTE: Maximum short circuit loop will shut down until short-circuit condition is corrected.
Maximum resistance: 50 ohms (supervised and powerlimited).

Temperature and humidity ranges: This system meets
NFPA requirements for operation at 0 49C/32 120F and
at a relative humidity 93% 2% RH (noncondensing) at 32C
2C (90F 3F). However, the useful life of the system's
standby batteries and the electronic components may be
adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its
peripherals be installed in an environment with a normal room
temperature of 15 27C/60 80F.
XLS-ELEM-320: Loop Expander Module (Eclipse protocol).

Used to expand the XLS-ELCM-320 only; not compatible with
the XLS140/XLS140-2.

The listings and approvals below apply to the basic XLSELCM-320, XLS-ELEM-320, LCM-320, and LEM-320. In some
cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval
agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL: S470
ULC: S635/CS118
ULC: S470/CS118
FM Approved
CSFM: 7165-1130:256, 7170-1130:255 (LCM-320/LEM-320
with XLS3000). 7165-1130:265, 7170-1130:264 (LEM-320
with XLS140-2).
MEA: 232-06-E Vol 2. (LCM-320/LEM-320 with XLS3000)
FDNY: COA# 6030 (LEM-320 with XLS140-2). COA#6031
(LCM-320/LEM-320 and XLS-ELCM-320/XLS-ELEM-320
with XLS3000).
NOTE: The LCM-320/LEM-320 and XLS-ELCM-320/XLS-ELEM320 must be installed in corresponding pairs. For example, an
LEM-320 cannot be used to expand an XLS-ELCM-320.
5/18/10 11:09:00 PM
FLASHSCAN and NOTIFIER are registered trademarks and Eclipse is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3056-1 Rev. 08-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:09:02 PM
XLS-NCA2
Network Control Annunciator
General
Hardware Features

Full supervision of all inputs and network integrity.
Enhanced-format 640-character LCD display with backlighting.
ACS bus for LED or graphic annunciators (EIA-485).
Optically isolated printer interface (EIA-232).
11 LED status indicators: Power, Controls Active, Fire Alarm,
Pre-Alarm, Security, Alert, Supervisory, Trouble, Signal,
Silence, CPU Failure, Point Disabled, Other Event.
Rubber keypad.
Four status relays: Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, Security (Form-C).
Nonvolatile real-time clock can be synchronized with network
by master node.
Optional Security Keyswitch enable Keypad functions.
Optional Security Tamper switch.
Supports up to 32 remote ACS annunciators and modules.
Requires 24 VDC, and a network connection.
RDP port for LCD-160 or terminal mode LCD-80.
NOTE: XLS-NCA2 Firmware version 14.0 (and higher) can support LCD-160 on the RDP port, or LCD-80 in terminal mode, but
not both at the same time.
Function Features
Individual Enable/Disable or Group Enable/Disable local for
networked compatible panels.
Control ON/OFF networked compatible panel control points.
Read Status networked compatible panel points and zones.
Network paging control/HVAC control .
Network-wide: Acknowledge, Silence, Reset.
Lamp Test (local to XLS-NCA2).
History Buffer (1000 Alarm events; 4000 System events).
Print XLS-NCA2 programming and history reports.
Report status of networked panels and their respective field
devices to a central station via a single UDACT.
One Master level, nine User level passwords. The Master can
assign each User access levels (programming, alter status).
Interactive Summary Event Count display, event handling package.
Online programming and alter-status programs.
Intuitive user guidance program including interactive soft keys.
Enhanced Read Status/Alter Status displays.
New history filters for report displaying and printing: All
Events, Only Alarms, Only Troubles, Only Supervisory, Only,
Security, Time Interval, Point Range.
Fully programmable node-mapping subsystem.
h7047ph1.jpg
The XLS-NCA2 is a second-generation Network Control Annunciator for the XLS-NET network, compatible for use with nodes such
as the XLS3000, XLS140-2 and XLS140 fire alarm control panels,
as well as first-generation XLS-NCA Network Control Annunciators.
Additionally, the XLS-NCA2 may be configured with XLS-DVC
Series products (XLS-DVC-EM, XLS-DVC-EMF, and XLS-DVCEMSF) to create one or more Digital Audio Command Centers on
XLS-NET. The XLS-NCA2 provides system control and display
capabilities for all, or for selected network nodes.
The XLS-NCA2 display consists of a 640-character backlit LCD display, and a control interface consisting of soft keys used to navigate screen menus, and hard keys with fixed control functions.
When connected to one or more networked panels the XLS-NCA2
provides network control and status/history display capabilities. It
may also be configured as the Primary Display for displayless
nodes on the network.
Advanced/Basic Walk-Test program.

Timer control for Auto Silence, AC Fail Delay.
Meets Canadian ULC display requirements.
Environmental adjustment controls to maximize LCD legibility.
Meets NFPA requirements for Firefighter Smoke Control Station (FSCS) and HVAC.
XLS-NCA2 Indicators and Controls

LED INDICATORS
POWER (green) illuminates when 24 VDC power is applied;
LED goes out if power is removed and XLS-NCA2 is using a
battery.
CONTROLS ACTIVE (green) illuminates to indicate that the
XLS-NCA2 control functions are active.
FIRE ALARM (red) illuminates when at least one fire alarm
event exists; flashes when any of these events remain unacknowledged.
PRE-ALARM (red) illuminates when at least one pre-alarm
event exists; flashes when any of these events remain unacknowledged.
SECURITY (blue) illuminates when at least one security event
exists; flashes when any of these events remain unacknowledged.
SUPERVISORY (yellow) illuminates when at least one supervisory event exists (i.e., sprinkler valve off normal, low pressure, fire pump running, guards tour, etc.); flashes when any
of these events remain unacknowledged.
SYSTEM TROUBLE (yellow) illuminates when at least one trouble event exists; flashes when any of these events remain
unacknowledged.
OTHER EVENT (yellow) illuminates for any category of event
not listed above; flashes when any of these events remain
unacknowledged.
SIGNALS SILENCED (yellow) illuminates if the XLS-NCA2
Silence key has been pressed or if any other node sent a
Network Silence command; flashes if only some points on a
node are silenced.
POINT DISABLED (yellow) illuminates when at least one disable
exists on the network or in the system.
CPU FAILURE (yellow) activated by the watchdog timer hardware, indicates an abnormal hardware or software condition. Contact technical support.
FIXED FUNCTION KEYS

ACKNOWLEDGE
SIGNAL SILENCE
SYSTEM RESET
5/18/10 11:09:02 PM
DRILL
FIRE ALARM SCROLL/DISPLAY
SECURITY SCROLL/DISPLAY
SUPERVISORY SCROLL/DISPLAY
TROUBLE SCROLL/DISPLAY
OTHER EVENT SCROLL/DISPLAY
The five keys labeled SCROLL/DISPLAY allow the user to scroll
through messages for the particular event type. For example,
pressing the FIRE ALARM SCROLL/DISPLAY key will scroll through
all fire alarm events, as details of each are shown in the display
area of the XLS-NCA2.
NOTE: The OTHER EVENT SCROLL/DISPLAY key also scrolls
between Pre-Alarm and Disabled events.
ACKNOWLEDGE press this key to acknowledge off all active
events.
SIGNAL SILENCE press this key to turn off all control modules, notification appliance circuits, and panel output circuits
that have been programmed as Silenceable.
SYSTEM RESET press this key to clear all latched alarms
and other events and turn off event LEDs.
DRILL HOLD 2 SEC press this key, holding it down for two
seconds, to activate all silenceable output circuits.
SPECIAL FUNCTION KEYS

PRINT SCREEN press this key to print what is currently on
the LCD screen.
LAMP TEST press this key to test the LED indicators on the
left of the keypad and to check firmware revision numbers.
NEXT SELECTION/PREVIOUS SELECTION these keys are used
when setting parameters in XLS-NCA2 data fields; for example, choosing a device type as a filter for requesting a Node
History.
BATTERY LEVEL press this key to display voltage and charging current level for system batteries. Displays levels for local
AMPS-24(E) or AMPS-24(E) connected to associated
XLS3000 node.
Specifications
Temperature and humidity ranges: This system meets NFPA
requirements for operation at 0C to 49C (32F to 120F); and
at a relative humidity (noncondensing) of 85% at 30C (86F)
per NFPA, and 93% 2% at 32C 2C (89.6F 1.1F) per
ULC. However, the useful life of the systems standby batteries
and the electronic components may be adversely affected by
extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and all peripherals be installed in an
environment with a nominal room temperature of 15C to 27C
(60F to 80F). Product weight is 3 lbs (1.36 kilograms).
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
The XLS-NCA2 may be powered from a Main Power Supply
AMPS-24(E) (see data sheet 85-3057) mounted in a seperate
cabinet (see specifications below); or from any UL Listed nonresettable 24 VDC source from a compatible fire panel (see
panel data sheets). The battery on the XLS-NCA2 motherboard
is for RTC and SRAM; holds the history memory through power
failure. Replacements are available (P/N 31004). Power source:

1) AMPS-24 (120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 A maximum) or AMPS24E (240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.25 A maximum) power supply; 2) the
XLS140-2 on-board power supply; or 3) a supervised +24 VDC
power supply that is UL/ULC-listed for fire protective service.
The current of the XLS-NCA2 is 400 mA with backlight and 200
mA with the backlight off.

These listings and approvals apply to the XLS-NCA2. In some
cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
MEA approved: file 232-06-E Vol. 2.
CSFM approved: files 7165-1130:255, 7170-1130:256.

XLS-NCA2: Network Control Annunciator. Requires a NCM-W
or NCM-F network communications module for networking. In
direct connect applications NCM not required.
NCM-W, NCM-F: Standard Network Communications Modules. Wire and multi-mode fiber versions available. One
required for each network node (XLS3000, XLS140, XLS140-2,
XLS-DVC, BACNET GATEWAY, FNA) on XLS-NET. Mounts in a
standard chassis position or on a BMP-1 plate. See 85-3007.
fiber, and media conversion models are available.
XLS-ABS-2D: Annunciator Backbox, Surface, black. Mounts
one XLS-NCA2 and one NCM-W/-F.
XLS-ABS-2DR: Same as above, but red.
CHS-2D: Chassis, required whenever the XLS-NCA2 is
mounted in an XLS-ABS-2D(R).
CHS-M3: Chassis, mounts an XLS-NCA2 in a single row of a
XLS-CAB-4 Series cabinet.
CA-2: Chassis, Audio, 2 rows. Mounts an XLS-NCA2 and the
XLS-DVC Digital Voice Command in two rows of a XLS-CAB-4
Series cabinet.
DP-DISP: Annunciator Dress Plate. Dress plate is used when
XLS-NCA2 is mounted in the top row of an XLS-CAB-4 Series
cabinet with a CHS-M3 chassis.
NCA-2RETRO: Kit for retrofit mounting the XLS-NCA2 to a DPDISP dress plate.
NCA/640-2-KIT: Mounting kit for directly mounting the XLSNCA2 to XLS140-CPU2 chassis.
LCD-160: 160 character LCD annunciator
XLS-LCD-80: 80 character LCD annunciator
TR-ABS2D: Trim ring for semi-flush mounting of XLS-ABS-2D

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-4045-2 Rev. 03-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:09:03 PM
HS-NCM-W, HS-NCM-MF,
HS-NCM-SF, HS-NCM-WMF,
HS-NCM-WSF, HS-NCM-MFSF
High-Speed Network Communications Modules
General
The High-Speed Network Communications Module (HSNCM) provides Honeywells XLS140, XLS140-2, and XLS3000
Fire Alarm Control Panels and XLS-NCA and XLS-NCA2
Network Control Annunciators, and XLS-DVC Digital Voice
Command with a means to connect to High-Speed XLSNET.
Six types of HS-NCM are available: HS-NCM-W for connecting
nodes with twisted-pair wire, HS-NCM-MF for connecting nodes
with multi-mode fiber-optic cable, HS-NCM-SF for connecting
nodes with single-mode fiber-optic cable, HS-NCM-WMF for
connecting wire and multi-mode fiber-optic medium on the same
network, HS-NCM-WSF for connecting wire and single-mode
fiber-optic mediums on the same network and HS-NCM-MFSF
for connecting multi-mode and single-mode fiber optic mediums
on the same network.
HS-NCM.jpg
HS-NCM
Each HS-NCM can accommodate up to two node addresses.

For example, one HS-NCM can provide network communication
for both an XLS140-2 and an XLS-NCA2.
When not connected to a fire alarm panel, the HS-NCM defaults
to repeater mode and can be used to boost signal distances or
to pass data transmissions between two differently configured
network segments when wire and fiber co-exist on a network.
HS-NCM-W Features
Supports twisted-pair wire medium.
NFPA Style 4 (Class B) operation or NFPA Style 7 (Class A)
operation.
Transformer coupling provides electrical isolation between
nodes.
Pluggable terminal wiring with strain relief.
Pluggable service connector (feeds signal directly through) in
the event that power must be removed from a node.
12 Mb transmission rate.
Data is regenerated at each node.
Two network ports to allow simultaneous connection to fire
alarm control panel and to programming computer.
Enables software and database upload/download over HighSpeed XLSNET.
Up to 3,000 feet (914.4 m) between nodes in a point-to-point
fashion (actual distance varies with wire quality).
HS-NCM-W Interconnections: When wiring consecutive HSNCM-W boards, wiring may enter or exit at Port A or Port B. HSNCM-W port-to-port wiring is not polarity sensitive; use of Port A
or Port B is arbitrary. An HS-NCM-W may be connected to any
of the following devices: HS-NCM-W (in another panel), HSNCM-WMF, HS-NCM-WSF.
HS-NCM-W Switch Functions: The HS-NCM-W provides one
set of switches to simplify network setup. Enable ground fault
detection by setting ON switch SW4-1 (Channel A); switch
SW4-2 (Channel B). NOTE: Correct configuration is dependent
on network design; refer to the High-Speed XLSNET manual.
For further information and diagrams, refer to the HS-NCM
Installation Document, 54013.
HS-NCM-MF and HS-NCM-SF Features

Supports fiber-optic medium.
NFPA Style 4 (Class B) or Style 7 (Class A) operation.
Data is immune to all environmental noise.
Optical isolation prevents ground loops.

High-Speed XLSNET fiber-optic medium.
Fiber type: 62.5/125 micrometers (multi-mode); 50/125
micrometers (multimode), or 9/125 micrometers (singlemode).
Maximum attenuation is 10 dB with 62.5/125 m cable, and
6.5 dB with 50/125 m cable, and 30 dB with 9/125 m cable.
Wavelength (1): 1310 nanometers.
Connectors: LC style.
100 Mb baud transmission rate.
HS-NCM-MF/SF Interconnections: When wiring consecutive
nodes/repeaters, fiber cable must exit one board on Transmit
(TX) and enter the next node/repeater on Receive (RX). The
fiber-optic pair (RX, TX) from Port A of one node/repeater may
be connected to either Port A or Port B of another node/
repeater. A HS-NCM-MF/SF may be connected to any of the
following devices: HS-NCM-MF/SF (respectively) on another
panel, HS-NCM-WMF, HS-NCM-WSF, HS-NCM-MFSF.
HS-NCM-WMF, HS-NCM-WSF, and HSNCM-MFSF Features

Supports twisted-pair wire and fiber-optic medium.
NFPA Style 4 (Class B) operation or NFPA Style 7 (Class A)
operation.
Allows wire and fiber optic nodes to communicate as one
network.
Fiber type: 62.5/125 micrometers (multi-mode); 50/125
micrometers (multimode), or 9/125 micrometers (singlemode).
Maximum attenuation is 10 dB with 62.5/125 m cable, and
6.5 dB with 50/125 m cable, and 30 dB with 9/125 m cable.
Wavelength (1): 1310 nanometers.
Pluggable service connector (feeds signal directly through) in
the event that power must be removed from a node.
5/18/10 11:09:03 PM

Up to 3,000 feet (914.4 m) between nodes in a point-to-point
fashion (actual distance varies with wire quality).
HS-NCM-WMF/WSF/MFSF Interconnections: When wiring
consecutive nodes/repeaters, fiber cable must exit one board on
Transmit (TX) and enter the next node/repeater on Receive
(RX). The fiber-optic pair (RX, TX) from Port A of one node/
repeater may be connected to either Port A or Port B of another
node/repeater. An HS-NCM-WMF/WSF/MFSF may be
connected to any of the following devices: HS-NCM-WMF, HSNCM-WSF or HS-NCM-MFSF on another panel, HS-NCM-MF,
HS-NCM-SF.
Common Specifications
extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is
recommended that this system and all peripherals be installed in
an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15C to
27C (60F to 80F).\
Weight: 5.2 ounces (147.4 grams)

The following listings and approvals apply to the HS-NCM. In
some cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed
by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process.
Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL Listed: file S635, S470.
ULC Listed: files CS118 Vol. 22/UL S6235 Vol. 43
CSFM Approved: files 7300-0028:257, 7165-1130:265,
7165-1130:256
FM Approved
MEA approved: file 317-01-E (NCM-W)
FDNY: COA#6022, COA#6030, COA#6031

HS-NCM-W High-Speed Network Communications Module,
twisted-pair wire interface.
HS-NCM-MF High-Speed Network Communications Module,
fiber-optic cable interface (multi-mode).
HS-NCM-SF High-Speed Network Communications Module,
fiber-optic cable interface (single-mode)
HS-NCM-WMF High-Speed Network Communications Module,
wire and fiber-optic cable interface (wire/multi-mode).
HS-NCM-WSF High-Speed Network Communications Module,
wire and fiber-optic cable interface (wire/single-mode).
HS-NCM-MFSF High-Speed Network Communications Module,
fiber-optic cable interface (multi-mode/single-mode).
Mounting
All models of the HS-NCM can be installed in any standard
chassis such as the CHS-4L, CHS-M2, CHS-M3, CHS-4N or
XLS140-2 chassis (see panel sheets). Additionally, the HSNCM-W can be door-mounted on the ADP-4B dress panel on a
single-space blank plate (BMP-1) for mounting in an XLS-CAB4 Series cabinet.
XLS-NET is a trademark; NOTIFIER and VeriFire are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-4082 Rev. 02-10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:09:07 PM
ACS Series
Annunciators
ACM/AEM-24T, ACM/AEM-48A
General
ACS Series Annunciators provide a modular line of products
for annunciation and control of Honeywell XLS Series Intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels, and Network Control Annunciators. The ACS line provides arrays of LEDs to indicate point
status and, in some versions, switches to control the state of
output circuits. These ACS units use a serial interface and may
be located at distances of up to 6,000 feet (1,828.8 meters)
from the panel.
Features
Speaker control mode for use with XPIQ and the following
panels: XLS140, XLS140-2, XLS3000. Enables the ACS to
control operation of groups of multi-channels mapped to
groups of multi-speakers.
Compatible with existing annunciators.
Color-programmable LEDs.
On-board end-of-line resistors can be enabled/disabled by
setting a switch.
Alarm/Circuit On and Trouble LED per-point option or more
dense Alarm-only option.
Touch-pad control switch option for remote control of system relays; or silence, reset, and evacuate.
LEDs may be programmed to display status of indicating
circuits or control relays as well as system status conditions.
System Trouble LED indicator.
On-Line/Power LED indicator.
Alarm and trouble resound with flash of new conditions.
Local sounder for both alarm and trouble conditions with
silence/acknowledge button (program options).
May be powered by 24 VDC from the panel or by remote
power supplies.
Microprocessor-controlled electronics, fully supervised.
Slip-in custom labels, lettered with standard typewriter or
LabelEase program.
Plug-in terminal blocks for ease of installation and service.
Construction
The ACS modules are provided in two basic controller modules, each with its expander module. The ACM-24AT provides
24 annunciation and control points per module, each with a
red, green, or yellow Alarm/Circuit On LED, a yellow Trouble
LED, and a touch-key switch. The ACM-48A provides 48
annunciation points per module, each with a red, green, or yellow Alarm/Circuit On LED (for annunciating control relays, the
LED indicates ON/OFF).
On the ACM-24AT, each LED point is individually color-programmable. On ACM-48A, each column of 24 LED points can
be color-configured using a DIP switch.
NFPA requirements for operation at 0C to 49C (32F to
120F); and at a relative humidity (noncondensing) of 85% at
30C (86F) per NFPA, and 93% 2% at 32C 2C (89.6F
1.1F) per ULC. However, the useful life of the systems
adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humid-
ACM/AEM-24AT
ACM/AEM-48AT
ity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and all

peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room
temperature of 15C to 27C (60F to 80F).
Installation
The ACS Series annunciator and control subsystems use
modular hardware assemblies which allow the custom configuration of the annunciator panel to fit the individual job requirements.
Standard backboxes and mounting hardware schemes, including special remote cabinets, allow the annunciators to be constructed and configured with other system components.
When used with the XLS140, XLS140-2 or XLS3000, the ACS
modules can be used for manual selection of speaker and telephone circuits. In this application, they are typically mounted in
the main control near the microphone and telephone handset.
For remote annunciation applications, the modules are typically mounted in special ABF or ABS boxes. Control switch key
locks (XLS-AKS-1B) and phone jacks (XLS-APJ-1B) are available.
Communication between the ACS Series annunciators and the
host Fire Alarm Control Panel is made through an EIA-485
multi-drop loop, eliminating the need for costly wiring
schemes. Four wires are required, two for the EIA-485 communications (twisted pair), and two for 24 VDC regulated
power.
Retrofit of ACS Series annunciators into existing systems is
easily accomplished. Software may require upgrading.
All field-wiring terminations use removable, compression-type
terminal blocks for ease of installation, wiring, and circuit testing.
Operation
The ACS Series annunciator and control system provides the
system with up to 32 remote serially connected annunciators,
each with a capacity of 96 points, for a total capacity of 3072
points (subject to the capability of the FACP). The XLSNCA(2) is capable of using the full 96 points.
Local or remote power supplies and serial communications
allow the ACS to be located virtually anywhere in the protected
premises.
5/18/10 11:09:08 PM
XLS140, XLS3000, and XLS-NCA(2) system alarm and/or

trouble conditions may be annunciated on a per-point basis, or
in a grouped or zone configuration.
Control of system operational controls, such as Signal Silence,
System Reset, and local annunciation controls (such as Local
Acknowledge and Lamp Test) may be accomplished through
the modules rubber keypad.
ABS-1B: (shown below) The Annunciator Surface Box-1B

(black) provides for the remote mounting of one annunciator
module in a surface-mount enclosure. Knockouts are provided
for use with 1/2" (1.27 cm) conduit. The annunciator mounts
directly to the ABS-1B without a dress plate. 8.5" (21.59 cm)
high x 4.5" (11.43 cm) wide x 2" (5.08 cm) deep. NOTE: The
ABS-1B will not support the installation of the XLS-AKS-1B
Annunciator Key Switch.
50439d2.tif
ACM-24AT: (shown below) The Annunciator Control Module-24AT contains 24 color-programmable (red/green/yellow)
Active and 24 yellow Trouble LEDs, 24 momentary touch-pad
switches, a System Trouble LED, an On-Line/Power LED, and
a local piezo sounder with a silence/acknowledge switch for
audible indication of alarm and trouble conditions. Includes
instructions. 8.375" (21.27 cm) high; 4.375" (11.11 cm) wide.
XLS-ABF-1B
50439d3.tif
ABS-1B
XLS-ABS-1TB: The XLS-ABS-1TB is an attractive surfacemount backbox for mounting one ACS Series Annunciator.
Unlike the ABS-1B, the XLS-ABS-1TB has an increased depth
that allows mounting of the XLS-AKS-1B Annunciator Key
Switch. Black, 9.938" (25.24 cm) high x 4.625" (11.75 cm)
wide x 2.5" (6.35 cm) deep.
ACM/AEM-24AT
6862at24.wmf
ACM/AEM-48A
6862a48.wmf
AEM-24AT: The
Annunciator
Expander
Module-24AT
expands the ACM-24AT by 24 system points. The AEM-24AT
is identical in size and in frontal appearance to the ACM-24AT.
Up to three of these expander modules can be supported by
an ACM-24AT, for a maximum of 96 system points. 8.375"
(21.27 cm) high; 4.375" (11.11 cm) wide. NOTE: The
AEM-24AT cannot be used to expand the ACM-48A.
ACM-48A: (shown above) The Annunciator Control Module-48A contains 48 color-programmable (red/green/yellow)
Active LEDs, a System Trouble LED, an On-Line/Power LED,
and a local piezo sounder with a Silence/Acknowledge switch
for audible indication of alarm and trouble conditions. Includes
instructions. 8.375" (21.27 cm) high; 4.375" (11.11 cm) wide.
AEM-48A: The Annunciator Expander Module-48A expands
the ACM-48A by 48 system points. The AEM-48A is identical
in frontal appearance to the ACM-48A. One expander module
can be supported by an ACM-48A, providing a maximum of 96
points (subject to the capability of the FACP). 8.375" (21.27
cm) high; 4.375" (11.11 cm) wide. NOTE: The AEM-48A cannot be used to expand the ACM-24AT.
Page 2 of 4 10/14/2009 85-3004-1
ABS-2B: The Annunciator Surface Box-2B (black) provides

for the surface mounting of one ACM-24AT/AEM-24AT combination or one ACM-48A/AEM-48A combination. Knockouts are
provided for use with 1/2" (1.27 cm) conduit. The annunciators
mount directly to the ABS-2B without a dress plate. 8.5" (21.59
cm) high x 8.92" (22.66 cm) wide x 2" (5.08 cm) deep. NOTE:
The ABS-2B will not support the installation of the XLSAKS-1B Annunciator Key Switch.
XLS-ABF-1B: (shown above) The Annunciator Flush Box-1B
(black) provides for the remote mounting of a single annunciator module in a flush-mount enclosure. Knockouts are provided
for use with 1/2" (1.27 cm) conduit. The XLS-ABF-1B includes
a painted black metal trim plate [11" (27.94 cm) high x 6.25"
(15.875 cm) wide], mounting hardware, and an adhesivebacked annunciator label for the dress plate. 9.938" (25.24 cm)
high x 4.625" (11.75 cm) wide x 2.5" (6.35 cm) deep.
XLS-ABF-2B: The Annunciator Flush Box-2B (black) provides for the flush mounting of two annunciator modules.
Includes a painted black metal trim plate [11" (27.94 cm) high
x 10.625" (26.99 cm) wide] and adhesive-backed annunciator
label. 9.938" (25.24 cm) high x 9.188" (23.34 cm) wide x 3.75"
(9.525 cm) deep.
XLS-ABF-4B: (shown below) The Annunciator Flush Box-4B
(black) provides for the remote mounting of one to four
annunciator modules. Knockouts are provided for use with 1/2"
(1.27 cm) conduit. The flush-mounted XLS-ABF-4B includes a
painted black metal trim plate [11" (27.94 cm) high x 19.375"
(49.21 cm) wide] and an annunciator label. 9.938" (25.24 cm)
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:09:08 PM
6858disp.wmf
XLS-ABF-4B
DP-DISP Dress Panel with XLS-NCA

Network Control Annunciator in left two positions,
and two ACM-24AT Annunciators at right.
50439d1.tif
XLS-ABF-1DB, ABF-2DB, XLS-ABS-4D: The XLS-ABF-1DB,

ABF-2DB and XLS-ABS-4D are semi-flush-mount backboxes for
ACS Series Annunciators. The XLS-ABF-1DB mounts one annunciator module and the ABF-2DB mounts two modules or one XLSNCA. The XLS-ABS-4D mounts up to four annunciators or two
annunciators with an NCA. Black with an attractive smoked glass
door with a keylock. The XLS-ABS-4D is hinged on the bottom for
stability.
DIMENSIONS, XLS-ABF-1DB: Box only: 9.938" (25.24 cm)
Door: 11" (27.94 cm) high x 6" (15.24 cm) wide x 0.75" (1.9
cm) deep.
DIMENSIONS, ABF-2DB: Box only: 9.938" (25.24 cm) high x
9.188" (23.34 cm) wide x 3.75" (9.525 cm) deep. Door: 11"
(27.94 cm) high x 10.375" (26.35 cm) wide x 0.75" (1.9 cm)
deep.
DIMENSIONS, XLS-ABS-4D: Box only: 11.97" (30.40 cm)
high x 19.87" (50.47cm) wide x 3.50" (8.89 cm) deep.
Door: 11.97" (30.40 cm) high x 19.87" (50.47 cm) wide
x 1.25" (3.18 cm) deep.
ADP-4B: The Annunciator Dress Panel-4B (black) provides
for the cabinet mounting of one to four modules. The ADP-4B
hinge-mounts to an XLS-CAB-4 Series cabinet. Modules
mount directly to threaded studs on the ADP-4B.
DP-DISP: The Dress Panel-Display provides for the cabinet
mounting of one to four modules in the top row of an XLSCAB-4 Series backbox. Modules mount directly to threaded
studs on the DP-DISP (see illustration below).
www.honeywell.com
BMP-1: Annunciator Blank Module is a flat black dress plate

that covers unused module positions in the annunciator backbox or in the ADP-4B. 8.375" (21.27 cm) high x 4.375" (11.11
cm) wide. Studs for a variety of module mounting options are
available.
XLS-AKS-1B: The Annunciator Key Switch-1B (black) provides access security for the control switches on the ACM/
AEM-24AT. The key switch kit includes a key and hardware for
mounting to the XLS-ABF-1B. Also included is an adhesivebacked annunciator label for use with the key switch/dress
plate assembly. NOTE: The XLS-AKS-1B can only be
employed with the XLS-ABS-1TB.

The listings and approvals below apply to the ACM/AEM-24AT
and the ACM/AEM-48A. In some cases, certain modules or
applications may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or
listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
Additional listings relating to recent product or applications to
be released shortly.
UL Listed: files S635 (ACM/AEM-24AT, ACM/AEM-48A),
S470 (XLS-ABF-1B/-2B/-4B, XLS-ABF-1DB, ABF-2DB,
XLS-ABS-1TB, XLS-ABS-4D).
ULC Listed: files CS118 Vol. 15 and UL S635 Vol. 50 (ACM/
AEM-24AT, ACM/AEM-48A); files CS118 Vol 27 and UL
S635 Vol. 27 (XLS-ABF-1B/-2B/-4B, XLS-ABF-1DB/-2DB,
XLS-ABS-1TB, XLS-ABS-4D).
MEA approved: files 317-01-E, 317-01-E, Vol. 4.
CSFM approved: files 7120-0028:156 (ACM/AEM-24AT,
ACM/AEM-48A).
FM approved.
FDNY: COA #6030 (XLS140-2), COA #6031 (XLS3000).
85-3004-1 10/14/2009 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:09:09 PM

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3004-1 Rev. 10-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
5/18/10 11:09:10 PM
ACM-8R
Relay Module
General
3558acm8.wmf
The ACM-8R is a module in the Honeywell ACS class of annunciators. It provides the XLS3000 and XLS140 Fire Alarm Control
Panels and XLS-NCA and XLS-NCA-2 Network Annunciators with
a mappable relay control module.
Features
Provides eight Form-C relays with 5-amp contacts.
The relays can be employed to track a variety of devices and
panel points, in a grouped fashion.
Removable terminal blocks for ease of installation and service.
DIP switch selectable memory mapping of relays.
NOTE: The ACM-8R can also be used with legacy panels. Please
refer to the ACM-8R manual (document 15382).
ACM-8R Relay Module
Mounting
The ACM-8R module will mount to CHS-4 chassis, a CHS-4L
low-profile chassis (assumes one of four positions on the chassis), or CHS-4N; or for remote applications, to an ABS-8RB
Annunciator Surface-mount backbox with blank faceplate.
Limits
The ACM-8R is a member of the Honeywell ACS class of
annunciators. Up to 32 annunciators (not including expander
modules) may be installed on an EIA-485 circuit.
Wire Runs
Communication between the control panel and the ACM-8R is
accomplished over a two-wire EIA-485 serial interface. This
communication, to include the wiring, is supervised by the fire
alarm control panel. Power for the annunciators is provided via
a separate power loop from the control panel, which is inherently supervised (loss of power also results in a communication
failure at the control panel).
Relay Mapping
The ACM-8Rs relays can follow the status of initiating and indicating circuits, control relays, and several system control functions.
The ACM-8R can track:
CPU status
Soft zones
Special hazard zones.
Addressable circuits
Power supply NACs.
Selectable points when tracking special annunciator points.

UL Listed: S635
ULC Listed: S7566
MEA Listed: 232-06-E Vol. 2; 317-01-E-4
FM Approved: (XLS140)
CSFM: 7120-0028:156; 7170-1130:235; 7170-1130:255;
7170-1130:256
City of Chicago
City of Denver
FDNY: #6039
5/18/10 11:09:10 PM
Relay Terminal Assignments

The ACM-8R provices eight relays with Form C contacts rated
for 5 A. The terminal assignments are illustrated below.
5 or
} Relay
Trouble Relay 1
6 or
} Relay
Trouble Relay 2
7 or
} Relay
Trouble Relay 3
8 or
} Relay
Trouble Relay 4
{
Relay 3 {
Relay 2 {
Relay 1 {
3558acm8.wmf
5155abs.wmf
Relay 4
The ABS-8RB
NOTE: Circuits can be annunciated as
alarm, or alarm and trouble. Alarm and trouble consumes two annunciator points.
9.94H x 4.63W x 2.50D

252.5mm(H) x 117.6mm(W) x 63.5mm(D)

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3046 Rev. 01-10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:09:10 PM
SCS Series
SCS-8
Smoke Control Station

SCS-8, SCE-8, SCS-8L, SCE-8E
General
The SCS-8 Smoke Control Station and optional SCE-8 Smoke
Control Expander, SCS-8L Smoke Control Lamp Driver, and
SCE-8L Smoke Control Lamp Driver Expander are used with
the Honeywell XLS140 and XLS3000 Fire Alarm Control Panels
(FACPs) and XLS-NCA and XLS-NCA2 Network Control Annunciator displays, to provide the capability to control and display
the status of AHU fans or dampers. Each SCS can control and
monitor eight AHU fans or dampers. The SCS-8L and SCE-8L
must be installed in a UL-Listed Graphic Annunciator backbox.
The SCE is used with the SCS, expanding the capability to control and monitor a total of 16 AHU fans or dampers. Only one
SCE can be used for each SCS and a maximum of 32 pairs can
be used with each Honeywell control panel. With the maximum
configuration of 32 pairs, the system has the capability to control
and monitor 512 separate AHU fans or dampers. The SCS can
be used with theIntelligent Network Annunciator (INA) Release
2.8 (or higher) and with the (without NCA display option) in
HVAC mode only.
The SCS/SCE, when used with the XLS3000 or XLS-NCA(2)
display with XLS140 or XLS3000 FACPs, complies with UL
smoke control requirements (Category UUKL) for dedicated and
non-dedicated systems as well as NFPA 90A, 92A, and 92B
standards for smoke control. The SCS/SCE also complies with
UL 916 Energy Management category PAZX. When used with
the XLS140 (without an XLS-NCA/-NCA2) only HVAC mode
may be used.
Features
The SCS-8/SCE-8 or SCS-8L/SCE-8L is capable of two modes
of operation: Firefighters Smoke Control Station (FSCS) or
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC).
In the FSCS mode, the SCS/SCE has the capability to: help
maintain a tenable environment in evacuation routes; help
restrict the movement of smoke from the fire area; help provide
conditions in non-smoke areas that will assist fire officials conduct search and rescue operations and to find and combat the
fire; and assist in protecting life and property.
In the HVAC mode, the SCS/SCE has the capability to monitor
and control the building heating, ventilating and air conditioning.
The HVAC mode is not consistent with UL and NFPA standards
for smoke control. This mode should be used for fan shutdown
and building heating, ventilating, and air conditioning purposes
only.
Communication to the SCS is accomplished over a two-wire
serial interface employing an EIA-485 communication standard. Power for the SCS is provided via a separate 24 VDC regulated power loop. If power is lost, a trouble signal will result at
the control panel.
Each SCS has two rotary decimal switches for addressing
and eight dipswitches for mode configuration.
Each SCS-8/SCE-8 module has eight independent switch
groups that consist of the following:
Miniature locking toggle switch, three-position ON/AUTO/
OFF.
Four annunciator protocol points (two control and two monitor).
ON/OPEN indicator (Green).
OFF/CLOSED indicator (Yellow).
Trouble LED (Amber).
Each SCS-8/SCE-8 also has two LEDs and one momentary

switch with the following functions:
ALL AUTO LED (Green).
MANUAL LED (Amber).
LOCAL ACKNOWLEDGE/LAMP TEST momentary switch.
Each SCS-8L/SCE-8L module has eight independent switch
groups as well, however, since the SCS-8L/SCE-8L is a lamp
driver version of the SCS-8/SCE-8 each switch group consists of
contacts for connection of a three-position switch and contacts
for connection of three lamps or LEDs. Each SCS-8L module
also has contacts for connection of two LEDs and one momentary switch. The SCS-8L/SCE-8L modules must be installed in a
UL approved Custom Graphic Annunciator panel.
extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and all peripherals be installed in an
environment with a nominal room temperature of 15C to 27C
(60F to 80F).
Fan and Damper Operation

with the SCS/SCE
For a fan or damper to be used in a smoke control system, the
system must not only be able to control the device, but it must
be able to verify what state it is in (ON/OFF or OPEN/CLOSED).
The capability to control a fan or a damper is accomplished
through the use of an intelligent control module. The control
module is used to control the ON/OFF state of a fan or the
OPEN/CLOSED state of a damper. The capability to monitor the
state of a fan or a damper is accomplished through the use of an
intelligent monitor module. The monitor module is used to
monitor the ON/OFF state of a fan or the OPEN/CLOSED state
of a damper. The figure below shows a general layout of the
components necessary to control and monitor a fan.
The intelligent control and monitor modules are controlled by the
FACP. The SCS communicates with the FACP over the EIA-485
data line. Each SCS must be set for a specific address on the
EIA-485 circuit, different from that of other devices on the EIA485 data line. There are 32 valid EIA-485 addresses in the
FACP and each address provides 64 protocol points for the pur-
5/18/10 11:09:11 PM
pose of communication with the FACP. The SCS monitors and

controls the intelligent monitor and control modules through the
FACP by using the 64 points.
RS-SCS Series: UL-Listed Custom Graphic Annunciator panel

available from the Kirkland Company (Arvada, CO, (303) 4226670) for use with the SCS-8L/SCE-8L.
Each switch group on the SCS is responsible for controlling

and monitoring one fan or damper. This is accomplished by
using four EIA-485 protocol points (of the 64 available). For each
of the four protocol points used, an appropriate control or monitor module must be present at the fan or damper.
BGR-SCS Series: UL-Listed Custom Graphic Annunciator

panel available from the Kirkland Company for use with the
SCS-8L/SCE-8L.
Each switch group on an SCS-8/SCE-8 consists of two LEDs

for annunciation of fan or damper status, one LED for annunciation of trouble conditions, and an ON/AUTO/OFF (OPEN/AUTO/
CLOSED) three-position switch for control of a fan or damper
(through the intelligent control and monitor modules). The status
of the control and monitor modules depends on the setting of
the three-position switch. If the switch is in the AUTO position
and there is an alarm condition in the FACP, then the control and
monitor modules will function according to the automatic programming in the control panel.
If the switch is in the ON (OPEN) position, the SCS-8 sends a
signal over the EIA-485 which overrides the automatic programming to ensure the ON/OPEN condition of the fan or damper.
If the switch is in the OFF (CLOSED) position, then the SCS8 sends a signal over the EIA-485 overriding the automatic programming to ensure the OFF/CLOSED position of the fan or
damper.
CE-SCS Series: UL-Listed Custom Graphic Annunciator panel

available from the Kirkland Company for use with the SCS-8L/
SCE-8L.
LDM-R32: Relay driver module for the SCS-8L.
XLS-ABS-4D: Annunciator Surface Box. Mounts four modules. Attractive window with key-lock door, 12.0" (30.48 cm) x
19.938" (50.641 cm) x 3.5" (8.89 cm). Door adds 1.25" (3.175
cm) to depth.
ADP-4B: The Annunciator Dress Panel-4B (black) provides for
the cabinet mounting of one to four modules. The ADP-4B
hinge-mounts to a XLS-CAB-4 Series cabinet. Modules mount
directly to threaded studs on the ADP-4B. NOTE: The SCS-8
does not mount in a DP-DISP.
Controlling and Monitoring a Fan

Fan
Network Control
Annunciator

The listings and approvals below apply to SCS Series components. In some cases, certain modules or applications may not
be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
Listing information to be provided in upcoming edits. Consult
panel manuals for lists of compatible UL-Listed devices.
Control
Module
Monitor
Module
EIA-485
Data LIne

NOTE: See panel data sheets and manuals lists of compatible
devices for appropriate intelligent control and monitor modules.
SLC Loop
4818dia1.wmf
SCS-8: Smoke Control Master Module. Eight switches expandable to 16 with SCE-8.
SCE-8: Smoke Control Expander Module expands the SCS-8
switches to 16.
SCS-8L: Smoke Control Lamp Driver Master Module. Eight
switches expandable to 16 with SCE-8.
Fire Alarm Control Panel and/or

Network Control Annunciator
SCE-8L: Smoke Control Lamp Driver Expander Module

expands the SCS-8 switches to 16.
SCS8L-CBL24: 24" (60.96 cm) long cable used to connect
SCS-8L/SCE-8L outputs to lamps or LEDs.
SCS-8
NOTE: For full FSCS support with XLS140 panel, the SCS must
connect to the NCA EIA-485 port.
SCS8L-CBL48: 48" (121.92 cm) long cable used to connect

SCS-8L/SCE-8L outputs to lamps or LEDs.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3048-1 Rev. 08-09

Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:09:11 PM
UDACT
4867udac.wmf
Universal Digital Alarm

Communicator Transmitter
General
The Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter
(UDACT) is designed for use on the Honeywell XLS3000 and
XLS140, Fire Alarm Control Panels. In addition, it is also
designed for use on the Network Control Annunciator (XLSNCA or XLS-NCA2). When used in conjunction with the , XLSNCA, and XLS-NCA-2 the UDACT can report the status of all
control panels on XLSNET. The UDACT transmits system
status to UL listed Central Station Receivers via the public
switched telephone network.
The UDACT is compact in size and may be mounted externally
in a separate cabinet. EIA-485 annunciator communications
bus and regulated 24-volt connections are required.
The UDACT is capable of transmitting the status of software
zones (Alarm and Trouble), System Trouble, Panel Off-Normal,
Supervisory, Bell Trouble, Low Battery, and AC Fail. The
UDACT is capable of transmitting all of the zone and point status associated with each panel.
When the UDACT is used with the XLS-3000, XLS-NCA, and
XLS-NCA-2 it is capable of reporting up to 2,040 points.
Reporting may be in the form of points or zones (refer to the
UDACT manual for specific reporting parameters). The first
568 points transmitted may be programmed for a variety of
types, including fire, waterflow, supervisory, etc. Remaining
points transmitted are for fire alarm only.
UDACT
NOTE: Descriptions regarding point capacity, listed above, are for

receivers which receive in Ademco Contact ID format. See chart
on page 2 for compatible receivers.
Troubleshoot Mode converts keypad to DTMF touchpad.

Individual LEDs for: Power, EIA-485 Loss, Manual Test,
Kissoff, Comm Fail, Primary Line Seize, Secondary Line
Seize and Modem Communications.
Open Collector relay driver for Total Communications Failure or UDACT trouble.
Real-time clock.
Extensive transient protection.
Simple EIA-485 interface to host panel.
Features
Maximum of 14 point trouble messages transmitted per

hour.
Dual phone lines.
Dual telephone line voltage detect.
Surface Mount Technology.
Compact in size: 6.75" x 4.25" (17.145 x 10.795 cm).
Built-in programmer.
Built-in 4-character red 7-segment LED display.
Manual Test Report function.
Manual Transmission Clear function.
Mounts in a separate enclosure (ABS-8RB or UBS-1).
Communicates vital system status including:
Independent zone fire alarm.
Independent zone non-fire alarm.
Independent zone trouble.
Independent zone supervisory.
AC (mains) Power Loss (programmable).
Low Battery and Earth Fault.
System Off-Normal.
12 or 24 hour test signal.
Abnormal Test Signal per new UL requirements.
EIA-485 Communication Bus Failure.
Annunciation of UDACT Troubles including: loss of phone
lines, communication failure with either Central Station, total
communications failure.

UL Listed: S635
ULC Listed: CS100 Vol. VII
MEA: 317-01-E Vol. IV; 232-06-E Vol. II
CSFM: 7165-1130:234; 7170-1130:235; 7170-1130:255;
7165-1130:256
INDUSTRY CANADA
FCC
FM Approved (XLS140; with Ademco 685 only)
City of Denver
City of Chicago
Installation
The UDACT mounts is a CAB-4 Series backbox on the CHS-4,
CHS-4L, CHS-MZ, or CHS-M3 chassis and occupies one
module position. The UDACT can also be mounted remotely
(up to 6,000 ft./1828.8 m) in an ABS-8RB or UBS-1 backbox.
Communication Formats
3+1 Standard
4+1 Standard
4+2 Standard
4+1 and 4+2 Ademco Express
Ademco Contact ID
NOTE: Ademco Contact ID must be used for independent zone
reporting.
5/18/10 11:09:11 PM
Required Software
ROM1-UDACT: EPROM upgrade kit.
XLS-140 = ALL VERSIONS COMPATIBLE

XLS-3000 = ALL VERSIONS COMPATIBLE
XLS-NCA = ALL
XLS-NCA-2 = ALL
ABS-8RB
for remote mounting
* NOTE: Presently the UDACT is not capable of AC Fail delay (per

NFPA standards) when used with the AA series Amplifier, or APS6R Power Supply
[9.94(25.2476cm)H x
4.63(11.7602cm)W x
2.5(6.35cm)D]
Type Mode Feature

Ademco Contact ID format only) Use Type Mode to identify
reports to Central Station as:
Fire Alarm
Supervisory
Pull Station
Heat Detector
Waterflow
Duct Detector
Flame Sensor
Smoke Zone
Burglary
24 hour Non-Burglary
High Temperature
Low Temperature
Low Water Pressure
Low Water Level
Pump Failure
b
5a
55
51
mf
s.w
4867hubs.w
Electrical Specifications
Standby current: 40 mA.

Current while communicating: 75 mA.
Maximum current while communicating and with open collector output activated: 100 mA.
Voltage: Regulated 24 volts. Range: 21.2 to 28.2 volts.
UDACT: Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter.
Includes operating and programming instructions, and mounting hardware.
MCBL-7: DACT phone cord, 7 ft (2.13 m) long (two required).
ABS-8RB: Metal enclosure for externally mounting UDACT
up to 6,000 ft./1828.8 m from host FACP. 9.94" H x 4.63" W x
2.50" D (cm: 25.248 H x 11.760 W x 6.350 D).
UBS-1: Metal enclosure. Includes viewing window and
optional relay mounting capability.
R-10E: SPDT Form-C relay. Contacts rated for 10 A @ 115
VAC. Connects to open collector relay driver.
R-20E: DPDT Two Form-C relays. Contacts rated for 10A @
115 VAC. Connects to open collector relay driver.
FBD-1: Ferrite bead kit. Use for remote mounting only.
Page 2 of 3 HON-60046:A 85-3049 11/14/06
UDACT
shown in UBS-1
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:09:12 PM
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Sur-Gard
MLR-2 (9)
Sescoa 3000R
(7)
Radionics
6000/6500 (5)
Osborne Hoffman
Models 1&2
FBI CP220FB
ITI CS-4000 (3)
Silent Knight
9000
Ademco
685 (1)
Format #
(Addresses 16 & 42)
4+1 Ademco Express

X
X
X
4+2 Ademco Express
X
X
X(8)
X
3+1/Standard/1800/2300
X X(2)
X
X(4)
X X(5,6) X
X
(NOT USED)
3+1/Standard/1900/1400
X
X(2)
X(4)
X
X
X
(NOT USED)
4+1/Standard/1800/2300
X
X(2)
X
X(4)
X
X(5)
X
X
(NOT USED)
4+1/Standard/1900/1400
X
X(2)
X(4)
X
X
X
(NOT USED)
4+2/Standard/1800/2300
X
X(2)
X
X(4)
X
X(5)
X
X
(NOT USED)
4+2/Standard/1900/1400
X
X(2)
X(4)
X
X
X
(NOT USED)
Ademco Contact ID
X
X
X
X
(NOT USED)
With 685-8 Line Card with Rev. 4.4d software.
With 9002 Line Card Rev. 9035 software, or 9032 Line Card with 9326A software.
Rev. 4.0 software.
FBI CP220FB Rec-11 Line Card with Rev. 2.6 software and a memory card with
Rev. 3.8 software.
Model 6500 with Rev. 600 software.
Model 6000 with Rev. 204 software.
With Rev. B control card at Rev. 1.4 software and Rev. C line card at Rev. 1.5 software.
Model 2 only.
Version 1.62 software.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60046:A
85-3049 Rev. 11/06
November 2006
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 3 of 3
5/18/10 11:09:12 PM
Notes
5/18/10 11:09:13 PM
LDM
Lamp Driver Modules
General
0551LDM.wmf
The LDM Series lamp driver modules, when combined with a

custom graphic display, provide annunciation and control for
Honeywells intelligent fire alarm control panels. These modules use a serial communications interface, and may be
located up to 6,000 feet from the panel.
Features
ALARM/CIRCUIT ON and TROUBLE lamp/LED per-point
option, or more dense alarm-only option (field selectable).
Control switch option for remote control per point.
Lamps/LEDs may be programmed to display status of indicating circuits or control relays as well as system status
conditions.
System trouble lamp/LED signal.
On-line/power LED indicator.
Alarm and trouble resound with flash of new conditions.
Local sounder for both alarm/circuit-on and trouble conditions with silence/acknowledge switch connection.
Serial EIA-485 interface for reduced installation costs.
May be powered by 24 VDC from the panel or by remote
power supplies.
Efficient switch-power converter reduces power consumption.
Microprocessor-controlled electronics, fully supervised.
Plug-in terminal blocks for ease of installation and service.
Trouble monitor option for remote power supplies.
Construction
Two basic models are available; the LDM-32 control module
and the LDM-E32 expander module. Each may be selected to
provide 32 alarm indications; or 16 alarm, 16 trouble, and 16
control points.
Applications
The LDM-32/LDM-E32 with a custom graphic array may be
used to indicate point status and, in some versions, to control
the state of output points.
In addition, the LDM-R32 module may be used to provide 32
dry-contact relays for electrical isolation when connecting the
system to other equipment.
Installation
The LDM-32 and LDM-E32 modules mount on four standoffs
inside the custom annunciator graphic box. Alternately, the
modules may be installed in a CHS-4L chassis. The module
size is approximately 4.4 (11.2cm) x 7.1 (18cm).
Communications between the LDM Series annunciators and
the host FIre Alarm Control Panel are made through a
two-wire EIA-485 multi-drop loop, and a two-wire regulated 24
VDC power loop. Up to 32 LDM systems may be connected to
a single control panel.
All field-wiring terminations use removable, compression-type
terminal blocks for ease of installation, wiring, and circuit testing.
LDM-32
Operation
LDM Series modules, when used with a custom graphic
annunciator, provide the Honeywells intelligent fire alarm control panels with up to 32 unique or redundant annunciators,
each with a capacity of 64 points for a total capacity of 2048
points.
Local or remote power supplies and serial communications
allow the custom annunciators to be located anywhere on the
protected premises.
Control of system operational controls, such as Signal Silence,
System Reset, and local annunciation controls (such as Local
Acknowledge), and Lamp Test may be accomplished through
special key- or push-switches.

UL Listed: S632
ULC Listed: CS100
317-01-E4 (XLS-140); 232-06-E Vol. 2 (XLS3000)CSFM:
7165-1130:256 (XLS3000); 7170-1130:235 (XLS140);
7170-1130:255 (XLS3000); 7165-1130:234 (XLS-140)
FM Approved (XLS-140)
City of Chicago approved: Class 1, Class 2

LDM-32: Lamp Driver Module with 32 alarm lamp-driver transistors (sink to power common on alarm). May be selected
(dip switch) for 16 alarm/circuit on, 16 trouble, and 16 switch
inputs if desired. Also includes system-trouble lamp driver and
lamp-test/local-acknowledge switch input. Integral piezo
sounder sounds for each new alarm or trouble and is silenced
with the Local Acknowledge switch, or permanently disabled
with a dip switch selection. Flash of new alarms or troubles is
selectable through dip switches. 16 switch inputs may be used
1/1/70 10:11:20 AM
for panel SILENCE, RESET, or remote relay control. Instructions are included.
Use for electrical isolation when interfacing the system to other

equipment.
LDM-E32: Lamp Driver Module with 32 alarm drivers; or 16

alarm, 16 trouble, and 16 switch inputs. One LDM-E32 is
allowed per LDM-32 in alarm-only mode. Three LDM-E32
modules are allowed per LDM-32 in alarm/trouble. Includes
ribbon cable to connect to ACM.
LDM-CBL24, LDM-CBL48: Ribbon cable sets to provide

either a 24 (60.96cm) or 48 (121.96cm) connection between
LDM-32/LDM-E32 and LEDs or lamps on a custom graphic
panel. Includes all cables necessary for one LDM-32 or
LDM-E32. Cables have connector on one end only (split, strip,
and connect other end to graphic annunciator).
LDM-R32: Lamp Driver Module which connects to any LDM32 or LDM-E32 to convert transistor outputs to 32 Form-A dry
contacts (1.0 A @ 30 VDC). Provides 32 output terminal
screw connections and a single common terminal screw.
Includes ribbon cables to connected to the LDM-32/LDM-E32.
Architectural/Engineering Specifications
For specifications on LDM Graphic Annunciator Lamp Driver
Modules, contact Honeywell.
0551ELDM.wmf
0551RLDM.wmf
0551cbl.wmf
LDM-CLS24,
LDC-CBL48
LDM-E32
LDM-R32

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3042:1
85-3042-1 Rev. 08/09
April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
1/1/70 10:11:21 AM
TM-4
Transmitter Module
General
The TM-4 Transmitter Module provides Honeywells XLS3000
and XLS140 Fire Alarm Control Panels, and XLS-NCA2 and
XLS-NCA Network Control Annunciators with three reversepolarity outputs (alarm, trouble, and supervisory) and one fire
municipal box trip on a single PC board. The TM-4 is designed
to meet NFPA 72 requirements for Auxiliary Protective Signaling
Systems and Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems.
Features
On each TM-4 module in a system, use either the three
reverse-polarity outputs (alarm, trouble, and supervisory) or
the fire municipal box trip.
Maximum load for each reverse-polarity output circuit is 15
mA, 24 VDC nominal. All circuits are power cross-rated and
power-limited per UL 1950 requirements.
Mounts on CHS Series chassis and in panel module locations.
Diagnostic LEDs: green for Power, ACS Data Reception and
ACS Data Transmission; yellow for Trouble.
Isolated 24 V for reverse-polarity outputs.
Disconnect mechanism provides a means for inhibiting alarm
status changes, which cause trouble indication for unit at the
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). Operation of the disconnect mechanism will also create a trouble condition on the
reverse-polarity output circuits.
Option jumper combines alarm and trouble conditions onto
one circuit.
Specifications
PHYSICAL
Approximately 4.375" (11.11 cm) wide by 6.875" (17.30 cm)
high. Mounts onto any panel module location.
1.1F) per ULC. However, the useful life of the systems
adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and
humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and all
peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room
temperature of 15C to 27C (60F to 80F).
ELECTRICAL
Input voltage range: 18.0 to 31.0 VDC, 24 V nominal.
Power requirements: 165 mA.
Maximum current per output: 15 mA; three isolated
reverse-polarity outputs.
Supply voltage: Sufficient capacitance provided to maintain
a minimum supply voltage for 20 ms during battery transfer
on a panel supply.
Current consumption: 175 mA maximum @ 24 VDC.
One isolated 24 VDC supply, capable of driving a 45 mA
load [three reverse-polarity circuits (15 mA each) OR one
Municipal Box Trip Circuit (350 mA and support circuitry)].
FIRE MUNICIPAL BOX TRIP

Supervisory current: 250 A.
6860pho1.jpg
TM-4 Transmitter Module

Trip current: 0.35 A.
Coil voltage: 3.65 VDC.
Wire resistance: 3.0 ohms maximum.
MOUNTING
The TM-4 is designed to mount in CHS-M2, CHS-M3, CPU2640 chassis, CHS-4N, or CHS-4L chassis; or onto a BMP-1
blank plate for dress-panel mounting. Refer to the TM-4 Product
Installation Document, number 51490, for further information
and diagrams.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
Refer to the TM-4 Product Installation Document, number
51490, for diagrams and wiring informationOperation
Highlights
DIAGNOSTIC LEDS
POWER (green) illuminates when 5 V is present on the TM-4
board.
TROUBLE (yellow) illuminates when ACS Trouble occurs; or if
the Disable All Outputs switch (SW4) is on.
RX ACS (green) blinks when Annunciator Control System
(ACS) data is received.
TX ACS (green) blinks when ACS data is transmitted.
SWITCHES
SW1, EOL Resistor switch must be set to ON when the
TM-4 is the last device on the ACS circuit.
SW2 & SW3, ACS Address switches tens and ones positions.
SW4, Disable All Outputs switch disables all outputs
except Remote Station Trouble when turned ON (a Trouble
message will display at FACP when on), for ease of maintenance.
SW5, four DIP switches with the following functions: SW5.1,
SW5.2 not used. SW5.3 when set to ON, if the Signal
Silence button at the panel is pushed after an alarm has been
initiated, the Remote Station or Municipal Box output will
deactivate. A subsequent alarm will reactivate the output.
SW5.4 when set to ON, Alarm and Trouble signals are
combined onto one output (Remote Station Alarm).
1/1/70 10:11:22 AM
SW6, Isolator switch isolates or non-isolates the Municipal

Box output.
ANNUNCIATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

EIA-485 INTERFACE
The TM-4 communicates with the control panel over a powerlimited, one-channel, multi-drop EIA-485 serial interface using a
special poll-response protocol.
OPTION TO COMBINE ALARM AND TROUBLE

A jumper allows the user to combine Alarm and Trouble conditions on reverse-polarity output #1.
DISCONNECT CAPABILITY
A selection switch allows the user to disconnect the TM-4 outputs inhibiting the transmission of signals to the remote monitoring station except for trouble conditions.

These listings and approvals apply to the TM-4. In some cases,
certain modules or applications may not be listed by certain
approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory
for latest listing status.
ULC Listed: file CS118 (TM-4).
MEA approved: files 317-01-E2 (XLS140), 232-06-E2
(XLS3000).
CSFM approved: files 7165-1130:234 (XLS140), 71701130:235 (XLS140), 7165-1130:256 (XLS3000), 71701130:255 (XLS3000).
FM approved (XLS140 only).
City of Chicago approved.
City of Denver approved.

TM-4: Transmitter Module for XLS3000, XLS140, XLS-NCA(2).
6860tm4b.wmf

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-6860:A
85-3005-1 Rev. 3-10
March 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
1/1/70 10:11:22 AM
0704uzc.wmf
UZC-256
Universal Zone Code
Software Release 2.0
General
The UZC-256 Universal Zone Coder enables the Honeywell
intelligent fire alam control panels (FACPs), network control
annunciators (NCAs) and compatible legacy systems to provide positive non-interfering successive zone coded outputs.
Up to 256 separate codes may be programmed to operate on
the three coded outputs. Each output is used to code or pulse
up to 3 Amps of Notification Appliance power.
Features
Coded output from the UZC-256 can be fed to multiple output circuits.
Up to 256 individually programmed codes.
Three 3-Amp outputs.
Programmable rounds of code (1 to 99 rounds).
Up to four digits per round.
Up to 15 pulses per digit of code.
Optional general alarm.
Programmable code and round(s) delay.
Programmable pulse and digit pause times.
Connects and communicates over panel EIA-485 interface.
Programmable for California code.
Weight 1.75 lbs.
Release 2.0 Features

Secondary UZC use: counting alarm operation activates
UZC relays after specified number of alarms.
Programmable address EIA-485 range (1-32).
No code/counting selection for non-fire points.
Applications
The UZC-256 provides three outputs that supply unique coded
information to certain output circuits, depending on the alarm
initiation condition. This can be useful when employing coded
outputs in floor-above, floor-below applications, or to provide
various numbers of rounds for bell circuits and strobe or lamp
circuits.
NOTE: Due to the nature of coded outputs, the UZC-256 is not
compatible with notification devices which do not produce a steady
or non-periodic sound. Periodic appliances that produce their own
code (such as some codes available with electronic sounders) will
not be compatible with the UZC-256. Refer to the UZC-256 Installation Manual for a list of compatible panels.
UZC-256 Universal Zone Coder
Standby current: 35 mA.
Alarm current: 55 mA.
Installation
Locate the system, including components and peripheral
equipment in the following nominal environment:
Temperature: 60 to 80F (15.6 to 26.7C).
Relative humidity: 40% to 60% (non-condensing).

UL Listed: S624
ULC Listed: CS118/CS733/CBP696
MEA: 317-01-E4 (XLS140); 232-06-E Vol. II (XLS3000)
CSFM: 7165-1130:234 (XLS140); 7165-1130:256
(XLS3000); 7165-1130:265 (XLS140-2)
FDNY: COA #6030, 6031
FM Approved (XLS140)
Construction & Operation

The UZC-256 provides three coded output relays, each rated
for three amps at 30 VDC. These relays are controlled by a
predefined program, and can be set to respond to general
alarm conditions with the fire alarm system.
The UZC-256 and the CPU use the EIA-485 circuit for communication. When installed, the zone coder has a programmable
address on the EIA-485 interface.
1/1/70 10:11:23 AM
UZC-256 Programming
Programming the UZC-256 is accomplished through the serial port of an Microsoft Windows-compatible PC. The Software
Interface (UZC-SI) enables the user to select from a variety of code options (see software coding). The UZC requires power from
the control panel to download the programmed code. Alternately, it may be powered remotely with a 9 VDC power transformer
which is included with the UZC Hardware Interface (UZC-HI).
0704uzc.wmf
3404pc.wmf
Microsoft Windows Compatible PC
UZC-256
UZC Software Coding
Each code (up to 256) may be up to four digits long and each
digit can be from 0 to 15 pulses. User-selectable times and
delays may also be programmed.
UZC-256: Universal Zone Coder, power cable and mounting

hardware.
Delay Time: The period from when the alarm is received at

the control panel and the code begins. Value can be 0 to 99
seconds.
UZC-SI: UZC-256 Software Interface Version 2.0 (must be

used with UZC-256 EPROM 73712 or greater). Provides the
capability to program the UZC. Includes programming instructions and programming software. Available for download only.
Number of Rounds: The number of times the code will

sound. Value can be 1 to 99.
UZC-HI: UZC-256 Hardware Interface. Includes null modem

cable, 9-pin to 25-pin adapter, and a 9 VDC power transformer.
Pulse Time: The period each pulse will sound. Value can be
0 to 1 second in 1/100th of a second increments.
BB-UZC: Backbox for housing the UZC for applications where

the UZC will not fit in the panel enclosure. Black casing.
Digit Pause: The pause between digits of the code. Value

can be 0 to 10 seconds in 1/10th of a second increments.
BB-UZC-R: same as BB-UZC, but with a red casing.
Pulse Pause: The pause between pulses of the digit. Value

can be 0 to 1 second in 1/100th of a second increments.
Round Pause: The pause between the round(s) of the code.
Value can be 0 to 10 seconds in 1/10th of a second increments.
General Alarm: Provides the UZC with the capability to turn
on selected Indicating Circuits (general alarm) after completing its code. See the appropriate installation manual for information on the General Alarm feature.
Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3045-1 Rev. 11/09
October 2009
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
1/1/70 10:11:24 AM
ACPS-610
Addressable Charger/Power Supply
The ACPS-610(E) is an auxiliary power supply with a battery

charging option and a host of special features. Selectable
charging options allow the ACPS-610(E) to provide 6 amps of
shared power to four outputs while charging batteries from 12 to
200 AH, or 10 amps of shared power when the unit is configured
for use with an external battery charger.
Four individually
addressable outputs can be independently configured for auxiliary power or Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC). NAC outputs support notification appliance synchronization for devices
manufactured by System Sensor, Wheelock, and Gentex. An
option to disable battery charging allows the system designer to
use the four built-in circuits to distribute 10 amps of power for
general purposes, excluding NAC applications.
60244cov.jpg
General
The ACPS-610(E) is compatible with Honeywell intelligent fire

alarm control panels using CLIP and FlashScan protocol.
Features
Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th Edition.
Provides 6.0 A of NAC power or 10 A of general purpose
power.
Four Class B (Style Y) or four Class A (Style Z) outputs, individually addressable by the FACP.
When built-in outputs are configured for NAC operation, each
circuit supports strobe synchronization with the following
manufacturers' audio/visual devices: System Sensor (SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert Advance Series) or Wheelock or
Gentex.
Each circuit can be software-selected for use as: a Notification Appliance Circuit, general purpose 24 VDC power, fourwire detector power, or door holder.
Steady, March Time (120 PPM), Two Stage, Temporal, or
UZC Zone-Coded and Non-Coded devices - software-selectable by circuit.
Universal Zone Coder (UZC-256) option supports for programmable coded outputs. Up to 256 different codes.
Auxiliary Outputs: 24V @ 0.5A and 5V @ 0.15A
Charges 12 to 200 AH batteries with full supervision. The
charger on the ACPS may be disabled via software. When
disabled, a separate, external charger is required , for example a CHG-120.
May be used to provide battery backup for multiple ACPS
supplies.
AC loss detection, brownout detection, and AC loss delay
reporting.
Power-limited outputs.
Isolated Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) interface.
Selectable ground fault detection.
Canadian two stage operation.
Specifications
Primary (AC) power:
ACPS-610: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz input, 5.0 A maximum
ACPS-610E: 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz input, 2.5 A maximum
Output voltage: 24 VDC electrically regulated and power limited (under primary AC mains). Under secondary power, 20.4
to 26.4 VDC.
Output circuits - TB3, TB4, TB5, TB6 on Main Board: 1.5 A
maximum for any NAC output circuit. 2.5 A maximum for any
Power output with battery charger disabled.
Secondary power (battery) charging circuit - lead-acid battery
charger which will charge 12 to 200 AH batteries. Maximum
charger current - 5.0 A.
Secondary power auxiliary outputs - TB2 on CPS-24 Board:
24V @ 0.5A, power limited
5V @ 0.15A, power limited
Wiring: utilizes wire sizes 12 to 18 AWG (3.1 to 0.78 mm).
SLC specifications: Average SLC current is 1.287 mA. SLC
data is transmitted between 24.0 VDC, 5 VDC, and 0 VDC at
approximately 3.33 Kbaud.
Battery fuse (F2): 15A, Fast-acting
Weight: 4.5 lb
ACPS Programming
The ACPS-610(E) is programmable via the simple-to-use
PK-PPS programming utility, which requires a Windows PC
with a USB port and cable. A copy of the PK-PPS programming
utility is included with each ACPS-610(E). Programming may be
performed during an on-line session with the ACPS-610(E), or
previously saved programs may be downloaded to individual
ACPS-610(E) units. The ACPS-610(E) requires the use of a
minimum of 5 SLC address points, and will use up to 14 SLC
address points to fulfill requirements for Canadian supervision
and two stage operation.
1/1/70 10:11:24 AM

60244scrn1.jpg
UL Listed: S635
ULC Listed: S635
FM Approved
CSFM: 7315-0028:248
MEA #30-08-E

Example of Programming
for the ACPS-610 Using 6 Addresses
ACPS-610: Addressable charger power supply, with selectable

built-in synchronization, and four built-in control modules.
Includes installation instructions and PK-PPS programming utility CD. Requires Windows PC with USB port and USB cable.
Several mounting options available (see below).
ACPS-610E: Same as ACPS-610, but configured for 220/240
VAC operation.
CAB-PS1: The CAB-PS1 can house one ACPS-610(E) and
two 12 AH batteries. Dimensions: 15.218" (38.654 cm) high x
14.5" (36.83 cm) wide x 3.562" (9.048 cm) deep with door.
DR-PS1: When installing an ACPS-610(E) into an older version
of the CAB-PS1 used for an ACPS-2406(E), the new wider door
must be ordered for use with the older version cabinet.
BB-25: The BB-25 can house one ACPS-610(E) and two 12
volt, 26 AH batteries.
60244scrn2.jpg
CAB-4 Series: The ACPS-610(E) can mount in any of the

CAB-4 Series cabinets. This can be in the bottom of the cabinet
or a tier via a CHS-PS and CHS-BH. See CAB-4 Series data
sheet (85-3002).
Example for ACPS-610

Using Canadian Reporting with Two Stage.
EQ Cabinet Series: The ACPS-610(E) can mount in any of the

EQ Cabinet Series cabinets. See EQ Cabinet Series data sheet
(85-3110).
CHS-PS/CHS-6: Power supply mounting plate. Optional kit
used to mount the ACPS-610(E) in a location other than the bottom of the CAB-4 cabinet or in an EQ Series cabinet (e.g., 2nd,
3rd, or 4th tier).
CHS-BH: Battery mounting chassis used to mount batteries in
a location other than the bottom of the CAB-4 cabinet (e.g., 2nd,
3rd, or 4th tier).
Batteries: ACPS-610(E) battery charging circuit range is 12 200 AH. See BAT Series data sheet (85-3072).
FlashScan, System Sensor, and SpectrAlert are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3109-1 Rev. 04-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
1/1/70 10:11:25 AM
APS2-6R
6.0 Amp Auxiliary Power Supply
General
NOTE: The APS2-6R can also be used with Legacy panels.

Please refer to the APS2-6R manual for more information.
Features
UL 864 Ninth Edition compliant

Lightweight, compact design
120 or 220/240 VAC (@ 50/60 Hz) versions
Output circuits with overload protection
Built-in brown-out circuitry
Diagnostic trouble LED
Plug-in connector for in-cabinet applications and screw terminals for remote device applications
Trouble supervision bus
Shares battery and charger circuit with control panel
Power-limited design, per UL requirements
AC Fail supervision and reporting with field-selectable delay
per UL 864
Heavy-duty clamp-type terminals accept up to 12 AWG
(3.1 mm) wire
Battery voltage supervision
Low battery disconnect
Mounts in a standard XLS-CAB-4 Series cabinet.
Construction and Operation

When used with the XLS-CAB-4 Series (CAB-A4, -B4, -C4, or
-D4), the APS2-6R mounts to a CHS-4 or CHS-4L mounting
chassis. If more than one APS2-6R is necessary to satisfy
Audible/Visual (DC) power requirements, connect additional
APS2-6R power supplies together as described in the Installation Instruction Manual #53232.
Specifications
aps2-yr.jpg
The APS2-6R is a state-of-the-art, 150 watt, switching auxiliary power supply providing 24 VDC of filtered DC power. The
APS2-6R provides three 24 VDC output circuits, rated for 6.0
Amps in alarm and 4.0 Amps continuous. It is used for the
operation of peripheral devices for the Honeywell control panels.
NOTE: J3 and J4 can be interchanged.
Loss of AC indication: Immediate indication (default); 1-2

hour delay (cut JP2); 2-3 hour delay (cut JP2 and JP3).
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The APS2-6R measures approximately 8.625" (21.91 cm) x
6.625" (16.83 cm) x 2.375 (6.03 cm) and weighs approximately 2 lbs (0.91kg).
Cabinet for Mounting

XLS-CAB-4 Series: Use CHS-4 and CHS-4L chassis, for
XLS3000, XLS140-2, and XLS140 control panels.

APS2-6R: 24-volt, filtered power supply (120 VAC input).
APS2-6RE: 24-volt, filtered power supply (220-240 VAC input)
EOLR-1: 12/24 VDC end-of-line relay.
CHS-4: Four-module chassis.
CHS-4L: Four-module chassis (low-profile).
R-47K: End of Line Resistor Assembly
Installation Standards and Codes

This power supply complies with the standards set forth by the
following regulatory agencies:
NFPA Standards
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
Underwriters Laboratories:
UL 864 Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire
Alarm Systems
In addition, the installer should be familiar with the following
standards:
AC primary input power (TB1): APS2-6R: 120 VAC, 50/60

Hz, 2.9 A., APS2-6RE : 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.5 A.
NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods

Applicable Local and State Building Codes
Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction
DC secondary input power (TB3): TB3-1 (+), TB3-2 ().
24 VDC output power (TB2): Total 6.0 A (4.0 A continuous).

Circuit 1 (TB2-1, TB2-2): 3.0 A @ 24 VDC power-limited. Circuit 2 (TB2-3, TB2-4): 3.0 A @ 24 VDC power-limited.
The listings and approvals below apply to the basic APS2-6R.

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
24 VDC output power (J9): 6.0 A (4.0 A continuous), NonPower Limted.

Relay Contacts (TB4): AC Fail supervision over the SLC.
Fuse: (F2 battery supervision): 32 VAC, 10.0 A, Fast-Acting
Automotive Minifuse.
UL-Listed: S635
FM approved
CSFM: 7315-0028:248
FDNY: COA#6028
Trouble supervision bus: J3 output: Form-A contact (open

collector). J4 input: Form-A contact (open collector).
1/1/70 10:11:25 AM

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-5072-2 Rev. 10-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
1/1/70 10:11:26 AM
AMPS-24/E
Power Supply
for the XLS3000 and XLS-NCA2
General
The AMPS-24/E is an addressable power supply and battery
charger which serves as the primary supply for the XLS3000
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) or the XLS-NCA2 Network
Control Annunciator.
Features
Connects directly to the XLS3000 CPU via the RS-485 connection.
Selectable charging current charges 7 AH to 200 AH batteries.
Isolated Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) interface.
Trouble bus input for use with normally-open dry contacts or
open-collector circuit.
USB Type B connector for programming installation parameters.
Brownout detection.
Battery/battery charger supervision.
Secondary Power Auxiliary Outputs: 24V @ 0.5A and 5V @
0.15A.
AC loss detection and AC loss delay reporting.
Mounts in a CAB-4 Series enclosure, EQ Cabinet Series
enclosure, BB-25, BB-100, or BB-200 Battery Backbox.
Specifications
Primary (AC) power:

AMPS24: 110-120 VAC 50/60 Hz input, 5 A maximum;
AMPS24E: 220-240 VAC 50/60 Hz input, 2.5 A maximum.
MAIN 24V Output - filtered power-limited power. Refer to
table for configuration/current information.
These listings and approvals apply to the AMPS-24/E power

supply. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by
*Total AUX 24V (TB3 on Main
Charger Setting/
Battery Size
Main 24V (TB 1 on

Main Control Unit)
Max. Current
Control Unit with TB2 on CPS24) Max. Current
1A/7-26AH Batteries
5A
3A
2A/12-60AH Batteries
5A
3A
5A/55-200AH
Configuration 1
Configuration 2
5A
3A
0A
1A
5A
5A
Disabled
* Maximum current for all AUX 24 volt outputs. Note that TB2 on CPS-24 is
limited to 0.5A.
AUX 24V - provides filtered power-limited power for additional components. Refer to table above for configuration/
current information.
Secondary power (battery) charging circuit: Current-limited,
sealed lead-acid battery charger which will charge 7 to 200
AH batteries.
Selectable charging current: 1.0 A, 2.0 A or 5.0 A.
Secondary power auxiliary outputs.
Wire sizes: 10 AWG (5.26 mm) to 22 AWG (0.326 mm).
Battery fuse (F2): 15 A, fast-acting.
Shipping Weight: 4.25 lb
UL: S470
ULC: CS118
City of Chicago
City of Denver
MEA: 345-02-E
CSFM: 7165-1130:256
FM: Approved
FDNY: #6037

AMPS-24: Addressable power supply/battery charger
AMPS-24E: Same as AMPS-24: 220-240VAC operation
1/1/70 10:11:26 AM
FlashScan is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3057-2 Rev. 10-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
1/1/70 10:11:26 AM
BAT Series Batteries

Sealed Lead-Acid or Gell Cell
General
BAT Series Batteries feature a new part-numbering/listing system providing an improved method of delivery for Honeywellapproved sealed lead-acid batteries for all your fire alarm system needs. Multiple brands of batteries are now offered under
generic part numbers, reducing backorder situations and permitting us to deliver these products in a more timely fashion. Honeywell has approved the multiple brands listed below as
possible product shipped for a given part number. Please note
that any incoming orders for PS Series batteries will be converted to the equivalent BAT Series part numbers.
6933cov.jpg
Features
The listings and approvals below apply to BAT Series Batteries.

Provide secondary power for control panels.

Sealed and maintenance-free.
Overcharge protected.
Easy handling with leakproof construction.
Ruggedly constructed, high-impact case (ABS, polystyrene,
or polypropylene, depending on models).
Long service life.
Compact design.
UL Recognized Components: files MH19884 (B & B Battery), MH20727 (UPG, previously Jolt), MH20845 (PowerSonic).
Part Number Reference

CURRENT
Part
Number
BATTERY
DESCRIPTION
ALTERNATES APPROVED:
manufacturers and P/Ns
shipped under BAT P/Ns
BAT-1250
12 V, 5 AH, sealed.
BP5-12 (B&B Battery); PS-1250 (Power-Sonic);

SA1250 (Jolt) to be replaced with UB1250 (UPG).
BAT-1250
12 V, 5 AH, sealed.

BAT-1270
12 V, 7 AH, sealed.

BAT-12120
12 V, 12 AH, sealed.

BAT-12180
PS-12180 (Power-Sonic); SA12180 (Jolt) to be replaced

with UB12180 (UPG).
BAT-12180
PS-12180 (Power-Sonic); SA12180 (Jolt) to be replaced

with UB12180 (UPG).
BAT-12260

BAT-12550
PS-12550 (Power-Sonic); XSA12550 (Jolt) to be

replaced with UB12550 (UPG).
BAT-12550
PS-12550 (Power-Sonic); XSA12550 (Jolt) to be

BAT-121000
12 V, 100 AH, gell cell.
PS-121000 (Power-Sonic); XSA121000A (Jolt) to be

1/1/70 10:11:26 AM
POWER-SONIC
1109t1.tbl
Part Number Reference

DIMENSIONS
MODEL
Nominal Discharge
Nominal Capacity
Current
Voltage V @ 20 hr.
@20 hr.
rate A.H.
rate mA
Width
in.
mm
Depth
in.
mm
PS-1250 12
250
3.54
90
2.76
70
Height
in.
4.02
mm
102
Height over
terminal
in.
4.21
mm
107
Weight
lb.
4.1
kg.
1.9
PS-1270 12
325
5.94
151
2.56
65
3.7
94
3.86
98
5.7
2.6
PS-12120 12
12
600
5.94
151
3.86
98
3.7
94
3.86
98
8.8
PS-12180 12
18
875
7.13
181
2.99
76
6.57
167
6.57
167
12.8
5.8
PS-12250 12
25
1300
6.89
175
6.54
166
4.92
125
4.92
125
18.7
8.5
PS-12550 12
55
3000
10.25
260
6.6
168
8.2
208
9.45
240
39.7
18
PS-121000 12
100
5000
12
305
6.6
168
8.2
208
9.45
240
65.7
29.8
Effect of Temperature on Capacity
1109grf2.wmf
1109grf1.tif
Characteristic Discharge Curves
1109grf3.wmf
at left:
PS-121000
Shelf-Life
and Storage
1109grf4.wmf
at left:
PS-1210000
Discharge
Characteristics
Page 2 of 9 HON-60074:A 85-3072-1 2/12/2010
www.honeywell.com
1/1/70 10:11:27 AM
B & B BATTERY
Terminal
Nominal Capacity (AH)
Model
Standard
20 hr
10 hr
5 hr
Dimensions
Weight
1 hr
kg
lbs
Optional
Type
Pos.
Type
Pos.
L
mm
W
in
mm
TH
in
mm
in
mm
in
4.17
BP5-12
12
5.00
4.75
4.25
3.00
1.86 4.10
T1
T2
90
3.54
70
2.76
102
4.02
106
BP7-12
12
7.00
6.65
5.95
4.20
2.60 5.73
T2
T1
151
5.94
65
2.56
93
3.66
98
3.86
BP12-12
12
12.00
11.40
10.20
7.20
4.03 8.89
B1
T1
151
5.94
98
3.86
94
3.70
98
3.86
BP26-12
12
26.00
24.70
22.10
15.60
9.40 20.73
B1
T2.I1
175
6.89
166
6.54
125
4.92
125
4.92
Charging Procedure
Charging time 0.1 CA,
Temperature
Maximum
20C (h)
Charging
compensation
charging
voltage at
coefficient of
current
100%
50%
20C (V/cell) charging voltage
(CA)
discharge discharge
(mV/C/cell)
Application
Charging method
For standby
power source
For cycle
service
Constant voltage and

constant current
charging (with current
restriction)
2.25 ~ 2.30
0.3
24
20
2.40 ~ 2.50
0.3
16
10
Temp (C)
0 40C
(32 ~104F)
Temperature compensation of charging voltage is not needed when using the batteries within 5C to 35C range.
Discharge Time: for Model BP5-12
Final
Voltage
5 min
10 min
15 min
30 min
1 hr
3 hr
5 hr
10 hr
20 hr
Battery Output Power (W): for Model BP5-12

10.80 V
180.8
133.1
106.6
63.5
36.39 14.57
10.05
5.62
2.94
10.50 V
209.2
144.2
111.5
65.9
37.48 14.87
10.20
5.70
3.00
10.20 V
222.3
149.4
115.0
67.4
38.16 15.00
10.26
5.73
3.01
9.90 V
232.3
152.9
117.6
68.3
38.61 15.10
10.29
5.75
3.02
9.60 V
240.0
156.0
120.0
69.0
39.0 15.20
10.32
5.75
3.02
10 hr
20 hr
Constant Power Discharge

Characteristics at 25C/77F
for BP5-12

Final
Voltage
5 min
10 min
15 min
30 min
1 hr
3 hr
5 hr

10.80 V
253.1
186.3
149.3
88.8
50.95 20.40
14.07
7.86
4.11
10.50 V
292.9
201.8
156.2
92.2
52.47 20.81
14.28
7.98
4.20
10.20 V
311.2
209.1
161.0
94.3
53.42 21.00
14.36
8.02
4.22
9.90 V
325.2
214.1
164.7
95.6
54.06 21.15
14.41
8.04
4.23
9.60 V
336.0
218.4
168.0
96.6
54.60 21.27
14.45
8.04
4.23
10 hr
20 hr

for BP7-12

Final
Voltage
5 min
10 min
15 min
30 min
1 hr
3 hr
5 hr

10.80 V
433.9
319.4
256.0
152.3
87.34 34.98
24.12
13.48
7.05
10.50 V
502.2
346.0
267.7
158.1
89.96 35.68
24.48
13.68
7.20
10.20 V
533.6
358.5
276.0
161.7
91.57 36.00
24.61
13.75
7.23
9.90 V
557.5
367.1
282.4
164.0
92.67 36.25
24.70
13.79
7.25
9.60 V
576.0
374.4
288.0
165.6
93.60 36.47
24.77
13.79
7.25
10 hr
20 hr
29.20
15.26

for BP12-12

Final
Voltage
5 min
10 min
15 min
30 min
1 hr
3 hr
5 hr

10.80 V
940.0
692.0
554.6
330.0
189.23 75.79
10.50 V
1088.0
749.7
580.0
342.5
194.91 77.30
53.04
29.64
15.60
10.20 V
1156.0
776.7
598.0
350.3
198.41 78.00
53.33
29.79
15.67
9.90 V
1208.0
795.3
611.8
355.2
200.79 78.54
53.52
29.88
15.71
9.60 V
1248.0
811.2
624.0
358.8
202.80 79.01
53.68
29.88
15.71
www.honeywell.com
52.25

for BP26-12
HON-60074:A 85-3072-1 2/12/2010 Page 3 of 9
1/1/70 10:11:27 AM
B & B BATTERY
BP5-12 Battery Discharge
Characteristics (25C/77F)

BP05dis.tif

BP07dis.tif

BP12dis.tif
BP26dis.tif
BP05-12
BP26-12
Page 4 of 9 HON-60074:A 85-3072-1 2/12/2010
6933bp26.jpg
6933bp12.jpg
6933bp05.jpg
BP12-12
www.honeywell.com
1/1/70 10:11:28 AM
UPG BATTERY
UB1250 has the same specifications as previous Jolt SA1250;
SA1272 to be replaced with UB1270 (specs/diagrams pending).
UB1250 (previously SA1250) Diagrams
SA1272 Diagrams
UB1250/SA1250 discharge current vs. time
SA1272 discharge current vs. time
6933up01.tif
6933up03.tif
UB1250/SA1250 discharge characteristics (25C/77F)
SA1272 discharge characteristics (25C/77F)
6933up02.tif
6933up04.tif
UB1250, SA1250 Specifications
SA1272 Specifications
Nominal voltage: 12 V.
Nominal capacity (20 hr): 5.0 AH.
Dimensions: total height 107 mm (4.21"); container height
101 mm (3.98"); length 90 mm (3.54"); width 70 mm (2.76").
Weight: approximately 1.83 kg (4.03 lbs).
Container material: UL94HB ABS, UL94V-0 ABS.
Internal resistance (25C, 77F): ~ 32 m.
Discharge capacity under different temperatures:
40C: ~ 102%
25C: ~ 100%
0C: ~ 85%
Capacity 25C/77F:
20 hr @ 0.25 A: 5.0 AH.
5 hr @ 0.8 A: 4.0 AH.
1 hr @ 3.0 A: 3.0 AH.
1 C @ 5.0 A: 2.5 AH.
Charging voltage (25C, 77F):
Standby use: 13.65 V 0.15 V.
Cycle use: 14.7 V 0.3 V.
Maximum discharge current: 60 A (5 sec).
Self-discharge residual capacity (25C, 77F):
After 3 months: ~ 90%.
Dimensions: total height 100 mm (3.94"); container height 94
mm (3.70"); length 151 mm (5.95"); width 65 mm (2.56").
40C: ~ 102%
25C: ~ 100%
0C: ~ 85%
Capacity 25C/77F:
20 hr @ 0.36 A: 7.2 AH.
5 hr @ 1.15 A: 5.76 AH.
1 hr @ 4.32 A: 4.32 AH.
1 C @ 7.2 A: 3.6 AH.
www.honeywell.com
HON-60074:A 85-3072-1 2/12/2010 Page 5 of 9
1/1/70 10:11:28 AM
UPG BATTERY
Same specifications as previous Jolt models;
packaging and part numbers are the only changes.
UB12120 (was SA12120) Diagrams
6933up05.tif
6933up07.tif
6933up06.tif
6933up08.tif
40C: ~ 102%
25C: ~ 100%
0C: ~ 85%
Capacity 25C/77F:
20 hr @ 0.6 A: 12.0 AH.
5 hr @ 1.92 A: 9.6 AH.
1 hr @ 7.2 A: 7.2 AH.
1 C @ 12.0 A: 6.0 AH.
Dimensions: total height 167 mm (6.58"); container height
167 mm (6.58"); length 181 mm (7.13"); width 76 mm (2.29").
40C: ~ 102%
25C: ~ 100%
0C: ~ 85%
Capacity 25C/77F:
20 hr @ 0.9 A: 18.0 AH.
5 hr @ 2.88 A: 14.4 AH.
1 hr @ 10.8 A: 10.8 AH.
1 C @ 18.0 A: 9.0 AH.

Page 6 of 9 HON-60074:A 85-3072-1 2/12/2010
www.honeywell.com
1/1/70 10:11:28 AM
UPG BATTERY
6933up09.tif
6933up11.tif
6933up10.tif
6933up12.tif
40C: ~ 102%
25C: ~ 100%
0C: ~ 85%
Capacity 25C/77F:
20 hr @ 1.3 A: 26.0 AH.
5 hr @ 4.16 A: 20.8 AH.
1 hr @ 15.6 A: 15.6 AH.
1 C @ 26.0 A: 13.0 AH.
Dimensions: total height 234.5 mm (9.23"); container height
216.5 mm (8.52"); length 229 mm (9.02"); width 138 mm (5.43").
40C: ~ 102%
25C: ~ 100%
0C: ~ 85%
Capacity 25C/77F:
20 hr @ 2.75 A: 55.0 AH.
5 hr @ 8.8 A: 44.0 AH.
1 hr @ 33.0 A: 33.0 AH.
1 C @ 55.0 A: 27.5 AH.
www.honeywell.com
HON-60074:A 85-3072-1 2/12/2010 Page 7 of 9
1/1/70 10:11:28 AM
UPG BATTERY
UB121000 (XSA121000A) Diagrams
UPG Summary Diagrams
UB121000/XSA121000A discharge current vs. time
Summary discharge characteristics
6933up15.wmf
Summary discharge current vs. time curve (25C/77F)
6933up13.tif
UB121000/XSA121000A discharge characteristics (25C/77F)
6933up16.wmf
6933up14.tif
UB121000 (XSA121000A) Diagrams

Internal resistance (25C, 77F): ~ 6.5 m.
40C: ~ 102%
25C: ~ 100%
0C: ~ 85%
Capacity 25C/77F:
20 hr @ 5.0 A: 100.0 AH.
5 hr @ 16.0 A: 80.0 AH.
1 hr @ 60.0 A: 60.0 AH.
1 C @ 100.0 A: 50.0 AH.
Maximum charging current: 30 A.
Page 8 of 9 HON-60074:A 85-3072-1 2/12/2010
6933ub1280.jpg
6933ub12260.jpg
www.honeywell.com
1/1/70 10:11:29 AM
UPG BATTERY
Charging Procedure: UPG Battery

Application
Charging method
For standby
power source
For cycle service
Constant voltage and

constant current
charging (with current
restriction)
Charging time 0.1 CA,

Temperature
25C (h)
Charging
compensation Maximum
charging
voltage at
coefficient of
current
100%
50%
25C (V/cell) charging voltage
(CA)
discharge discharge
(mV/C/cell)
2.25 ~ 2.30
2.40 ~ 2.50
3.3
(1.8 mV/F/cell)
5
(2.8 mV/F/cell)
0.3
0.3
T 24
T 20
16 < T < 24 10 < T < 24
Temp (C)
0 40C
(32 104F)
Temperature compensation of charging voltage is not needed when using the batteries within 5C to 35C range.
www.honeywell.com
HON-60074:A 85-3072-1 2/12/2010 Page 9 of 9
1/1/70 10:11:29 AM
Notes
1/1/70 10:11:30 AM
411 Series
Slave Digital Alarm
Communicator Transmitters
General
The 411 Series are compact, multifaceted, slave Digital Alarm
Communicator Transmitters (DACTs) designed for a variety of
fire, security, and non-fire applications. The series features the
411 and 411UD, which provide three and four monitoring
channels (inputs) respectively. These slave DACTs are a solution for applications that require an existing (or new) fire alarm
control panel (FACP) to transmit system status to an off-site
monitoring facility for Central or Remote Station compliance.
Due to extremely flexible programming options, the 411 Series
slave DACTs are also ideal for monitoring non-fire and security
control panels. With fifteen selectable transmission formats
(including ADEMCO Contact ID) compatibility with virtually all
Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR) is ensured.
Programming can be accomplished on-site with a hand-held
programmer (PRO-411), or remotely (411UD only) utilizing an
optional PK-CD Windows-based remote upload/download
software package. The PK-CD upload/download software also
permits system interrogation and revision from a remote site.
Features
Three (411) or four (411UD) monitoring channels (inputs).
Inputs may be individually programmed to monitor the host
control panel for:
Fire Alarm
Fire Trouble
Fire Supervisory
Process Monitoring
AC Power Loss
Security Alarm
Other (Fire and Non-Fire Events)
Fully supervised trigger inputs require a contact closure for
activation.
12- or 24-VDC operation, jumper-selectable.
Industry-first, UL recognized, dialer-runaway prevention
feature.
Dual-line, rotary or touch-tone-dial DACT interfaces to public switched telephone network (leased phone lines are not
required).
Includes 15 reporting formats, including the popular
ADEMCO Contact ID format.
Capable of transmitting the following DACT information, in
addition to vital system status of the host control panel:
DACT troubles.
Telephone line 1 and 2 voltage fault.
Primary or Secondary Central Station communication
fault.
System off-normal.
24-hour normal test.
24-hour abnormal test.
Long-distance Carrier Access Code (CAC) compliant,
accepting up to 20-digit Central Station telephone numbers.
Fully programmable transmittal codes for fire, security, process monitoring, and others.
6619ph1.jpg
Field-programmable utilizing PRO-411 hand-held programmer.

Programmable from remote site with optional PK-CD programming software (model 411UD only).
View 411 Series status offsite in real time, with optional PKCD programming software, without ever compromising
monitoring protection at the protected premises (model
411UD only).
Integral piezo sounder (both models) with local silence
switch (model 411UD only).
One Form-C relay, fully programmable (model 411UD only).
Complies with NFPA 72 (Central Station and Remote Station [DACT only - not polarity reversal] Fire Alarm Systems).
Surface Mount Technology (SMT).
Extremely compact enclosure, measuring only 6.75"
(17.145 cm) W x 4.40" (11.176 cm) H x 1.05" (2.667 cm) D.
Host Panel Compatibility

Host panels must include AC Fail Delay option to meet NFPA
Central Station Requirements.
Housing
The 411 Series DACTs are fully enclosed in a compact housing measuring only 6.75" (17.145 cm) W x 4.40" (11.176 cm) H
x 1.05" (2.667 cm) D. The housing enclosure consists of an
aluminum backbox painted red with a matching cover secured
by two captive screws. The overlay includes large areas to
independently mark programming options for the three or four
channels (inputs), relay, and also includes printed terminal and
diagnostic LED designations. The overall compact size of the
enclosure permits mounting of these DACTs in virtually any
control panels enclosure, or alternately, adjacent to the host
control panel.
Phone Line Connections

Two modular phone connections on the 411 Series are accessible with the cover in place and provide connections for two
separate telephone lines using standard RJ31X or RJ38X
jacks. Both telephone lines are constantly supervised for
proper operation and integrity. Should one phone line go into
fault, and the remaining is operational, a report is sent to the
central or remote station.
5/18/10 11:11:37 PM
Diagnostic LEDs
Form-C Relay:
Contact rating: 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive).
Communication Fail (visible with front cover in place).

DACT Trouble (visible with front cover in place) (411UD).
Channel Active (visible with front cover in place) (411UD).
Primary Phone Line Active (411UD).
Secondary Phone Line Active (411UD).
Modem Active (411UD).
Specifications 411UD
Listings and Approvals:
NFPA 72: Central Station Fire Alarm Systems.
NFPA 72: Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems.
UL Standard 1635: Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitters.
UL Standard 864: Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems.
FCC Registration: OAAUSA-25431-AL-E. Ringer Equivalence: 0.5 B.
For Canadian Applications: IC Certificate Number: 2132
9028 A. Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 0.2.
Programming: A digital programming unit with a keypad,
model PRO-411, is available for programming the 411 Series.
Operating Power: The 411UD circuit board operates on filtered 12 VDC. The configuration of Jumper J4 determines
whether 12 VDC power is to be supplied directly to the circuit
board, or 24 VDC power is to be supplied and then internally
regulated down to 12 VDC.
DC Power:
J4 Jumper REMOVED: Filtered, nonresettable and powerlimited 24 VDC (nominal) power must be supplied at TB1
Terminals 7(+) and 8(). Current requirements are 100 mA
in standby and 170 mA* while communicating.
J4 Jumper INSTALLED: Filtered, nonresettable and powerlimited 12 VDC (nominal) power must be supplied at TB1
Terminals 7(+) and 8(). Current requirements are 100 mA
in standby and 170 mA* while communicating.
*NOTE: A maximum of 300 mA is possible with all channels active,
the 411UD communicating, the PRO-411 connected, and Lamp
Test active.
Channels/Inputs:**
Programmable Channels 1 through 4.

Power-limited circuitry.
Fully supervised.
Operation: All channels NFPA Style B (Class B). Requires
Normally Open contact to trigger.
Normal operating voltage: 12 VDC.
Alarm current: 3.34 mA.
End-of-line resistor: 2.2K ohms.
Short-circuit current: 3.8 mA per channel/input.
**NOTE: Channels/inputs do NOT support two-wire smoke detectors.
Specifications 411
FCC Registration: OAAUSA-25431-AL-E.
lence: 0.5 B.
Ringer
Equiva-
For Canadian Applications: IC Certificate Number: 2132

9028 A. Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 0.2.
Programming: A digital programming unit with a keypad,
model PRO-411, is available for programming the 411 Series.
Operating Power: The 411 may be powered from UL-listed
control panels that output nonresettable and power-limited 12
or 24 VDC power. The configuration of Jumper J4 determines
whether 12 VDC power is to be supplied directly to the 411 circuit board, or 24 VDC power is to be supplied and then internally regulated down to 12 VDC.
DC Power: TB1 Terminals 1(+) and 2(); Terminal 3 is Earth
Ground.
J4 Jumper removed: Filtered, nonresettable, and power-limited 24 VDC (nominal) power must be supplied at TB1 Terminals 1(+) and 2(). Operating voltage provided must be
within 21.3 to 24.0 VDC (UL tested range: 15%, +10%).
Current requirements are 78 mA in standby and 126 mA*
while communicating.
J4 Jumper installed: Filtered, nonresettable, and power-limited 12 VDC (nominal) power must be supplied at TB1 Terminals 1(+) and 2(). Operating voltage must be within 11.2
to 12.4 VDC (UL tested range: 15%, +10%). Current
requirements are 78 mA in standby and 126 mA* while
communicating.
*NOTE: A maximum of 240 mA is possible with all input channels
active, the 411 communicating, the Programmer connected, and
Lamp Test active.
Channels/Inputs** TB2 Terminals 1 through 6:
Programmable Channels 1 through 3.

Power-limited circuitry.
Fully supervised.
Operation: All channels NFPA Style B (Class B). Requires
Normally Open contact to trigger.
Normal operating voltage: 12 VDC.
Maximum line resistance: 100 ohms per channel.
Alarm current: 3.34 mA.
End-of-line resistor: 2.2K ohms, 1/2 watt (P/N 27070).
Short circuit current: 3.8 mA per channel/input.
**NOTE: Channels/inputs do NOT support two-wire smoke detectors.

UL Listed: S2424
ULC Listed: CS635
MEA Listed: 328-94-E Vol. III (411UD); 328-94-E Vol. IV
(411)
CSFM: 7300-0075:174
Page 2 of 4 HON-60154:A 85-3063 3/5/07
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:11:37 PM
ming software for remote programming and real-time diagnostics.
411: Three-channel, dual-line, slave Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter. Includes housing, operating and programming instructions. Requires PRO-411 hand-held DACT
programmer for local programming.
PRO-411: Hand-held programmer for local programming of

411 Series DACTs.
411UD: Same as above with four input channels, Form-C programmable relay, silence switch and remote upload/download
capability. Requires PRO-411 hand-held DACT programmer
for local programming or PK-CD Windows-based program-
MCBL-7: DACT phone cord, seven feet long (two required).
Silent
Format # (addresses Ademco
685
Knight
16 & 42)
(1)
9000
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
4+1 Ademco Express

4+2 Ademco Express
3+1/Standard/1800/2300
3+1/Expanded/1800/2300
3+1/Standard/1900/1400
3+1/Expanded/1900/1400
4+1/Standard/1800/2300
4+1/Expanded/1800/2300
4+1/Standard/1900/1400
4+1/Expanded/1900/1400
4+2/Standard/1800/2300
4+2/Expanded/1800/2300
4+2/Standard/1900/1400
4+2/Expanded/1900/1400
Ademco Contact ID
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
ITI
CS4000
(3)
PK-CD: Remote upload/download, Windows-compatible

programming software kit (for use with 411UD only).
Osborn
FBI
Hoffman Radiovonics
CP220FB Models 6000/6500 (5)
1& 2
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
(8)
Sescoa
3000R
(7)
(5, 6)
(5)
(5)
SurGuard
MLR-2
(9)
KEY:
(1) With 685-8 Line Card with Rev 4.4d software.
(2) With 9002 Line Card Rev 9035 software or 9032 Line Card with 9326A software.
(3) Rev. 4.0 software.
(4) FBI CP220FB Rec-11 Line Card with Rev 2.6 software and a memory card with Rev 3.8 software.
(5) Model 6500 with Rev 600 software.
(6) Model 6000 with Rev 204 software.
(7) With Rev B control card at Rev 1.4 software and Rev C line card at Rev 1.5 software.
(8) Model 2 only.
(9) Version 1.62 software.
www.honeywell.com
HON-60154:A 85-3063 3/5/07 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:11:37 PM
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60154:A
85-3063 Rev. 03/07
April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
85-3063
5/18/10 11:11:38 PM
Multi-Voltage
Conventional Relays
7015group.jpg
General
Honeywells multi-voltage conventional relays are used for
high-current switching applications such as fan and damper
assembly control, door control, air handling unit controls, and
other types of system interfacing.
The R-10T(A)/20T(A) and R-14T(A)/R-24T(A) models are
multi-voltage relays with terminal strip field wiring connections,
mounting track and hardware. The R-10T(A) is a single
FORM-C (SPDT) relay with a red activation LED, and the
R-14T(A) is a 4-gang 1 FORM-C (SPDT) relay with 4 red activation LEDs. The R-20T(A) is a single 2 FORM-C (DPDT)
relay with red activation LED, and the R-24T(A) is a 4-gang 2
FORM-C (DPDT) relay with 4 red activation LEDs.
The R-10E(A)/R-20E(A) and R-14E(A)/R-24E(A) are similar to
the T series track mount relays, but they are mounted into a
steel enclosure. The enclosure has a removable front cover
that provides easy access and a LED viewing hole on the top
of the cover.
Multi-Voltage Conventional Relays

R-10E(A)/ R-14E(A)/R-20E(A)/ R-24E(A)
Operating Voltage Range: 18-35 VDC,. 18-35 VAC, 115
VAC, 230 VAC.
Operating Current:
PR-1(A)/PR-2(A)/PR-3(A) are epoxy encapsulated multi-voltage relays. They are single pole double throw relays that use a
red LED as a visible indication of relay coil energization. PR-3
is identical to PR-2 except it has an extra pair of wires for
redundant power input.
Model EOLR-1(A) is an epoxy encapsulated single pole single
throw, normally open relay that can be used as an end of line
device in fire alarm systems, e.g. to supervise power supplies.
23 mA DC max. @ 24 V, 59 mA
@ 24 VAC, 150mA @ 120 VAC,
180 mA @ 240 VAC [R-10E(A)/
R-14E(A)].
-40 mA DC max. @ 24 VDC,
24 VAC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC (R20E/R-24E).
Humidity Range:
10% to 93% (non-condensing).
Dimensions:
R-10E(A)/R-20E(A):
3.75W x 2.5H.
5.1L
R-14E(A)/R-24E(A):
5.3W x 2.5H.
11L
Specifications
R-10T(A)/R-14T(A)/R-20T(A)/ R-24(A)T
Operating Voltage Range: 18-35 VDC, 18-35 VAC, 115
VAC, 230 VAC.
Operating Temperature:
-40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70

C).
Operating Current:
Contact Ratings:
24 VDC: 7 A with L/R = 5mS.
23 mA @ 24 VDC , 59 mA @
24 VAC,150 mA @ 120 VAC,
180 mA @ 240 VAC [R-10T(A)/
R-14T(A)].
40 mA DC max. @ 24 VDC, 24
VAC, 92 mA @ 24 VAC, 220
mA @ 120 VAC, 260 mA @
240 VAC [R-20T(A)/R-24T(A)]
120 VAC: 10 A.
120 VAC: 1/6 HP.
230 VAC: 7 A.
PR-1(A)
Operating Voltage Range: 18-35 VDC, 18-35 VAC, 120
VAC.
Humidity Range:
10% to 93% (non-condensing).
Dimensions:
R-10T(A)/ R-20T(A): 2.5L x

3.35W x 1.2H.
Operating Current:
15 mA DC max. @ 24 VDC, 24
VAC,120VAC.
R-14T(A)/R-24T(A):
3.35W x 1.2H.
Humidity Range:
10% to 93% RH.
Dimensions:
0.87 H x 2.01 W x 1.42 D.
-40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70

C).
Contact Ratings:
24 VDC: 7 A with LR = 5 mS.
10L
-40 F to 158 F (-40C to

70C)
Contact Ratings:
24 VDC: 7A with L/R = 5 mS.

120 VAC: 10 A.
120 VAC: 7 A max. (0.35 PF).
120 VAC: 1/6 HP.
250 VAC: 10 A resistive.
230 VAC: 7 A.
30 VDC: 10 A resistive.
Wire Length:
8 minimum.
5/18/10 11:11:38 PM
PR-2(A)/PR-3(A)
Operating Voltage Range: 10 to 40 VDC.
Operating Current:
30 mA DC max.
Humidity Range:
10% to 93% RH.
Dimensions:
0.91 H x 1.65 W x 1.22 D.
-40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70

C).
Contact Ratings:
120 VAC: 10 A (resistive load).

UL/ULC Listed: S3705

ULC Listed: CS669
MEA: 419-04-E
CSFM: 7300-1653:173
120 VAC: 7 A max. (0.35 PF).
250 VAC: 10 A max. (resistive

load).
NOTE: A suffix indicates ULC listed model.
30 VDC: 10 A max. (resistive

load).
PR-1(A): Epoxy encapsulated single pull double throw

(SPDT) relay. It also uses a red LED as a visible indication of
relay coil energization with pigtails.
8 minimum.
PR-2(A): Epoxy encapsulated single pull double throw

(SPDT) activated by 10 to 40 VDC. It uses a red LED as a visible indication of relay coil energization with pigtails.
Operating Voltage Range: 9 to 40 VDC.
PR-3(A): Epxoy encapsulated single pull double throw

(SPDT) activated by 10 to 40 VDC. It contains an additional
black and red wire for redundant power input with pigtails.
Wire Length:
EOLR-1(A)
Operating Current:
20 mA DC max.
Humidity Range:
10% to 93% RH.
-22 F to 140 F (-30 C to 60

C).
EOLR-1(A): Epoxy encapsulated single pull single throw

(SPST) normally open relay that is activated by 9 to 40 VDC.
This relay can be used as an end of line device in fire alarm
systems, e.g., to supervise power supplies.
Contact Ratings:
120 VAC: 0.5 A max. (resistive

load).
R-10T(A): Single (SPDT) relay with a red activation LED.
30 VDC: 3 A max. (resistive

load).
Wire Length:
8 minimum.
R-14T(A): 4-gang (SPDT) relay with 4 red activation LEDs.

R-20T(A): Single (DPDT) relay with a red activation LED.
R-24T(A): 4-gang (DPDT) relay with 4 red activation LEDs.
R-10E(A): Single (SPDT) relay with a red activation LED.
R-14E(A): 4-gang (SPDT) relay with 4 red activation LEDs.
R-20E(A): Single (DPDT) relay with a red activation LED.
R-24E(A): 4-gang (DPDT) relay with 4 red activation LEDs.
Page 2 of 4 1/27/09 85-3113-2
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:11:39 PM
7015pr2.jpg
7015pr1.jpg
PR-1(A)
PR-2(A)
7015eolr1.jpg
7015pr3.jpg
PR-3(A)
EOLR-1(A)
7015r14t.jpg
7015r10t.jpg
R-10T(A)
R-14T(A)
7015r10-14e.jpg
7015r20-24e.jpg
R-20E(A) & R-24E(A)

Enclosures
www.honeywell.com
R-10E(A) & R-14E(A)

Enclosures
85-3113-2 1/27/09 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:14:07 PM

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3113-2 Rev. 01/09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
85-3113-2
5/18/10 11:14:09 PM
XLS-CAB-4 Series
Cabinets, Solid or with Windows
Backboxes with Locking Doors
General
The key-locked door is provided with a pin-type hinge, two

keys and the necessary hardware to mount the door to the
backbox.
The backbox has been engineered to provide ease-of-entry
for the installer. Knockouts are positioned at numerous
points to aid the installer in bringing a conduit into the enclosure with a minimum of hardship.
Right- or left-hand hinges, selectable in the field. Door
opens 180.
Cabinets are arranged in four standard sizes, A (one tier)
through D (four tiers), plus a mini cabinet (AA, one tier without a battery compartment). See Ordering Information.
A trim ring option is available for semi-flush mounting.
Chassis bridge available for assembling multiple CHS-4
chassis external to the backbox.
h6857cov.jpg
All cabinets for Honeywells XLS140 and XLS3000 are fabricated from 16-gauge steel. The cabinet assembly consists of
two basic parts: a backbox and a locking door. Cabinets are
available in either black or red, with or without LEXAN windows. The LEXAN model provides a tasteful combination to
accent the decor of the finest lobby setting.
XLS3000 in B sized
XLS-CAB-4 cabinet
NOTE: Black trim rings are used with red or black cabinets.
BP-4: Battery panel for XLS140 only. Used to cover battery

and power supply when lower position is used in backbox.
XLS-BP2-4: Battery panel for XLS3000 only. Used to cover battery and power supply when lower position is used in backbox.
TWO TIERS, B SIZE:
A complete cabinet assembly consists of: a door, a backbox, an

optional battery plate, and an optional semi-flush trim ring. For
each cabinet required, order one DR door and one SBB
backbox. The BP-4 or XLS-BP2-4 battery plate is required for
each cabinet assembly that mounts batteries and/or a power
supply in the lower position of the cabinet. The optional trim ring
is an attractive picture frame-style black metal ring.
XLS-DR-B4: Door assembly, LEXAN window, two tiers,

BLACK.
MINI AA SIZE, ONE TIER:
SBB-B4R: Backbox assembly, two tiers, RED.
XLS-DR-AA4: Door assembly, LEXAN window, one tier (no

battery compartment), BLACK.
XLS-DR-AA4R: Door assembly, LEXAN window, one tier (no
battery compartment), RED.
XLS-DR-AA4B: Door assembly, solid door, one tier (no battery
compartment), BLACK.
XLS-DR-AA4BR: Door assembly, solid door, one tier (no battery compartment), RED.
XLS-DR-B4R: Door assembly, LEXAN window, two tiers, RED.

XLS-DR-B4B: Door assembly, solid door, two tiers, BLACK.
XLS-DR-B4BR: Door assembly, solid door, two tiers, RED.
SBB-B4: Backbox assembly, two tiers, BLACK.
TR-B4: Accessory semi-flush-mount trim ring, two tiers (opening 24.062" [61.118 cm] W x 28.562" [72.548 cm] H), BLACK.
THREE TIERS, C SIZE:
SBB-AA4: Backbox assembly, one tier (no battery compartment), BLACK.
XLS-DR-C4: Door assembly, LEXAN window, three tiers,

BLACK.
SBB-AA4R: Backbox assembly, one tier (no battery compartment), RED.
XLS-DR-C4R: Door assembly, LEXAN window, three tiers,

RED.
TR-AA4: Accessory semi-flush-mount trim ring, one tier (no

battery compartment).
XLS-DR-C4B: Door assembly, solid door, three tiers, BLACK.
ONE TIER, A SIZE:
SBB-C4R: Backbox assembly, three tiers, RED.
XLS-DR-A4: Door assembly, LEXAN window, one tier, BLACK.
TR-C4: Accessory semi-flush-mount trim ring, three tiers (opening 24.062" [61.118 cm] W x 37.187" [94.455 cm] H), BLACK.
XLS-DR-A4R: Door assembly, LEXAN window, one tier, RED.

XLS-DR-A4B: Door assembly, solid door, one tier, BLACK.
XLS-DR-A4BR: Door assembly, solid door, one tier, RED.
SBB-A4: Backbox assembly, one tier, BLACK.
SBB-A4R: Backbox assembly, one tier, RED.
XLS-DR-C4BR: Door assembly, solid door, three tiers, RED.

SBB-C4: Backbox assembly, three tiers, BLACK.

TR-A4: Accessory semi-flush-mount trim ring, one tier (opening

24.062" [61.118 cm] W x 20.062" [50.958 cm] H), BLACK.
5/18/10 11:14:10 PM
FOUR TIERS, D SIZE:

XLS-DR-D4: Door assembly, LEXAN window, four tiers,
BLACK.
XLS-DR-D4R: Door assembly, LEXAN window, four tiers, RED.
XLS-DR-D4B: Door assembly, solid door, four tiers, BLACK.
CB-1: Chassis bridge. Provides a bridge between CHS Series

chassis.
DP-1B: Blank dress panel, covers one CAB-4 tier, BLACK.
ADP-4B: Annunciator dress panel.
XLS-DR-D4BR: Door assembly, solid door, four tiers, RED.

SBB-D4: Backbox assembly, four tiers, BLACK.
SBB-D4R: Backbox assembly, four tiers, RED.
TR-D4: Accessory semi-flush-mount trim ring, four tiers (opening 24.062" [61.118 cm] W x 45.812" [116.363 cm] H), BLACK.
Note: Black trim rings are used with red or black cabinets.
These listings and approvals below apply to the XLS-CAB-4

Series Cabinets. In some cases, certain modules or applications
UL Listed: file S470 (except AA size).

ULC Listed: file CS118 Vol. 27 (except AA size).
MEA approved (except AA size): files 317-01-E Vol. IV
CSFM approved (except AA size): files 7165-1130:234
(XLS140), 7170-1130:235 (XLS140).
FM approved (except AA size).
ACCESSORIES:
WC-2: Wire channel. Provides a pair of wire trays to neatly
route wiring between CHS chassis.
Cabinet Dimensions and Features

CAB4keyhole.wmf
Knockouts on
top of cabinets.
Keyhole
dimensions
6857ko.wmf
Height of
mounting bolt
after installation
A SIZE
CABINET
cab-a4-2003.wmf
Page 2 of 4 HON-6857:A 85-3002 11/30/2006
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:14:11 PM
AA SIZE
CABINET
cab-b4-2003.wmf
B SIZE
CABINET
cab-b4-2003.wmf
C SIZE
CABINET
cab-c4-2003.wmf
www.honeywell.com
HON-6857:A 85-3002 11/30/2006 Page 3 of 4
5/19/10 10:41:00 AM
D SIZE
CABINET
cab-d4-2003.wmf
6897d4b.wmf
6857bp4.wmf
The BP-4 Battery Dress Panel

covers the Main Power Supply
and the batteries in the cabinet.
Only one BP-4 or XLS-BP2-4 is required
per cabinet unless an AA cabinet is used
(no battery compartment).
D sized cabinet
with solid door.
Solid door option available
on all sizes in black or red.
LEXAN is a registered trademark of GE Plastics, a subsidiary of General Electric Company.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-6857:A
85-3002 Rev. 11-06
November 2006
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
5/19/10 10:41:01 AM
DPI-232
Direct Panel Interface
General
The DPI-232 Direct Panel Interface is a specialized modem
for extending EIA-232 serial data links to remotely located control panels and/or peripherals.
The DPI-232 is used with:
The intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), XLS-NCA
and XLS-NCA2 Network Control Annunciators.
The NCM Network Control Modules.
Remote CRTs and printers.
Applications include extending distance between:
6870dpi2.wmf
FACP and peripheral device (CRT, printer).

FACP and XLSNET connection module.
Network annunciator and XLSNET connection module.
Block diagrams of applications and connections charts are
available in the DPI-232 Manual, number 51499.
Features
Utilizes two dry copper unshielded twisted-pairs of 16 to
26 AWG (1.3 to 0.13 mm) wire.
Capable of carrying full duplex transmission with data
rates of up to 57.6 Kbaud in each direction over a distance
of up to 10,000 feet (3048 m).
Each full duplex transmission link requires one DPI-232
on each end of the two pairs.
Each wire pair is connected to transmitter terminals (+TX,
TX) of the DPI-232 on one end and to the receiver terminals (+RX, RX) of the DPI-232 on the other end.
Each DPI-232 supervises for ground faults on the wire
pair connected to +TX and TX terminals. The ground fault
detector has an LED indicator as well as Form-C trouble
contacts.
Panel/peripheral terminals are electrically isolated from
the twisted pair terminals.
Equipped with a power-saving switch that allows power
conservation at the lower data rates of up to 9,600 baud.
Higher data rates than 9,600 baud require setting switch
position to 57.6.
TA-24VDC UL-Listed power supply (UL 864 UTRZ Listed)
plugs into a 120 VAC wall outlet and supplies +24 VDC to
power the DPI-232 modem. This power supply must be
used when the modem is not being powered directly from a
FACP or other UL-Listed power-limited power supply. Listed
for fire protective signaling.
Specifications
Physical dimensions: approximately 4.375" (11.11 cm)
wide by 6.875" (17.30 cm) high. Mounts onto any panel
module location.
120F); and at a relative humidity (noncondensing) of 85%
at 30C (86F) per NFPA, and 93% 2% at 32C 2C
(89.6F 1.1F) per ULC. However, the useful life of the
systems standby batteries and the electronic components
may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges
and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system
and all peripherals be installed in an environment with a

nominal room temperature of 15C to 27C (60F to 80F).
Input voltage range: 18.0 to 31.0 VDC, 24 V nominal.
Power requirements: 245 mA with SW1 set to 57.6, 148
mA with SW1 set to LOW.
Performance and capacity (per NFPA SLC classification):
Style 4 for data rates up to 9600 baud.
Style 3.5 for data rates up to 57.6 Kbaud.
Distance limitations:
Up to 10,000 feet (3,048 m) on 16 to 24 AWG (1.3 to 0.2
mm) unshielded twisted-pair wire.
OR (whichever comes first)...
Up to 580 ohm total (290 ohm each wire) of wire resistance.

Wiring from the DPI-232 that is installed outside the
building:
Cannot exceed 1,000 meters (3,280 feet).
Must be in conduit.
Cannot cross any power lines.
Mounting: The DPI-232 is designed to mount in CHS-M2,
CHS-4N, or CHS-4L chassis; or on the ADP-4B annunciator dress panel. Refer to the DPI-232 Manual, number
51499, for further information and diagrams.
Operation Highlights
DIAGNOSTIC LEDS
Power (green LED 1) illuminates to indicate presence of
DC power.
RX Line (green LED 2) illuminates when the RX line is connected to the receiver with proper polarities.
RX 232 (LED 3) when RX Line (LED 2, above), is illuminated, RX 232 (LED 3) illumination indicates data is being
received.
TX 232 (LED 4) when TX Line (LED 5, below), is illuminated, TX 232 (LED 4) illumination indicates data is being
transmitted.
TX Line (green LED 5) illuminates when the TX line is connected to the receiver with proper polarities.
Earth Fault (yellow LED 6) illuminates when a ground fault
is detected on the twisted-pair connected to the transmitter.
SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS

SW1, Power-Save switch has two settings, 57.6 and
Low. Data rates above 9,600 baud require setting the
switch to 57.6 position. Set the switch to Low to conserve energy for data rates up to 9,600 baud.
TB1:
-TX, +TX Transmit connections to remote device for use
with 16 26 AWG (1.3 to 0.13 mm) twisted-pair
unshielded wire.
Earth connect to ground of cabinet/chassis.
-RX, +RX Receive connections to remote device for use
with 16 26 AWG (1.3 to 0.13 mm) twisted-pair
unshielded wire.
TB2:
EIA-232 TX Transmit connection to EIA-232 TX connection of panel/peripheral.
EIA-232 REF Reference connection to EIA-232 REF
connection of panel/peripheral.
EIA-232 RX Receive connection to EIA-232 TX connection of panel/peripheral.
+24V connection to +24 VDC power.

Common connection to 24 VDC common.
NUP: EIA-232 Cable Connection (NUP) connection for
NUP (network) cable from NUP-compatible equipment.

These listings and approvals apply to the DPI-232. In some
cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed by
UL: S635 (Listed for Canadian and non Canadian applications)
MEA: 253-02-E
CSFM: 7165-1130:234; 7170-1130:235 (XLS140);71651130:256; 7170-1130:255 (XLS3000)
City of Chicago approved; Class 1, Class 2

DPI-232: Direct Panel Interface modem for extending EIA-232
serial data links.
TA-24VDC: UL-Listed power supply for DPI-232. Supplies
+24 VDC from a 120 VAC wall outlet.
Earth Flt (NO, NC, C) normally open (NO), normally

closed (NC), and common (C) earth fault trouble contacts.
DPI-232 BLOCK DIAGRAM: XLS-NCA OR XLS140 TO XLSNET
Place Trademark Block here

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60024:A
85-3006 Rev. 10/06
November 2006
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
XLS-PRN-6
Printer
General
The XLS-PRN-6 printer is used with Honeywell fire alarm control
panels (FACPs) with printer capability to provide a written record
of system events and status changes.
6769cov.tif
Features
Provides a hard copy printout of all system events and status
changes.
Time stamps printed on the record of each event and status
change with the current time-of-day and date.
Uses standard 9 x 11 tractor-feed fan-fold paper.
Provides 80 columns of data at 10 characters per inch.
Provides printed records of system configuration and addressable device parameters.
Nine-pin print head.
Very quiet (approximately 53 dBA).
Applications
Printed transaction records reduce the man-hours required to
install and maintain a system. A printed record of all system
events (alarms, troubles, etc.) and status changes can be especially valuable in the event of a disputed incident.
Printer Specifications
Printer Method: Serial printing with 9-pin matrix print head.
Printing Speed (copy draft): 310 cps at 10 cpi.
Character Density: 10 cpi standard (12, 15, 17.1, and 20 cpi
available via front panel).
Graphic Resolution (VxH): 144 x 240 dpi.
Ribbon Life (approx.): 4 million characters (DPQ).
Acoustic Noise Level: 53 dBA (approx.).
Dimensions: 19(48.26
(24.64cm)D.
cm)W
7.9(20.08cm)H
9.7
Weight: 17.6 pounds (7.9 kg).

Power Supply: 120 VAC (only).
Power Consumption: 50 watts (operating).
Construction and Operation

The printer is housed in its own separate enclosure and is suitable for placement on a desk top, counter, or table.
Installation
The XLS-PRN-6 should be placed in a secure area to prevent
theft of the printer and/or printed records.
The XLS-PRN-6 must not be located further than 50 ft/15.24 m
(actual cable length) from the control panel.
Consult the control panel installation manual for the proper
method and PIN numbers used to complete the electrical connection to the control panel.
NOTE: If printer operation is required during failure of primary
power, use of a separate UL-listed Uninterruptable Power Supply
(UPS) system is recommended.
Operating Environment Temperature: 50F to 104F (10C

to 40C).
Operating Environment Humidity: 20% to 80% (non-condensing).

UL Listed: S470
CSFM: 7300-1130:236. 7165-1130:265 and 7170-1130:264
(XLS140-2). 7165-1130:255 and 7170-1130:255 (XLS3000).

XLS-PRN-6: 9-pin dot-matrix printer, 120 VAC power.
5/19/10 10:43:38 AM
XLS-NET is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3073-1 Rev. 03/09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:19:32 PM
Notes
4.0 Eclipse Intelligent Devices

Input / Output Modules
Manual Call Points
Detector Accessories
Eclipse Intelligent Devices
Heat / Smoke Detectors
TC906A, TC907A, TC908A

Eclipse Series: Intelligent
Low-Profile Plug-In Detectors
General
The Honeywell Eclipse Series of intelligent fire sensors utilizes a peer-to-peer, all digital protocol that provides faster
device response time with more flexibility than ever possible
before. In addition, this digital, peer-to-peer protocol is more
resilient than other types of systems because of its significantly high noise immunity. The Honeywell Eclipse Series is
compatible with the Honeywell XLS-ELCM-320 Eclipse Loop
Control Module and the Honeywell XLS-ELEM-320 Eclipse
Loop Expander Module.
60106cov.jpg
Specifications
ELECTRICAL RATINGS:
Voltage range: 15 to 30 VDC peak.
When used with the XLS3000 Fire Alarm Control Panel

(FACP), the Eclipse system distributes intelligence to the networked devices. In fact, Eclipse turns every networked device
into a peer, capable of generating messages readable by the
entire system. Additionally, with Eclipse, no special communication cables are required, making it ideal for retrofit applications.
Standby current (maximum/average): Thermal: 215 A at

24 VDC (continuous broadcasts). Photo/photo with thermal:
250 A at 24 VDC (continuous broadcasts). Ion: 314 A at 24
VDC (continuous broadcasts).
All of these sensors have on-board short-circuit isolators to

prevent shorts on the signaling line circuit (SLC) from disabling
all devices on the intelligent loop.
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
The TC906A photoelectric detectors and TC907A ionization

detectors have state-of-the-art sensing chambers that are
engineered to sense smoke produced by a wide range of combustion sources. The sensing chambers employ features that
minimize the effects of settled dust on their performance. The
detectors are designed with tri-color LEDs to indicate detector
status and can be programmed to either make the LEDs blink,
or be steady on in green, amber or red. Dual electronic thermistors add 135F (57C) fixed temperature thermal sensing
on the TC906A1010 model.
The TC908A1000 is a spot-type heat detector designed to be
programmable for a setpoint range of 135F to 174F (57C to
79C) for ordinary detection, or 175F to 190F (79C to 88C)
for intermediate detection. A detector in the ordinary range
may be programmed for either fixed, or 15F (8.3C) rate-ofrise operation.
CONFIGURATION TOOL
The EA-CT is a remote control which communicates with
Eclipse devices via infrared signals at line-of-sight distances
up to 30 feet (9 meters). The remote control provides the user
with the ability to communicate with the panel and other
devices through any selected device on the loop. The EA-CT
can read device information such as type, loop, and address
along with set loop, address, branch, and service date. It can
also initiate a walk test and a device test. The EA-CT features
a 16-character liquid crystal display and a 17-button keypad.
LED current (maximum): 6.5 mA at 24 VDC (ON).

Temperature ratings: Configuration tool, operating: 32F
to 122F (0C to 50C). Photo and ion: 32F to 120F (0C to
49C). Photo with thermal: 32F to 100F (0C to 38C).
Thermal: 4F to +100F (20C to +38C); 135F to 174F
(57C to 79C) setpoint. High-temperature thermal: 4F to
+150F (20C to +66C); 175F to 190F (79C to 88C) setpoint.
Humidity ratings: 10% to 93% RH, non-condensing.
Thermal ratings: Fixed temperature setpoint: 135F (57C).
Rate-of-rise detection: 15F/minute (8.3C/minute). High temperature heat: 190F (88C).
Thermal detector spacing: 50 ft. (15.2 m) spacing: for detectors set between 135F to 155F (57C to 68C) or 175F to
190F (79C to 88C). 15 ft. (4.6 m) spacing: for detectors set
between 156F to 174F (69C to 79C).
Configuration tool: communication range: up to 30 ft. (9 m).
Battery life: 168 hours (typical usage).
Dimensions: Detectors: 2.125" (51 mm) high; diameter
installed in 50001947-002 base: 6.125" (155 mm); diameter
installed in installed in 50001947-001 base: 4.125" (104 mm).
Configuration tool, overall: 2.25" (57 mm) wide x 1.313" (33
mm) high x 7.75" (196 mm) length.
Shipping weight: Thermal: 4.8 oz. (136 g). Photo, Photo/
Thermal, and Ion: 5.2 oz. (147 g). Configuration tool: 1.0 lb.
(0.45 kg).
SLC compatibility: XLS-ELCM-320 and XLS-ELEM-320 Eclipse
Loop Control/Expander Modules.
Features
The listings and approvals below apply to the Eclipse Series

Intelligent Low-Profile Plug-In Detectors. In some cases,
approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult
factory for latest listing status.
Built-in isolation.
Distributed intelligence.
Peer-to-peer communication.
Digital communication protocol.
Fast response time.
Sleek, low-profile design.
Low standby current.
Superior immunity to electrical noise.
Communicate with devices via hand-held wireless configuration tool.
UL Listed: files S1196 (TC906A1002, TC906A1010,

TC907A1001), S751 (TC908A1000).
CSFM approved (except TC907A1001): files 7272-1130:259
(TC906A1002, TC906A1010); 7272-1130:260 (TC908A1000).
5/18/10 11:19:33 PM

DETECTORS:
TC906A1002: Eclipse Series photoelectric smoke detector
with isolator.
TC906A1010: Eclipse Series thermal/photoelectric smoke
detector with isolator.
TC907A1001: Eclipse Series ionization smoke detector with
isolator.
TC908A1000: Eclipse Series fixed-temperature/rate-of-rise/
high-temperature thermal detector with isolator.
BASES AND MOUNTING KITS:

50001947-001: Flangeless mounting base with isolator.
50001947-002: Flanged mounting base with isolator.
EBS: Eclipse Series sounder base with isolator and temporal
tone selection.
EBR: Eclipse Series relay base with isolator.
RMK400: Recessed mounting kit.
SMK400E: 4" (102 mm) flangeless surface-mounting kit.
ACCESSORIES:
EA-CT: Eclipse Series configuration tool (requires two AA
batteries, not included).
RA400Z: Remote LED annunciator.
XR2B: Detector removal tool, T55-127-000 detector removal
head included.
XP-4: Extension pole for XR2B (5 to 15 ft/1.524 to 4.572 m).
BCK-200B: Black detector kit.
Eclipse is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60106:A
74-3986-2 Rev. 01-07
January 2007
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:19:34 PM
TC906D Eclipse Series

Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector
and DNRECL Housing
General
The Honeywell Eclipse Series Duct Smoke Detector samples air currents passing through a duct and gives dependable
performance for shutdown of fans, blowers and air conditioning
systems preventing the spread of toxic smoke and fire
gases through the protected area. The Eclipse TC906D Series
Photoelectric Air Duct Smoke Detectors are capable of sensing smoke in air velocities from 300 to 4000 feet per minute
(91.44 to 1219 meters per minute). The Eclipse Series duct
housing has a twist-in, twist-out head for quick and easy cleaning or application changes without removing the duct housing.
The Honeywell Eclipse Series of intelligent fire sensors utilize
a peer-to-peer, all digital protocol that provides faster device
response time with more flexibility than ever possible before. In
addition, this digital, peer-to-peer protocol is more resilient
than other types of systems because of its significantly high
noise immunity. The Eclipse Series is compatible with the Honeywell XLS-ELCM-320 Eclipse Loop Control Module and the
Honeywell XLS-ELEM-320 Eclipse Loop Expander Module.
(FACP), the Eclipse system distributes intelligence to the networked devices. In fact, Eclipse turns every networked device
into a peer capable of generating messages readable by the
All of these sensors have on-board short-circuit isolators to
prevent shorts on the signaling line circuit (SLC) from disabling
all devices on the intelligent loop.
This intelligent sensor communicates and is continuously monitored through the communication line. Detector sensitivity
changes caused by dirt, temperature, or humidity are reported
to the panel allowing compensation algorithms to maintain the
sensor.s set sensitivity. An advance indication at the panel
specifies the sensor address allowing for selected maintenance to be performed as needed.
Remote alarm annunciation can be accomplished by using the
RA100Z Remote Annunciator, or the RTS151 or RTS151KEY
Remote Test Station. These devices allow testing of the detector from a remote location.
Innovairflex intelligent.jpg
Continuous sensitivity monitoring from the panel.

Intelligent photo isolator head with twist-in/twist-out removal.
Easy to clean.
Meets requirements for UL 268A.
Transparent cover for convenient visual inspection.
Outputs for remote LED display, remote test.
No auxiliary power needed.
Powered outputs for remote LED and remote test.
Remote test station and remote annunciator accessories.
Communicate with devices via hand-held wireless configuration tool.
Specifications
Models: TC906D1006 Eclipse Series Intelligent Duct Smoke
Detector; DNRECL Eclipse Series Intelligent Duct Smoke
Detector Housing. Detector and housing meet UL 268A standards.
TC906D DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR:

Temperature rating: 32F to 120F (0C to 49C).
Humidity rating: 10% to 93% RH, non-condensing.
Duct air velocity rating: 300 to 4000 ft/min. (91.44 to 1219 m/
min.).
Dimensions: 5.0" (127 mm) wide x 14.5" (368 mm) high x 4.0"
(102 mm) deep.
Shipping weight (with DNRECL): 1.6 lbs (0.73 kg).
DNRECL HOUSING:
The Eclipse Series is designed for simplified installation and

easy maintenance. Refer to NFPA 72 and 90A for additional
duct smoke detector application information.
Electrical ratings (using no accessories): Power supply

voltage: 14 to 30 VDC. Standby current: 360 A maximum.
Alarm current: 7 mA maximum at 24 VDC (LEDs on).
CONFIGURATION TOOL
Temperature rating: -4F - 158F (-20C to 70C).

Alarm response time: 30 seconds.
Features
Terminal connections: strip and clamp suitable for 18 AWG

to 2 AWG (0.821 mm to 3.31 mm) wiring.
Built-in isolation.
Air velocity rating from 300 to 4000 feet per minute (91.44 to
1219 meters per minute).
Operates from the control panel communication line.
Power-up time: 2 seconds.

Self-test initiation time: 1 second.
Relay contact ratings (each set of Form-C contacts): see
table below.
Accessory current loads @ 24 VDC: For RA100Z: Standby
0 mA, Alarm 4.6 mA maximum. For RTS151/RTS151KEY:
Standby 0 mA, Alarm 4.6 mA maximum.
EA-CT CONFIGURATION TOOL:

Temperature rating: 32F to 122 F (0C to 50C).
5/18/10 11:19:34 PM
Communication range: Up to 30 ft. (9 m).

Dimensions: 2.25" (57 mm) wide x 1.313" (33 mm) high x
7.75" (197 mm) deep.

Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector and Housing. In some cases,
CSFM approved: file 7272-1130:259.

NOTE: A or CDN suffix indicates ULC listed model.
TC906D1006(CDN): Eclipse Series intelligent duct smoke

detector head.
NOTE: Inlet tube (DST-___, below) is required and must be purchased separately. Order one inlet tube for each duct smoke
detector ordered.
DST1(A): Metal sampling tube duct width up to 1 ft (0.3m)

DST1.5(A): Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 1 ft to 2 ft (0.3
to 0.6 m)
DST3(A): Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 2 ft to 4 ft (0.6
to 1.2 m)
DST5(A): Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 4 ft to 8 ft (1.2
to 2.4 m)
DST10(A): Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 8 ft to 12 ft
(2.4 to 3.7 m)
RA100Z(A): Remote annunciator alarm LED.

RTS151(A): Remote test station. Mounts in single-gang box.
Includes red alarm LED and magnet test switch.
RTS151KEY(A): Key-activated remote test station.
P48-21-00: Replacement end cap for metal sampling tube.
ETX: Metal exhaust tube duct, width 1 ft (0.3 m)
M02-04-00: Test magnet
DNRECL: Eclipse Series intelligent duct smoke detector

housing. Order TC906D1006(CDN) seperately.
EA-CT: Eclipse Series configuration tool (two AA batteries
required, not included).

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60107:A
74-3988-1 Rev. 04-10
April 2010
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:19:35 PM
TC909A and B, TC910N and R

Eclipse Series: Intelligent
Monitor, Control, and Relay Modules
General
The Honeywell Eclipse Series of Intelligent Monitor, Control,
and Relay Modules utilize a peer-to-peer, all-digital protocol that
allows for numerous applications, such as fire, security, access,
and HVAC control. Eclipse provides faster device response time
with more flexibility than ever possible before. In addition, this digital peer-to-peer protocol is more resilient than other types of systems because of its significantly high noise immunity. The
Honeywell Eclipse Series is compatible with the Honeywell XLSELCM-320 Eclipse Loop Control Module and the Honeywell XLSELEM-320 Eclipse Loop Expander Module.
When used with the XLS3000 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP),
the Eclipse system distributes intelligence to the networked
devices. In fact, Eclipse turns every networked device into a
peer, capable of generating messages readable by the entire
system. Additionally, with Eclipse, no special communication
cables are required, making it ideal for retrofit applications.
These modules have on-board short-circuit isolators to prevent
shorts on the signaling line circuit (SLC) from disabling all
devices on the intelligent loop.
Eclipse monitor, control, and relay modules can be used to
supervise and activate sounders, strobes, door closers, pull stations, waterflow switches, and more. Each module is rigorously
designed and tested for electromagnetic compatibility and environmental reliability, in many cases exceeding industry standards. Full-size modules mount in a standard 4.0" x 4.0" x
2.125" (102 mm x 102 mm x 54 mm) junction box. Wiring terminals are easily accessible for troubleshooting purposes. Relay
modules are designed for activating products connected to an
alarm system and the mini monitor module can monitor the wiring to the device for open circuits via an end-of-line resistor.
MONITOR MODULE
The TC909A Monitor Modules monitor the normally open contacts of an auxiliary device. In addition to monitoring the contact,
the device will supervise the wiring to the device for open circuits via an end-of-line resistor. This device is capable of Class
A or Class B operation.
MINI MONITOR MODULE

The small size of the TC909B Mini Monitor Module allows it to fit
either inside devices or in junction boxes behind devices.
SUPERVISED CONTROL MODULE

The TC910N Supervised Control Modules are used to switch an
external power supply or audio amplifier to notification appliances. The devices will supervise the wiring to the auxiliary
device for open and short circuits via an end-of-line resistor. The
control module will also have the capability to monitor the external power input for loss of power (DC voltage supplies only).
This module is capable of Class A or Class B operation.
RELAY MODULE
The TC910R Relay Modules are designed for use in activation of
products that are connected to an intelligent fire alarm system.
They provide two sets of Form-C contacts that switch together
(one DPDT relay). There is also an input that is capable of monitoring a dry set of contacts for open or closed conditions.
CONFIGURATION TOOL
60105cov.jpg

Features
Built-in isolators.
Distributed intelligence.
Peer-to-peer communication.
Digital communication protocol.
Fast response time.
Numerous applications (fire, security, access, and HVAC control).
Superior immunity to electrical noise.
Wiring terminals easily accessible.
Communicate with the devices via hand-held configuration tool.
Module Physical Specifications

Models: TC909A1009 monitor module with isolator; TC909B1007
mini-monitor module with isolator; TC910N1007 supervised control
module with isolator; TC910R1009 relay module with isolator.
Electrical ratings: voltage range 15 to 30 VDC.
Alarm current: 2.0 mA (red LED ON).
Temperature ratings: 32F to 120F (0C to 49C).
Dimensions: (except mini-module) 4.313" (110 mm) wide x
4.25" (108 mm) high x 1.25" (32 mm) deep.
Shipping weight: 8 oz. (227g).
Module Electrical Ratings

TC910N SUPERVISED CONTROL MODULE
WITH ISOLATOR
Standby current average: 560 A maximum average (continuous broadcasts).
External power supply: 9 to 80 VDC (normal range); 0 to 2
VDC (trouble range).
End-of-line resistance: 39K ohms (included).
Maximum NAC wiring resistance: 100 ohms.
5/18/10 11:19:35 PM
Maximum NAC current rating: Class B wiring: 3.0 A. Class A

wiring: 2.0 A.
TC910R RELAY MODULE WITH ISOLATOR

Standby current average: 500 A maximum average (continuous broadcasts).
Dry-contact short-circuit current: 30 A maximum average.
Relay contact ratings: 3.0 A @ 30 VDC resistive, non-coded;
2.0 A @ 30 VDC resistive, coded; 0.9 A @ 70.7 VAC resistive,
non-coded; 0.7 A @ 70.7 VAC inductive (PF = 35), non-coded.

Intelligent Monitor, Control, and Relay Modules. In some cases,
TC909A MONITOR MODULE, TC909B MINI-MONITOR

MODULE WITH ISOLATOR
Standby current average: 485

broadcasts).
TC909B1007: Eclipse Series mini monitor module with isolator.
A maximum (continuous
IDC voltage: 5.4 VDC maximum.

TC909A1009: Eclipse Series monitor module with isolator.

TC910N1007: Eclipse Series supervised control module with
isolator.
TC910R1009: Eclipse Series relay module with isolator.
EA-CT Physical Specifications

Temperature ratings: 32F to 122F (0C to 50C).
CB500: Control module barrier.

Communication range: up to 30 feet (9 meters).
SMB500: Surface-mount box.

Dimensions: 2.25" (57 mm) wide x 1.313" (33 mm) high x 7.75"
(197 mm) deep.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60105:A
74-3987-1 Rev. 01-07
January 2007
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:19:58 PM
EBR Relay Base

& EBS Sounder Base
General
The EBR Relay Base and EBS Sounder Base are used with
System Sensor sensor heads. Refer to the listed compatible
control panel manual for more information on sensors.
The EBR relay base is intended for use with intelligent systems. Refer to the panel manual for maximum allowable
number of units per loop.
Form C latching relay contacts are included for control of an
auxilary function. The relay operates 3.7 seconds (nominally) after activation of the sensor head remote annunciator output.
The EBS sounder base is intended for use with intelligent
systems. Refer to the panel manual for the maximum allowable number of units per loop. The sounder base requires
an external 24VDC supply. The connections for the external
supply (terminals 1 and 2) and the communication loop (terminals 3, 4 and 5) are isolated to prevent electrical interaction between them.
When the sensors remote annunciator is activated, the
associated horn sounds. A loop of horns can be made to
sound by configuring the panel to activate all remote annunciators when one is activated.
NOTE: When not used as a supplementary evacuation system,
the external 24 VDC supply shall be treated as a component of
the main power supply system and shall fall under the requirements of the main power supply system per NFPA 72.
Specifications
Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 120F (0 to 49C)

Operating Humidity Range: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity
Shipping Weight: 0.4 lb. (181 gm)
Relay Resistive Contact Rating: 2 A @ 30 VDC, .5 A @
125 VAC
Relay Inductive Contact Rating: 1 A @ 30 VDC, .25 A @
125 VDC
Power Supply Voltage: 15 to 30 VDC
Set Time: 4.7 seconds maximum
Reset Time: 4.7 seconds maximum
Before Installation
Please read the System Smoke Detector Application Guide,
which provides detailed information on sensor spacing, placement, zoning, wiring. and special applications. Copies of this
manual are available from System Sensor. NFPA 72 and
NEMA guidelines should be observed.
CAUTION: The detector used with this base must be tested and
maintained regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at least once a year.
60197pho1.jp
likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a

system from responding properly in the event of a fire.
For signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected sensors
or modules), it is recommended that the wire be no smaller
than 18 gauge (1.0 square mm). Wire sizes up to 12 gauge
(2.5 square mm) may be used with the base. For best system
performance, the power (+ and ]) wires and the communication circuit wires should be twisted pair or shielded cable
installed in separate grounded conduit to protect the communication loop from electrical interference.
Make wire connections by stripping about 3/8 of insulation
from the end of the wire. Then, slide the bare end of the wire
under the clamping plate, and tighten the clamping plate
screw. Do NOT loop the wire under the clamping plate.
The zone wiring of the sensor base should be checked before
the sensor heads are installed. Check the wiring for continuity
and polarity in the base.
See the individual sensor manual for the maximum sensor
installation temperature.
Mounting
Mount directly to an electrical box, using the mounting kit
supplied. (See drawing on following page.)
The bases are 1.1 inches deep (2.794 cm). Electrical boxes
must be 4 inches square (10.16 cm) by at least 1.5 inches
deep (3.81 cm); 2.125 inches is recommended (5.4 cm).
NOTE: A maximum space of 1/8 inch from the outside edge of the
electrical box to the inside edge of the drywall or ceiling tile is
allowable.
Wiring Guidelines
All wiring must be installed in compliance with the National
Electrical Code and the local codes having jurisdiction and
must not be of such length or wire size which would cause the
base to operate outside of its published specifications. The
conductors used to connect smoke sensors to control panels
and accessory devices should be color coded to reduce the
5/18/10 11:19:58 PM

UL Listed: S1196
b
97
01
.w
d1
Mounting a Base into an Electrical Box

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3086 Rev. 02-09

February 2009
Made in the U.S.A.
PRELIMINARY Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:19:59 PM
EA-CT
Configuration Tool
General
The EA-CT is a hand-held remote control that is designed to
communicate with Eclipse devices via infrared signals. The
remote control will give the user the ability to communicate
with the panel and other devices through any selected device
on the loop. The EA-CT can read device information such as
type, loop, address and sensitivity along with write loop,
address, branch and service date, and initiate walk test and
device test. The EA-CT features a 16-character liquid crystal
display and a 17-button keypad.
Specifications
Communication Range: Up to 30 feet (9.14 m)

Battery Life: 168 hours (typical usage)
Operating Temperature Range: 32F to 122F (0C to 50C)
Relative Humidity: 10-90% RH noncondensing
Dimensions: 1.3H x 2.2W x 7.7L
(3.302cm H x 5.588cm W x 19.558cm L)
General Instructions
For more detailed instructions please refer to the EA-CT
Configuration Tool Installation and Maintenance Instructions
(System Sensor document I56-2245).
Press the PWR button on the EA-CT. For first time users or
devices without a PIN number, the main menu will be displayed. The main menu consists of seven choices for the user.
You can select each choice by pressing the up or down keys to
highlight your selection and pressing enter or by pressing the
number of the selected item.
NOTE: EA-CT automatically shuts down after four minutes of nonuse.
Before communication is enabled, the device must be

selected by the EA-CT. To select a device, aim the EA-CT at
the device and press the SELECT key. In situations where
there is more than one device in close proximity, the desired
device may not be initially selected. Simply press the SELECT
key again and that device will be deselected and another
J
T.
C
A-
PG
device within the EA-CT field of view will be selected. To deselect a device, aim the EA-CT at the device and press the
DESELECT key. A device can be selected or deselected at
any time.
When a device is selected by the EA-CT, the LED on the
device will change to a blinking green pattern. This will help
the user ensure the correct Eclipse device is selected. The
only exception is the mini monitor module. This units LED will
temporarily turn off because it does not have a bi-color LED.
NOTE: There must be a clear line of sight between the EACT and
the device it is communicating with.

UL: S2522
CSFM: 7300-1653:174

5/18/10 11:20:03 PM
Select Key
SELECT
DESELECT
Scroll Up Key
Deselect Key
Scroll Down Key
Escape Key
ESC
ENTER
Enter Key
0
Power Button

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3080 Rev. 12-08

December 2008
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
85-3080
5/18/10 11:20:03 PM
S464H Eclipse Series

Intelligent Manual
Fire Alarm Pull Station
General
The S464H is a feature packed, manual, non-coded fire alarm
station. The station is fabricated in a highly visible red LEXAN
plastic (or polycarbonate equivalent) with white lettering. The
words NORMAL and ACTIVATED are molded into the plastic
adjacent to the alarm switch (located inside). The S464H has a
status LED that is visible through the translucent handle. The
Honeywell Eclipse Series Intelligent Manual Fire Alarm Station is compatible with the Honeywell XLS-ELCM-320 Eclipse
Loop Control Module and the Honeywell XLS-ELEM-320
Eclipse Loop Expander Module.
(FACP), the Eclipse System distributes intelligence to the networked devices. In fact, Eclipse turns every networked device
into a peer, capable of generating messages readable by the
CONFIGURATION TOOL
CONSTRUCTION
The cover, backplate and operation handle of the S464H are
molded of durable polycarbonate material. The cover features
white lettering and trim.
OPERATION
The S464H Manual Fire Alarm Station provides a textured finger-hold area that includes Braille text. In addition to PUSH IN
and PULL DOWN text, arrows indicate how to operate the station for non-English-speaking people.
Pushing in and then pulling down on the handle activates the
normally-open alarm switch. When latched in the down position, the word ACTIVATED appears at the top in bright yellow
lettering with a portion of the handle protruding at the bottom
as a visible flag. Resetting the station is simple insert the
key, twist one quarter-turn, then open the front cover of the
station, causing the spring-loaded operation handle to return
its original position. The alarm switch can then be reset, either
manually to its normal (non-alarm) position, or by closing the
front cover of the station which automatically resets the switch.
Features
Built-in isolation.
Reliable gold-plated switch contacts.
Easily operated, yet designed to prevent false alarms when
bumped, shaken or jarred.
Dual-action PUSH IN/PULL DOWN handle latches in the
down position for clear indication that the station has been
operated.
ACTIVATED appears on the top of the handle in bright yellow lettering when station has been operated.
52004cov.jpg
h6643logo.tif
Key-lock reset feature.

Meets ADA 5 lb. maximum pull force and UL38 Standard.
Operation described with arrows and Braille text.
Station can be opened for inspection and maintenance
without initiating an alarm.
Specifications
Model: S464H1006 Eclipse Series Intelligent Fire Alarm Station with English labeling.
Electrical ratings for pull station: Standby current: 485 A
average. Switch contacts: 0.25 A @ 30 VDC or 30 VAC. Voltage range: 5 to 30 VDC. Alarm current: 20 mA (red LED on).
Switching action: SPST, normally open.
Wiring connections: screw terminals accomodate 18 AWG to
12 AWG (0.821 mm to 3.31 mm) wiring.
Temperature rating: 32F to 120F (0C to 49C).
Dimensions: Pull station (see figure below): 5.5" (13.97 cm)
H x 4.121" (10.467 cm) W x 1.390" (3.531 cm) D. SB-10 backbox: 5.5" (13.97 cm) H x 4.125" (10.478 cm) x 1.375" (3.493 cm).
SB-I/O backbox: 5.601" (14.23 cm) H x 4.222" (10.72 cm) W x
1.439" (3.66 cm) D.
Mounting options for S464H1006:
Single-gang backbox, 2.75" (70 mm) deep.
Double-gang backbox, 2.75" (70 mm) deep.
4.0" (102 mm) or 4.688" (119 mm) square backbox,
2.125" (54 mm) deep with double plaster ring.
4.688" (119 mm) square backbox, 2.125" (54 mm) deep
with double plaster ring.
SB-10 surface-mounting backbox, metal (dimensions above).
SB-I/O surface-mounting backbox, plastic (dimensions above).
Finish: Red LEXAN (or polycarbonate equivalent) plastic with
white lettering.
Shipping weight: 10.5 oz. (298 g).
EA-CT configuration tool: Communication range: up to 30
ft. (9 m). Battery life: 168 hours (typical usage). Dimensions:
2.25" (57 mm) wide x 1.313" (33 mm) high x 7.75" (197 mm)
deep. Temperature rating, operating: 32F to 122F (0C to
50C).
5/18/10 11:20:04 PM

Intelligent Fire Alarm Station. In some cases, certain modules
or applications may not be listed by certain approval agencies,
or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
S464H1006: Eclipse Series intelligent manual fire alarm pull

station, English labeling, key/lock to reset.
C(UL)US Listed: file S5749.

MEA approved: file 62-05-E Vol. II.
EA-CT: Eclipse Series configuration tool (two AA batteries

required, not included).
SB-10: Surface-mounting backbox, metal.
SB-I/O: Surface-mounting backbox, plastic.
BG-TR: Trim ring.
17051: Standard Honeywell 2126 key, set of two (one key is
included with station).
Pull Station Dimensions
6643dim2.wmf

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60108:A
74-4014-1 Rev. 01-07
January 2007
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:20:05 PM
Notes
5.0 Flashscan Intelligent Devices

Heat / Smoke Detectors
Manual Call Points
Detector Accessories
Relay and Output Control Modules
Release Control Modules
Flashscan
Intelligent Devices
TC806B1076(CDN) and
TC806B1084
Intelligent Plug-In Photoelectric
Smoke Detectors with FlashScan
General
Honeywell intelligent plug-in smoke detectors with integral
communication provide features that surpass conventional
detectors. Detector sensitivity can be programmed in the control panel software. Sensitivity is continuously monitored and
reported to the panel. Point ID capability allows each detectors address to be set with decade address switches, providing exact detector location for selective maintenance when
chamber contamination reaches an unacceptable level. The
TC806B1076 photoelectric detectors unique optical sensing
chamber is engineered to sense smoke produced by a wide
range of combustion sources. Dual electronic thermistors add
135F (57C) fixed-temperature thermal sensing on the
TC806B1084. TC806B1076 and TC806B1084 detectors are
compatible with Honeywell fire alarm control panels (FACP).
FlashScan (U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication protocol that greatly increases the speed of communication
between analog intelligent devices. Intelligent devices communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices in the
group has new information, the panels CPU stops the group
poll and concentrates on single points. The net effect is
response speed greater than five times that of earlier designs.
Features

Addressable-analog communication.
Stable communication technique with noise immunity.
Two-wire SLC connection.
FlashScan (XLS140-2, XLS3000) and classic CLIP systems (XLS140-2, XLS1000, XLS3000, FS90 Plus) compatible.
Rotary, decimal addressing (1-99 on CLIP systems, 1-159
on FlashScan systems).
Optional remote, single-gang LED accessory.
Dual LED design provides 360 viewing angle.
Visible bi-color LEDs blink green every time the detector is
addressed, and illuminate steady red on alarm (FlashScan
systems only).
Remote test feature from the panel.
Walk test with address display (an address on 121 will blink
the detector LED: 12-[pause]-1(FlashScan systems only).
Built-in functional test switch activated by external magnet.
Built-in tamper-resistant feature.
Sealed against back pressure.
Constructed of off-white Bayblend, designed to commercial standards, and offers an attractive appearance.
94-5V plastic flammability rating.
SEMS screws for wiring of the separate base.
Optional relay, isolator, and sounder bases.
Specifications
Size: 2.1 (5.3cm) high x 4.1 (10.4cm) diameter installed in
14506414-002 base, 6.1 (15.5cm) diameter installed in
14507371-001 base.
TC806B1076 with 14507371-001 base
TC806B1084 with 14507371-001 base
Shipping Weight: 5.2oz. (147g).

Operating Temperature: TC806B1076, 0C to 49C (32F to
120F); TC806B1084, 0C to 38C (32F to 100F). Low temperature signal for TC806B1084 at 45F +/- 10F (7.22C +/5.54C).
UL/ULC Listed Velocity Range: 0-4000 ft/min. (1219.2 m/
min.), suitable for installation in ducts.
Relative Humidity: 10%-93% noncondensing.
Thermal Ratings: Fixed-temperature setpoint 135F (57C).
DETECTOR SPACING AND APPLICATIONS

Honeywell recommends spacing detectors in compliance with
NFPA 72. In low airflow applications with smooth ceiling,
space detectors 30 feet (9.144m) for ceiling heights 10 feet
(3.148m) and higher. For specific information regarding
detector spacing, placement, and special applications refer to
NFPA 72.
System Smoke Detector Application Guide,
document A05-1003, is available at systemsensor.com
Voltage Range: 15-32 volts DC peak.
Standby Current (max. avg.): 300 A @ 24VDC (one communication every five seconds with LED enabled).
LED Current (max.): 6.5mA @ 24VDC (ON).
BASES AVAILABLE
NOTE: CDN or suffix indicates ULC Listed model.
14507371-001(CDN): Standard flanged base. Measures 6.1

(15.5cm) diameter.
14506414-002(CDN): Standard flangeless base. Measures
4.1 (10.4cm) diameter.
B501BH-2(A) or B501BHT-2(A): Sounder base assembly.
Includes B501 base.
B224RB(A) Relay Base: Screw Terminals, up to 14AWG
(2.0mm2); Relay Type, Form-C; Rating, 2.0A @ 30VDC resistive, 0.3A @ 110VDC inductive, 1.0A @ 30VDC inductive;
Dimensions, 6.2 (15.748cm) x 1.2 (3.048cm) x 1.2
(3.048cm).
5/18/10 11:20:05 PM
14507371-005(CDN) Isolator Base: Dimensions, 6.2

(15.748cm) x 1.2 (3.048cm) x 1.2 (3.048cm); Maximum, 25
devices between isolator bases.
Installation
TC806B1076CDN:Same as TC806B1076 but with ULC listing.
TC806B1076 plug-in detectors use a separate base to simplify

installation, service, and maintenance. A special tool allows
maintenance personnel to plug in and remove detectors without using a ladder.
TC806B1084:Same as TC806B1076 but includes a built-in

135F (57C) fixed-temperature thermal device.
Mount base on an electrical backbox which is at least 1.5

(3.81cm) deep. Suitable mounting base boxes include:
4.0 (10.16cm) square box.

3.5 (8.89cm) or 4.0 (10.16cm) octagonal box.
Single-gang box (except relay or isolator base).
With B501BH-2 or B501BHT-2 base, use a 4.0 (10.16cm)
square box.
With B224RB or 14507371-005 base, use a 3.5 (8.89cm)
octagonal box, or a 4.0 (10.16cm) octagonal or square box.
TC806B1076:Low-profile intelligent photoelectric sensor.

Must be mounted to one of the bases listed below.
BASES
B710LP: Standard U.S. low-profile base.
14507371-001:Standard U.S. low-profile base, .

14507371-001BP:Standard U.S. low-profile base, pkg. of 10.
14507371-001CDN:Standard U.S. low-profile base, ULC listing.
14506414-002:Standard European flangeless base, .
14506414-002BP:Standard European flangeless base, pkg. of 10.
14506414-002CDN:Standard European flangeless base, ULC listing.
B501BH-2(A):Sounder base, includes B501(A) base.
NOTE: 1) Because of inherent supervision provided by the SLC

loop, end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring T-taps or
branches are permitted for style 4 (Class B) wiring. 2) When
using relay or sounder bases, consult data sheet 77-4555
(TC811A1006) for device limitations between isolator modules and
isolator bases.
B501BHT-2(A):Same as B501BH-2(A), but includes temporal

sounder.
ACCESSORIES

UL Listed: S1196
ULC Listed: S6959 for TC806B1076
MEA Listed: 214-02-E
FM Approved
CSFM: 7272-1130:205
B224RB(A):Intelligent relay base.

14507371-005(CDN):Intelligent isolator base. Isolates SLC
from loop shorts.
F110:Retrofit replacement flange for older style bases. Converts older high profile base for use with FlashScan detectors.
RA100Z(A):Remote LED annunciator. 3-32VDC. Fits U.S.
single-gang electrical box. Supported by 14507371-001(CDN)
and 14506414-002(CDN) bases only.
SMK400E:Surface mounting kit provides for entry of surface
wiring conduit. For use with 14506414-002(CDN) base only.
RMK400(A):Recessed mounting kit. For use with 14506414002(CDN) base only.
SMB600-C:Surface mounting kit for use with 14507371-001(CDN).
BCK-200B:Black detector covers, box of 10. For use with
TC806B1076 only.
WCK-200B: White detector covers, box of 10. For use with
TC806B1076 only.
M02-04-00:Test magnet.
M02-09-00:Test magnet with telescope stick.
XR2B:Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or
removal of FlashScan Series detector heads from base in high
ceiling installations.
T55-127-010:Detector removal tool without pole.
XP-4:Extension pole for XR2B. Comes in three 5-ft. sections.
FlashScan is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. Bayblend is a registered trademark of Bayer Corporation.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-1941-2 Rev. 07-09

July 2009
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:20:06 PM
TC807B1059(CDN)
Intelligent Plug-In Ionization
Smoke Detector with FlashScan
General
TC807B1059(CDN) intelligent plug-in ion detectors with integral
communication has features that surpass conventional detectors. Detector sensitivity can be programmed in the control
panel software. Sensitivity is continuously monitored and
reported to the panel. Point ID capability allows each detectors
address to be set with decade address switches, providing exact
detector locations for selective maintenance when chamber
contamination reaches an unacceptable level.
The TC807B1059(CDN) ionization detector incorporates a
unique single-source, dual-chamber design to respond quickly
and dependably to a broad range of fires. TC807B1059(CDN)
detectors are compatible with Honeywell intelligent Fire Alarm
Control Panels (FACPs).
FlashScan (U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication protocol that greatly improves the speed of communication between
analog intelligent devices and certain systems. Intelligent
devices communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices
within the group has new information, the panels CPU stops the
group poll and concentrates on single points. The net effect is
response speed greater than five times that of other protocols.
6934pho1.jpg
TC807B1059(CDN)
with 14507371-001 base
UL/ULC-Listed Velocity Range: ION: 0 1200 ft./min. (365.76

m/min.).
Relative Humidity: 10% 93% noncondensing.
Voltage Range: 15 - 32 volts DC peak.
Standby Current (max. avg.): 300 A
LED Current (max.): 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (ON).
Features
Installation
TC807B1059(CDN) plug-in detectors use a separate base to

simplify installation, service, and maintenance. A special tool
allows maintenance personnel to plug in and remove detectors
without using a ladder.

Stable communication technique with noise immunity.
Compatible with FlashScan and CLIP systems
Direct-dial entry of address 01 159 for FlashScan loops, 01
99 for CLIP mode loops
Optional remote, single-gang LED accessory (RA400Z).
Visible bicolor LEDs blink green every time the detector is
addressed, and illuminate steady red on alarm.
Remote test feature from the panel.
Walk test with address display (an address of 121 will blink
the detector LED: 12-(pause)-1) (FlashScan systems only).
Constructed of off-white Bayblend, designed to commercial
standards, and offers an attractive appearance.
94-5V plastic flammability rating.
Optional relay, isolator, or sounder bases.
Listed to UL 268.
Specifications
Size: 2.0" (51 mm) high x 4.1" (10.4 cm) diameter installed in
14506414-002(CDN) base, 6.1" (15.5 cm) diameter installed in
14507371-001(CDN) base.
Mount base on an electrical backbox which is at least 1.5" (3.81

cm) deep. Suitable mounting base boxes include:
4.0" (10.16 cm) square box.

3.5" (8.89 cm) or 4.0" (10.16 cm) octagonal box.
With B501BH-2 or B501BHT-2 base, use a 4.0" (10.16 cm)
square box.
With B224RB or B224BI base, use a 3.5" (8.89 cm) octagonal box, or a 4.0" (10.16 cm) octagonal or square box.
NOTES: 1) Because of the inherent supervision provided by the
SLC loop, end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring T-taps or
branches are permitted for Style 4 (Class B) wiring. 2) When
using relay or sounder bases, consult install sheet I56-1385-002
for device limitations between isolator modules and isolator bases

UL Listed: S470
ULC Listed: S6959
CSFM: 7271-1130:142
FM Approved
Shipping Weight: 5.4 oz. (153 g).
NOTE: CDN or A suffix indicates ULC Listed model.
Operating Temperature: 0C to 49C (32F to 120F).
TC807B1059: Low-profile intelligent ionization sensor. Must be

mounted to one of the bases listed below.
TC807B1059CDN: Same as above but with ULC Listing.
5/18/10 11:20:06 PM
INTELLIGENT BASES
ACCESSORIES
14506414-002: Flangeless mounting base.
F110: Retrofit replacement flange for older style base. Converts

older high profile base for use with FlashScan detectors.
14506414-002CDN: Flangeless mounting base, ULC Listed.

14506414-002BP: Flangeless mounting base, ULC Listed.
14507371-001: Flanged mounting base.
14507371-001CDN: Flanged mounting base, ULC Listed.
RA400Z(A): Remote LED annunciator. 3 32 VDC. Fits U.S.

single-gang electrical box. Supported by 14507371-001(CDN)
and 14506414-002(CDN) base bases only.
14507371-001BP: Flanged mounting base.
SMK400E: Surface mounting kit provides for entry of surface

wiring conduit. For use with 14506414-002(CDN) base only.
B501BH-2: Plug-in System Sensor standard sounder detec-tor

base, steady tone. Includes 14506414-002 base.
RMK400(A): Recessed mounting kit. For use with 14506414002(CDN) base only.
B501BHT-2: Plug-in System Sensor temporal tone sounder

base.
SMB600-C: Surface mounting kit for use with 14507371001(CDN).
B501BHA: Plug-in System Sensor standard sounder detec-tor

base, steady tone, with ULC Listing. Includes 14506414-002
base.
BCK-200B: Black detector covers, box of 10.
B501BHTA: Plug-in System Sensor temporal tone sounder

base, with ULC listing.
M02-04-00: Test magnet.

M02-09-00: Test magnet with telescope stick.
B224RB: Relay base.
XR2B: Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or removal

of FlashScan Series detector heads from base in high ceiling
installations.
B224RBA: Relay base, ULC Listed.
T55-127-010: Detector removal tool without pole.
14507371-005: Isolator base.
XP-4: Extension pole for XR2B. Comes in three 5-ft. sections.
14507371-005CDN: Isolator base, ULC Listed.
FlashScan is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. Bayblend is a registered trademark of Bayer Corporation.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3089 Rev. 06-09

April 2010
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:21:57 PM
TC840M1021(CDN)
Acclimate Multi-Sensor
Low-Profile Intelligent Detector
General
The TC840M1021(CDN) Acclimate detector is an intelligent,
addressable, multi-sensing, low-profile detector designed for
use with Honeywell (CLIP or FlashScan modes) Fire Alarm
Control Panels.
The Acclimate detector uses a combination of photoelectric
and thermal sensing technologies to increase immunity to
false alarms. Unlike traditional intelligent detectors, the Acclimate detector has a microprocessor in the detector head
that processes alarm data. As a result, the Acclimate detector adjusts its sensitivity automatically, without operator intervention or control panel programming.
j6935ph1.jpg
TC840M1021(CDN) in 14507371-001 base
Backwards-compatible on most panels.

Low-temperature signal at 45F +/ 10F (7.22C +/
5.54C).
Areas where the Acclimate detector is especially useful

include office complexes, schools, college campuses, manufacturing and industrial facilities, and anywhere else the use of
a particular area may change. The Acclimate detector automatically adjusts its sensitivity to the environment.
Specifications
FlashScan (U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication protocol developed to greatly enhance the speed of communication
between analog intelligent devices and compatible systems.
Intelligent devices communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of
the devices within the group has new information, the panels
CPU stops the group poll and concentrates on single points.
The net effect is response speed greater than five times that of
earlier designs.
Size: 2.0" (5.3 cm) high x 4.1" (10.4 cm) diameter installed in
14506414-002 base, 6.1" (15.5 cm) diameter installed in
14507371-001 base.
Features
Automatically adjusts sensitivity levels without operator
intervention or programming. Sensitivity increases with
heat.
Microprocessor-based, combination photo and thermal
technology.
FlashScan (XLS140-2 and XLS3000) and CLIP system
(XLS140, XLS3000, XLS1000, and FS90 Plus) compatible.
Direct-Dial entry of address: (1 159 on FlashScan systems; 1 99 on CLIP systems).
Addresses can be viewed and changed without electronic
programmers.
Dual bi-color LED design provides 360 viewing angle.
LEDs lock red when in alarm. In FlashScan, LEDs flash
green in standby for normal condition.
Constructed of off-white Bayblend, designed to commercial standards, and offers an attractive appearance.
Several base options, including relay, isolator, and sounder.
Listed to UL 268.
Capable of heat-only alarm mode, enabled by a special
command from the panel. Smoke alarms are ignored.
Sensitivity: auto-adjusting levels: 1 to 2%/ft. and 2 to 4%/ft.

with classic CLIP systems; 1 to 2, 2 to 3, and 3 to 4%/ft. with
systems; fixed-sensitivity levels: 1, 2, and 4%/ft. with classic
CLIP systems; 0.5, 1, 2, 3, and 4%/ft. with FlashScan systems.
Shipping weight: 5.2 oz. (147 g).

Operating temperature: 0C to 38C (32F to 100F).
Operating altitude: up to 10,000 feet.
UL-Listed velocity range: 0 4000 ft./min. (1219.2 m/min.),
suitable for installation in ducts.
Relative humidity: 10% 93% noncondensing.
Thermal sensing rating: fixed-temperature setpoint 135F
(57C).
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
Voltage range: 15 32 volts DC peak.
Standby current (max. avg.): 300 A.
Loop resistance: 50 ohms maximum; varies according to
control panel used. Refer to panel installation manuals.
LED current (max.): 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (ON).
Installation
The TC840M1021(CDN) plug-in detector uses a separate
base to simplify installation, service, and maintenance. A special tool allows maintenance personnel to plug-in and remove
detectors without using a ladder. Mount base on an electrical
backbox at least 1.5" (3.81 cm) deep. Suitable mounting base
boxes include:
4.0" (10.16 cm) square box.
3.5" (8.89 cm) or 4.0" (10.16 cm) octagonal box.
APPLICATION NOTE: The TC840M1021(CDN) detector has the
unique ability to adjust sensitivity according to the environment,
based on heat and smoke levels. Avoid installing these detectors
in locations that are susceptible to rapid and high temperature
changes. An example of an incorrect application would be near or
in line with the output of a self-contained heater.
5/18/10 11:21:58 PM
DETECTOR SPACING: Honeywell recommends spacing detectors in compliance with NFPA 72. In low airflow applications with
smooth ceilings, space detectors 30 feet (9.144 m). For specific
information regarding detector spacing, placement, and special
applications, refer to NFPA 72. System Smoke Detector Application Guide, document A05-1003, is available at systemsensor.com.

this. In some cases, certain modules or applications may not
UL Listed: S1196
ULC Listed: S6959CS308S6963
FM Approved
CSFM: 7272-1130:144

base.
B224RB: Relay base Screw terminals: up to 14 AWG (2.0
mm). Relay type: Form-C. Rating: 2.0 A @ 30 VDC resistive;
0.3 A @ 110 VDC inductive; 1.0 A @ 30 VDC inductive.
Dimensions: 6.2" (15.748 cm) x 1.2" (3.048 cm)..
14507371-005: Isolator base. Dimensions: 6.2" (15.748 cm) x
1.2" (3.048 cm). Maximum: 25 devices between isolator bases.
ACCESSORIES:
F110: Retrofit replacement flange for older high profile bases.
Converts bases for use with FlashScan detectors.
RA100Z: Remote LED annunciator. 3 32 VDC. Fits U.S. single-gang electrical box. Supported by 14507371-001 and
14506414-002 bases only.
TC840M1021: Low-profile intelligent multi-sensor detector.

Must be mounted to one of the bases listed below.

wiring conduit. For use with 14506414-002 base only.
TC840M1021CDN: Same as TC840M1021 but with ULC Listing.
RMK400: Recessed mounting kit. For use with 14506414-002

base only.
SMB600: Surface mounting kit for use with 14507371-001.
INTELLIGENT BASES
14506414-002: Flangeless mounting base. 4.1" (10.4 cm) diameter.
BCK-200B: Black detector covers, box of 10.

M02-09-00: Test magnet with telescope stick.

XR2B: Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or

removal of FlashScan Series detector heads from base in
high ceiling installations.
T55-127-010: Detector removal tool without pole.
B501BH-2: Plug-in System Sensor standard sounder detector

XP-4: Extension pole for XR2B. Comes in three 5-ft. sections.
14507371-001: Flanged mounting base. 6.1" (15.5 cm) diameter

base.
FlashScan is a registered trademark and Acclimate is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc. Bayblend is a registered trademark of Bayer Corp.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-3387-3 Rev. 06/09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:21:58 PM
TC846A Series
Pinnacle High Sensitivity
Laser Smoke Detectors
General
The TC846A1013 and TC846A1005 Laser Detectors provides
a revolutionary advance in early warning smoke detection
technology. The unique design of this detector, combined with
enhanced intelligent sensing algorithms in the Honeywell control panels, allows smoke detection sensitivity that is up to 50
times higher than present photoelectric technology. Because
of this high sensitivity, the TC846A Series can provide very
early warning of slow smoldering fires. Its performance is comparable to present aspiration technology, at a substantially
lower installed cost.
The TC846A uses an extremely bright laser diode, combined
with special lens and mirror optics (U.S. patent pending), to
achieve a signal-to-noise ratio that is much higher than traditional photoelectric sensors. In addition, the tightly focused
light beam, combined with the intelligent sensing algorithms,
allow the system to differentiate between dust and smoke particles. Because of this differentiation, the TC846A can be set to
extremely high sensitivity, yet can reject false signals caused
by larger airborne particles such as dust, lint, and small
insects .
The TC846A is an intelligent (analog/addressable) detector.
Using CLIP mode, up to 99 TC846A detectors may be
installed per loop. On FlashScan systems (XLS140/
XLS3000), up to 159 addresses are available. The TC846A
may be mixed in any combination with other Honeywell intelligent sensors on the same loop and is quickly installed using
the panel autoprogram feature. The TC846A provides dual bicolor LEDs, which blink green in normal operation and illuminate steady red in alarm.
FlashScan (U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication protocol that greatly enhances the speed of communication
between analog intelligent devices. Intelligent devices communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices within the
group has new information, the panel CPU stops the group poll
and concentrates on single points. The net effect is response
speed greater than five times that of other designs.
Features
Intelligent Early Warning smoke detection.

Advanced laser light source and patented optical design.
Sleek low-profile housing (1.66"/42.164 mm height).
Honeywell Analog Addressable communications protocol
provides extremely reliable operation proven in millions of
worldwide detector installations.
Sensitivity:
0.02% to 2.00%
Rotary DECADE address switches. Set 01 99 on legacy
systems and 01 159 on FlashScan systems . These
switches allow quick selection of address without resorting
to binary switches, special programmers, or bar coding
devices.
Dual bi-color (red/green) LEDs flash green when Normal
and are steady red in Alarm.
Built-in magnetic test switch, or automatic test commanded
from panel.
Optional relay, isolator, or sounder bases.
TC846A with 14507371-001 base
Specifications
Operating voltage range: 15 to 32 VDC peak.
Maximum average standby current: 230 A @ 24 VDC (no
communication). 330 A @ 24 VDC (one communication
every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled).
Maximum alarm current: 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (LED ON).
Operating humidity range: 10% to 93% relative humidity,
non-condensing.
Operating temperature range: 0 to 38C (32 to 100F).
Loop resistance: 40 ohms maximum.
Dimensions: Height: 1.66 inches (42.16 mm) installed in
14507371-001 base. Diameter: 4.0
inches (154.94 mm)
installed in 14507371-001 base; 4 inches (101.6 mm). Weight:
5.6 oz. (102 g).
BASES AVAILABLE:
14507371-001: Standard flanged base. Measures 6.1 inches
(154.94 mm) diameter.
14506414-002: Standard flangeless base. Measures 4.1
inches (104.14 mm) diameter.
B501BH-2: Sounder base assembly, constant tone. Includes
14506414-002 base.
B501BHT-2: Sounder base assembly, temporal three-tone.
Includes 14506414-002 base.
B224RB Relay Base: Screw terminals: Up to 14 AWG (2.00
mm). Relay type: Form-C. Rating: 2 A @ 30 VDC resistive;
Dimensions: 6.2 in. (157.48 mm) x 1.2 in. (30.48 mm).
14507371-005 Isolator Base: Dimensions: 6.2 in. (157.48
mm) x 1.2 in. (30.48 mm). Maximum: 25 devices between isolator bases.
Recommended Coverage Per Detector

In order to support sophisticated smoke/dust discrimination
algorithms (cooperating multi-detector), it is recommended
that at least two TC846A detectors be installed in each room
or enclosed area.
Recommended coverage per detector is 400 square feet
(37.16 square meters).
Installation
The TC846A plug-in detector uses a separate base to simplify
installation, service, and maintenance. A special tool allows
maintenance personnel to plug-in and remove detectors without using a ladder.
5/18/10 11:21:59 PM
Mount base on a box which is at least 1.5" (38.1 mm) deep.

Suitable mounting base boxes include:
4" (101.6 mm) square box.
3-1/2" (88.9 mm) or 4" (101.6 mm) octagonal box.
14506414-002CDN: Same as 145073171-001, but with ULC

listing.
B501BH-2: Sounder base, includes B501 base.
B501BH-2A: Same as B501BH-2, but with ULC listing.
B501BHT-2: Sounder base assembly. Temporal three-tone.
Includes 14506414-002 base.
B501BHT-2A: Same as B501BHT-2, but with ULC listing.

B224RBA: Same as B224RB, but with ULC listing.

listing.
UL Listed: S1196
ULC Listed: S6959
MEA Listed: 232-06-E Vol. II (XLS3000)
CSFM: 7272-1130:224
TC846A1013: Laser Detector. Intelligent laser sensor with
FlashScan only capabilities. Mounts to one of the bases listed
below.
TC846A1005: Laser Detector. Intelligent laser sensor with

CLIP capabilities only. Mounts to one of the bases listed below.
TC846A1013CDN: Same as TC846A1013, but with ULC listing.
TC846A1005CDN: Same as TC846A1005, but with ULC listing.
B224RB: Intelligent relay base.

14507371-005: Intelligent isolator base. Isolates SLC from
loop shorts.
ACCESSORIES
F110: Retrofit replacement flange for BX-501 base.
RA400Z: *Remote LED annunciator. 3 32 VDC. Fits U.S.
single-gang electrical box.
MOD400R: Detector sensitivity test tool. Use with most analog or digital multimeters. Satisfies requirement of NFPA72 for
sensitivity testing.
wiring conduit. For use with 14506414-002 base only.
RMK400: Recessed mounting kit. For use with 14506414-002
base only.
BASES:
M02-09-00: Test magnet with telescoping handle.
14507371-001BP: Standard U.S. flanged low-profile base,

package of ten (10).
XR2: Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or removal

of 700 Series detector heads from base in high ceiling installations.

listing.
B501: Standard European Flangeless base.
14506414-002BP: Standard European flangeless base, package of ten (10).
Page 2 of 4 03/02/2009 74-3373-1
XP-4: Extension pole for XR-2. Comes in three 5-ft. (1.524 m)

sections.
*Supported by 14507371-001 and 14506414-002 bases only.
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:21:59 PM
TC846A Design
The TC846A incorporates an extremely bright laser diode and integral lens that focuses the light beam to a very small volume
near the receiving photo sensor. The light then passes into a light trap and is absorbed. The photo sensor is activated by a scattering of smoke particles in this small-volume light beam. In a typical photoelectric detector, the light beam is very wide and can
reflect off the chamber walls into the photo sensor because dust accumulation changes the wall color from flat black to gray. With
the TC846A the concentrated light beam does not touch the walls, therefore it is much less susceptible to dust accumulation.
Smoke scatters light in all directions and, in a typical photoelectric detector, only a small portion of that scattered light reaches the
photo sensor itself. In the TC846A, a special mirror reflects and concentrates most of the scattered light into the photo sensor.
See laser detail drawings on this page. Compared to smoke, airborne dust particles are very large and very sparse. Since a) they
are in motion; b) the illuminated volume is very small; and c) the TC846A flashes the laser only every few seconds; then the occasional dust particle cannot remain in the light volume for more than one or two samples. This transient signal from dust is the key
to the dust discrimination performed by the TC846A system.
Test LED
Smoke direction baffles
Laser diode &
integral lens
assembly
Sensing chamber
Laser beam
Light trap
Mirror Detail
Photo receiver
5306mir.wmf
Mirror
(see detail at right)
5306d2.wmf
Protective housing
RF shield
Safety interlocks (4)
Chamber cover
Smoke sensing chamber

cover/screen
Bug screen
Smoke sensing chamber base

Spring contact to bug screen
Circuit board
Contacts to
mounting brackets
Photo diode
5306d1.wmf
www.honeywell.com
Smoke detector base
74-3373-1 03/02/2009 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:21:59 PM

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-3373-1 Rev. 03-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
5/18/10 11:22:00 PM
TC840C1000 COPTIR
Advanced Multi-Criteria Detector
with four unique sensing elements
General
This latest addition to the Advanced Detection line combines
four complementary technologies into one device to convey
accurate fire sensing information for locations where absolute
certainty is required.
It is designed for use with Honeywell fire alarm control panels
(FACPs) compatible with the FlashScan protocol.
Unique ability to detect all four major elements of a fire

Highest nuisance alarm immunity
Advanced algorithms interpret and respond to the multiple
inputs
Six levels of sensitivity
CO sensing for fastest response to slow developing, smoldering fires
Fully integrated infrared sensing to support the fire alarm
decision
Automatic drift compensation of smoke sensor and CO cell
Superior EMI protection
Twin LED indicators providing 360 visibility
LEDs can be panel controlled to blink, latch on, latch off
Built-in test switch
This plug-in fire detector combines four separate sensing elements in one unit:
60412cov.tif
Features
NOTE: The CO cell is specifically deployed as a component of

smoke detection in this device. This device is not listed for applications in which standalone CO detection is required for life safety.
The IR light sensor recognizes specific situations such as

welding and makes adjustments rapidly to further reduce the
potential for nuisance alarms. The thermal detection function
uses thermistor technology with a software-corrected linear
temperature response to offer exceptional nuisance alarm
immunity and excellent fire detection.
1. Electrochemical cell technology that monitors carbon

monoxide (CO) produced by smoldering fires
2. Infrared (IR) sensing that measures ambient light levels
and flame signatures
3. Photo-electric smoke detection
4. Thermal detection for temperature monitoring
The integration of continual monitoring for all four major elements of a fire leads to a detector that responds more quickly
to an actual fire with the highest immunity to nuisances. This
advanced multi-criteria detector operates at a high immunity
level, changing to become very sensitive to identify those that
should be ignored, reducing false alarms.
Its on-board intelligence runs advanced algorithms that

dynamically adjust detection parameters to respond to the
inputs from the sensors, enabling instant response as ambient
conditions change.
The program changes sensor thresholds, sensor gain, time,
delays, combinations, sampling rates, and averaging rates. If
any sensor fails, the detector automatically adjusts the sensitivity of the remaining sensors. It also recognizes a fault condition.
The CO cell has an expected lifetime of approximately six
years. It is not a field replaceable component. An internal
timer signals the control panel to indicate the approach of the
CO cells end of life. Upon expiration, you should contact the
system supplier to arrange for replacement of the unit. Detection is not compromised when the CO cell expires. The algorithms automatically adjust to properly weight the inputs from
the photo-electric, heat, and IR sensors.
TC840C1000(CDN): Advanced Multi-Criteria Detector

Accessories
14506414-002: Flangeless mounting base. 4.1 (10.4 cm) diameter
14507371-001: Flanged mounting base. 6.1 (15.5 cm) diameter.
B501BH-2: Plug-in System Sensor standard sounder detec-tor
base.
base.
B224RB: Relay base Screw terminals: up to 14 AWG (2.0
mm). Relay type: Form-C. Rating: 2.0 A @ 30 VDC resistive;
Dimensions: 6.2" (15.748 cm) x 1.2" (3.048 cm)..
14507371-005: Isolator base. Dimensions: 6.2" (15.748 cm) x
1.2" (3.048 cm). Maximum: 25 devices between isolator bases.
5/18/10 11:22:00 PM

UL Listed: S1196
FM Approved
CSFM: 7272-1130:272
Level 5: 4% per foot (30.48 cm) of smoke. Equipment rooms,

Kitchens, Paint Shops.
Level 6: Thermal alarm at 135F (57C).
NOTE: Once the CO cell has reached the end of life, any device
set to Level 3 or Level 4 will default to Level 5 and Level 5 will drop
to 3%. The following sensitivities apply to devices with expired CO
cells:
Specifications
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Size: H : 2.4" (6.1 cm), Diam : 4.0" (10.16 cm)
Shipping Weight: 4.6 ounces
Color: Ivory
Operating Humidity Range: 10 to 93% relative humidity
(non-condensing)
Level 1: 1% per foot (30.48 cm) of smoke. Very clean environments - Laboratories.
Level 2: 2% per foot (30.48 cm) of smoke. Clean environments - Offices.
Level 5: 3% per foot (30.48 cm) of smoke. Moderately clean
environments - Hotel Room, Dorm Room.
Level 6: Thermal alarm at 135F (57C).
Application Temperature Range: 32F to 100F (0C to

38C)
Operating Voltage Range: 15 to 32VDC
Maximum Standby Current: 200A at 24VDC (no communications)
60412dia.wmf
Maximum Alarm Current (LED on): 7mA at 24VDC
SENSITIVITY SETTINGS & SUGGESTED APPLICATION

Level 1: 1% per foot (30.48 cm) of smoke. Very clean environments - Laboratories.
Level 2: 2% per foot (30.48 cm) of smoke. Clean environments - Offices.
Level 3: 3% per foot (30.48 cm) of smoke. Moderately clean
environments - Hotel Room, Dorm Room.
Level 4: 3% per foot (30.48 cm) of smoke with different algorithm processing and weighting of sensor elements. Hotel
rooms near a shower, Boiler Rooms.
4.0"
(10.16 cm)
2.4"
(6.096 cm)
TC840C1000
Advanced Multi-Criteria Detector

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-5070-1 Rev. 07-09

April 2010
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:22:01 PM
TC847A1004(A)
Single-Ended, Reflector-Type
Addressable Beam Smoke Detector
TC847A with
Reflective Plate
GENERAL
The Honeywell TC847A1004 are intelligent, addressable
reflected beam smoke detectors for protecting open areas with
high and sloping ceilings, and wide-open areas, where spot-type
smoke detectors are difficult to install and maintain. Ideal
applications are atriums, cathedral ceilings, aircraft hangars,
warehouses, sporting arenas, concert halls, and enclosed
parking facilities. They are compatible with Honeywells
Intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels in FlashScan or CLIP
mode, as well as with the FS90, XLS200, and XLS1000 in CLIP
mode only. Installation of the single-ended reflective design is
much quicker than a dual-ended projected beam detector.
Alignment is easily accomplished with an optical sight and a
two-digit signal strength meter incorporated into the beam
detector. Listed for operation from 22F to 131F, the
TC847A1004 are usable in open area applications where
temperature extremes exceed the design limits of other types of
smoke detection.
The TC847A1004 are a transmitter/receiver unit and a reflector.
When smoke enters the area between the unit and the reflector
it causes a reduction in the signal strength. When the smoke
level (signal strength) reaches the predetermined threshold, an
alarm is activated. The detectors have four standard sensitivity
selections as well as two Acclimate settings. When either
Acclimate setting is selected, the detectors advanced
software algorithms automatically adjust to the optimum
sensitivity for the specific environment.
The TC847A1004 has an integral sensitivity test feature of a
filter attached to a servomotor inside the detector optics.
Activation of the RTS151 or RTS151KEY remote test stations
moves the filter into the pathway of the light beam, testing the
detectors sensitivity. This sensitivity test feature allows the user
to quickly and easily meet the annual maintenance and test
requirements of NFPA 72, without physical access to the
detector. The servomotor must be powered by +24 VDC, not
SLC power.
FEATURES
Listed to UL 268, ULC CAN/ULC S529.

Transmitter/receiver built into same unit.
Six user-selectable sensitivity levels.
16' to 328' (use BEAMLRK beyond 230') protection range.
Removable plug-in terminal blocks.
Digital display no special tools required.
Built-in automatic gain control compensates for signal deterioration from dust buildup.
Optional remote test station.
Optional long-range kit (BEAMLRK) for applications in
excess of 230' (70 m).
Optional multi-mount kit (BEAMMMK) providing ceiling or
wall mount capability with increased angular adjustment.
Optional heater kits (BEAMHK and BEAMHKR) for
prevention of condensation (not intended to increase or
reduce the specified operating temperature).
Paintable cover.
6975reflect.jpg
TC847A with
BEAMMMK
6975beammk.jpg
SPECIFICATIONS
OPERATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
Protection Range: 16 to 230 feet (5 to 70 m), 230 to 328 feet
(70 to 100 m) using optional BEAMLRK kit.
Adjustment Angle: 10 horizontal and vertical. Note that the
optics move independently of the unit.
Sensitivity (6 levels):
NOTE: Sensitivity settings are a feature of specific control panels.
Level 1 25%.
Level 2 30%.
Level 3 40%.
Level 4 50%.
Acclimate Level 5 30% to 50%.
Acclimate Level 6 40% to 50%.
Fault Condition (trouble):
96% or more obscuration blockage.
In alignment mode.
Improper initial alignment.
Self-compensation limit reached.
Alignment Aid:
Optical gunsight.
Integral signal strength indication.
Two-digit display.
Indicators:
Alarm local red LED and remote alarm.
Trouble local yellow LED and remote trouble.
Normal local flashing green LED.
Test/reset features:
Integral sensitivity test filter (TC847A1004 only, requires
external power supply).
Sensitivity filter (incremental scale on reflector).
Local alarm test switch.
Local alarm reset switch.
Remote test and reset switch (compatible with RTS151 and
RTS151KEY test stations).
5/18/10 11:22:01 PM
Smoke Detector Spacing: On smooth ceilings, 30 60 feet

(9.1 to 18.3 m) between projected beams and not more than
one-half that spacing between a projected beam and a sidewall.
Other spacing may be used depending on ceiling height, airflow
characteristics, and response requirements. See NFPA 72.
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature: 22F to 131F (30C to 55C).
Humidity: 10 93% RH noncondensing.
Voltage: 15 to 32 VDC.
Average Standby Current (24 VDC): 2 mA maximum (LED
flashing, SLC @ 24 V).
Alarm Current (LED on): 8.5 mA maximum.
Trouble Current (LED on): 4.5 mA maximum.
Alignment Current: 20 mA maximum.
External Supply
Voltage 15 to 32 VDC
Current 0.5 A maximum.
Remote Output (Alarm):
Voltage - 15 to 32 VDC (Output voltage same as device input
voltage)
Current - 15 mA maximum, 6 mA minimum (Output current is
limited by 2.2K ohm resistor)
Heater Kit BEAMHK: Voltage - 15 to 32 V; Current - 92 mA
maximum @ 32 V (heater only); Power Consumption nominal 1.6 W @ 24 V, maximum 3.0 W @ 32 V.
Reflector Heater Kit BEAMHKR: Voltage - 15 to 32 V;
Current - 450 mA maximum @ 32 V (per reflector); Power
Consumption (per reflector) - nominal 7.7 W @ 24 V,
maximum 15.0 W @ 32 V.
Shipping Weight: 3.7 lbs (1.68 kg)
Detector Dimensions: 10.0" H x 7.5" W x 3.3" D (254 mm H x
191 mm W x 84 mm D).
Reflector Dimensions for 16' to 230'
Applications: 7.9" x 9.1" (200 x 230 mm).
(5
to
70m)
Reflector Dimensions for Applications Beyond 230'/70m:

15.7" x 18.1" (400 x 460 mm).
Page 2 of 4 11/16/09 74-3940-4
SENSITIVITY SELECTION
The detector has six sensitivity selections (sensitivity settings
are a feature of specific control panels). Each of these
selections is only acceptable over a specific distance separation
between the detector and the reflector per UL 268. The chart
below determines which selections are acceptable for your
installed distance. The sensitivity of the detector can be set only
when the housing is removed and the detector is not in the fine
adjustment step of the alignment mode, indicated by the
illumination of the dual digital display. To set the sensitivity,
depress the sensitivity button one time. See Switch Locations
diagram. Once the switch is pressed, the digital display will
illuminate and read the current sensitivity setting in percent
obscuration. To change the sensitivity, continue to depress the
sensitivity switch until the desired setting is achieved. The digital
display will turn off automatically if no further switch presses
occur.
Sensitivity
Percent
Setting Obscuration
Display
Reading
Acceptable Acceptable
DISTANCE DISTANCE
between
between
Detector
Detector
and
and
Reflector
Reflector
(ft)
(m)
Level 1
25%
Level 2
30%
Level 3
40%
Level 4
50%
Acclimate
30% to 50%
Level 1
Acclimate
40% to 50%
Level 2
25
30
40
50
16.4 to 120 5.0 to 36.6

25 to 150 7.6 to 45.7
60 to 220
18.3 to 67
80 to 328 24.4 to 100
A1
80 to 150
24.4 to 45.7
A2
80 to 200
24.4 to 67
In addition to the four standard sensitivity selections, the

detector has two Acclimate settings. When either Acclimate
setting is chosen the detector will automatically adjust its
sensitivity using advanced software algorithms to select the
optimum sensitivity for the environment. The sensitivity will be
continuously adjusted within the ranges specified in the chart
above.
Total obscuration can be converted to percent per foot,
assuming uniform smoke density for the entire length of the
beam. The chart below converts total obscuration percent per
foot for all acceptable sensitivity settings.
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:22:22 PM
6985graph.tif
6985swlo.wmf
Table 1: Total Obscuration

6985wir1-2.wmf
Switch Locations
Listed
Remote
Power
Source
From Panel
or Previous
device.
Communication Line
32 VDC Maximum
Twisted pair is
recommended
To Next
Device
6985adjloc.tif
Wiring Diagram
TC847A
Pin 2
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 5
RTS151/KEY
Remote Alarm Out

AUX (-)
Reset Input
Test Input
6985wirerts151.tif
Pin 1
See RTS151/KEY Installation Instructions

for electrical ratings of the RTS151/KEY
Alignment and Adjustment Locations

PARTS LIST
ItemQuantity
Transmitter/Receiver Unit1
Paintable Trim Ring1
Reflector1
Wiring Diagram with RTS451/KEY
Plug-In Terminal Blocks3

Isolator Shunts2
Instruction Manual1
Housing Screw Locations
www.honeywell.com
6985part.wmf
6985screwlocs.tif
Orange Sticky Paper1
74-3940-4 11/16/09 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:22:22 PM
These listings and approvals apply to the devices specified in


sensitivity test.
UL Listed: S1196
ULC Listed: S1196
CSFM: 7260-1130:237
MEA: 158-04-E
FM Approved
TC847A1004A: Same as TC847A1004 with ULC Listing.

BEAMLRK: Long range accessory kit (required for applications
in excess of 230 ft/70 m).
BEAMMMK: Multi-mount kit (provides ceiling or wall mount
capability with increased angular adjustment).
BEAMSMK: Surface-mount kit.
RTS151: Remote test station.
RTS151A: Same RTS151 with ULC listing.
RTS151KEY: Remote test station with key lock.
RTS151KEYA: Same as the RTS151KEY with ULC listing.
BEAMHK: Heating kit for use with the transmitter/receiver unit
of TC847A1004. For prevention of condensation.
BEAMHKR: Heating kit for use with the
TC847A1004. For prevention of condensation
reflector
on
6500-MMK: Heavy-duty multi-mount kit for installations prone

to vibration or where there is difficulty mounting the set angle.
When installed with the transmitter/receiver unit, the 6500-SMK
must be used as well.
6500-SMK: Surface-mount kit (required when using 6500-MMK
to mount transmitter/receiver).
6975beammk.jpg
rts151key.wmf
rts151.wmf
6985hk.tif
BEAMMMK
(ceiling or wall mount kit sold separately)
RTS151
RTS151KEY
BEAMHK
Acclimate is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-3940-4 Rev. 11/09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
5/18/10 11:22:24 PM
The RMK400 recessed mounting kit provides the most aesthetically pleasing installation. Surface mounting boxes are
available when flush mounting isnt possible.
Specifications
Diameter:
14506414-002: 4.1" (104 mm).
14507371-005, B224RB, 14507371-001: 6.1" (155 mm).
B501BH-2, B501BHT-2: 6.0" (152 mm).
B200SR: 6.875" (17.46 cm).
Wire gauge:
60054b5.jpg
Recessed Mounting
60054smk.jpg
Flanged Mounting Base
60054sr.jpg
Relay, isolator, and sounder bases can be used to meet local

code requirements. Relay bases provide one Form-C contact
relay for control of auxiliary functions such as door closure and
elevator recall. Isolator bases allow loops to continue to operate
under fault conditions and automatically restore when the fault is
removed. Sounder bases are available in temporal and non-temporal pattern versions depending on whether the signal is to be
used for evacuation purposes.
60054LP.jpg
General
Intelligent FlashScan and CLIP mounting bases and kits provide a variety of ways to install Honeywell detectors in any application. Intelligent detectors can be mounted in either flanged or
flangeless bases depending on junction box selection (see
Junction Box Selection Guide). Across this product line, detectors plug in easily to the base with SEMS screws; and models
employ various 12 to 24 AWG wire ranges.
Relay Base
Flangeless Mounting Base

60054rmk.jpg
B200SR, 14506414-002(CDN),
14507371-001(CDN), B501BH-2,
B501BHT-2, B501BHA, B501BHTA,
B224RB(A), 14507371-005(CDN),
Mounting Kits, and Accessories
60054rb.jpg
Intelligent Bases
Standard Sounder Base
Flangeless Surface
Mounting
SLC standby current: 300 F.

Sound output: measured in a UL reverberant room at 10
feet, 24 Volts (continuous tone). Greater than 85 dBA minimum.
FOR B224RB, 14507371-005:

Operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC (powered by SLC).
Standby ratings: <500 A maximum @ 24 VDC.
Set time (B224RB only): short delay 55 to 90 msec; long delay
6 to 9 seconds.
14507371-005, B224RB: 14 to 24 AWG.

14507371-001, 14506414-002, B501BH-2, B501BHT-2,
B200SR: 12 to 24 AWG.
Temperature range:
Reset time (B224RB only): 20 msec maximum.
14507371-005, B224RB, B501BH-2, B501BHT-2, B200SR:

32F to 120F (0C to 49C).
14506414-002 and 14507371-001, -4F to 150F (0C to
66C).
Humidity range: 10% to 93% RH, non-condensing.
FOR B501BH-2, B501BHT-2:
System temperature and humidity ranges: This system

meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0C to 49C (32F to
1.1F) per ULC. However, the useful life of the systems standby
batteries and the electronic components may be adversely
affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and all peripherals be
installed in an environment with a nominal room temperature of
15C to 27C (60F to 80F).
Electrical Ratings
FOR B200SR:
External supply voltage: 16 to 33 VDC (VFWR)
Standby current: 500 A maximum.
Alarm current: 35 mA maximum.
SLC operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC.
Relay characteristics (B224RB only): two-coil latching relay;

one Form-C contact; ratings (UL/CSA): 0.9 A @ 125 VAC, 0.9 A
@ 110 VDC, and 3.0 A @ 30 VDC.
External supply voltage: 17 to 32 VDC.

Standby current: 1.0 mA maximum.
Alarm current: 15 mA maximum.
Maximum ripple voltage: 10% of supply voltage.
Startup capacitance: 200 F.
Sounder delay time: For B501BH-2 and B501BHT-2, 0.75 to
5.7 seconds.
Sound output: greater than 90 dBA measured in anechoic
room at 10 feet (3.048 m), 24 volts. 85 dBA minimum in UL
reverberant room.
Recessed Mounting Kit

The RMK400 can be used with drywall or suspended ceilings.
The aesthetically pleasing design can be used with standard
junction boxes suitable for use with 4.0 (10.16 cm) octagonal, 50 mm, and 60 mm junction boxes connected to flexible
conduit. Note that junction boxes are not included in the kit. As
an application example, with the 14506414-002 base, the
RMK400 provides a simple installation solution in applications
that demand a lower-profile smoke detector.
5/18/10 11:22:24 PM
SMB600: Surface mounting kit, flanged.

F110: Retrofit flange for B501B, B524.
INTELLIGENT BASES
RA100Z: Remote LED annunciator.
14506414-002: Flangeless mounting base.
RA100ZA: Remote LED annunciator, ULC Listed.
M02-04-00: Detector test magnet.
14506414-002BP: Bulk pack of 14506414-002 (10).
M02-09-00: Test magnet with telescoping handle.
14507371-001: Flanged mounting base.
XR2B: Detector removal tool (T55-127-000 included).
XP-4: Extension pole for XR2B (5 to 15 ft/1.524 to 4.572 m).

B200SR: Intelligent sounder base capable of producing sound
output with T3 or continuous tone. Replaces the B501BH
series bases in retrofit applications.
T55-127-000: Detector removal head.

BCK-200B: Black detector kit, package of 10 (for use with photo
and ion detectors).
B501BH-2: Plug-in System Sensor standard sounder detector

WCK-200B: White detector kit, package of 10 (for use with

photo and ion detectors).

base.
B501BHA: Plug-in System Sensor standard sounder detector

base.
The listings and approvals below apply to intelligent bases as

noted. In some cases, certain modules or applications may not

B224RB: Relay base.
14507371-005: Isolator base.
UL Listed: S911
ULC Listed: S911
FM Approved
MEA: 22-95-E, 205-94-E Vol. 2; 257-06-E
CSFM: 7300-1130:131, 7300-1653:109; 7300-1653:126,
7300-1653:191
MOUNTING KITS AND ACCESSORIES

RMK400: Recessed mounting kit.
SMK400E: Surface mounting kit, flangeless.
Junction Box Selection Guide

Base Models
B200SR
Single
Gang
Double
Gang
3.5" Oct.
4.0" Oct.
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
4.0" Sq.
4.0" Sq.
with 3.0"
mud ring
50 mm
60 mm
70 mm
75 mm
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
14506414-002
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
14507371-001
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
B224RB
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
14507371-005
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
B501BH-2
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
B501BHT-2
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
NOTE: Box depth contingent on base and wire size.

Refer to National Electric Code or applicable local codes for appropriate recommendations.
FlashScan and System Sensor are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3043-2 Rev. 01-10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:22:25 PM
TC809A, TC809B,
TC841A, TC809D
Monitor Modules with FlashScan
General
Four different monitor modules are available for Honeywells
intelligent control panels for a variety of applications. Monitor
modules supervise a circuit of dry-contact input devices, such
as conventional heat detectors and pull stations, or monitor
and power a circuit of two-wire smoke detectors
(TC841A1000).
TC809B is a miniature monitor module a mere 1.3" (3.302 cm)

H x 2.75" (6.985 cm) W x 0.5" (1.270 cm) D that supervises a
Style B (Class B) circuit of dry-contact input devices. Its compact design allows the TC809B1008(CDN) to often be
mounted in a single-gang box behind the device it monitors.
TC841A is a standard-sized module that monitors and supervises compatible two-wire, 24 volt, smoke detectors on a Style
D (Class A) or Style B (Class B) circuit.
TC809D is a standard-sized dual monitor module that monitors and supervises two independent two-wire Style B (Class
B) dry-contact initiating device circuits (IDCs) at two separate,
consecutive addresses in intelligent, two-wire systems.
FlashScan (U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication protocol that greatly increases the speed of communication
speed greater than five times that of other design protocols.
6999cov.jpg
TC809A is a standard-sized module (typically mounts to a 4"

[10.16 cm] square box) that supervises either a Style D (Class
A) or Style B (Class B) circuit of dry-contact input devices.
TC809A1059 (Type H)
may be wired as an NFPA Style B (Class B) or Style D (Class

A) Initiating Device Circuit. A 47K ohm End-of-Line Resistor
(provided) terminates the Style B circuit. No resistor is
required for supervision of the Style D circuit.
TC809A OPERATION
Each TC809A uses one of the available module addresses on
an SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the control panel
and reports its type and the status (open/normal/short) of its
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). A flashing LED indicates that
the module is in communication with the control panel. The
LED latches steady on alarm (subject to current limitations on
the loop).
TC809A SPECIFICATIONS
TC809A Monitor Module
Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC.
Built-in type identification automatically identifies this device

as a monitor module to the control panel.
Powered directly by two-wire SLC loop. No additional power
required.
High noise (EMF/RFI) immunity.
SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring.
Direct-dial entry of address: 01 159 on FlashScan loops;
01 99 on CLIP loops.
LED flashes green during normal operation (this is a programmable option) and latches on steady red to indicate
alarm.
The TC809A Monitor Module is intended for use in intelligent,
two-wire systems, where the individual address of each module is selected using the built-in rotary switches. It provides
either a two-wire or four-wire fault-tolerant Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) for normally-open-contact fire alarm and supervisory
devices. The module has a panel-controlled LED indicator.
Maximum current draw: 5.0 mA (LED on).
TC809A APPLICATIONS
Use to monitor a zone of four-wire smoke detectors, manual
fire alarm pull stations, waterflow devices, or other normallyopen dry-contact alarm activation devices. May also be used
to monitor normally-open supervisory devices with special
supervisory indication at the control panel. Monitored circuit
Average operating current: 350 A (LED flashing), 1 communication every 5 seconds, 47k EOL.
Maximum IDC wiring resistance: 40 ohms.
EOL resistance: 47K ohms.
Temperature range: 32F to 120F (0C to 49C).
Humidity range: 10% to 93% noncondensing.
Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4" (10.16 cm) wide x
1.25" (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (10.16 cm) square x
2.125" (5.398 cm) deep box.
TC809B Mini Monitor Module

Built-in type identification automatically identifies this device
as a monitor module to the panel.
Powered directly by two-wire SLC loop. No additional power
required.
Tinned, stripped leads for ease of wiring.
Direct-dial entry of address: 01 159 on FlashScan loops;
5/18/10 11:22:25 PM
6720m101.wmf
Direct-dial entry of address: 01 159 on FlashScan loops,

LED flashes during normal operation; this is a programmable option.
LED latches steady to indicate alarm on command from
control panel.
The TC841A Interface Module is intended for use in intelligent,
addressable systems, where the individual address of each
module is selected using built-in rotary switches. This module
allows intelligent panels to interface and monitor two-wire conventional smoke detectors. It transmits the status (normal,
open, or alarm) of one full zone of conventional detectors back
to the control panel. All two-wire detectors being monitored
must be UL compatible with the module. TC841A
TC841A APPLICATIONS
The TC809B Mini Monitor Module can be installed in a singlegang junction directly behind the monitored unit. Its small size
and light weight allow it to be installed without rigid mounting.
The TC809B is intended for use in intelligent, two-wire systems where the individual address of each module is selected
using rotary switches. It provides a two-wire initiating device
circuit for normally-open-contact fire alarm and security
devices.
TC809B APPLICATIONS
Use to monitor a single device or a zone of four-wire smoke
detectors, manual fire alarm pull stations, waterflow devices, or
other normally-open dry-contact devices. May also be used to
monitor normally-open supervisory devices with special supervisory indication at the control panel. Monitored circuit/device
is wired as an NFPA Style B (Class B) Initiating Device Circuit.
A 47K ohm End-of-Line Resistor (provided) terminates the circuit.
TC809B OPERATION
Each TC809B uses one of the available module addresses on
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC).
Use the TC841A to monitor a zone of two-wire smoke detectors. The monitored circuit may be wired as an NFPA Style B
(Class B) or Style D (Class A) Initiating Device Circuit. A 3.9 K
ohm End-of-Line Resistor (provided) terminates the end of the
Style B or D (class B or A) circuit (maximum IDC loop resistance is 25 ohms). Install ELR across terminals 8 and 9 for
Style D application.
TC841A OPERATION
Each TC841A uses one of the available module addresses on
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). A flashing LED indicates that
the module is in communication with the control panel. The
LED latches steady on alarm (subject to current limitations on
the loop).
TC841A SPECIFICATIONS
Average operating current: 300 A, 1 communication and 1
LED flash every 5 seconds, 3.9k eol.
EOL resistance: 3.9K ohms.
TC809B SPECIFICATIONS
External supply voltage (between Terminals T3 and T4):

DC voltage: 24 volts power limited. Ripple voltage: 0.1 Vrms
maximum. Current: 90 mA per module maximum.
Average operating current: 350 A, 1 communication every

5 seconds, 47k EOL; 600 A Max. (Communicating, IDC
Shorted).

1.25" (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (10.16 cm) square x
2.125" (5.398 cm) deep box.
Maximum IDC Voltage: 11 Volts.

Maximum IDC Current: 400 A.
TC809D Dual Monitor Module
The TC809D Dual Monitor Module is intended for use in intelligent, two-wire systems. It provides two independent two-wire
initiating device circuits (IDCs) at two separate, consecutive
addresses. It is capable of monitoring normally open contact fire
alarm and supervisory devices; or either normally open or normally closed security devices. The module has a single panelcontrolled LED.
NOTE: The TC809D provides two Style B (Class B) IDC circuits
ONLY. Style D (Class A) IDC circuits are NOT supported in any
application.

Dimensions: 1.3" (3.302 cm) high x 2.75" (6.985 cm) wide x
0.65" (1.651 cm) deep.
Wire length: 6" (15.24 cm) minimum.
TC841A Interface Module

Supports compatible two-wire smoke detectors.
Supervises IDC wiring and connection of external power
source.
Page 2 of 4 11/19/09 74-3993-3
TC809D SPECIFICATIONS
Normal operating voltage range: 15 to 32 VDC.
Average operating current: 750 A (LED flashing).
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:22:26 PM
Maximum IDC wiring resistance: 1,500 ohms.

Maximum IDC Voltage: 11 Volts.
Maximum IDC Current: 240 A
Maximum SLC Wiring resistance: 40 Ohms.
Temperature range: 32 to 120F (0 to 49C).
Humidity range: 10% to 93% (non-condensing).
2.125" (5.398 cm) deep.
TC809D AUTOMATIC ADDRESSING

The TC809D automatically assigns itself to two addressable
points, starting with the original address. For example, if the
TC809D is set to address 26, then it will automatically assign
itself to addresses 26 and 27.
NOTE: Ones addresses on the TC809D are 0, 2, 4, 6, or 8 only.
Terminals 6 and 7 use the first address, and terminals 8 and 9 use
the second address.
wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and

regulations.

UL: S470
ULC: S7567
FM Approved
CSFM: 7300-1130:115, 7300-1130:218
MEA: 457-99-E Vol. 4 (does not apply for TC809D1004)

NOTE: CDN suffix indicates ULC-listed model.
TC809A1059: Monitor module.

TC809A1067CDN: Monitor module, ULC.
TC809B1008: Monitor module, miniature.
CAUTION:
Avoid duplicating addresses on the system.
Installation
TC809A, TC841A, and TC809D modules mount directly to a
standard 4" (10.16 cm) square, 2.125" (5.398 cm) deep, electrical box. They may also be mounted to the SMB500 surfacemount box. Mounting hardware and installation instructions
are provided with each module. All wiring must conform to
applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. These
modules are intended for power-limited wiring only.
TC809B1016CDN: Monitor module, miniature, ULC.

TC841A1000: Monitor module, two-wire detectors.
TC841A1000CDN: Monitor module, dual, two-wire detectors,
ULC.
TC809D1004: Monitor module, dual, two independent Class
B circuits.
TC809D1004CDN: Monitor module, dual, two independent
Class B circuits, ULC.
SMB500: Optional surface-mount backbox.
NOTE: See installation instructions and refer to the SLC Wiring
Manual, PN 95-7675 (51932).
The TC809B module is intended to be wired and mounted

without rigid connections inside a standard electrical box. All
www.honeywell.com
74-3993-3 11/19/09 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:22:26 PM
FlashScan is a registered trademark and FireWatch is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-3993-3 Rev. 11-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
5/18/10 11:22:27 PM
TC810N1013(CDN),
TC810R1024(CDN)
Control and Relay Modules
with FlashScan
General
7000cov.JPG
TC810N1013(CDN) Control Module: The TC810N1013(CDN)

Addressable Control Module provides Honeywell intelligent fire
alarm control panels a circuit for Notification Appliances
(horns, strobes, speakers, etc.) Addressability allows the
TC810N1013(CDN) to be activated, either manually or through
panel programming, on a select (zone or area of coverage)
basis.
TC810R1024(CDN) Relay Module: The TC810R1024(CDN)
Addressable Relay Module provides the system with a drycontact output for activating a variety of auxiliary devices, such
as fans, dampers, control equipment, etc. Addressability
allows the dry contact to be activated, either manually or
through panel programming, on a select basis.
FlashScan (U.S. Patent 5,539,389) is a communication protocol that greatly enhances the speed of communication
speed greater than five times that of other designs.
Features
Built-in type identification automatically identifies these
devices to the control panel.
Internal circuitry and relay powered directly by two-wire
SLC loop. The TC810N1013(CDN) module requires power
(for horns, strobes, etc.), or audio (for speakers).
Integral LED blinks green each time a communication is
received from the control panel and turns on in steady red
when activated.
LED blink may be deselected globally (affects all devices).
High noise immunity (EMF/RFI).
The TC810N1013(CDN) may be used to switch 24-volt
NAC power, audio (up to 70.7 Vrms).
Wide viewing angle of LED.
SEMS screws with clamping plates for wiring ease.
Direct-dial entry of address 01 159 for FlashScan loops,
01 99 for CLIP mode loops.
Speaker, and audible/visual applications may be wired for
Class B or A (Style Y or Z).
Applications
The TC810N1013(CDN) is used to switch 24 VDC audible/
visual power, high-level audio (speakers), or control telephone
devices. The TC810R1024(CDN) may be programmed to
operate dry contacts for applications such as door holders or
Air Handling Unit shutdown, and to reset four-wire smoke
detector power.
NOTE: Refer to the SLC Manual (PN 95-7675 (51932)) for details
regarding releasing applications with the TC810N1013(CDN).
Construction
The face plate is made of off-white heat-resistant plastic.
Controls include two rotary switches for direct-dial entry of
address (01-159).
TC810N1013
The TC810N1013(CDN) is configured for a single Class B

(Style Y) or Class A (Style Z) Notification Appliance Circuit.
The TC810R1024(CDN) provides two Form-C dry contacts
that switch together.
Operation
Each TC810N1013(CDN) or TC810R1024(CDN) uses one of
159 possible module addresses on a SLC loop (99 on CLIP
loops). It responds to regular polls from the control panel and
reports its type and status, including the open/normal/short
status of its Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC). The LED
blinks with each poll received. On command, it activates its
internal relay. The TC810N1013(CDN) supervises Class B
(Style Y) or Class A (Style Z) notification or control circuits.
Upon code command from the panel, the TC810N1013(CDN)
will disconnect the supervision and connect the external power
supply in the proper polarity across the load device. The disconnection of the supervision provides a positive indication to
the panel that the control relay actually turned ON. The external power supply is always relay isolated from the communication loop so that a trouble condition on the external power
supply will never interfere with the rest of the system.
Rotary switches set a unique address for each module. The
address may be set before or after mounting. The built-in
TYPE CODE (not settable) will identify the module to the control panel, so as to differentiate between a module and a sensor address.
Specifications for TC810N1013(CDN)

Normal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC.
Average operating current: 350 A direct poll, 375 A group
poll with LED flashing, 485 A Max. (LED flashing, NAC
shorted.)
Maximum NAC Line Loss: 4 VDC.
External supply voltage (between Terminals T10 and
T11): Maximum (NAC): Regulated 24 VDC; Maximum
(Speakers): 70.7 V RMS, 50W.
Drain on external supply: 1.7 mA maximum using 24 VDC
supply; 2.2 mA Maximum using 80 VRMS supply.
5/18/10 11:22:27 PM
Max NAC Current Ratings: For class B wiring system, the

current rating is 3A; For class A wiring system, the current rating is 2A.
Contact Ratings for TC810R1024(CDN)

Current
Rating
Maximum
Voltage
Load
Description
Application
30 VDC
Resistive
Non-Coded
Humidity range: 10% to 93% non-condensing.
3A
Dimensions: 4.5" (114.3 mm) high x 4" (101.6 mm) wide x

1.25" (31.75 mm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (101.6 mm) square x
2.125" (53.975 mm) deep box.
2A
30 VDC
Resistive
Coded
.9 A
110 VDC
Resistive
Non-Coded
.9 A
125 VDC
Resistive
Non-Coded
.5 A
30 VDC
Inductive
(L/R=5ms)
Coded
1A
30 VDC
Inductive
(L/R=2ms)
Coded
.3 A
125 VAC
Inductive
(PF=0.35)
Non-Coded
1.5 A
25 VAC
Inductive
(PF=0.35)
Non-Coded
Humidity range: 10% to 93% non-condensing.
.7 A
70.7 VAC
Inductive
(PF=0.35)
Non-Coded
Dimensions: 4.5" (114.3 mm) high x 4" (101.6 mm) wide x

1.25" (31.75 mm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (101.6 mm) square x
2.125" (53.975 mm) deep box.
2A
25 VAC
Inductive
(PF=0.35)
Non-Coded
Accessories: SMB500 Electrical Box; CB500 Barrier
Specifications for TC810R1024(CDN)

Normal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC.
Average operating current: 230 A direct poll; 255 A group
poll.
EOL resistance: not used.
Accessories: SMB500 Electrical Box; CB500 Barrier

UL: S470
ULC: S7567 (CDN version only)
FM Approved
CSFM: 7300-1130:218
MEA: 2-02-E
FDNY: COA #6030, #6031
NOTE: Maximum (Speakers): 70.7 V RMS, 50 W

NOTE: CDN suffix indicates ULC Listed model.
TC810N1013(CDN): Intelligent Addressable Control Module.

TC810R1024(CDN): Intelligent Addressable Relay Module.
A2143-20: Capacitor, required for Class A (Style Z) operation
of speakers.
SMB500: Optional Surface-Mount Backbox.
CB500: Control Module Barrier required by UL for separating power-limited and non-power limited wiring in the same
junction box as TC810N1013(CDN).
NOTE: For installation instructions, see the following documents:
TC810N1013(CDN) Installation document I56-3800.
TC810R1024(CDN) Installation document I56-3802.
Honeywell SLC Wiring Manual, document 95-7675 (51932).

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-3995-3 Rev. 04-10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:22:28 PM
TC811A
Fault Isolator Module
General
The Honeywell TC811A Fault Isolator Module is used with the
Honeywell Intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP) CLIP
and FlashScan SLCs to protect the system against wire-towire short circuits.
Powered by SLC loop directly, no external power required.

Mount in standard 4.0" (10.16 cm) square (2.125" [5.398
cm] deep) junction boxes.
Integral LED blinks to indicate normal condition. Illuminates
steady when short circuit condition is detected.
Wide viewing angle of LED.
Opens SLC loop automatically on detection of short, preventing the short from causing failure of the entire loop.
Automatically resets on correction of short.
Supports Style 4, 6, or 7 wiring.
Applications
The Fault Isolator Modules should be spaced between groups
of sensors in a loop to protect the rest of the loop. Use to isolate short circuit problems within a section of a loop so that
other sections can continue to operate normally. The TC811A
supports a maximum of 25 devices in-between isolators,
except when using relay bases.
NOTE: ON LOADS PER RELAY BASE AND ISOLATORS/ISOLATOR BASES: the maximum number of addressable devices
between isolators (or 14507371-005 isolator bases) is 25 devices.
Tc811Acov.jpg
Features
TC811A
ately switch to an open circuit state and isolate the groups of
sensors between them. The remaining units on the loop continue to fully operate.
In Style 4 loops, the TC811A is generally used at each T-tap
branch, to limit the effect of short circuits on a branch to the
devices on that branch. The LED indicator is on continuously
during a short circuit condition.
The TC811A Fault Isolator Module automatically restores the
shorted portion of the communications loop to normal condition when the short circuit condition is removed.
Installation
Mount on a standard 4" (10.16 cm) mounting junction box
which is at least 2.125" (5.398 cm) deep.
Terminal screws are provided for in and out wiring.
Installation instructions are provided with each module.
Surface-mount box is available as an option.
g2243dia1.wmf
14507371-003 relay bases draw more current than all other

intelligent devices. When calculating the 25-device maximum:
14507371-003 represents 2.5 devices (see example on page
2)
Specifications
Operating voltage: 15 32 VDC (peak).
Current range: 5 mA for LED latched in alarm.
NOTE: ON MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DEVICES: See the SLC

Manual (Form Number 95-7675) for information on loss of
addresses due to current limitations. Each module or base added
reduces the capacity of address positions in an SLC. Requirements differ as applied to relay bases (see note above).
Standby current: 400 A maximum, plus supervision current.
Construction
Relative humidity: 10% to 93%.
The face plate is made of off-white plastic. Includes yellow

LED indicator that pulses when normal and illuminates steady
when a short is detected.
Weight: (5 oz.) 150 grams.
Operation
Automatically opens circuit when the line voltage drops below
four volts. Fault Isolator Modules should be spaced between
groups of addressable devices (maximum 25, see notes on
page 1) in a loop to protect the rest of the loop. If a short
occurs between any two isolators, then both isolators immedi-
Pulsing current: 30 mA for 15 mS (TC810A, TC810N, XLSCM-N).


UL: S470
ULC: S7567 (TC811A1014CDN)
5/18/10 11:22:29 PM
FM Approved
CSFM: 7300-1130:115
Architectual/Engineering Specifications
Fault Isolator Modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on an SLC loop. The Fault Isolator Module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that
may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC
Loop. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the Fault Isolator Module
shall automatically open-circuit (disconnect) the SLC loop.
When the short circuit condition is corrected, the Fault Isolator
Module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section of
the SLC loop. The Fault Isolator Module shall not require any
address-setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It
shall not be necessary to replace or reset an Fault Isolator

Module after its normal operation. The Fault Isolator Module
shall mount in a standard 4.0" (10.16 cm) deep electrical box,
in a surface-mounted backbox, or in the Fire Alarm Control
Panel. It shall provide a single LED which shall flash to indicate that the Isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily
to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and
isolated.

TC811A1006: Isolator Module.
TC811A1014: Isolator Module. Canadian (ULC) version.
SMB500: Surface Mount Backbox
Examples of Device Counts

(see notes under Applications)
g52389d2.wmf

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60113:1
77-4555 Rev. 12/09
April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:22:30 PM
TC810S1000(CDN)
Releasing Control Module
General
The TC810S1000 Releasing Control Module uses a redundant protocol; the module must be armed with a pair of signals in order to activate. It will then enter a 3-second window
awaiting a pair of confirmation signals. If no confirmation is
received, the module will automatically reset. It also supervises the wiring to the connected load and reports the status
to the panel as NORMAL, OPEN, or SHORT CIRCUIT. The
module has two pairs of output termination points available
for fault-tolerant wiring and a panel-controlled LED indicator.
The module may be connected to either one 24VDC solenoid
or up to two 12VDC solenoids (in series). To ensure proper
operation, this module shall be connected to a compatible
Honeywell system control panel only (list available from Honeywell). In addition, please refer to Honeywell Device Compatibility Document PN 51939 for the list of compatible
solenoids.
NOTE: TC810S1000 is required for all new FlashScan-mode
releasing applications with XLS3000 (version 14.0 or higher) and
XLS140-2 (version 12.0 or higher). Use TC810N1013 or XLS-CMN for releasing applications on XLS140.
Features
Redundant protocol for added protection

Configurable for Class A or Class B operation
External supply voltage monitoring
Can power one 24V or two 12V solenoids
SEMS screws for easing wiring
Panel controlled status LED
Analog communications
Rotary address switches
Low standby current
Mounts in standard 4" (10.16 cm) junction box
FlashScan operation
Specifications
Operating Voltage: 15 to 32 VDC
Communication Line Loop Impedance: 40 Ohm max.
Temperature Range: 14F to 140F (-10 to 60C)
Relative Humidity: 10% to 95% noncondensing
Shipping Weight: 5.5 oz (156 g)
Dimensions: 4.275" W 4.675" H 1.400" D
(10.86 cm W 11.87 cm H 3.56 cm D)
SLC
Average Operating Current: 700 A max @ 24 VDC
(one communication every 5 sec. with LED enabled)
Maximum Activation Current: 9.0 mA (LED on)
60390cov.jpg
The TC810S1000 Releasing Control Module is specifically

designed for fire suppression releasing applications in FlashScan systems. Power to the release agent solenoid(s) runs
through the module for full-time monitoring and supervision.
TC810S1000
EXTERNAL SUPPLY
Normal Operating Voltage: 24 VDC Nominal
Maximum Line Loss: 2.3 VDC (total allowable loss from
power supply to module and from module to solenoid)
Minimum Operating Voltage to Activate Solenoid:
18 VDC (at solenoid)
Standby Current: 6.4 mA
Activation Current: 10 mA
SOLENOID
Supervisory Loop Voltage: 3.3 V
Supervisory Loop Current (Normal): 30 mA
Maximum Activation Current: 2 A

TC810S1000: Releasing Control Module.
TC810S1000CDN: ULC-listed Releasing Control Module.
SMB500: Optional Surface-Mount Backbox.
CB500: Control Module Barrier required by UL for separating power-limited and non-power limited wiring in the
same junction box as TC810S1000(CDN).

These listings and approvals apply to the modules specified
in this document. In some cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listings may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing
status.
UL Listed: S470
ULC Listed: S7567 (TC810S1000CDN)
FM Approved
CSFM: 7300-1130:273
5/18/10 11:22:31 PM

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-5068 Rev. 08-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:22:31 PM
TC809C1004(CDN)
Analog Input Module
General
The TC809C1004 Analog Input Module allows the XLS3000
fire alarm control panel (FACP) to monitor industry-standard,
linear-scale, 420 mA protocol sensors. The module converts
the sensor output to communication protocol that can be interpreted by the FACP for monitoring and display. There are
numerous sensors available in the marketplace that communicate using a 420 mA output, including gas sensors, temperature sensors, air speed sensors, and more.
SEMS screws for easing wiring

Panel controlled status LED (bi-color)
Analog communications
Rotary address switches
Low standby current
Mounts in standard 4" (10.16 cm) junction box
FlashScan operation
The TC809C1004 Module includes numerous safeguards and

protective features to ensure trouble-free operation. The external power supply is isolated from the communication line. In
addition, a 500 mA current limiter and a cutoff circuit protect
the modules electrical supply from short circuits. In the event
of a short, the output voltage will cycle within safe limits until
the short is removed. The output signal is sampled and filtered
for transients and noise prior to passing the signal along to the
FACP. If the current running through the sensing circuitry
exceeds 25 mA, the output voltage will shut down and the
short protection process will begin. The module accepts both
3-wire (device sink) and 2-wire configurations.
The XLS3000 panel with compatible firmware supports up to
five programmable thresholds for each TC809C1004.
The TC809C1004 Analog Input Module is rigorously designed
and tested for electromagnetic compatibility and environmental
reliability, in most cases exceeding industry standards. The
h60411cov.jpg
Features
TC809C1004
device is equipped with a panel-controlled LED for local status
indication. The standard SEMS terminals will accept wiring
from 12 AWG to 18 AWG.
TC809C1004: Analog input module
TC809C1004CDN: Same as TC809C1004 listed for use in
Canada.
UL Listed: S8380
cUL Listed: S8380 (TC809C1004CDN)
FM approved
FM6320 approved: Class 6320 for Gas Detection
CSFM: 7300-1130:271
420 mA Sensor
SLC &
Device Power
7070covg.jpg
TC809C1004 Forming the Interface

Between 420 mA Sensor
and the XLS3000
.7070covh-r.jpg, 60411cov.jpg.jpg
420 mA Signal
& Device Power
XLS3000
5/18/10 11:23:25 PM
Specifications
CURRENT-DRAW SPECIFICATIONS
Standby Current: 700 A max. @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec. with LED enabled)
External Power Supply: 12 to 28 VDC
External Supply Standby Current: 10 mA @ 24 VDC
(nominal - module only, does not include sensor current)
External Supply Sensor Current: 500 mA (maximum)
LED Current: 6mA (with LED latched on)
Operating Voltage: 15 to 32 VDC

Communication Line Loop Impedance: 40 Ohm max.
Temperature Range: 14F to 140F (-10 to 60C)
Relative Humidity: 10% to 93% noncondensing
Shipping Weight: 5.5 oz (156 g)
Dimensions: 4.275" W 4.675" H 1.400" D
(10.86 cm W 11.87 cm H 3.56 cm D)

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-5071 Rev. 06-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:23:26 PM
XP10-M(A)
Ten-Input Monitor Module
General
The XP10-M ten-input monitor module is an interface
between a control panel and normally open contact devices
in intelligent alarm systems such as pull stations, security
contacts, or flow switches.
The first address on the XP10-M is set from 01 to 150 and
the remaining modules are automatically assigned to the
next nine higher addresses. Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of two unused addresses.
6923xp10.jpg
The supervised state (normal, open, or short) of the monitored device is sent back to the panel. A common SLC input
is used for all modules, and the initiating device loops share a
common supervisory supply and ground otherwise each
monitor operates independently from the others.
Each XP10-M module has panel-controlled green LED indicators. The panel can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or
latch off.
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, the term XP10-M is used in
this data sheet to refer to both the XP10-M and the XP10-MA
(ULC-listed version).
Features
Ten addressable Class B or five addressable Class A initiating device circuits.
Removable 12 AWG (3.31 mm) to 18 AWG (0.821 mm)
plug-in terminal blocks.
Status indicators for each point.
Unused addresses may be disabled.
Rotary address switches.
Class A or Class B operation.
FlashScan or CLIP operation. NOTE: Not compatible
with the XLS1000 or FS90 Plus.
Flexible mounting options.
Mounting hardware included.
Mounting options:
CHS-6 chassis: Up to 6 modules.

BB-25 cabinet: Up to 6 modules.
BB-XP cabinet: One or two modules.
XLS-CAB-4 Series cabinet: See 85-3002.
EQ Cabinet Series: See 85-3110.
Wire gauge: 12 AWG (3.31 mm) to 18 AWG (0.821 mm).
Power-limited circuits must employ type FPL, FPLR, or
FPLP cable as required by Article 760 of the NEC.
XP10-M is shipped in Class B position; remove shunt for
Class A operation.
Maximum SLC wiring resistance: 40 or 50 ohms, panel
dependent.
Maximum IDC voltage: 10.2 VDC.
Maximum IDC current: 240 A.
Specifications
Standby current: 3.5 mA (SLC current draw with all

addresses used; if some addresses are disabled, the
standby current decreases).
The listings and approvals below apply to the XP10-M(A) TenInput Monitor Module. In some cases, certain modules or
applications may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or
listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing
status.
Alarm current: 55 mA (assumes all ten LEDs solid ON).

Temperature range: 32F to 120F (0C to 49C) for UL
applications; 10C to +55C for EN54 applications.
Humidity: 10% to 85% noncondensing for UL applications;
10% to 93% noncondensing for EN54 applications.
Dimensions: 6.8" (172.72 mm) high x 5.8" (147.32 mm)
wide x 1.25" (31.75 mm) deep.
UL Listed: S635
ULC Listed: S635 (XP10-MA)
CSFM approved: 7300-0028:219
FM approved
MEA approved: 43-02-E
Maryland State Fire Marshal approved: Permit #2106
Shipping weight: 0.76 lb. (0.345 kg) including packaging.
5/18/10 11:23:27 PM

XP10-M: Ten-input monitor module.
XP10-MA: Same as above with ULC Listing.
BB-XP: Optional cabinet for one or two modules. Dimensions, DOOR: 9.234" (23.454 cm) wide (9.484" [24.089 cm]
including hinges), x 12.218" (31.0337 cm) high, x 0.672"
(1.7068 cm) deep; BACKBOX: 9.0" (22.860 cm) wide (9.25"
[23.495 cm] including hinges), x 12.0" (30.480 cm) high x
2.75" (6.985 cm); CHASSIS (installed): 7.150" (18.161 cm)
wide overall x 7.312" (18.5725 cm) high interior overall x
2.156" (5.4762 cm) deep overall.
BB-25: Optional cabinet for up to six modules mounted on

CHS-6 chassis (below). Dimensions, DOOR: 24.0" (60.96
cm) wide x 12.632" (32.0852 cm) high, x 1.25" (3.175 cm)
deep, hinged at bottom; BACKBOX: 24.0" (60.96 cm) wide x
12.550" (31.877 cm) high x 5.218" (13.2537 cm) deep.
CHS-6: Chassis, mounts up to six modules inan XLS-CAB-4
Series cabinet (see 85-3002), EQ Cabinet Series (see 853110), or BB-25.
FlashScan is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
2010. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3068-2 Rev. 05-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:23:27 PM
XP6-MA
Six Zone Interface Module
General
The XP6-MA six-zone interface module provides an interface between the intelligent alarm system and a two-wire conventional detection zone. A common SLC input is used for all
modules, and the initiating device circuits share a common
external supervisory supply and ground. Otherwise, each
module operates independently from the others.
The first module is addressed from 01 to 154 while the remaining modules are automatically assigned to the next five higher
addresses. Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of
two unused modules. All two-wire detectors being monitored
must be two-wire-compatibility-listed with the modules. The
XP6-MA transmits the status of a zone of two-wire detectors to
the fire alarm control panel. Status conditions are reported as
normal, open, or alarm. The interface module supervises the
zone of detectors and the connection of the external power
supply.
Each XP6-MA module has panel-controlled bicolor LED indicators. The panel can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or
latch off.
6925xp6m.jpg

dependent.
Features
Six addressable Class B or three addressable Class A initiating device circuits.

Removable 12 AWG (3.1 mm) to 18 AWG (0.78 mm) plugin terminal blocks.
Up to two unused addresses may be disabled.
Class A or Class B operation.
FlashScan or CLIP operation (NOTE: Not compatible with
the FS90 or XLS1000).
Mount one or two modules in a BB-XP cabinet (optional).
Mount up to six modules on a CHS-6 chassis in a CAB-4
Series, or BB-25 cabinet (optional), or EQ Cabinet Series.
External supply voltage: DC voltage: 18 28 volts powerlimited. Ripple voltage: 0.1 Vrms maximum. External supply
current: 90 mA maximum per address in alarm. In Class B
operation, 540 mA maximum for all six addresses in alarm. In
Class A operation, 270 mA maximum for all three addresses in
alarm.
Specifications
addresses used; if some addresses are disabled, the standby
current decreases).
Alarm current: 40 mA (assumes all six LEDs solid ON).
Compatible detectors: See the Device Compatibility document. Contact Honeywell.

UL Listed: S635
ULC Listed: S635 (XP6-MAA)
FM Approved
CSFM: 7300-0028:219
City of Chicago
City of Denver

Humidity: 10% to 85% noncondensing.
Dimensions: 6.8" (172.72 mm) high x 5.8" (147.32 mm) wide

x 1.25" (31.75 mm) deep.
XP6-MA: Six-zone conventional-detector interface module.
BB-XP: Optional cabinet for one or two modules. Dimensions,

DOOR: 9.234" (23.454 cm) wide (9.484" [24.089 cm] including
hinges), x 12.218" (31.0337 cm) high, x 0.672" (1.7068 cm)
deep; BACKBOX: 9.0" (22.860 cm) wide (9.25" [23.495 cm]
including hinges), x 12.0" (30.480 cm) high x 2.75" (6.985 cm);
CHASSIS (installed): 7.150" (18.161 cm) wide overall x 7.312"
(18.5725 cm) high interior overall x 2.156" (5.4762 cm) deep
overall.
Mounting options: CHS-6 chassis, BB-6F cabinet, BB-2F

cabinet, CAB-4 Series (see DN-6857) cabinet, or EQ Cabinet
Series.
XP6-MA is shipped in Class B position: Remove shunt for
Class A operation.
XP6-MAA: Same as above with ULC Listing.
5/18/10 11:23:28 PM

CHS-6 chassis (below). Dimensions, DOOR: 24.0" (60.96 cm)
wide x 12.632" (32.0852 cm) high, x 1.25" (3.175 cm) deep,
hinged at bottom; BACKBOX: 24.0" (60.96 cm) wide x 12.550"
(31.877 cm) high x 5.218" (13.2537 cm) deep.
CHS-6: Chassis, mounts up to six modules in a CAB-4 Series

(see 85-3002) cabinet, EQ Cabinet Series (see 85-3110), or
BB-25.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3070-2 Rev. 06-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:23:28 PM
XP6-C
Six Circuit Supervised Control Module
and SYNC-1 Accessory Card
General
The XP6-C six-circuit supervised control module provides
intelligent alarm systems with supervised monitoring of wiring
to load devices that require an external power supply to operate, such as horns, strobes, or bells. Each module is intended
for switching applications involving AC, DC, or audio, which
require wiring supervision. Upon command from the control
panel, the XP6-C will disconnect the supervision and connect
the external power supply across the load device.
6924xp6c.jpg
addresses. Each XP6-C module has terminals for connection
to an external supply circuit for powering devices on its notification appliance circuit (NAC). One or multiple power supplies
or amplifiers may be used.
NOTE: Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of three
unused addresses.
Each XP6-C module features a short-circuit-protection monitor

to protect the external power supply against short-circuit conditions on the NAC. When an alarm condition occurs, the relay
which connects the external supply to the NAC will not be
allowed to close if a short-circuit condition currently exists on
the NAC. Additionally, an algorithm is incorporated to find
shorts when the module is active. The XP6-C module will
close all circuits that are not shorted to find the NAC with the
problem.
Each XP6-C module has panel-controlled green LED indicators. The panel can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch
off.
The SYNC-1 accessory card provides the XP6-C with
additional functionality with compatible System Sensor
SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert Advance audio/visual devices.
Features
Six addressable Style B (Class B) or three addressable
Style D (Class A) outputs that function as notification appliance/speaker/telephone circuits.
Removable 12 AWG (3.31 mm) to 18 AWG (0.821 mm)
plug-in terminal blocks.
Unused addresses may be disabled(up to 3).
FlashScan or CLIP operation.
NOTE: Not compatible with the FS90 Plus or XLS 1000.
Optional SYNC-1 accessory card for SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert Advance devices.
Series, CAB-4 Series, EQ Series, or BB-25 cabinet
(optional).
Specifications
current decreases).
Alarm current: 35 mA (assumes all six NACS have been

switched once and all six LEDs solid ON).
Temperature range: 32F to 120F (0C to 49C) for UL applications; 10C to +55C for EN54 applications.
Humidity: 10% to 85% noncondensing for UL applications;
10% to 93% noncondensing for EN54 applications.
x 1.25" (31.75 mm) deep.
Mounting options: CHS-6 chassis, BB-25 cabinet, BB-XP
cabinet, CAB-3/CAB-4 series backboxes and doors, or EQ
Series cabinet.
Wire gauge: 12 AWG (3.31 mm) to 18 AWG (0.821 mm),
grounded.
XP6-C is shipped in Class B position; remove shunt for
Class A operation.
dependent.
Power rating per circuit: 63 W @ 70.7 VAC (UL applications
only); 22.5 W @ 25 VAC.
Current ratings:
3.0 A @ 30 VDC maximum, resistive, non-coded.

2.0 A @ 30 VDC maximum, resistive, coded.
1.0 A @ 30 VDC maximum, inductive (L/R = 2 ms), coded.
0.9 A @ 70.7 VAC maximum (UL only), resistive, noncoded.
0.7 A @ 70.7 VAC maximum (UL only), inductive (PF =
0.35), non-coded.
Compatible devices: See the documentation for your panel,
and the Honeywell Device Compatibility document. Contact
Honeywell. See also list of devices compatible with SYNC-1
below.
5/18/10 11:23:28 PM
SYNC-1 Accessory Card

The SYNC-1 accessory card is designed to operate with the
XP6-C. It works with the SpectrAlert and the SpectrAlert
Advance series of horns, strobes, and horn/strobes to provide
a means of synchronizing the temporal-coded horns; synchronizing the one-second flash timing of the strobe; and silencing
the horns of the horn/strobe combination over a two-wire circuit while leaving the strobes active. Each SYNC-1 accessory
card is capable of synchronizing six Class B circuits or three
Class A circuits.
Maximum load on a loop: 3 A.
Operating temperature: 32F to 120F (0C to 49C).
Wire size: 12 to 18 AWG (3.31 to 0.821 mm).
Operating voltage range: 11 to 30 VDC FWR, filtered or
unfiltered. Refer to notification appliance installation instructions for number of notification appliances and wire size.
Compatible A/V devices: The SYNC-1 Accessory Card is
compatible with all System Sensor SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert
Advance Audio Visual Devices that have synchronization
capability. Other manufacturers may be supported as well.
Please refer to the latest Device Compatibility Document,
PN 51939.
NOTE: *SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert Advance products utilizing
SYNC-1 module below.

XP6-C: Six-circuit supervised control module.
BB-XP: Optional cabinet for one or two modules. Dimensions, DOOR: 9.234" (23.454 cm) wide (9.484" [24.089 cm]
including hinges), x 12.218" (31.0337 cm) high, x 0.672"
(1.7068 cm) deep; BACKBOX: 9.0" (22.860 cm) wide (9.25"
[23.495 cm] including hinges), x 12.0" (30.480 cm) high x 2.75"
(6.985 cm); CHASSIS (installed): 7.150" (18.161 cm) wide
overall x 7.312" (18.5725 cm) high interior overall x 2.156"
(5.4762 cm) deep overall.
CHS-6 chassis (below). Dimensions, DOOR: 24.0" (60.96
cm) wide x 12.632" (32.0852 cm) high, x 1.25" (3.175 cm)
deep, hinged at bottom; BACKBOX: 24.0" (60.96 cm) wide x
12.550" (31.877 cm) high x 5.218" (13.2537 cm) deep.
(see 85-3002) cabinet, or EQ Series cabinet.

UL Listed: S635 (S635 SYNC-1)

ULC Listed: S635 (XP6-CA)
MEA Listed: 43-02-E / 226-03-E (SYNC-1)
FM Approved (Local Protective Signaling) - XP6-C only
CSFM: 7165-1130:234 7170-1130:235 7300-1653:100
(SYNC-1)
Maryland State Fire Marshal: Permit # 2106 (XP6-C)
XP6-CA: Same as above with ULC Listing.

SYNC-1: Optional accessory card for synchronization of compatible System Sensor SpectrAlert horns, strobes, and horn/
strobes.
SYNC-1
Module setup: Before installing the

accessory card on the XP6-C module,
add the shunt to the board where
indicated if any horns are required to
sound in temporal pattern.
Parts included with SYNC-1: Two
shunts, four screws, and two standoffs.
See installation instructions for details on
mounting and wiring the accessory card
and module.
XP6-C
6924sync.wmf
Figure 1 Mounting the SYNC-1 accessory card to the XP6-C module
Page 2 of 6 08/25/09 85-3069
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:23:29 PM
6924wir1.wmf
6924wirblock.wmf
Wiring Diagrams
NOTE: If the FACP does not inherently monitor for loss of external power to the module, an external EOLR1 Relay Module may be required on each NAC that has a dedicated supply. Refer to the Honeywell SLC
manual for more information.
6924wir2.wmf
Figure 2 Example of Class B, Style Y NAC configuration

with a single supply dedicated to a single NAC
Figure 3 Example of Class B, Style Y NAC configuration with a single supply shared by two NACs
www.honeywell.com
85-3069 08/25/09 Page 3 of 6
5/18/10 11:23:29 PM
6924wir3.wmf
6924wir4.wmf
Figure 4 Example of Class A, Style Z NAC configuration

with a single supply dedicated to a single NAC
Figure 5 Example of Class A, Style Z NAC configuration with a single supply shared by 2 NACs
Page 4 of 6 08/25/09 85-3069
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:23:30 PM
6924wir5.wmf
6924wir6.wmf
Figure 6 Example of Class B, Style Y audio NAC configuration
Figure 7 Example of Class A, Style Z audio NAC configuration
www.honeywell.com
85-3069 08/25/09 Page 5 of 6
5/18/10 11:23:31 PM
6924wir7.wmf
NOTE: Supply is shared by NACs +0 and +1 (on PCB #1) as well as +3, +4, and +5 (on PCB # 2). Refer to
Figure 2 through Figure 5 for typical NAC wiring. Make certain that the lip on the long power supply jumper
engages the retaining tab on T10 or T16 as shown in detail view A-A.
Figure 8 Example of multiple boards sharing the same external power supply
FlashScan, SpectrAlert, SpectrAlert Advance, and System Sensor are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3069 Rev. 08/09

Made in the U.S.A.
Page 6 of 6
5/18/10 11:23:32 PM
XP6-R
Six Relay Control Module
General
The XP6-R six-relay control module provides an intelligent fire
alarm system with six Form-C relays.
6926xp6r.jpg
addresses. Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of
three unused modules. A single isolated set of dry relay contacts is provided for each module address, which is capable of
being wired for either a normally-open or normally-closed
operation. The module allows the control panel to switch these
contacts on command. No supervision is provided for the controlled circuit.
Each XP6-R module has panel-controlled green LED indicators. The panel can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch
off.
Features
Six addressable Form-C relay contacts.
Removable 12 AWG (3.25 mm) to 18 AWG (0.9 mm) plugin terminal blocks.
Unused addresses may be disabled.
FlashScan or CLIP operation (NOTE: Not compatible with
the XLS1000 or FS90 Plus).
Series, EQ Series, or BB-25 cabinet (optional).
Specifications
current decreases).
Alarm current: 32 mA (assumes all six relays have been
switched once and all six LEDs solid ON).
Relay current: 30 mA/relay pulse (15.6 ms pulse duration),

pulse under panel control.
Relay contact ratings: 30 VDC; 70.7 VAC.
Current ratings:

2.0 A @ 30 VDC maximum, resistive, coded.
0.9 A @ 125 VAC maximum, resistive, non-coded.
0.7 A @ 70.7 VAC maximum, inductive (PF = 0.35), noncoded.
0.3 A @ 125 VAC maximum, inductive (PF = 0.35), noncoded.
1.5 A @25 VAC maximum, inductive (PF = 0.35), noncoded.
2.0 A @25 VAC maximum, inductive (PF = 0.35), noncoded.

Humidity: 10% to 93% noncondensing.

x 1.0" (25.40 mm) deep.


Mounting options: CHS-6 chassis, BB-25 cabinet, BB-XP
cabinet, CAB-4 Series (see 85-3002) cabinet, or EQ Series
(see 85-3110) cabinet.
Maximum SLC wiring resistance: 40
dependent.
or 50 ohms, panel
UL Listed: S635
ULC Listed: S635 (XP6-RA)
CSFM: 7300-0028:219
Maryland State Fire Marshall: Permit # 2099
FM Approved (Light Protective Signaling Only)
5/18/10 11:23:33 PM

XP6-R: Six-relay control module.
XP6-RA: Same as above with ULC Listing.
BB-XP: Optional cabinet for one or two modules. Dimensions,
DOOR: 9.234" (23.454 cm) wide (9.484" [24.089 cm] including
hinges), x 12.218" (31.0337 cm) high, x 0.672" (1.7068 cm)
deep; BACKBOX: 9.0" (22.860 cm) wide (9.25" [23.495 cm]
including hinges), x 12.0" (30.480 cm) high x 2.75" (6.985 cm);
CHASSIS (installed): 7.150" (18.161 cm) wide overall x 7.312"
(18.5725 cm) high interior overall x 2.156" (5.4762 cm) deep

overall.
CHS-6 chassis (below). Dimensions, DOOR: 24.0" (60.96 cm)
wide x 12.632" (32.0852 cm) high, x 1.25" (3.175 cm) deep,
hinged at bottom; BACKBOX: 24.0" (60.96 cm) wide x 12.550"
(31.877 cm) high x 5.218" (13.2537 cm) deep.
(see 85-3002), BB-25, or EQ Series (see 85-3110) cabinet.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
HON-60159:A
85-3071 Rev. 2/10
February 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:23:33 PM
Notes
Detectors for
Hazardous Areas
6.0 Detectors for Hazardous Areas

Intrinsically Safe Detectors
Intrinsically Safe MCPs
Explosion Proof Detectors
Conventional
Conventional
INTRINSICALLY SAFE - Ionisation Smoke Detector

Model 1151EIS
Overview
Features
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
Low prole design

Low current draw
Remote LED option
Two alarm LEDs providing 360o visibility
Removable cover for ease of maintenance
Simple plug-in installation
Compatible with standard B401 mounting base
Tamper-resistant
Suitable for use in up to Zone 0 environments
Approved for use with Zener safety barriers or galvanic isolators
BASEEFA approval to EEx ia IIB T5
Tested and approved to EN54 7:2000 (Amendment 1)
118b/09
Baseefa03ATEX0156X
G296051
Description
Model 1151EIS ionisation smoke detectors use stateof-the-art sensing chambers and SMD circuitry for
maximum reliability. These detectors are designed to
afford open area protection and are for use in hazardous
areas where potentially explosive atmospheres are likely
to arise (conrm classication of equipment required
with your responsible authority). 1151EIS detectors are
designed to be used with compatible panels only and
must be used in conjunction with a compatible zener
barrier or galvanic isolator.
Each detector has two integral alarm LEDs to provide
local visual indication of detector status. Once the
detector senses a re, it latches in alarm and remains
in this condition until it is reset by a momentary power
interruption.
Model 1151EIS smoke detectors include a tamper
feature that prevents removal from the base without the
use of a tool. In addition, these detectors can be tested
by activating an internal reed switch with a test magnet.
This test simulates smoke in the detector and performs a
full check of the operating circuitry.
1/1/70 6:30:37 AM
Architect/Engineer Specifications
Typical 1151EIS System Diagram
Operating Voltage Range
15 to 32VDC
Maximum Standby Current
30A at 24VDC
Latching alarm reset by momentary power interruption
Environmental Specifications
Application Temperature Range
-10C to 55C
Humidity
10% to 93% Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
IP Ratings
On application
Intrinsic Safety Rating
EEx ia IIB T5
Mechanical Information
Height
43mm
Diameter
104mm
Weight
110g (excluding base)
Product Range
Compatible Bases
B401, B401DG
System Sensor Europe (Technical Services)

Charles Avenue
Burgess Hill
RH15 9TQ
United Kingdom
Tel: +44 (0)1444 238820
Fax: +44 (0)1444 248123
Email: sse.technical@systemsensor.com
www.systemsensoreurope.com
Copyright 2005 System Sensor. All rights reserved.
All technical data is correct at time of publication and is subject to change without notice. All trademarks acknowledged.
Installation information: in order to ensure full functionality, refer to the installation instructions as supplied.
DS1151EIS-07
1/1/70 6:30:39 AM
Conventional
Conventional
INTRINSICALLY SAFE - Rate of Rise Temperature Detector

Model 5451EIS
Overview
Features
t
Low prole design
Low current draw
Remote LED option
Simple plug-in installation
Compatible with standard B401 mounting base
Tamper-resistant
Suitable for use in up to Zone 0 environments
Approved for use with Zener safety barriers or galvanic isolators
BASEEFA approval to EEx ia IIB T5
Tested and approved to EN54 5:2000 (Amendment 1) Class A1R
118a/04
Baseefa03ATEX0155X
G296050
Description
Model 5451EIS is an intrinsically safe rate of rise
detector with xed temperature alarm. It uses state-ofthe-art dual thermistor technology to provide maximum
sensitivity. This detector is designed to afford open
area protection and is for use in hazardous areas where
potentially explosive atmospheres are likely to arise
(conrm classication of equipment required with your
responsible authority). Model 5451EIS detectors are
designed to be used with compatible panels only.
Model 5451EIS rate of rise detectors include a tamper

feature that prevents removal from their mounting base
(if enabled) without the use of a tool. In addition, these
detectors can be easily tested by activating an internal
reed switch with a test
magnet.
Each detector has two LEDs to provide a local visual

indication of detector status. Once the detector senses
a re, it latches in alarm and remains in this condition
until it is reset by a momentary power interruption.
1/1/70 6:30:39 AM
5451EIS Intrinsically Safe Rate of Rise Temperature Detector
One channel from a single or dual channel d.c. Shunt Zener Diode Safety Barrier certied by Baseefa or any EU
Approved Body to [EEx ia] IIC having the following, or lower parameters:
Uo = 28V
Io = 93.3mA
Po = 0.67W
In any safety barrier used the output current must be limited by a resistor R such that Io = Uo/R
OR one of the following isolation barriers may be used:
MTL:
Pepperl + Fuchs:
MTL4061 (BAS01ATEX7176), MTL5061 (BAS01ATEX7160)

KFDO-CS-Ex1.5IP (BAS98ATEX7343), KFDO-CS-Ex2.5IP (BAS98ATEX7343)
Operating Voltage Range
15 to 32VDC Latching alarm reset by momentary power interruption
Standby Current (maximum)
100A at 24VDC
Environmental Specifications
Application Temperature Range
-10C to 55C
Humidity
10% to 93% Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
IP Ratings
On application
Intrinsic Safety Rating
EEx II1G EEx ia IIB T5
Mechanical Information
Height
54mm
Diameter
104mm
Weight
80g (excluding base)
Max Wire Gauge for Terminals
2.5mm2
Colour
Pantone Warm Grey 1C
Material
Bayblend FR110
Product Range
Compatible Bases
B401, B401DG
System Sensor Europe (Technical Services)

Charles Avenue
Burgess Hill
RH15 9TQ
United Kingdom
Tel: +44 (0)1444 238820
Fax: +44 (0)1444 248123
Email: sse.technical@systemsensor.com
www.systemsensoreurope.com
Copyright 2005 System Sensor. All rights reserved.
All technical data is correct at time of publication and is subject to change without notice. All trademarks acknowledged.
Installation information: in order to ensure full functionality, refer to the installation instructions as supplied.
DS5451EIS-07
1/1/70 6:30:41 AM
Intelligent
Intelligent
INTRINSICALLY SAFE - Photoelectric Smoke Sensor

Model 22051EISE
Overview
Features
t
Compatible with existing System Sensor Protocol
Low prole design
Reliable analogue addressable communications
Rotary decade address switches
Tamper Resistant
Twin LED indicators provide 3600 visibility
Built in test switch
Must be used in conjunction with IST200

Translator Module and Y72221 Galvanic Isolator
Compatible with the existing standard intelligent
199p/03
Baseefa08 ATEX0278X
0832-CPD-199
sensor base
t
BASEEFA Approved to EEx ia IIC T5 for use in up to Zone 0 hazardous environments
Description
The 22051EISE analogue addressable photoelectric
sensor is a plug in intrinsically safe smoke sensor
combining an optical sensing chamber with analogue
addressable communications. As an intrinsically safe
sensor, the 22051EISE has been designed specically to
provide re protection for most hazardous environments,
and has therefore been engineered so that it cannot
become a source of ignition in areas where potentially
explosive atmospheres are likely to arise.
The 22051EISE sensors are approved by BASEEFA to
EEx ia IIC T5, for use in hazardous environments. The
22051EISE sensor is therefore suitable for use in all
hazardous areas up to Zone 0 areas and with most
gases, excluding hydrogen and acetylene.
The 22051EISE has two integral LEDs which provide
local visual indication of the sensor status. These LEDs
provide a dual function. In the event of an alarm, they
can be switched ON continuously, and can also be
programmed to either blink when polled by the panel or
remain off during normal conditions.
The individual loop address of each 22051EISE can be

easily set and read, using the rotary decade address
switches located on the rear of each sensor. The use
of decimal address codes signicantly reduces the
potential for incorrect address selection.
Each sensor base includes a tamper resistant option
which, when activated, prevents the removal of the
sensor from its base without the use of a tool. Full
circuit functionality can be easily conrmed on site by
use of the sensor test switch. Operation of this magnetic
switch will generate an alarm response to the re alarm
control panel, making system testing both convenient
and simple.
All System Sensor products are covered by our extended
3 year warranty.
1/1/70 6:30:41 AM
IST200 Intelligent Translator Module
Description
The IST200 translator module is intended for use with analogue addressable systems and in conjunction with 22051EISE intrinsically safe photoelectric
smoke sensors. The IST200 translator module serves as an interface between the control panel and up to a maximum of 15 x 22051EISE smoke sensors.
The IST200 must also be used in conjunction with a Y72221 galvanic isolator barrier (see below). To ensure correct operation, the IST200 must only be
connected to a listed compatible Control Panel.
The IST200 translator module can be easily mounted within System Sensors existing SMB500 surface mount box (see diagram). The IST200 must be
located within a safe environment.
Y72221 Galvanic Isolator

Description
The Y72221 Galvanic Isolator is a single channel isolated repeater. It is suitable for use as an intrinsically safe isolator between an IST200 translator
module and up to a maximum of 15 x 22051EISE intrinsically safe photoelectric smoke sensors. The Y72221 is designed to transfer a DC current
from a safe area to the hazardous area load, from a 24V DC nominal voltage. An AC signal ranging from 0.6 to 24V will then be transferred, allowing
communication to the 22051EISE sensors in the hazardous area.
We would recommend the use of the Y72221 with all installations of 22051EISE sensors. We do not recommend the use of zener barriers, as they need to
be tied to a high integrity earth, which can lead to earth fault indications on some Fire Control Panels. Please refer to the Fire Control Panel manufacturer
for compatibility information. The Y72221 is certified intrinsically safe to EEx ia IIC, (Baseefa00ATEX087X).
The Y72221 is suitable for DIN rail mounting and can therefore be mounted within any electrical box with suitable DIN rail.
1/1/70 6:30:43 AM
Intrinsically Safe Outdoor Call Points

Resistor & Clean Contact Model
(Red Versions)
> Product Benefits
Sealed to IP67
Unique Plug & Play installation concept
Total Flex-Ability in the choice of operating

element
Anti-Tamper facility
Enhanced aesthetics and compact design
Fully approved to the latest standards
1GD Ex ia C T4 Ga
Sira 06ATEX2131X
IECEx SIR 08.0105X
166b
Product Overview
An Intrinsically Safe version of our WCP1A outdoor call point is available for installation in
hazardous areas. These call points are manufactured to protect against other hazards, as defined
in paragraph 1.2.7 of annex II of the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC. They are intended for outdoor use
within Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) systems using suitable I.S. barriers (contact KAC for a list of approved
barriers).
Installation efficiency, flexibility and full compliance with the latest standards are at the heart of the
new WCP outdoor Call Point range.
The outdoor WCP is an IP67 sealed manual call point product. The enhanced environmental
protection allows the unit to be installed in many external environments where water and dirt are likely
to be present, making it a true waterproof and outdoor product.
Installation time and ultimately cost, are of paramount importance to any fire or security installer.
The WCP range directly reflects this need by providing a unique plug and play concept designed
specifically to reduce installation time. All new WCP products utilise a special terminal block,
where all initial installation cabling is terminated. This terminal block is then simply connected to
the back of the WCP. Simple, but effective with no re-termination required and no time wasted. In
addition, all WCP products are supplied with three standard 20mm threaded holes for cable entries,
accommodating all types of surface wiring installations.
Through new standards and legislation, both break glass and re-settable operating elements can
now be used within a manual call point. To provide you with the greatest flex-ability, the new
WCP range can be configured as either a break glass or re-settable unit by simply changing from
one element to another. No other additional parts or alternative products need to be ordered.
All WCP Outdoor Call Point products also help preserve the integrity of the overall system as illegal removal
of the product lid will result in the call point operating and the system going in to alarm.
Full compliance with the latest standards is essential and the new WCP indoor call point range is
fully approved to the latest EN54-11 standard.
The WCP1A product version is supplied with both a resistor and normally open clean
contact electrical options. These options are easily utilised by simply connecting the
terminal block to the required connection in the back of the WCP1 product. A variety of
resistor versions are available, with both 470 and 680 offered as standard. However,
other resistor types can be provided upon request.
ISWCP1
Rev. No. 1
1/1/70 6:30:43 AM
Electrical Specification
Connection Details:
Cable Termination:
Maximium Voltage:
Switch Rating:
Certification Details:
Figure .1
WCP1A-X WCP1B-X
See Figure .1
0.5-2.5mm2
30VDC
2 Amps
II 1GD Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (-30CTa+70C)
Ex iaD T135C Da (-20CTa+40C) when Pi = 0.75W
(-20CTa+70C) when Pi = 0.65W
Sira 06ATEX2131X
IECEx SIR 08.0105X
Suitable IS Barriers:
Pepperl & Fuchs KFDO-Cs-Ex 1.51P (BAS98ATEX7343), KFDO-Cs-Ex 2.51P (BAS98ATEX7343)
MTL MTL4061 (BAS01ATEX7176), MTL5061 (BAS01ATEX7160)
A certified shunt zener barrier may be used having the following output parameters;
Uz - 28V, Imax - 93.3mA, Wmax - 0.67W
Environmental Specification
0-95% non-condensing
-300C to +700C
-300C to +700C
IP67
Material:
Weight:
Colour:
PC/ABS
240g
Red, Ral 3001
97.5mm
71mm
84mm
93mm
Mechanical Specification
77mm
Humidity:
Storage Temperature:
Ingress Protection (IP) Rating:
Model
Electrical Configuration
Mounting
Operating
Element
Markings
Non-Stock
WCP1A-R470SG-01
WCP1A-R470SF-01
WCP1A-R680SG-01
WCP1A-R680SF-01
470 Resistor & N\O 30VDC

Surface
Surface
Surface
Surface
Glass
Flexi
Glass
Flexi
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
WCP1B-R470SG-01
WCP1B-R470SF-01
WCP1B-R680SG-01
WCP1B-R680SF-01
470 Resistor & N\O 30VDC (SAV)

Surface
Surface
Surface
Surface
Glass
Flexible
Glass
Flexible
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
N\O = Normally Open Contact

SAV = Savwire system
Accessories
Code
SC070
KG1 x 5
PS210
PS200
SC071
Description
Pack Of Ten Test Keys
Pack Of Five Glass Elements
Flexible Operating Element
Plain Hinged Cover
Pack Of Ten Terminal Blocks
> KAC Alarm Company Ltd

KAC House, Thornhill Road,
North Moons Moat, Redditch,
B98 9ND, United Kingdom
Tel: +44 (0) 1527 406655
Fax: +44 (0) 1527 406677
e-mail: marketing@kac.co.uk
1/1/70 6:30:44 AM
Intrinsically Safe Outdoor Call Points

Double Pole Changeover Contact Model
(Red Versions)
> Product Benefits
Sealed to IP67

element
Enhanced aesthetics and compact design
1GD Ex ia C T4 Ga
Sira 06ATEX2131X
IECEx SIR 08.0105X
166b
Product Overview
An Intrinsically Safe version of our WCP4A outdoor call point is available for installation in
hazardous areas. These call points are manufactured to protect against other hazards, as defined
in paragraph 1.2.7 of annex II of the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC. They are intended for outdoor use
within Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) systems using suitable I.S. barriers (contact KAC for a list of approved
barriers).
Installation efficiency, flexibility and full compliance with the latest standards are at the heart of the
new WCP outdoor Call Point range.
The outdoor WCP is an IP67 sealed manual call point product. The enhanced environmental
protection allows the unit to be installed in many external environments where water and dirt are likely
to be present, making it a true waterproof and outdoor product.
Installation time and ultimately cost, are of paramount importance to any fire or security installer.
The WCP range directly reflects this need by providing a unique plug and play concept designed
specifically to reduce installation time. All new WCP products utilise a special terminal block,
where all initial installation cabling is terminated. This terminal block is then simply connected to
the back of the WCP. Simple, but effective with no re-termination required and no time wasted. In
addition, all WCP products are supplied with three standard 20mm threaded holes for cable entries,
accommodating all types of surface wiring installations.
Through new standards and legislation, both break glass and re-settable operating elements can
now be used within a manual call point. To provide you with the greatest flex-ability, the new
WCP range can be configured as either a break glass or re-settable unit by simply changing from
one element to another. No other additional parts or alternative products need to be ordered.
All WCP Outdoor Call Point products also help preserve the integrity of the overall system as illegal removal
of the product lid will result in the call point operating and the system going in to alarm.
Full compliance with the latest standards is essential and the new WCP indoor call point range is
fully approved to the latest EN54-11 standard.
The WCP4A product version is supplied with a double pole changeover set of contacts. The
product utilises two terminal blocks and wiring to the relevant terminals on these terminal connector
blocks provides either a normally open or normally closed operation (see wiring diagram
overleaf).
ISWCP4
Rev. No. 1
1/1/70 6:30:46 AM
Connection Details:
Cable Termination:
Maximium Voltage:
Switch Rating:
Figure .1
See Figure .1
0.5-2.5mm2
30VDC
2 Amps
WCP4A-X
or
II 1GD Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (-30CTa+70C)

Ex iaD T135C Da (-20CTa+40C) when Pi = 0.75W
(-20CTa+70C) when Pi = 0.65W
Sira 06ATEX2131X
IECEx SIR 08.0105X
Uz - 28V, Imax - 93.3mA, Wmax - 0.67W
Humidity:
Storage Temperature:
-300C to +700C
-300C to +700C
IP67
PC/ABS
240g
Red, Ral 3001
97.5mm
71mm
84mm
77mm
93mm
Material:
Weight:
Colour:
Model
Mounting
Operating
Element
Markings
Non-Stock
WCP4A-R000SG-01
WCP4A-R000SF-01
N\O & N\C Contacts 30VDC

N\O & N\C Contacts 30VDC
Surface
Surface
Glass
Flexi
EN54-11
EN54-11
N\C = Normally Closed Contact

Accessories
Code
SC070
KG1 x 5
PS210
PS200
SC071
Description
Plain Hinged Cover

Tel: +44 (0) 1527 406655
Fax: +44 (0) 1527 406677
1/1/70 6:30:47 AM
Intrinsically Safe Call Point Range

Resistor & Clean Contact Model
(Red Versions)
> Product Benefits

element
Enhanced aesthetics
Backward compatibility
166b
Product Overview
An Intrinsically Safe version of our MCP1A indoor call point is available for installation in
hazardous areas. These call points are manufactured to protect against other hazards, as
defined in paragraph 1.2.7 of annex II of the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC. They are intended
for use within Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) systems using suitable I.S. barriers. For a list of
suitable barriers see reverse.
Installation efficiency, flexibility and full compliance with the latest standards are at the
heart of the new Indoor Call Point range.
Installation time and ultimately cost, are of paramount importance to any fire or security
installer. The MCP range directly reflects this need by providing a unique plug and play
concept designed specifically to reduce installation time. All new MCP products utilise
a special terminal block, where all initial installation cabling is terminated. This terminal
block is then simply connected to the back of the MCP. Simple, but effective with no
re-termination required and no time wasted.
Through new standards and legislation, both break glass and resettable operating
elements can now be used within a manual call point. To provide you with the greatest
flex-ability, the new MCP range can be configured as either a break glass or resettable
unit by simply changing from one element to another. No other additional parts or
alternative products need to be ordered.
All MCP Indoor Call Point products also help preserve the integrity of the overall system
as illegal removal of the product lid will result in the call point operating and the system
going in to alarm.
The MCP1A product version is supplied with both a resistor and normally open clean
contact electrical options. These options are easily utilised by simply connecting the
terminal block to the required connection in the back of the MCP1 product. A variety of
resistor versions are available, with both 470 and 680 offered as standard. However,
other resistor types can be provided upon request. The MCP1B product version allows
for connection to Savwire systems.
IS-MCP1
Rev. No. 2
1/1/70 6:30:48 AM
Connection Details:
Cable Termination:
Maximum Voltage:
Maximum current:
Maximum Power:
Figure .1
IS-MCP1A-X
IS-MCP1B-X
See Figure .1
0.5-2.5mm2
30VDC
500mA
1W
Uz - 28V, Imax - 93.3mA, Wmax - 0.67W
-300C to + 700C
IP24D
89mm
Material:
Weight:
Colour:
PC/ABS
110g Flush
160g Surface
Red, Ral 3001
60mm
93mm
72mm
27.5mm 32mm
72mm
Humidity:
Ambient Temperature Range:
Model
MCP1A-R470FG-01IS
MCP1A-R470FF-01IS
MCP1A-R470SG-01IS
MCP1A-R470SF-01IS
MCP1A-R680FG-01IS
MCP1A-R680FF-01IS
MCP1A-R680SG-01IS
MCP1A-R680SF-01IS
Mounting
Flush
Flush
Surface
FSurface
Flush
Flush
Surface
Surface
Operating Element
Glass
Flexi
Glass
Flexi
Glass
Flexi
Glass
Flexi
Markings
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
MCP1B-R470FG-01IS
MCP1B-R470FF-01IS
MCP1B-R470SG-01IS
MCP1B-R470SF-01IS
MCP1B-R680FG-01IS
MCP1B-R680FF-01IS
MCP1B-R680SG-01IS
MCP1B-R680SF-01IS
470
470
470
470
680
680
680
680
Flush
Flush
Surface
Surface
Flush
Flush
Surface
Surface
Glass
Flexi
Glass
Flexi
Glass
Flexi
Glass
Flexi
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
Resistor & N\O 30VDC


SAV = Savwire system
Accessories
Code
SC070
KG1 x 5
PS210
PS200
SC071
Description
Plain Hinged Cover

Tel: +44 (0) 1527 406655
Fax: +44 (0) 1527 406677
1/1/70 6:30:49 AM
Intrinsically Safe Call Point Range

Intelligent Model - System Sensor Protocol
(Red Versions)
> Product Benefits

element
Enhanced aesthetics
Backward compatibility
II 1G Ex ia IIC T4
Baseefa 07ATEX0200X
IECEx BAS 07.0060X
166b
Product Overview
An Intrinsically Safe version of our MCP5A indoor call point is available for installation in
hazardous areas. These call points are manufactured to protect against other hazards, as
defined in paragraph 1.2.7 of annex II of the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC. They are intended
for use within Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) systems using suitable I.S. barriers. For a list of
suitable barriers see reverse.
Installation efficiency, flexibility and full compliance with the latest standards are at the
heart of the Indoor Call Point range.
Installation time and ultimately cost, are of paramount importance to any fire or security
installer. The MCP range directly reflects this need by providing a unique plug and play
concept designed specifically to reduce installation time. All new MCP products utilise a
special terminal block, where all initial installation cabling is terminated. This terminal block
is then simply connected to the back of the MCP. Simple, but effective with no re-termination
required and no time wasted.
Both break glass and resettable operating elements can now be used within a manual
call point. To provide you with the greatest flex-ability, the new MCP range can be
configured as either a break glass or resettable unit by simply changing from one element
to another. No other additional parts or alternative products need to be ordered.
All MCP Indoor Call Point products also help preserve the integrity of the overall system as
illegal removal of the product lid will result in the call point operating and the system going in to
alarm.
The MCP5A product is supplied with System Sensors protocol embedded. This allows
the device to be used in addressable systems running compatible protocols.
IS-MCP5
Rev. No.2
1/1/70 6:30:50 AM
Connection Details:
Cable Termination:
Maximum Voltage:
Standby current:
Operating current:
Figure .1
IS-MCP5A-X
See Figure .1
0.5-2.5mm2
24VDC
400uA
4.8mA (Typical)
II 1G Ex ia IIC T4
Baseefa 07ATEX0200X
IECEx BAS 07.0060X
P & F Smart Fire Detector Isolator
Type KFDO-CS-Ex1.54-Y72221
(BAS00ATEX7087x)
One channel from:
P & F Smart Fire Detector Isolator
Type KFDO-CS-Ex2.54-Y72222
(BAS00ATEX7087x)
-300C to + 700C
IP24D
Material:
Weight:
Colour:
PC/ABS
110g Flush
160g Surface
Red, Ral 3001
89mm
27.5mm 32mm
93mm
72mm
60mm
72mm
Humidity:
Ambient Temperature Range:
Model
Electrical
Configuration
Mounting
Operating
Element
Markings
MCP5A-RP01FG-K013-01IS
MCP5A-RP01FF-K013-01IS
MCP5A-RP01SG-K013-01IS
MCP5A-RP01SF-K013-01IS
N\O
N\O
N\O
N\O
Flush
Flush
Surface
Surface
Glass
Flexi
Glass
Flexi
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
EN54-11
N\C = Normally Closed Contact

Accessories
Code
SC070
KG1 x 5
PS210
PS200
SC071
Description
Plain Hinged Cover

Tel: +44 (0) 1527 406655
Fax: +44 (0) 1527 406677
1/1/70 6:30:51 AM
XAL-53
Hazardous Location Pull Station
Applications
KILLARK fire alarm stations are suitable for:
5274pho.jpg
Hazardous areas due to the presence of flammable gases

or vapors, combustible dusts or easily ignitable fibers or flyings.
Installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, storage areas, and other processing facilities where hazardous substances are handled and stored.
Areas where emergency control of fire alarm or signal circuits is required.
Features
Enclosure is made of copper-free aluminum alloy.
Conduit openings are 3/4" (19.05 mm) NPT feed-through.
Red, textured powder epoxy paint finish is standard on box
and cover and provides high visibility for alarm station.
Universal (1) normally open and (1) normally closed contact
furnished standard.
Bilingual nameplates included per CSA requirement.
Internal ground screw is standard.
Wiring range is #12 AWG through #24 AWG, solid or
stranded.
Operation
The alarm station is activated by lifting the front cover and pulling down ring. This quick, easy-to-use two-step process prevents unintentional operation. Operator is reset by depressing
shaft and returning plate to original position.
Hazardous Area Classifications
Class I, Divison 1 and 2, Groups C and D.

Class I, Zones 1 and 2, Groups IIB, IIA.
Class II, Division 1 and 2, Group E, F, and G.
Class III, Hazardous Locations.
NEMA 7CD, 9EFG.
Operational Data
XAL-53
Pull Ring
Dow Corning Molykote 33 Grease, light consistency, to

operator shaft.
2. Keep all flanges clean and free of scratches.
3. Some internal service parts are available. Consult the
Killark factory for parts breakdowns.

UL Listed: E50498
ULC Listed: E50498
CSA: LR31085
CSFM: 7150-1439:100
Contact Arrangement
Not Activated Position
This enclosure is made of cast, copper-free aluminum alloy. It

is suitable for: Class I, Groups C and D; Class II, Groups E, F,
and G; and Class III hazardous locations. All installations
must comply with applicable local and/or National Electrical
Code.
Like all electromechanical devices, these control stations
require occasional maintenance. Parts may wear out or
become defective due to adverse environmental conditions.
See Maintenance Data below.
5274con1.wmf
Activated Position
Maintenance Data
CAUTION: Disconnect this device from the supplying circuit before
removing the cover.
5274con2.wmf
1. To prevent corrosion, lubricant should be occasionally

applied, as follows:
Killark LUBG lubricant to box/cover flanges.
5/18/10 11:24:14 PM
Contact Block Rating

AC
DC
Volts
Make
Amperes
VA
Break
Amperes
VA
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
Volts
Make Break
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
120
60
7200
6.0
720
10
125
1.10
10
240
30
7200
3.0
720
10
250
0.55
10
480
15
7200
1.5
720
10
600
0.20
10
600
12
7200
1.2
720
10
3" (76.2 mm)
4-1/2" (114.3 mm)

2-1/4"
(57.15 mm)
2-1/4"
1"
(57.15 mm)
(25.4
mm)
5-3/8"
6-3/8"
4-5/8"
(136.53 mm) (117.48 mm)

5274dim1.tif
(161.93 mm)
5/8" dia.
(7.94 mm)
(2 holes)

XAL-53: Explosion-proof, N/O and N/C Contacts.
KILLARK is a registered trademark of Hubbell. Molykote is a trademark of the Dow Corning Corporation.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3094-1:1
85-3094-1 Rev. 1/10
April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:24:14 PM
30-3003
Explosion-Proof Smoke Detector
The Pyrotector Model 30-3003 Explosion Proof Smoke Detector is a sensitive yet rugged protection device that is designed
for use in hazardous industrial and commercial locations. The
detector is designed to operate effectively with both slow smoldering and fast burning fires.
Features
Rugged construction.
Self checking and compensating circuitry maintains desired
sensitivity.
Heightened sensitivity triggered when smoke is increasing,
but has not yet reached the preset sensitivity setting.
Form A (SPST) N.O. contacts for connection to alarm output circuitry.
SPST N.C. contacts for supervision of input power.
2.3% fixed sensitivity.
3846cros.tif
General
Cross Section of Sensing Chamber Assembly
Applications
Combustible storage facilities.

Munitions manufacturing.
Volatile chemical storage.
Chemical processing plants.
Petroleum refineries.
Turbine enclosures.
Construction & Operation

The photoelectric smoke detector uses a solid-state infraredemitting diode (IRED) and a light-sensing photovoltaic cell
arranged in a labyrinth assembly. The labyrinth permits free
access to smoke but restricts external light. Because of its
critical function to the operation of the detector, each IRED is
selected with extreme care and is subjected to rigorous preproduction testing to ensure long-term reliability and performance.
During normal operation (no smoke), the detector samples the
air approximately every four seconds for a period of less than
one millisecond. The photovoltaic smoke cell, which is placed
at an angle to the pulsed invisible light source, is sensitive to
the infrared light in the specified frequency emitted by the
IRED light source and is designed to receive a signal only
when the pulsed IRED source is activated. See Cross Section of Sensing Chamber Assembly at top of opposite column.
When smoke enters the chamber, the light from the IRED
reflects off the smoke particles and reaches the photovoltaic
smoke cell. When the amount of light reflected by smoke
reaches the factory-set threshold level, the smoke alarm circuit
is actuated.
The detector will respond to a slow smoldering fire when
smoke in the chamber reaches the preset sensitivity setting,
typically 2.3%.
If a fast-burning fire should occur, including fires in flammable
liquids and other materials such as plastics that generate black
smoke, the abnormally rapid movement of smoke into the
detection chamber is sensed by a special rate-compensating
circuit. An increase in smoke within the detection chamber
that exceeds a preset rate causes the rate-compensation circuit to increase the intensity of the light source, which
increases detector sensitivity. If the smoke continues to build
at this rate, an amplifier circuit is triggered and the unit generates an alarm. If not, the detector reverts to normal sensitivity.
In normally smoky atmospheres, the detector will not go into
alarm as long as the concentration is less than the fixed sensitivity of the detector. This results in a sensitive and positive
response with a very low potential for unwanted alarms.
The main enclosure of the detector contains the electronic circuitry, alarm relay, and supervision relay.
Fail-safe Operation. To ensure reliable operation, the Model
30-3003 is equipped with self-checking circuitry. A regulation
photodiode, which is matched to the smoke detection circuit,
continuously monitors the output intensity of the IRED and
adjusts it as necessary to compensate for an accumulation of
dust or other contaminants, or any other variation that can
occur with temperature and time. A power supervision relay in
the detector provides a trouble output signal in the event of an
input power failure.
The detector uses extensive filtering against RF and transient
interference. In addition, there is a two-second time delay
before an alarm is generated.
The printed circuit board inside the detector is coated to minimize the possibility of problems caused by moisture accumulation.
Detector Outputs. The detector provides a set of Form A
(SPST) N.O. contacts for connection to the alarm output circuitry and a set of SPST N.C. contacts for supervision of input
power. An auxilliary set of Form C (SPDT) NO/NC alarm relay
contacts is also provided for controlling remote annunication
devices. The alarm output latches on in the event of an alarm
and an LED located on the outer surface of the housing is illuminated to provide a visual indication that an alarm condition
has occurred. The detector is reset by momentarily interrupting input power.
Classification. The Model 30-3003 is designed to meet NEC
requirements for Class I, Division 2, Groups A,B, C and D;
5/18/10 11:24:15 PM
hazardous areas. CSA certified for use in Class 1, Division 2,

Groups A,B, C, and D hazardous locations.
Explosion-Proof Certification. The Model 30-3003 is certified by the German Electric Industry Association, VDE, to
meet Standards 0171/ Special Protection (Ex)sG5 (sand
encapsulated), and PTB/CENELEC approved as EEx q II T5.
Specifications
Operating Voltage: 20 to 28 volts DC.
Operating Current: Standby: 10 milliamperes. Alarm: 35
milliamperes.
Temperature Range: 13F to +140F (25C to +60C).
Alarm and Supervisory Relay Contact Rating: 1.0 ampere
at 30 vdc. SPST.
Auxiliary Alarm Relay Contact Rating: 2.0 amperes at 30
vdc. Form C. SPDT.
2. One set of N.C. Trouble contacts close when the detector

is powered.
Maintenance
Regularly scheduled maintenance is normally not needed,
however, periodic cleaning of the smoke chamber may be necessary when detectors are located in abnormally dirty or dusty
environments. Vacuuming around the smoke chamber housing prior to blowing out the chamber with a dry air hose is
recommended.
NOTE: The Model 30-3003 is NOT designed to be serviced or
repaired in the field. Disassembly of the detector in the field will
VOID both the explosion-proof rating and the warranty. If service
or repairs are required, RETURN THE ENTIRE UNIT TO THE
FACTORY.
The smoke detector can be tested using the same methods

employed for any photoelectric detector.
Dimensions: Diameter: 5-5/16". Depth: 3-1/2".
DO NOT USE canned aerosol smoke devices to test the

detector, since damage can result.
Junction Box:
Body Material: Copper-free aluminum,
Cover: Feraloy, Conduit Fitting: 25 mm (female).
Engineering Specifications
Installation
The Model 30-3003 is intended for surface mounting. The
mounting screw holes are counterbored for No. 8 flat-head
screws. Electrical equipment that is used in conjunction with
the smoke detector is connected to the detector using a terminal strip located in the junction box that is furnished with the
unit.
Detector Location
The smoke detector is normally mounted on the ceiling not
less than six inches from a side wall. The exact location of the
detector must be determined by an evaluation based on engineering judgment supplemented, if possible, by field tests.
For additional information on detector location and spacing,
contact the National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 02269, and request a
copy of NFPA Number 72, the Standard on Automatic Fire
Detectors.
Detector Connections
The Model 30-3003 contains two sets of relay contacts.
1. One set of N.O. Alarm contacts close upon detection of
smoke.
The detector shall be a 2.3% fixed sensitivity photoelectric

smoke detector, providing minimum response time to all fire
types.
The detection chamber shall extend beyond the main housing
into the area to be protected, to provide maximum smoke entry
capability into the chamber from any direction.
The detector light source shall be an IRED (Infrared Emitting
Diode). Typical detector current consumption in the standby
condition shall be 10 milliamperes.
The detector shall lock in on alarm and have a visible alarm
indicator LED.
The detector shall have SPST alarm relay contacts for connection to the fire alarm control panel and also power supervision
contacts.
The detector enclosure shall be an explosion-proof flanged
housing designed to meet CSA certification for use in Class 1,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D hazardous locations.
The detector shall be intended for surface mounting and connection to the system wiring shall be within a rated enclosure
(furnished).

30-3003
Explosion-Proof Smoke Detector.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3088:2
85-3088-2 Rev. 04/10
April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:24:15 PM
SpectrAlert Advance
Indoor Selectable Output Speaker Strobes and
Dual Voltage Evacuation Speakers
General
The SpectrAlert Advance Series of speakers and speaker
strobes is designed to reduce ground faults. The plug-in design
allows the installer to pre-wire mounting plates and dress the
wires before plugging in the speakers. The plastic cover prevents nicked wires by covering exposed speaker components.
60327pho1.j
pg
This design also allows faster installations with instant feedback

to ensure that wiring is properly connected, rotary switches to
select voltage and power settings, and 11 field selectable candela settings for wall and ceiling speaker strobes.
The low total harmonic distortion of the SP speaker offers high
fidelity sound output while the SPV speaker offers high volume
sound output for use in high ambient noise applications.
SpectrAlert Advance makes installation easy
Attach a universal mounting plate to a 4 x 4 x 2-1/8 back
box. Flush mount applications are achievable without the
need for an extension ring.
Connect the notification appliance circuit or speaker wiring to
the PEMS terminals on the mounting plate.
Attach the speaker or speaker strobe to the mounting plate
by inserting the product tabs into the mounting plate grooves.
Rotate the device into position to lock the product pins into
the mounting plate terminals. The device will temporarily hold
in place with a catch until it is secured with a captured mounting screw.
Features
Plug-in design
Protective cover isolates speaker components, reduces
ground faults
Electrical compatibility with existing SpectrAlert products
Field selectable candela settings on wall and ceiling units:
Standard: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115
High: 135, 150, 177, 185
Shorting spring on mounting plate tests continuity before
installation
Rotary switch simplifies field selection of speaker voltage and
power settings
Universal mounting plate for wall- and ceiling-mount units
Compatible with System Sensor synchronization protocol
SP speakers offer high fidelity sound output
SPV speakers offer high volume sound output
Automatic selection of 12 or 24 volt operation at 15 and 15/75
candela
No extension ring required
Ceiling and wall mount application
Optional tamper resistant Torx head screw included
Specifications
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature: 32F to 120F (0C to 49C)
Humidity Range: 10 to 93% non-condensing

Dimensions, Wall-Mount:
SPS Speaker Strobe: 6.0L x 5.0W x 4.7D
(includes lens and speaker)
SPSV Speaker Strobe: 6.0L x 5.0W x 4.9D
SP Speaker: 6.0L x 5.0W x 2.8D
SPSV Speaker: 6.0L x 5.0W x 2.9D
Dimensions, Ceiling-Mount:
SPS Speaker Strobe: 6.8Dia x 4.7D
SPSV Speaker Strobe: 6.8Dia x 4.8D
SP Speaker: 6.8Dia x 2.8D
SPSV Speaker: 6.8Dia x 2.9D
ELECTRICAL/OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal Voltage (speakers): 25 Volts or 70.7 Volts (nominal)
Maximum Supervisory Voltage (speakers): 50VDC
Strobe Flash Rate: 1 flash per second
Nominal Voltage (strobes): Regulated 12VDC/FWR or regulated 24DC/FWR
Operating Voltage Range (includes fire alarm panels with
built-in sync): 8 to 17.5V (12V nominal) or 16 to 33V (24V
nominal)
Operating Voltage with MDL Sync Module: 9 to 17.5V (12V
nominal) or 17 to 33V (24V nominal)
Frequency Range: 400 to 4000 Hz
Power: , , 1, 2 watts

approval agencies, or listing may be in progress. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL Listed: S4048
MEA: 10-08-E
CSFM: 7320-1653:201
FM Approved
5/18/10 11:24:16 PM
Audio / Visual Devices
7.0 Audio / Visual Devices

Speaker Strobes
Horns
Bells
Sounders
UL Maximum Strobe Current Draw (mA RMS)

Candela
Standard
Candela
Range
High
Candela
Range
15
15/75
30
75
95
110
115
135
150
177
185
8 to 17.5 Volts
DC
FWR
123
128
142
148
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
16 to 33 Volts
DC
FWR
66
71
77
81
94
96
158
153
181
176
202
195
210
205
228
207
246
220
281
251
286
258
SYNCHRONIZATION MODULE
The module shall be a System Sensor Sync Circuit model MDL listed to
UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The module shall
synchronize SpectrAlert strobes at 1Hz. The module shall mount to a
4-11/16 x 4-11/16 x 2-1/8 backbox. The module shall also control two
Style Y (class B) circuits or one Style Z (class A) circuit. The module shall
synchronize multiple zones. Daisy chaining two or more synchronization
modules together will synchronize all the zones they control. The module
shall not operate on a coded power supply.
NOTE: (W) indicates white coloring; (R), red.
WALL MOUNT
Sound Output
UL Reverberant (dBA @ 10ft)
Wall Mount SP Series
Wall Mount SPV Series
Ceiling Mount SPC Series
Ceiling Mount SPCV Series
Wall Mount SPS Series
Wall Mount SPSV Series
Ceiling Mount SPSC Series
Ceiling Mount SPSCV Series
range of 400 to 4000Hz. Speaker shall have power taps which are
selected by rotary switch. The strobe shall comply with the NFPA 72
requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1Hz over the
strobes entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a
xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system.
2W
86
90
86
90
85
89
85
89
1W
83
87
83
87
82
86
82
86
W
80
84
80
84
79
83
79
83
W
77
81
77
81
76
80
76
80
Architectural/Engineering
Specifications
GENERAL
SpectrAlert Advance speaker and speaker strobes shall mount to a
4 x 4 x 2-1/8 backbox. A universal mounting plate shall be used for
mounting ceiling and wall products. The notification appliance circuit and
amplifier wiring shall terminate at the universal mounting plate. Also,
SpectrAlert Advance speaker strobes, when used with the Sync Circuit.
Module accessory, shall be powered from a non-coded notification appliance circuit output and shall operate on a nominal 12 or 24volts. When
used with the Sync.Circuit Module, 12 volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between nine and 17.5 volts; 24 volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 17 and 33 volts.
Indoor SpectrAlert Advance products shall operate between 32F and
120F from a regulated DC, or full-wave rectified, unfiltered power supply.
Speaker strobes shall have field-selectable candela settings including 15,
15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, 185.
SPEAKER
The speaker shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance model
_______ dual-voltage transformer speaker capable of operating at 25.0 or
70.7 nominal Vrms. It should be listed to UL 1480 and shall be approved
for fire protective service. The speaker shall have a frequency range of
400 to 4000Hz and shall have an operating temperature between 32F
and 120F. Speaker shall have power taps and voltage that are selected
by rotary switches.
SPEAKER STROBE COMBINATION
SP(W)(R): Speaker only.

SP(W)(R)V: Speaker only, high dB; white.
SPS(W)(R)*: Speaker strobe, selectable candela (15, 15/75,
30, 75, 95, 110, 115).
SPS(W)(R)H*: Speaker strobe, selectable candela, high cd
(135, 150, 177, 185).
SPS(W)(R)V*: Speaker strobe, selectable candela, high dB.
CEILING MOUNT
SPC(W)(R): Speaker only.
SPC(W)(R)V: Speaker only, high dB.
SPSC(W*)(R): Speaker strobe, selectable candela (15, 15/75,
30, 50, 75, 95, 110, 115)
SPSC(W*)(R)H: Speaker strobe, selectable candela, high cd
(135, 150, 177, 185)
SPSC(W*)(R)V: Speaker strobe, selectable candela, high dB
(15, 15/75, 30, 50, 75, 95, 110, 115).
SPSC(W*)(R)VH: Speaker strobe, selectable candela, high dB,
high cd (135, 150, 177, 185).
ACCESSORIES
RFP: Retrofit plate (5 pack), red.
RFPW: Retrofit plate (5 pack), white.
SPBBSC: Ceiling mount backbox skirt, red.
SPBBSCW: Ceiling mount backbox skirt, white.
SPBBS: Wall mount backbox skirt, red.
SPBBSW: Wall mount backbox skirt, white.
TR: Wall mount trim ring, red.
TRW: Wall mount trim ring, white.
TRC: Ceiling mount trim ring, red.
TRCW: Ceiling mount trim ring, white.
*NOTE: Add -P to model number for plain housing (no FIRE
marking on the cover), e.g. SPSW-P
The speaker strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance model

__________ listed to UL1480 and UL 1971 and be approved for fire protective signaling systems. Speaker shall be capable of operating at 25.0 or
70.7 nominal Vrms selected via rotary switch, and shall have a frequency
SpectrAlert is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3130-1 Rev. 03/09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:24:16 PM
SpectrAlert Advance
Selectable Output CHR, CHW Chimes
and CHSR, CHSW Chime/Strobes
7089pho1.tif
P2F-P-rgb.bmp
General
Honeywells System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance selectableoutput chimes and chime/strobes are private-mode notification
appliances used to alert trained personnel to investigate possible emergency situations and to take appropriate action. Security guard and nurse workstations are ideal locations for chime
products.
SpectrAlert Advance chimes and chime/strobes are rich with
features guaranteed to cut installation times and maximize
profits. The SpectrAlert Advance series of notification appliances is designed to simplify your installations, with features
such as: plug-in designs, instant feedback messages to
ensure correct installation of individual devices, and seven
field-selectable candela settings for chime/strobes.
More specifically, when installing Advance products, first
attach a universal mounting plate to a four-inch (10.16 cm)
square, four-inch octagonal, single-gang, or double-gang junction box.
Then, connect the notification appliance circuit wiring to the
SEMS terminals on the mounting plate.
Finally, attach the chime or chime/strobe to the mounting plate
by inserting the products tabs in the mounting plates grooves.
The device will rotate into position, locking the products pins
into the mounting plates terminals. The device will temporarily
hold in place with a catch until it is secured with a captive
mounting screw.
SpectrAlert Advance products allow you to choose:
12 or 24 volts.
At 24 volts, 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, or 115 candela by
way of rear-mounted slide-switch and front-view window.
Chime tones and volume by way of rotary switch.
Features
Plug-in design.
Shorting spring on mounting plate for pre-installation continuity check.
Captive mounting screw.
Torx screw for tamper resistance.
Field-selectable candela settings: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95,
110, 115.
Automatic selection of 12- or 24-volt operation at 15 and 15/
75 candela.
Minimal intrusion into the backbox.
Rotary switch for tone selection.
Two volume settings.
Electrically compatible with existing SpectrAlert products.
Chime (CHW)
Chime/Strobe (CHSR)
SyncCircuit Module accessory, shall be powered from a

non-coded notification appliance circuit output and shall
operate on a nominal 12 or 24 volts. When used with the
SyncCircuit Module, 12-volt rated notification appliance circuit
outputs shall operate between 9 and 17.5 volts; 24-volt rated
notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 17
and 33 volts. Indoor SpectrAlert Advance products shall
operate between 32F and 120F from a regulated DC, or fullwave-rectified, unfiltered power supply. Chime/strobes shall
have field-selectable candela settings of 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95,
110, and 115.
CHIME/STROBE COMBINATION
The chime/strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert
Advance Model _______ listed to UL/ULC 1638 and UL/ULC
464. The chime/strobe shall comply with the Americans with
Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances,
flashing at 1 Hz over the strobes entire operating voltage
range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and
associated lens/reflector system. The chime shall have two
audibility options and an option to switch between a temporal
three-pattern and a non-temporal (continuous) pattern. These
options are set by a multiple position switch.
SYNCHRONIZATION MODULE
The module shall be a System Sensor SyncCircuit _______
listed to UL/ULC 464 and shall be approved for fire protective
service. The module shall synchronize SpectrAlert strobes at 1
Hz and chimes at Temporal 3. Also, while operating the
strobes, the module shall silence the chimes on chime/strobe
models over a single pair of wires. The module shall mount to
a 4.688" x 4.688" x 2.125" backbox. The module shall also
control two Style Y (Class B) circuits or one Style Z (Class A)
circuit. The module shall synchronize multiple zones. Daisychaining two or more synchronization modules together will
synchronize all the zones they control. The module shall not
operate on a coded power supply.
Engineering Specifications
Operating Specifications
SpectrAlert Advance chimes and chime/strobes shall mount to

a standard 4.0" x 4.0" x 1.5" backbox, 4.0" octagonal backbox,
single-gang 2.0" x 4.0" x 1.875" backbox, or double-gang
backbox. A universal mounting plate shall be used for
mounting products. The notification appliance circuit wiring
shall terminate at the universal mounting plate. Also,
SpectrAlert Advance products, when used with the
Standard operating temperature: 32F to 120F.

Humidity range: 10% to 93% non-condensing (indoor
products).
Strobe flash rate: 1 flash per second.
Nominal voltage: regulated 12 VDC/FWR or regulated 24
VDC/FWR.
5/18/10 11:24:17 PM
Operating voltage range: 8 V to 17.5 V (12 V nominal); or

16 V to 33 V (24 V nominal). NOTE: CHS products will
operate at 12 V nominal only for 15 cd and 15/75 cd.
Input terminal wire gauge: 12 to 18 AWG.
Chime/strobe dimensions (including lens): 5.6" H x 4.7"
W x 2.5" D.
Chime dimensions: 5.6" H x 4.7" W x 1.3" D.

The listings and approvals below apply to SpectrAlert Advance
Selectable Output Chimes and Chime/Strobes. In some cases,
certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status.
UL/ULC Listed: file S4011.

FM approved.
MEA approved: file 452-05-E.
CSFM approved: file 7125-1653:188 (CHSR, CHSW); file
7135-1653:189 (CHR, CHW).
CHR: Chime, red.
CHRA: Same as above with ULC listing.
CHW: Chime, white.
CHWA: Same as above with ULC listing.
CHSR: Chime/strobe, red.
CHSRA: Same as above with ULC listing.
CHSW: Chime/strobe, white.
CHSWA: Same as above with ULC listing.
BBS-2: Backbox skirt, wall, red.
BBS-2A: Same as above with ULC listing.
BBSW-2: Backbox skirt, wall white.
BBSW-2A: Same as above with ULC listing.
Current Draw, UL Maximum (mA RMS)

8 17.5 Volts
Input, Pattern, dB Out
16 33 Volts
15 cd
15/75 cd
15 cd
15/75 cd
30 cd
75 cd
95 cd
110 cd
115 cd
DC, 1-Second Chime, HIGH
131
142
65
76
94
160
185
207
213
DC, 1-Second Chime, LOW
131
142
64
75
92
157
183
203
212
DC, 1/4-Second Chime, HIGH
129
142
66
75
95
159
184
205
212
DC, 1/4-Second Chime, LOW
129
142
64
74
91
155
181
204
211
DC, Temporal Chime, HIGH
125
142
64
74
91
156
181
205
211
DC, Temporal Chime, LOW
129
141
65
75
92
155
180
200
209
DC, 5-Second Whoop, HIGH
133
145
70
81
99
165
189
210
217
DC, 5-Second Whoop, LOW
130
143
66
77
95
160
186
206
214
DC, One-Time Chime
127
141
64
76
93
156
182
203
210
FWR, 1-Second Chime, HIGH
128
150
72
82
98
158
183
202
210
FWR, 1-Second Chime, LOW
127
150
71
81
97
157
182
202
210
FWR, 1/4-Second Chime, HIGH
129
149
72
82
99
160
183
203
211
FWR, 1/4-Second Chime, LOW
128
149
71
81
97
154
179
196
205
FWR, Temporal Chime, HIGH
128
148
71
81
97
157
179
199
206
FWR, Temporal Chime, LOW
125
147
71
81
97
156
180
200
206
FWR, 5-Second Whoop, HIGH
136
152
84
93
110
170
193
212
220
FWR, 5-Second Whoop, LOW
132
150
77
86
102
161
184
203
214
FWR, One-Time Chime
127
147
72
82
97
157
181
200
210
Page 2 of 4 85-0306:2 85-0306 4/20/2010
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:24:18 PM
Tone Selection
Chime Patterns
Chime tone selection is accomplished by using the rotary switch on the back
of the product. The current draw and sound measurements for various
chime tones are listed below.
Sound Pattern
1-Second Chime
dB
HIGH
Repetition Rate
dB Out
1-Second Chime
HIGH
1-Second Chime
LOW
1/4-Second Chime
HIGH
1/4-Second Chime
LOW
16 33 Volts
Temporal Chime
HIGH
Temporal Chime
LOW
Chime Current Draw,

UL Maximum (mA RMS)
8 17.5 Volts
Setting
DC
FWR
DC
FWR
34 mA
50 mA
58 mA
51 mA
5-Second Whoop
HIGH
5-Second Whoop
LOW
One Test Chime
HIGH
1-Second Chime
LOW
30 mA
51 mA
51 mA
54 mA
1/4-Second Chime
HIGH
34 mA
51 mA
50 mA
50 mA
1/4-Second Chime
LOW
31 mA
51 mA
50 mA
52 mA
Temporal Chime
HIGH
30 mA
50 mA
48 mA
54 mA
Temporal Chime
LOW
30 mA
47 mA
50 mA
51 mA
5-Second Whoop
HIGH
32 mA
52 mA
34 mA
54 mA
5-Second Whoop
LOW
30 mA
40 mA
34 mA
52 mA
One Test Chime
HIGH
48 mA
49 mA
50 mA
50 mA
Sound Output (dBA), Chime and Chime/Strobe

8 17.5 Volts
Switch
Setting
Sound Pattern
dB
DC
FWR
16 33 Volts
DC
FWR
1-Second Chime
HIGH
58 dBA 59 dBA 61 dBA 61 dBA
1-Second Chime
LOW
1/4-Second Chime
HIGH
1/4-Second Chime
LOW
Temporal Chime
HIGH
Temporal Chime
LOW
5-Second Whoop
HIGH
5-Second Whoop
LOW
One Test Chime
HIGH
SpectrAlert Advance Chime/Strobe Dimensions
7089dim1.tif
www.honeywell.com
85-0306:2 85-0306 4/20/2010 Page 3 of 4
1/1/70 10:47:07 AM
SyncCircuit is a trademark, and SpectrAlert and System Sensor are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-0306 Rev. 4-10
April 2010
Page 4 of 4
85-0306:2
1/1/70 10:47:07 AM
SpectrAlert Advance
Outdoor Selectable Output Speaker Strobes and
Dual Voltage Evacuation Speakers
General
The plug-in design allows the installer to pre-wire mounting

plates and dress the wires before plugging in the speakers to
help reduce ground faults. This design also allows faster installations with instant feedback to ensure that wiring is properly
connected, rotary switches to select voltage and power settings,
and field selectable candela settings for wall and ceiling speaker
strobes.
The new weatherproof back boxes have plastic and metal versions. They are now designed to accommodate in-and-out wiring for daisy chaining outdoor devices. The plastic weatherproof
back boxes shipped with the product feature removable side
flanges and improved resistance to salt water corrosion. The
screw hole knockouts located on the back of the weatherproof
back box eliminate the need to drill holes for screw-in mounting.
Both weatherproof back boxes are available with 3/4 inch top
and bottom conduit entries and 3/4 inch knock-outs at the back.
Included with each back box is a screw-in NPT plug with an Oring gasket for a watertight seal. Metal back boxes are available
separately.
Features
Plug-in design
Electrical compatibility with existing SpectrAlert products
Shorting spring on mounting plate tests continuity before
installation
Rotary switch simplifies field selection of speaker voltage and
power settings
Universal mounting plate for wall- and ceiling-mount units
Weatherproof per NEMA 4x, IP56
Compatible with System Sensor synchronization protocol
Automatic selection of 12 or 24-volt operation at 15 and 15/
75 candela
Field selectable candela settings on wall and ceiling units
Ceiling and wall mount application

approval agencies, or listing may be in progress. Consult factory
UL/ULC Listed: S4048

MEA: 10-08-E
CSFM: 7320-1653:201
60323pho1.jpg
The SpectrAlert Advance series offers the broadest line of outdoor speakers and speaker strobes in the industry. From metal
and plastic outdoor back boxes, to white and red plastic housings, to wall and ceiling mounting options, virtually every application is covered. SpectrAlert Advance outdoor speakers and
speaker strobes offer reliable operation over the entire temperature range of -40F to 151F. They may be used indoors or outdoors in wet or dry applications. In addition, these speakers
provide a broad frequency response range and low harmonic
distortion to provide an accurate and intelligible broadcast of
evacuation messages. High sound pressure level at all tap settings ensures that messages are clearly heard.
Specifications
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature: -40F to 151F (-40C to 66C)
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions, Wall-Mount:
SPS Speaker Strobe: 6.0L x 5.0W x 4.7D
(including lens and speaker)
SP Speaker: 6.0L x 5.0W x 2.9D
Dimensions, Ceiling-Mount:
SPS Speaker Strobe: 6.8 in Diameter x 4.7D
(including lens and speaker)
SP Speaker: 6.8 in Diameter x 2.9D
Dimensions, Wall-Mount Weatherproof Backbox
6.5L x 5.5H x 2.9D
Dimensions, Ceiling-Mount Weatherproof Backbox
7.2Dia x 29H
ELECTRICAL/OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal Voltage (speakers): 25 Volts or 70.7 Volts (nominal)
Maximum Supervisory Voltage (speakers): 50VDC
Strobe Flash Rate: 1 flash per second
Nominal Voltage (Strobes): Regulated 12VDC/FWR or
24VDC/FWR
Operating Voltage Range (includes fire panels with built-in
sync): 8 to 17.5V (12V nominal) or 16 to 33V (24 nominal)
Operating Voltage with MDL Sync Module:
9 to 17.5V (12V nominal) or 17 to 33V (24V nominal)
Frequency Range: 400 to 4000Hz
Power: , , 1, 2 watts
Sound Output
UL Reverberant (dBA @ 10ft)
2W
1W
Outdoor Speaker
90
87
84
81
Outdoor Speaker/Speaker Strobe
89
86
83
80
5/18/10 11:24:18 PM
SPEAKER
UL Maximum Strobe Current Draw (mA RMS)

Candela
Standard
Candela
Range
High
Candela
Range
15
15/75
30
75
95
110
115
135
150
177
185
8 to 17.5 Volts
16 to 33 Volts
DC
FWR
DC
FWR
123
142
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
128
148
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
66
77
94
158
181
202
210
228
246
281
286
71
81
96
153
176
195
205
207
220
251
258
Candela Derating
NOTE: For K series products used at low temperatures, listed candela ratings must be reduced in accordance with this table.
Strobe Output (cd)

Listed Candela
15
15/75
30
75
95
110
115
135
150
177
185
Candela Rating at -40F

Do not use below 32F
44
70
110
115
135
150
177
185
Specifications
The Speaker shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance

Model ______ dual voltage transformer speaker capable of
operating at 25.0 or 70.7 nominal Vrms. Speaker shall be listed
to UL/ULC Standard S4048 for outdoor fire protective signaling
systems. Speaker shall have a frequency range of 400 to 4000
Hz and shall have an operating temperature from 40F to
150.8F. Speaker shall have power taps and wattage settings
which are selected by rotary switches. The speaker must be
installed with its weatherproof backbox in order to remain outdoor approved per UL/ULC listing S4048. The speaker shall be
suitable for use in air handling spaces, as well as wet environments.
SPEAKER STROBE COMBINATION

The Speaker Strobe shall be a System Sensor Model _____
listed to UL/ULC 1638 and UL/ULC 1480 and be approved for
fire protective signaling systems. Speaker shall be capable of
operating at 25.0 or 70.7 nominal Vrms, and shall have a frequency range of 400 to 4000 Hz. Speaker shall have power taps
that are selected by rotary switch. The strobe shall consist of a
xenon flash tube with associated lens/reflector system and operate on either 12V or 24V. The strobe shall also feature selectable candela output, providing options for 15 or 15/75 candela
when operating on 12V and 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 110, 115, 135,
150, 177 or 185 when operating on 24V. The strobe shall comply
with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirement for visible
signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobes entire
operating voltage range. The speaker strobe must be installed
with its weatherproof back box in order to remain outdoor
approved per UL/ULC. The speaker strobe shall be suitable for
use in wet environments.

NOTE: A suffix indicates ULC-Listed model.
SPWK(A): Wall mount outdoor speaker; white.

SPRK(A): Wall mount outdoor speaker; red.
SPSWK(A): Wall mount outdoor speaker strobe, selectable
candela (15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115); white.
SPSRK(A): Wall mount outdoor speaker strobe, selectable
candela (15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115); red.
GENERAL
SPCWK(A): Ceiling mount outdoor speaker; white.
SpectrAlert Advance outdoor speaker and speaker strobes shall

mount to a weatherproof back box. A universal mounting plate
shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall products. The notification appliance circuit and amplifier wiring shall terminate at
the universal mounting plate. Also, SpectrAlert Advance speaker
strobes, when used with the SyncCircuit Module accessory,
shall be powered from a non-coded notification appliance circuit
output and shall operate on a nominal 12 or 24 volts. When
used with the SyncCircuit Module, 12-volt rated notification
appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 9 and 17.5 volts;
24-volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate
between 17 and 33 volts. Outdoor SpectrAlert Advance products shall operate between 40F and 151F from a regulated
DC, or full-wave rectified, unfiltered power supply.
SPSCWK(A): Ceiling mount outdoor speaker strobe, selectable

candela (15, 15/75, 30, 50, 75, 95, 110, 115); white.
SPSCWHK(A): Ceiling mount outdoor speaker strobe, selectable candela, high cd (135, 150, 177, 185); white.
ACCESSORIES
MWBB(A): Wall, metal weatherproof backbox; red.
MWBBW(A): Wall, metal weatherproof backbox; white.
MWBBCW(A): Ceiling, metal weatherproof backbox; white.
System Sensor is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3131-2 Rev. 04/10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:24:19 PM
SpectrAlert Advance
Mini-Horns
MHR/MHW
General
The SpectrAlert Advance series of mini-horn sounders are
designed to simplify installation to provide primary and secondary signaling for fire and security applications.
The MHR and MHW mini-horns operate at 12 and 24 volts and
are ideal for hotel, motel or residential fire system applications,
where a smaller notification device is desired. The mini-horns
offer high and low volume settings, and temporal or non-temporal tones. The horns can be mounted to single gang back
boxes for aesthetically sensitive applications. Synchronization
is also provided when using the MDL3R, MDL3W module or
any panel with the System Sensor sync protocol.
60296pho1.jpg
The MHR and MHW mini-horns can operate between 32 and

120 degrees Fahrenheit from a regulated DC or full-wave rectified, unfiltered power supply. They are listed to Underwriters
Laboratories.
Features
Standard UL 464 for fire protective signaling systems.

12 and 24V operation.
High and low volume settings.
Temporal and non-temporal tones.
Mounts to a single-gang backbox.
Compatible with MDL sync module.
Mechanically and electrically compatible with PA400 series
Mini-Alert sounders.
Specifications

be in progress. Consult factory for listing status.
UL Listed: S4011
MEA: 7-07-E
CSFM: 7135-1653:196
FM Approved: 3028007
PHYSICAL SPECIALIZATIONS
MHR: Mini-Horn; Red.
Dimensions: 4.6L x 2.9W x .45D.
MHW: Mini-Horn; White.
Weight: 2.67 oz.

Operating Temperature Range: 0C to 49C (32F to 120F).
Mounting: Surface: Deep single-gang backbox (2-3/4 deep);
Flush: Standard 4 x 4 back box.
Input Terminals: 12 to 18 AWG
Nominal Voltage: Regulated 12DC/FWR or 24DC/FWR
Operating Voltage: 8-33
Operating Voltage with MDL3R/W: 9-33
Specifications
Mini-horns shall be a System Sensor Model MHR or MHW
capable of operating at nominal 12 or 24VDC and shall mount
to a single gang back box. Mini-horns shall be listed to Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL464 for fire protective signaling systems. Mini-horns shall operate between 32 and 120
degrees Fahrenheit from a regulated DC, or full-wave rectified,
unfiltered power supply. When used with the SyncCircuit
Module, 12-volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs
shall operate between nine and 17.5 volts; 24-volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 17 and
33 volts.
5/18/10 11:25:29 PM
UL Sound Output and Current Draw Data

SOUNDER OUTPUT (dBA)
Switch
Position
Sound
Pattern
Volume
8-17.5
VDC
8-17.5
VFWR
Nominal
12 VDC
Nominal
12 VFWR
16-33
VDC
16-33
VFWR
Temporal
High
68
67
71
70
78
76
Temporal
Low
66
65
69
68
76
75
Non-temporal
High
72
71
75
74
80
79
Non-temporal
Low
70
69
73
72
78
77
SOUNDER CURRENT DRAW (mA RMS)

Switch Position
Sound Pattern
Volume
Temporal
8-17.5 V
16-33 V
DC
FWR
DC
FWR
High
12
10
17
15
Temporal
Low
10
14
13
Non-temporal
High
22
17
29
25
Non-temporal
Low
17
13
21
19
SpectrAlert is a registered trademark and Mini-Alert is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3132-1 Rev. 02/10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:25:30 PM
SSM Series
Alarm Bells
General
System Sensors SSM Series alarm bells are low-current,
high-decibel notification appliances for use in fire and burglary
systems or other signaling applications. They come pre-wired
to reduce installation time, and also incorporate a polarized
electrical design for use with supervision circuitry.
With reliable performance, SSM Series alarm bells provide
loud, resonant tones. They operate on 24 VDC and are motordriven.
SSM Series alarm bells offer simplified installation. For indoor
use, SSM Series alarm bells mount to a standard 4" (10.16
cm) square electrical box. For outdoor applications, a WBB
weatherproof backbox is used.
Features
Approved for indoor or outdoor (with WBB backbox) use.

Low current draw.
High dB output.
Three sizes available: 6" (15.24 cm), 8" (20.32 cm), and
10" (25.40 cm) diameter.
24 VDC models; polarized for use with supervision circuitry.
Bells mount directly to standard 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box.
6910pho1.jpg

UL Listed: S4011
ULC Listed: CS549
FM Approved
CSFM: 7135-1653:125
Specifications
Regulated voltage: 24 VDC.
SSM24-6: 6" (15.24 cm) bell, 24 VDC, polarized, 82 dBA.
Operating voltage range: 116 to 33 VDC.
Maximum Current: DC 31.1 mA/FWR - 53.5 mA.
SSM24-8A: Canadian model of 8" bell above.
Operating temperature range: 31F (35C) to +150F

(+66C).

WBB: Weatherproof backbox.
Termination: provided with two sets of leads for in/out wiring.

Service use: Fire Alarm, General Signaling, Burglar Alarm.
Engineering and Architectural Specifications

Model shall be a SSM Series alarm bell. Bells shall have
underdome strikers and operating mechanisms. Gongs on
said bell shall be no smaller than nominal 6" (15.24 cm), 8"
(20.32 cm), or 10" (25.40 cm) (specify size) with an operating
voltage of 24 VDC. Bells shall be suitable for surface or semiflush mounting. Outdoor surface-mounted installations shall
be weatherproof (using optional WBB weatherproof backbox);
otherwise, bells shall mount to a standard 4" (10.16 cm)
square electrical box having a minimum projection of 2.5"
(6.35 cm). Bells shall be located as shown on the installation
drawings or as determined by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Bells shall be Listed for indoor/outdoor use by Underwriters Laboratories, ULC (Canada), and the California State Fire
Marshal, and approved by Factory Mutual and MEA.
5/18/10 11:25:31 PM

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3107-1 Rev. 02/10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
85-3107
5/18/10 11:25:31 PM
ExitPoint
Directional Sounder
with Voice Messaging
General
The ExitPoint Directional Sounder has an integral audio amplifier that produces a pulsating sound consisting of broadband
low, mid, and high range sounds. The broadband noise makes it
possible to determine the location of the sound. There are four
pulse patterns that can be used to create an egress pathway out
of a building and to mark perimeter exits. In addition to the
broadband noise, the sounder is capable of playing an alert
message in the form of a recorded voice message or other audible signals. These messages will instruct the occupants of what
action to take as they approach the directional sounder, and will
allow them to react quickly and confidently when the sounder is
activated. Fifteen different language combinations are available
to instruct occupants that they are nearing an exit, a stairway up,
a stairway down, or an area of refuge. The directional sounder
also incorporates an optional disable feature for use in conjunction with a control module or heat sensor.
The directional sounder features a number of field selectable
power settings including high, medium-high, medium-low, and
low. Installation ease and pleasing aesthetics are achieved by a
low profile compact design, and by the ability to flush mount in a
4 x 4 x 2 back-box.
ExitPoint directional sounders, fitted in addition to normal building evacuation sounders, draw people to evacuation routes in
both good and poor visibility. The directional sounder can be
used in a wide range of building applications. Trials consistently
have shown an improvement of up to 75 percent in evacuation
times in smoke and up to 35 percent without smoke. The 2007
Edition of NFPA 72 now provides installation and maintenance
guidelines on directional sounders.
Features
Listed to UL 464 (indoor applications only)

Five field-selectable power settings
Four field-selectable routing evacuation patterns
Constructed to be effective in unfamiliar surroundings or
poor visibility
Designed to work in open areas, corridors, or stairs
Fifteen different language selections available
Reduces evacuation times by as much as 75 percent
Optional disable feature for use in conjunction with a control
module or heat sensor
Low profile, compact design
Specifications
Voltage Input: Regulated 24 Volts
7044pho1.jpg
Speaker Size: 4 (101 mm)

Grille Size: 4 7/8 (127 mm)
Additional Tone Selection

Switch
Position 5
Setting
Switch
Position 6
Setting
Sound Output
On
On
Area of Refuge
On
Off
Upstairs
Off
On
Downstairs
Off
Off
Exit Here
Enable/Disable Selection
Switch
Position 4
Setting
Terminals 3 & 4
Sound Output
On
Open
Disabled
On
Closed
Enabled
Off
Open
Enabled
Off
Closed
Disabled
Power Setting Guide

DIP Switch
Position 1
Setting
DIP Switch
Position 2
Setting
DIP Switch
Position 3
Setting
Power
Setting
Operating Voltage Range: 16 to 33 Volts
Off
Off
Off
High
Operating Temperature: 32F to 120F (0C to 49C)
On
Off
Off
Med-High
Off
On
Off
Med
Off
Off
On
Med-Low
On
On
On
Low
Power Setting: High, medium-high, medium, medium-low, low
Input Terminals: 12-24 AWG
5/18/10 11:25:31 PM
Current Draw Measurements and Sound Output Guide

DIP Switch
Selection
Speed
Power
Setting
Max DC
Operating
Current
(mA RMS)
Audibility
(dBA)
Note 1
Fast (Exit)
10
High
185
Fast (Exit)
10
Med-High
131
Fast (Exit)
10
Med
78
Fast (Exit)
10
Med-Low
76
Fast (Exit)
10
Low
64
Med-Fast
9
High
170
Med-Fast
9
Med-High
124
Med-Fast
9
Med
75
Med-Fast
9
Med-Low
73
Med-Fast
9
Low
62
Med-Slow
8
High
135
Med-Slow
8
Med-High
104
Med-Slow
8
Med
67
Med-Slow
8
Med-Low
65
Med-Slow
8
Low
57
Slow
7
High
120
Slow
7
Med-High
92
Slow
7
Med
62
Slow
7
Med-Low
61
Slow
7
Low
54
Note 1: Sound output measured in anechoic room at 10 feet.
Note 2: Sound output measured in a reverberant room at 10 feet.
Audibility
(dBA)
Note 2
84
81
78
75
72
83
80
77
74
71
82
79
76
73
70
82
79
76
73
70
75
72
69
66
63
74
71
68
65
62
73
70
67
64
61
72
69
66
63
60
Language/Audible Tone Selection Guide

Rotary Switch Selection
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Tone/Language
Audible tone/sweep
English
Spanish
French
English/Spanish
English/French
Korean
Cantonese

Consult product manual for lists of compatible UL-Listed
devices. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by
UL Listed: S4011
ULC Listed: S8971
FM Approved
CSFM: 7135-1653:175
MEA Approved: 492-04-E Vol. 2
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Mandarin
English/Cantonese
English/Mandarin
Cantonese/Mandarin
English/Korean
English/Portuguese
English/Russian
English/Polish
PF24V
PF24VA
BBS-SP201W
ExitPoint Directional Sounder with Voice

Messaging
Same as PF24V, but with ULC (Canada)
Surface mount backbox skirt for PF24V
ExitPointis a trademark of Honeywell International Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3118 Rev. 12-08

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
85-3118
5/18/10 11:25:32 PM
ET Series
Low-Profile Speakers
and Speaker Strobes
Wheelocks high performance Series ET Speakers and Series

ET Speaker Strobes provide high audio output, clear audibility,
dual voltage (25/70 VRMS) capability and field selectable taps
from 1/8 to 8 watts. They are designed to meet the critical needs
of the life safety industry for effective emergency voice communications, tone signaling and visible signaling to alert the hearing impaired.
ET70 Series
Speaker Strobe
ET90 Series
Speaker
The low profile design incorporates a speaker mounting plate for

faster and easier installation. Each model has a built-in level
adjustment feature and an aesthetic two (2) screw grille cover.
The Series ET Speaker Strobe models incorporate Low Current
draw Series RSS Strobes.
Strobe options for wall mount models include 1575 cd or Wheelocks patented MCW multi-candela strobe with field selectable
candela settings of 15/30/75/110cd or the high intensity MCWH
strobe with field selectable 135/185cd.
Ceiling mount models are available in Wheelocks patented
MCC multi-candela ceiling strobe with field selectable intensities
of 15/30/75/95cd or the high intensity MCCH strobe with field
selectable 115/177cd.
The strobe portion of all Series ET Strobes may be synchronized when used in conjunction with the Wheelock SM, DSM
sync modules or the power supply with patented Wheelock Sync
Protocol. Wheelocks synchronized strobes offer an easy way to
comply with ADA recommendations concerning photosensitive
epilepsy.
Series ET70 and ET90 Speaker Strobes are UL Listed for
indoor use under Standard 1971 (Signaling Devices for the
Hearing Impaired) and Standard 1480 (Speaker Appliances),
and use a Xenon flashtube with solid state circuitry enclosed in
a rugged Lexan lens to provide maximum reliability for effective visual signaling. All inputs are supervised and employ IN/
OUT wiring terminals for fast installation using #12 to #18 AWG
wiring.
Color options for Series ET speakers and speaker strobes are
red or white plated.
Wheelocks Weatherproof Low Profile Speaker Strobe, Series
ET70WP-2475W-FR appliance has an extended temperature
range of -40 F to 150 F (-40 C to 66 C) that will satisfy virtually all outdoor and severe environment applications.
For outdoor applications the ET70WP-2475W-FR must be wall
mounted to a Weatherproof Back Box (IOB). Models are available for surface mounting to Wheelock weatherproof backboxes
on walls or ceilings. The optional WP-KIT allows the weatherproof backboxes (IOB, WPBB or WPSBB) to be mounted to a
recessed electrical box for concealed conduit installation. For
semi-flush installation, the WPA and WFPA kits allow a customer
to mount the weatherproof appliances to a recessed electrical
box without the need for an external weatherproof backbox.
FEATURES
ADA/NFPA/UFC/ANSI compliant.
Meets OSHA 29 Part 1910.165.
2225ss70.jpg; 2225pho2.tif; 6601pho3.jpg
GENERAL
Multi-Candela Indicator
(bottom of strobe lens)
Wall mount models are available with Field Selectable Candela.
Settings of 15/30/75/110cd or 135/185cd (Multi-Candela
models) or 1575cd (Single Candela model).
Ceiling mount models are available with field selectable candela settings of 15/30/75/95cd or 115/177cd (multi-candela
models).
Strobes produce 1 flash per second over the regulated voltage range.
24 VDC with wide UL Regulated Voltage using filtered DC
or unfiltered VRMS input voltage.
Synchronize with Wheelock SM, DSM or power supply with
built-in Wheelock sync protocol.
Field selectable taps for 25 or 70 VRMS operation from 1/8
watt to 8 watts.
High efficiency design for maximum output at minimum wattage across a frequency range of 400 to 4000 HZ.
Fast installation with IN/OUT screw terminals using #12 to
#18 AWG wires.
WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE

SPECIFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY
BEFORE USING, SPECIFYING OR APPLYING
THIS PRODUCT. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH
ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS, CAUTIONS
OR WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER
APPLICATION, INSTALLATION AND/OR
OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN
EMERGENCY SITUATION, WHICH COULD
RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR
OTHERS.
5/18/10 11:25:33 PM
GENERAL NOTES:
Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum
over their Regulated Voltage Range. Note that NFPA-72
specifies a flash rate of 1 to 2 flashes per second and ADA
Guidelines specify a flash rate of 1 to 3 flashes per second.
All candela ratings represent minimum effective Strobe intensity based on UL Standard 1971.
Series ET Speaker Strobes and Series ET Speakers are
listed under UL Standard 1971 for indoor use with a temperature range of 32F to 120F (0C to 49C) and maximum
humidity of 85%.
Wheelock Weatherproof Appliances are designed to operate
over an extended temperature of -40 F to 150F (-40C to
66C) and all candela ratings represent minimum effective
strobe intensity based on UL 1638. Maximum humidity of
93% RH + 2%.
Regulated Voltage Range is the newest terminology used
by UL to identify the voltage range. Prior to this change UL
used the terminology Listed Voltage Range.
ARCHITECTURAL/ENGINEERING
SPECIFICATIONS
The speaker appliances shall be Wheelock Series ET Speakers
and speaker strobe appliances shall be Wheelock Series ET
Speaker Strobes or approved equals. The speakers shall be UL
Listed under Standard 1480 for Fire Protective Service and
speakers equipped with strobes shall be listed under UL Standard 1971 for Signaling Devices for the Hearing-Impaired. In
addition, the strobes shall be certified to meet the requirements
of FCC Part 15, Class B.
All speakers shall be designed for a field selectable input of
either 25 or 70 VRMS, with selectable power taps from 1/8 watt
to 8 watts. All models shall have listed sound output of up to 93

dB at 10 feet and a listed frequency response of 400 to 4000 Hz.
The speaker shall also incorporate a sealed back construction.
All inputs shall employ terminals that accept #12 to #18 AWG
wire sizes.
The strobe portion of the appliance shall produce a flash rate of
one (1) flash per second over the Regulated Voltage Range and
shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged
Lexan lens. The strobe shall be of low current design. Where,
Multi-Candela Speaker Strobes are specified, the strobe intensity shall have field selectable settings and shall be rated per UL
Standard 1971 at 15/30/75/110cd or 135/185cd for wall mount
and 15/30/75/95 cd or 115/177cd for ceiling mount. The selector
switch for selecting the candela shall be tamper resistant. The
1575 strobe shall be specified when 15 candela UL Standard
1971 listing with 75 candela on-axis is required (e.g. ADA compliance).
When synchronization is required, the strobe portion of the
appliance shall be compatible with Wheelocks SM, DSM sync
modules or a a power supply with built-in Wheelock Patented
Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization
at any time during operation. If the sync module or Power Supply fails to operate, (i.e., contacts remain closed), the strobe
shall revert to a non-synchronized flash rate.
The speaker and speaker strobe appliances shall be designed
for indoor surface or flush mounting. The speaker and speaker
strobe shall incorporate a speaker mounting plate with a grille
cover which is secured with two screws for a level, aesthetic finish and shall mount to standard electrical hardware requiring no
additional trimplate or adapter. The finish of the Series ET
speakers and speaker strobes shall be white, red or nickel plate.
All speakers and speaker strobes shall be backward compatible.
WARNING: CONTACT WHEELOCK FOR THE CURRENT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (P83983) SERIES
NS-24MCW, (P84234) SERIES NS-12 AND 24 VDC SINGLE CANDELA MODELS, (P83600) SERIES NH AND
GENERAL INFORMATION SHEET (P82380) ON THESE PRODUCTS. THESE DOCUMENTS UNDERGO
PERIODIC CHANGES. IT IS IMPORTANT THAT YOU HAVE CURRENT INFORMATION ON THE PRODUCTS.
THESE MATERIALS CONTAIN IMPORTANT INFORMATION THAT SHOULD BE READ PRIOR TO
SPECIFYING OR INSTALLING THESE PRODUCTS, INCLUDING:
TOTAL CURRENT REQUIRED BY ALL APPLIANCES CONNECTED TO SYSTEM SECONDARY
POWER SOURCES.
FUSE RATINGS ON NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS TO HANDLE PEAK CURRENTS FROM
ALL APPLIANCES ON THOSE CIRCUITS.
COMPOSITE FLASH RATE FROM MULTIPLE STROBES WITHIN A PERSONS FIELD OF VIEW.
ADDING, REPLACING OR CHANGING APPLIANCES OR CHANGING CANDELLA SETTINGS WILL
AFFECT CURRENT DRAW. RECALCULATE CURRENT DRAW TO INSURE THAT THE TOTAL
AVERAGE CURRENT AND TOTAL PEAK REQUIRED BY ALL APPLIANCES DO NOT EXCEED THE
RATED CAPACITY OF THE POWER SOURCES OR FUSES.
THE VOLTAGE APPLIED TO THE PRODUCTS MUST BE WITHIN THEIR REGULATED VOLTAGE
RANGE.
INSTALLATION OF 110 CANDELA STROBE PRODUCTS IN SLEEPING AREAS.
INSTALLATION IN OFFICE AREAS AND OTHER SPECIFICATION AND INSTALLATION ISSUES.
THESE APPLIANCES ARE NOT DESIGNED TO BE USED ON CODED SYSTEMS IN WHICH THE
APPLIED VOLTAGE IS CYCLED ON AND OFF.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OR GENERAL INFORMATION
SHEETS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, AND/OR PROPERTY
DAMAGE AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS.
CONDUCTOR SIZE (AWG), LENGTH AND AMPACITY SHOULD BE TAKEN INTO CONSIDERATION
PRIOR TO DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF THESE PRODUCTS, PARTICULARLY IN RETROFIT
INSTALLATIONS.
Page 2 of 4 2/9/10 85-2129
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:25:33 PM
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Strobe
2225bd1.wmf
Speaker
Series ET Speaker and Strobe Operate Independently

(Non-Sync or Sync)
DSM #1
Strobe NAC Circuit
ET
ET
ET
ET
ET
ET
DSM #2
Strobe NAC Circuit
DSM #3
Strobe NAC Circuit
2225bd2.wmf
F
A
C
P
DSM Interconnecting wiring shown. Maximum of 20.

Series ET Speaker Strobes Synchronized
with DSM Module Single Class A
DSM
FACP
Strobe NAC Circuit

OUT
SYNC +
SYNC
+ OUT 1
+ IN 1
ET
ET
ET
MINUS 1
+ AUDIBLE
AUDIBLE
NOTE: Figure shows

interconnection to
strobe through sync
module. Speaker
portion requires 2
separate conductors to
FACP.
Strobe NAC Circuit

RETURN
ET
ET
ET
2225bd3.wmf
MINUS 2
+ IN 2
+ OUT 2
Series ET Speaker Strobe Appliances Synchronized

with DSM Module Single Class A
www.honeywell.com
85-2129 2/9/10 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:25:34 PM
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 1: UL Max Current*
ET70 Strobe Current - Wall Mount
ET70/ET90
Speaker 241575W
24MCW
24MCWH
Strobes
ET90 Strobe Current - Ceiling Mount

24MCC
24MCCH
1575cd
15cd 30cd 75cd 110cd 135cd 185cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 95cd 115cd 177cd
16-33 VDC
0.090
0.060 0.092 0.165 0.220 0.300 0.420 0.065 0.105 0.189 0.299 0.300 0.420
NOTE: UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33v for 24v units). For
strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16v for 24v units). For audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage (33v for 24v units). For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation instructions.
LISTINGS AND APPROVALS
Table 2: ET70/ET90 UL Reverberant dBA @ 10ft**

Watts
1/8 1/4 1/2
ET Speaker
75.0 78.0 81.0 84.0 87.0 90.0 93.0
ET Speaker Strobe
75.0 78.0 81.0 84.0 87.0 90.0 93.0
ET70WP-2475W
78.0 81.0 84.0 87.0 90.0 93.0 95.0
**NOTE: dBA ratings based on UL testing under UL Standard 1480.

be in progress. Consult factory for listing status.
UL Listed: S2652 (Speakers); S2652/S5391 (Strobe/Speakers)
CSFM: 7125-0785:146; 7125-0785:152; 7320-0785:134
MEA: 151-92-E Vol. 21
ORDERING INFORMATION
Model
Strobe
Candela
ET70-24MCW-FR
ET70-24MCW-FW
ET70-241575W-FR
ET70-24157SW-FW
ET70WP-2475W-FR
ET90WP-2475W-FW
ET90-24MCC-FR
ET90-24MCC-FW
ET90-24MCCH-FW
ET70-R
ET70-W
15/30/75/110
15/30/75/110
15 (75 on axis)
15 (75 on axis)
75
75
15/30/75/95
15/30/75/95
115/177
-
Sync Model
Non- w/
SM, Color
Sync DSM
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
Red
White
Red
White
Red
White
Red
White
White
Red
White
Wall/
Ceiling
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall
Wall/Ceiling
Ceiling
Ceiling
Ceiling
Wall/Ceiling
Wall/Ceiling
Agency Approvals
(* Pending )
UL MEA CSFM FM BFP

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
*
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
*
X
*
*
*
X
X

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-2129 Rev. 2/10

February 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
5/18/10 11:25:35 PM
Programming Tool
EBI - Integration Platform
Fireman Graphics
Gateways
Programming, Integration
and Graphics
8.0 Programming, Integration and Graphics
VeriFire Tools
Programming and Test Utility
VeriFire Tools is a programming and test utility with offline

and online capabilities that can greatly reduce installation programming time and increase confidence in the site-specific
software. It is Windows based and provides technologically
advanced capabilities to aid the installer. The installer may create the entire program for the control panel in the comfort of
the office, test it, store a backup file, then bring it to the site
and download from a laptop into the panel.
The program includes error checks for common programming
mistakes, such as an input point that does not activate any outputs, or an output point that is not linked to any inputs. In
online mode, users can perform point read status functions,
edit panel and device labels, and change detector sensitivities.
VeriFire Tools includes a compare database routine that can
also greatly help the installer. When a new program is created,
it may be compared with a previous version and differences
are highlighted. If the program is modified from the panel keypad, it may be uploaded into VeriFire Tools, and compared
with the previous version stored on disk. The identification of
program differences greatly helps the installer in testing the
installation.
Autoprogramming: After SLC loops are installed on XLS3000,
XLS140-2, or XLS140, VeriFire Tools can autoprogram that
panel. The system will read & set addresses for SLC detectors and modules. The installer can quickly verify these with
the programming spreadsheet and the Eclipse Device Map.
CBE Simulator: VeriFire Tools also offers a simulator that
provides a visual representation of the CBE programming for
XLS3000, XLS140-2, or XLS140. After detectors and modules
have been programmed, the simulator allows users to select
any input point and view the output points mapped to it via
CBE programming.
Device maintenance report: VeriFire Tools has a device
maintenance report for XLS3000 and XLS140-2 panels. The
device maintenance report provides valuable information on
FlashScan detectors; chamber values, the percent of drift
compensation and last functional test date. This information is
extremely useful in scheduling maintenance and testing of
detectors. For FlashScan modules, the maintenance report
provides the last functional test date.
Network test service: VeriFire Tools can run a communication test between selected network nodes, to verify network
connectivity. It sends messages from one node to another and
monitors the resulting node-to-node activity to determine
whether any message failures occur. The test procedure
aborts if a real event occurs anywhere on the network.
Upgrading from XPEDITE: VeriFire Tools easily imports data
from nodes on XLS-NET networks originally programmed with
XPEDITE. See the online help file for more details.
h6871prog.jpg
General
VeriFire Tools System Programming Screen
Minimum System Requirements

Windows 2000 with SP4, Windows XP Professional with
SP2, or Windows Vista Business/Ultimate edition
For Windows 2000/Windows XP Professional systems:
PC or laptop with a 300 MHz Pentium II processor
128MB RAM (256MB suggested)
For Windows Vista Business/Ultimate systems:
A 1 GHz 32-bit (x86) processor (Note: 64-bit processor
not supported with Vista)
1GB RAM
CD-ROM drive
Mouse and keyboard
250 MB free disk space (600 MB recommended for audio
storage)
XVGA monitor
Video card capable of supporting 1024 x 768 output resolution and 16 bit color
1 serial (COM) port or USB-to-Serial converter (ATEN
Model UC-232A recommended) (Use a USB A to B cable.
USB connection must be less than 10 feet long)
DB9-NUP cable (P/N 75554) for serial connections supplied with VeriFire Tools. (Serial port recommended for
XLS140 and XLS-NCA connections.)
USB A type to USB B type cable (P/N 75672) supplied
with VeriFire Tools. (USB 2.0 port recommended for
XLS3000, XLS-NCA2, XLS140-2, and XLS-DVC connections)
Microsoft Excel 2000, 2003, or 2007 (to use the spreadsheet function)
Internet connection (for IP connections and to use email
function)
MAPI compatible email client, such as Microsoft Outlook
or Microsoft Outlook Express (to use email function)
NOTE: VeriFire Tools version 3.21 and earlier supported Windows
98 Second Edition, ME, and NT. Windows 95 not supported.
Digital Audio
TO PROGRAM THE DIGITAL AUDIO SYSTEM:

VeriFire Tools: Please refer to the manufacturer's support
website for download.
75554: DB9-NUP Programming Cable
75672: USB A type to USB B type Programming Cable
USB port (for suggested USB Digital Headset used in audio

recording)
Plantronics DSP500 Digital Enhanced USB Headset (recommended) or your PCs sound card with any standard ULapproved PC microphone
Goldwave Digital Audio Editor (recommended) or equivalent audio editing software
5/18/10 11:26:02 PM
DIGITAL AUDIO FILE FORMAT DESCRIPTIONS

Audio editing software must be able to save files to .wav format
with the following descriptions:
Fidelity
High Quality
Standard Quality
Format
PCM
law
Sample Rate
44100Hz
11025Hz
Bit Depth
16-bit
8-bit
Channel
mono
mono
VeriFire is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Pentium
and Intel are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3010-3 Rev. 01-10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:26:03 PM
Enterprise Buildings Integrator R400

Specification and Technical Data
KEY FEATURES
Total integration of Access Control, Security,
Surveillance, Heating Ventilation and Air
Conditioning, Energy Management and Life Safety
systems
Integration with a diverse range of devices,
enterprise systems, Internet and intranet sources
allowing integrated building management of key
facility control and information
Uses industry-standard hardware and Windows
XP and Windows 2003 Server operating systems.
Windows Vista support for Operators is included
in EBI R400 Service Pack 1
Supports for leading open standards: BACnet,
LonMark, ODBC, OPC, and Modbus
UL Listed to Standards UL864 (Fire), UL2017
(Signaling Systems), UL916 (Energy Management
Systems), UL1017, UL1076 (Security), UL1610
(Central Station) and UL294 (Access Control)
Web-based user interface provides operators or
facility engineers easy access and puts the user in
control of every situation
Suitable for use in a restricted Pharmaceutical
environment requiring conformance to 21 CFR
Part 11 for electronic records and electronic
signatures
Designed and developed to International Standards
ISO 9001 for quality
5/18/10 11:26:03 PM
ENTERPRISE BUILDINGS INTEGRATOR (R400)
Enterprise Buildings Integrator (EBI) is a highly

configurable integrated building management
system providing an efficient and reliable way of
ensuring the security, safety and comfort of people
and the effective operation of buildings and
facilities.
HONEYWELL BUILDING
MANAGER
Building Manager meets building management and
HVAC control needs by providing interfaces to
leading open system solutions and HVAC devices.
EBI provides a scalable suite of solutions that can be

tailored to key facility management requirements.
By combining these applications, EBI is flexible
enough to adapt to a range of industries including
large commercial buildings, industrial facilities,
airports, university campuses, pharmaceutical and
healthcare facilities, and government locations. It
can be inexpensively tailored to meet specialized
industry requirements.
HONEYWELL SECURITY
MANAGER
Security Manager collects information from
security, access control and surveillance devices,
ensuring protection of your people, assets and
intellectual property.
HONEYWELL LIFE SAFETY

MANAGER
For global companies, EBI is the ideal system,

allowing the operator interface to be translated into
the local language, and enabling centralized
monitoring and control of locally or globally
distributed sites.
Life Safety Manager allows monitoring and control

of fire alarm systems for fire protection and smoke
control. EBI is available with UL864 Listing for
Ethernet based life safety control and monitoring.
EBI integrates with Open System standards, existing

enterprise systems, and with Internet and intranet
applications. This allows you to choose the best field
solutions for your building and to seamlessly
integrate information into EBI for further
processing, reporting or distribution.
HONEYWELL DIGITAL VIDEO

MANAGER
Digital Video Manager seamlessly integrates
surveillance of your facility using cameras
connected directly to your LAN, enabling flexible
event-based recording and viewing.
EBI provides operators, supervisors, and managers

with a sophisticated Web-style interface to enable
personnel to easily monitor and control buildings at
one or more sites. EBI uses technology such as
HTML for creating graphic displays. EBI allows
remote or partially automated monitoring and
control of your facility.
HONEYWELL ENERGY
MANAGER
Energy Manager monitors, validates and optimizes
your energy usage enabling you to help the
environment while saving money.
EBI runs on industry-standard personal computers

using the Windows XP and Windows 2003 Server
operating systems. EBI R400 Service Pack 1 will also
introduce support for Windows Vista on the EBI
clients and operator stations.
2
5/18/10 11:26:04 PM
Operator Interface
PRODUCT DATA SUMMARY

System Architecture
Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft

Windows 2003 Server. Microsoft Vista supported with EBI
R400 Service Pack 1
Client/server architecture
Internet Explorer 7.0
Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft

Windows 2003 Server
Use Station Client software or Internet Explorer Browser

Over 300 preconfigured standard displays
Native 32-bit application

Scalable-single server to distributed server systems
1000 Standard Trends
Real-time database
User configurable object-based custom displays
Microsoft SQL Server 2005

SQL Reporting Services
Designed for display resolution of 1280 x 1024 or

higher
Points: Analog, digital, totalizer, access, flexible and

container
Embed live video
Architectures
Embed SafeBrowse for secure Internet/intranet

integration
Single server
Redundant hot standby server
ActiveX animation using VB Scripts
Distributed System Architecture
ActiveX document integration
Networking
Launch Windows applications directly from displays
Uses industry-standard TCP/IP networking over Ethernet
Easy point and cardholder search with wildcard support
Flexible station licensing based on the number of

simultaneous connections
Cut, copy, and paste facilities for easy editing of text
Controllers may be connected via Ethernet

Remote connections via WAN
User input devices include keyboard, mouse, trackball

(optional), touchscreen (optional)
Open Systems Support
Support for 21 CFR Part 11 electronic signatures
HTML graphics
Using Windows Terminal Services - support for up to 5

mobile Stations on PDAs
LonWorks - LonMark standard (ANSI/CEA 709.1)& LNS 3.2

BACnet - ASHRAE BACnet standard (SSPC 135-2004) BOWS Profile
Operator Security
OPC - OLE for Process Control
Six levels of access to system functions:
OPC Data Access 2.0
View Only
OPC Alarm and Event 1.02
Acknowledge Only
Modbus, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP

ODBC database access
Operator
XML interface via SQL Reporting services
Engineer
Supervisor
19
5/18/10 11:26:05 PM

Four levels of alarm priority with fifteen sub-priorities
Manager
Sort and filter alarms, add comments to alarms
Up to 255 control levels for operator-initiated actions
Alarm segregation through database partitioning
Automatic idle time logout
Location tree summary of alarms
Prompt for periodic change of passwords
Alarm parameters can be adjusted on-line
Events logged by operator ID or full operator name
Dedicated alarm zone displays most recent highest

priority alarm
Individual operator profiles including Scope of

Responsibility (SOR)
All alarm and return-to-normal conditions logged in

event summary
Effective data partitioning of facility into different

locations
Individual or page acknowledgment of alarms
Command assignment to control different output

states
Automatic link to optional alarm instruction page or

associated display page or digital video clip
Operator sign-on can be restricted to certain Stations

and certain times
Alarm handling responses logged into event summary

Additional messages can be attached to an alarm
Automatic change of Scope of Responsibility by time
Alarm acknowledge (writes through to controller)
Use Windows operator accounts for authentication in

EBI
Individual alarm prioritization of different input states

for the same point
Real-time Database
Single line alarm processing (recurring individual alarms

can be displayed as a single alarm with a count)
Connects to HVAC, security, access control, industrial

process control, fire detectors, energy meters, analog
CCTV, and digital CCTV controllers
Alarms and events can trigger reports

Alarm annunciation can use custom sound files (*.wav)
Database partitioning into a hierarchy of locations (up

to 10 levels deep)
Automatic alarm priority elevation if alarm unactioned
Point groups
Analog point alarm types include:
Event-initiated programs include:
PV High
Arithmetic calculations
PV Low
Logic calculations
PV High High
Composite hierarchical point alarming
PV Low Low
Report, task or display request activated by access card

or status change
Deviation High
Group point control
Transmitter High
Location or group alarm inhibit
Transmitter Low
Alarm Management
Alarm Pager
Configurable color-coded alarm summary display page

with filtering by alarm priorities and area
Rate of Change
Transmits alarms to pagers using PET, TAP or UCP

protocols. This enables SMS alerts to be sent to Mobile
Phones.
2000 concurrent alarms in alarm list, each with a count

available for number of times occurred since last
acknowledgement
Transmits alarms to email using SMTP
Transmits alarms to SNMP managers as SNMP traps.
20
5/18/10 11:26:05 PM

Events
On-line change of trend type
System events created for all:
Up to thirty-two parameters on one trend
Operator changes
Configurable sample densities
Point state changes
Configurable sample periods
Alarms
Time of interest entry
Alarm acknowledgment
Individual pen enable/disable
Manual controls
Rubber band zoom
Cardholder changes
Hairline cursor readout
And for many other system activities
Copy and paste trend data to Microsoft Excel
Event file limited only by disk space available
Embed trends in custom displays
Simple archiving of events to off-line storage media

Simple retrieval of off-line events for reporting
Underwriters Laboratory Listing
Historization
EBI R310 was UL listed to the following standards. EBI

R400 is being tested for compliance which will be
announced in product bulletin when complete.
Virtually unlimited historical record of both live and

derived data can be stored.
Intervals include:
ALVY-UL294-Access Control
1, 2 or 5 second snapshots
AMCX-UL1610-Central Station
1 hour snapshot
8 hour snapshot
APOU-UL1017-Security Systems
24 hour snapshot
APOU-UL1076-Security Systems
6 minute average
PAZX-UL916-Energy Management Systems
1 hour average
QVAX-UL864-Critical&NonCritical Process Control
8 hour average
24 hour average
UDTZ-UL2017-Signaling Systems
Collection is configured per point
UOXX-UL864 Accessory Fire
Composite point parameters can all be historized

Archive to off-line local or network attached storage
UOJZ-UL864-Panels Fire
Trends
UUKL-UL864-Smoke Control
Multiple formats include:

1000 trend displays
Multi Line (points and events)
Reports
Multi-Line (trend with events)
Periodic, demandable, or event driven reports
Single (bar graph)
ODBC access for custom reports
X Y Plot (point plot)
Custom reports via SQL Reporting Services
Numeric (tabular)
21
5/18/10 11:26:06 PM

Report
Description
SQL 2005
Reporting
Services
Microsoft SQL Server Reporting

Services delivery of simple custom
report interface with EBI. Allowing
graphic interface for reporting
cardholder, system event, point
history and real time point
information
at that time.
Point Attribute
Lists all points specified by the

following attributes: Out of service,
Alarm suppressed, Abnormal input
levels, In Manual mode and
Nominated state.
Point State
Changes
Lists all information about Time

Periods matching a specified search
criteria.
Access
Level
Lists all access levels matching a

specified search criteria and the
zones, Time periods.
Time Period
After Hours
Lists all points changing state

matching a certain search criteria
occurring over a specified range of
time.
Lists all information about Time

Periods matching a specified search
criteria.
Zone
Information
Lists all information about Zones

matching a specified search criteria.
Alarm/Event
All points
All cardholders may have the following:

Cardholder first name and last name
Lists all points which match a

specified search criteria.
Cardholder
(visitor) Detail
Lists all information for cardholders

who correspond to a specified
search criteria.
Cardholder
(visitor) List
Lists card details for cards

corresponding to specified search
criteria based on any cardholder
field.
Card Usage
Cardholders
Lists all alarms or events matching a

certain search criteria occurring over
a range of time.
94 configurable user fields delivered (easily customized

or expanded)
Organization
Address
Comments
Alarm priority
Cardholder State (Active, inactive, Left Company)
Shows the total number of access

movements (including no
movements) for cardholders over a
given period of time.
Cardholder
Zone
Lists all cardholders who have access

to the specified zones.
Door History
Lists all cardholders that accessed

any specified door or group
occurring over a specified range of
time.
Card trace option

64 access levels per cardholder as standard
Last door accessed
Cardholder commencement date
Cardholder expiration date
Lighting control zone
High resolution color image of cardholder
Cardholder signature
Generic
Crystal
This report can execute any custom

designed report using the Crystal
Reports tool.
Group Card
Trail
Lists all doors accessed by an

individual or group of cardholders
during a specific range of time.
Card number
Microsoft
Excel
Runs a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
Card credential type
Occupancy
Lists cardholders in specified zones
Cardholders may be assigned one or many cards. Each

card has the following information:
Card technology type
Card state (active, inactive, lost, stolen, expired)
Card commencement date
22
5/18/10 11:26:07 PM

Card expiration date
Support for one level of global perimeter anti-passback,

with nested anti-passback available with Temaline access
control solution
Personal Identification Number or (PIN)

Long access (controller-specific)
Escort required (controller-specific)
Application Development
Escort capable (controller-specific)
Network API: allows simple network connected programs

to read and write point data
Cost override (controller-specific)
Microsoft Excel Data Exchange: Wizard for getting point

and history data into Microsoft Excel from EBI
Event lockout override (controller-specific)

Card Class A, B (controller-specific)
Support for over 100,000 cardholders
Web Toolkit: allows point data to be incorporated onto

web pages
Fully customizable user-defined database fields
API: general purpose application development interface
Comboboxes to preprogram cardholder field choices
Cardholder Services: specific API interface for accessing

cardholder data. This is planned to be available with
Service Pack 2 of R400.
Card and cardholder commencement and expiration

dates
User Scan Task Kit: allows development of loosely

integrated controller interfaces
Up to 64 access levels per cardholder

Automatic trace of cardholder through the facility
Card pending expiration notification
Quick Builder
Multi-select and multi-edit of cardholder
Graphical engineering tool
Visitor and employee cardholder types supported
Preconfigured typical system databases
Templates for cardholder management
Easy creation of point, hardware, Stations and printers
Powerful searching and sorting of cardholders
Hierarchical system modeling
Photo Identification
Multipoint edit
MCI or TWAIN interface for image capture
User defined fields
Wintab interface for signature capture
Import/export facility
Configurable card layouts and image size
HMIWeb Display Builder
Easy search and navigation facilities

Batch printing of cards
Object-based display building package with dynamic

display objects such as:
Bar code
Shapes
Magnetic stripe encoding
Live Video
Chromakey and ghosting
Alphanumerics
Access Control
Checkboxes
1024 access levels containing 256 zone/time period pairs
Card Image
1024 card reader zones each containing 128 doors
Comboboxes
256 time periods
Pushbuttons
Complete or modified data download to controllers
Charts
ASCII import/ export of all access components
Many standard drawing features including:

Tool Palette
23
5/18/10 11:26:07 PM

Color palette
For selected switchers, camera selection, and automatic

PTZ control from operator display or keyboard
Alignment
Honeywell Maxpro
Group/Ungroup
Honeywell / Ademco VideoBloX
Snap to grid
Pacom/Pelco
Zooming
Resizing objects
Digital Video Systems:
Horizontal and vertical spacing
Honeywell Digital Video Manager R300
Library of commonly used symbols
Honeywell Digital Video Manager R200
Remote engineering support
Industrial Process Control
Printed Documentation
Experion PKS R300 via DSA
Installation Guide
Experion PKS R200 via DSA
Overview Guide
Security Controllers:
Operators Guide
Honeywell SMP or HSM
Configuration and Administration Guide
Tecom Challenger
Building Management Guide
Honeywell I9000
Temaline Access Control Config Guide
Honeywell FS90 Plus
Security Electronics Access Control Cnfg Gd
Galaxy
FS90 Access Control Configuration Guide
Life Safety Controllers:
PCSC Access Control Configuration Guide
Honeywell XLS1000
Internationalization
Honeywell XLS2000
Support for operator interface in localized languages
Honeywell XLS3000
CONTROLLER SUPPORT
Honeywell FS90 Plus

Honeywell XLS80e
Access Controllers:
Honeywell XLS140
Honeywell Temaline
Honeywell XLS200
Honeywell NexSentry (Security Electronics) 800 series,

4100 series controllers, Star I and Star II controllers
Building Management Controllers:
Honeywell FS90 AMC
Honeywell EXCEL 5000 OPEN suite of controllers
PCSC MicroLPM, MicroALM, and MicroELV, IQ and

Ultimate access control panels
BACnet compatible controllers
Biometric Devices, RSI Handkey II (with Service Pack 2

of EBI R400), ID3D with integrated template manager
Honeywell ComfortPoint (not available in all regions)
Honeywell JACE V (not available in all regions)

Honeywell and third-party LonMark Controllers
ePADink Signature Pad from Interlink Electronics
Honeywell R7044
Analog CCTV Controllers:
Honeywell Delta 1000/2000 (via XBSi)
Camera and monitor switching on alarm
Honeywell Excel Classic
24
5/18/10 11:26:08 PM

Operating system: Windows XP Professional SP2 and
SP3. Windows 2003 Server SP2
Honeywell IRC
Honeywell Excel EMC
Browser: Internet Explorer 7.0
PLCs:
Honeywell UMC 800, HC900
Operator Station (Client) Platform
Modbus, Modbus Plus, Modbus RTV, Modbus TCP
Processor: 3.0 GHz Pentium 4 processor or higher
Honeywell LCS620 PLCs
Memory: 1 GB minimum
Allen Bradley PLC2, PLC5 SLC5/03 PLCs
Display Resolution: 1280 x 1024 x 65K colors

Hard Disk: 20 GB drive (NTFS)
SOFTWARE OPTIONS
Keyboard: 12 function keys
Asset Locator
Pointing Device: Mouse
Integrated Maintenance Manager
Operating systems: Windows XP Professional SP2,or

SP3. Windows 2003 Server SP2, Windows Vista with
EBI R400 Service Pack 1
Deadman Timer
SAP Integration (available with R310, planned with
Service Pack 2 for EBI R400)
Network Protocol: TCP/IP

Browser: Internet Explorer 7.0
Alarm Pager
Group Control
Database Sizing:
Guard Tour
The EBI base package includes licensing for 250 points

and 12 readers.
UL Listing Compliance
Pharmaceutical Compliance Restrictions
User Scan Task and Applications Toolkit
Additional licensing for points can be purchased in

quantities of the following packages to a maximum of
65,000 points per single EBI Server:
Microsoft Excel Data Exchange
250 point adder
Network API
2,500 point adder
Integrated Photo ID
20,000 point adder
Communications Encryption
Additional licensing for readers can be purchased in

quantities of the following packages to a maximum of
2,000 readers:
Web Toolkit
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
6 reader adder
Server Platform
50 reader adder
Processor: 3.0 GHz Pentium 4 processor or higher
400 reader adder
Memory: Minimum of 2 GB RAM
Other Database parameters include the following.
Keyboard: with 12 function keys
Items
Display Resolution: 1280 x 1024 x 65K colors
Maximum Number
per single EBI server
DVDROM Drive
Network Protocols: TCP/IP
Pointing Device: Mouse
Hard Disk: 40 GB drive (NTFS)
Cards
Greater than 100,000 subject to

hardware limitations
Points
65,000 per server

180,000* per system
25
5/18/10 11:26:09 PM

* More than 180,000 with Technical
Risk Review and Approval
Access
Levels
64
Zones
1024
Time Periods
256
Alarms
2000 concurrent
Operator
Stations
Licensed individually up to 40*

*80 stations will be supported with EBI
R400 Service Pack 1
Printers
50
Channels
90
Reports
1000
Events
100000 per 60 MB of disk space

available
Assignable
Locations
1000
Users
1000
Number of
DSA
connected
Servers
10*
* More than 10 with Technical Risk
review and approval
North America Honeywell 1985 Douglas Drive North, Golden Valley, MN 55422-3992 Ph: 1-800-345-6700 ext.420 Asia Honeywell Southeast Asia,
Honeywell Building, 17 Changi Business Park Central 1, Singapore 486073, Tel: 355 2828 Fax: 445 3055 0149 Pacific Division Honeywell Pty Ltd., 2
Richardson Place, North Ryde NSW Australia 2113, Tel: 1300 138 081 Fax: 1300 138 082 Europe Honeywell Building Solutions, Hermes Plaza,
Hermeslaan 1H, B-1831 Diegem, Belgium, Tel: +32 2728 2597
Honeywell Enterprise Buildings Integrator, Honeywell Building Manager, Honeywell Security Manager,
Honeywell Life Safety Manager, Honeywell Digital Video Manager, SafeBrowse and EXCEL 5000 OPEN are trademarks of Honeywell Inc.
ExcelWeb is a registered trademark of Honeywell Inc.
Microsoft, Windows XP, Windows 2003 Server, Windows Vista, Microsoft SQL Server and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE.
LONMARK, LONWORKS and the LONWORKS logo are registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation.
www.honeywell.com 08/08 Honeywell Inc. All rights reserved
5/18/10 11:26:10 PM
XLS-FRI
First Responders Interface
General
The First Responders Interface is a revolutionary wayfinding
navigational tool for firefighters and other emergency responders. XLS-FRI, a touch screen, graphically displays critical information on the origin and spread of a fire; allowing firefighters
to quickly locate and extinguish the fire.
Features
GENERAL
17" LCD touch-screen.
Interfaces to XLS140-2, XLS3000, or XLS-NET (version 5.0
or higher) through the XLS Gateway over Ethernet.
Compatible with standard and High Speed
Supports the following additional languages: Arabic, French
(Canadian), Hebrew, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish, and
Chinese (Traditional and Simplified).
Supports multiple Gateways for large networks and campuses.
USER INTERFACE
Integrates with Honeywell's Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR
for CCTV camera viewing.
Large intuitive display shows building floor plans in a campus footprint with respective active fire alarm devices, water
supplies, evacuation routes, access routes, gas, power and
HVAC shutoffs, and chemical and structural hazards in the
building.
Detailed information for active devices or critical building
icons on the floor plan.
Easy access to building, emergency contacts, site plan, and
alarm event information.
EVENT NOTIFICATION
Graphic and text event notification of fire, supervisory, security, and medical events.
Fast automatic navigation to floors and locations of the
emergency events.
First alarm display to identify where the emergency started.
Time sequence display of activated detectors to track
smoke progression.
SYSTEM SETUP
Screen development tool can easily import building floor
plan CAD drawings (as a .wmf, .bmp, or .jpg file) and XPEDITE or VeriFire Toolsdatabases.
H7051cov-09.jpg
With XLS-FRI, emergency responders can immediately gather

the information needed to accurately pinpoint the source of the
fire and the rate at which its spreading. Crucial information is
easy to access with a spatial, graphical depiction of the location of activated detectors and detector sequence of activation
for one or multiple buildings. In addition, FeaturedProduct is an
interactive interface. It displays CCTV video and a summary
of building floor plans with detailed information about the building. Details can include locations for all fire alarm devices;
water supplies; evacuation routes; access routes; chemical
and structural hazards in the building; and shutoffs for gas,
power, and HVAC.
Standard icon library indicates fire alarm and critical building devices.
Ethernet and USB ports available for transferring screen
database information.
Specifications
NOTE: Dimensions are subject to change. Refer to product documentation for further information.
Enclosure Dimensions: 17.5" H x 18.0" W x 3.5" D (44.5

cm H x 45.7 cm W x 8.89 cm D).
Door Dimensions: 18.5" H x 20.0" W x 0.4" D (47 cm H x
50.8 cm W x 1.0 cm D).
Power Requirements: Regulated, filtered 24 VDC @ 3.0 A
via non-resettable power supply, UL Listed for fire-protective signaling use.
Temperature Range: 0C 50C (32F 120F).

These listings and approvals apply to XLS-FRI.
UL/ULC Listed: S470
CSFM: 7300-1130:270
XLS-FRI-DSP: XLS-FRI User Interface software and hardware
package. Includes 17" LCD touch-screen, Onboard Ethernet,
and USB ports. Also includes one software license and screen
configuration software (XLS-FRI-SCT). Does not include backbox, order separately.
XLS-FRI-ENC: XLS-FRI backbox enclosure and door.
Additional required components:
XLS-NET Gateway (P/N XLS-GW-EM-3).
NCM-W, NCM-F or HS-NCM/WMF/WSF/MFSF for connection to NOTIFIRENET.
Standard Ethernet network cable with RJ45 connectors.
Standard Ethernet network cable with RJ45 connectors and
hub/switch or Standard Ethernet crossover cable
5/18/10 11:26:10 PM
IBM-compatible PC with Windows XP and available Ethernet or USB port (used for programming).
Applications
An XLS-FRI display is an ideal component of a Honeywell fire system providing real-time fire system status to firefighters. XLSFRI interfaces directly to XLS Series control panels and an entire XLS-NET network.
IP connection
over Ethernet
H7051cov-09.jpg; cab4c.wmf,
nfngw3.bmp
Firefighters Display
Network version 5.0

(standard or
high-speed)
XLS-FRI
Network Control
Module
XLS-FRI Software
GRAPHICAL ICON KEY
Activated
Smoke
Detector
Gas Tank
Area of
Refuge
Master
Sprinkler
Shutoff
Activated
Duct
Detector
Halon
Fire
Phone
Power
Shutoff
Activated
Pullstation
Hydrant
Fire
Service
Keybox
Room Contains
Hazardous
Materials
Activated
Sprinkler
Device
HVAC
Shutoff
Fire
Service
Display
Stairs
Activated
Heat
Detector
Locked
Door
Gas
Shutoff
Standpipe
Page 2 of 4 06/15/2009 85-3134-2
www.honeywell.com
5/18/10 11:26:11 PM
7051dscr3.bmp
7051dscr6.bmp
www.honeywell.com
85-3134-2 06/15/2009 Page 3 of 4
5/18/10 11:26:12 PM
7051dscr7.bmp
7051dscr8.bmp
XLS-NET, Rapid Eye, and XPEDITE are trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3134-2 Rev. 06-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 4 of 4
5/18/10 11:27:20 PM
XLS-NET Embedded
Gateway-3
XLS-NET Fire Monitoring
General
The XLSNET Gateway is an intelligent gateway interface for
the XLSFRI. This gateway facilitates complete monitoring of
a XLSNET network.
The embedded gateway is a standalone version and is
equipped with IP capability thus enabling XLSNET users to
monitor multiple sites over an Ethernet network.
XLS-GW-EM-3
Features
Standards and Codes
Enables XLSFRI to monitor alarm events for Honeywell

fire alarm control panels on a XLSNET network or a high
speed network.
Compatible with standard and high speed XLSNET
network.
Supervised IP connections for remote XLS-FRI.
The XLSNET Gateway complies with the following UL/ULC

Standards and NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Systems requirements:
UL 864
UL 1076
UL 2017
ULC S559-04
ULC S527-99
Compatibility
The XLSNET Gateway is compatible with XLSNET and
interfaces to XLSNET version 5.0 and higher, as well as a
high speed XLSNET network for the following panels and
devices:
XLSNET
XLS-3000/140 (version 5.0 SIB-NET)
XLS-NCA2/XLS-NCA Network Control Annunciator
Specifications
Power input: 24 VDC

Input current: 450 mA @ 24 VDC (without XLS-NCM).
Operating temperature: 0C to 49C (32F to 120F).
Direct connection to XLS-3000, XLS-140, and XLS-140-2
fire alarm control panels. NCM required for connection to
XLSNET, and HS-NCM for connection to high-speed
network.(See data sheets 85-3007 and 74-4082.)

UL / ULC: S470
FM Approved
CSFM: 7300-1130:270
MEA: 286-07-E
XLS-GW-EM-3: XLSNET Gateway, embedded. Includes PC
board, NUP to NUP cable (75577), USB Cable (75665) and
NFN Configuration.
Additional EMBEDDED
components:
VERSION
Gateway
required
NCM for connection to XLSNET.

HS-NCM for connection to high speed XLSNET.
IBM-compatible PC with Windows XP.
Standard Ethernet network cable with RJ45 to RJ45
connectors.
XLSFRI 1.7 or above.
XLS-NET Network Version 5.0 or above.
Verifire Tools Version 5.71 or above.
5/18/10 11:27:22 PM
74-5084a.wmf
Ethernet
(TCP/IP)
XLS-GW-EM-3
XLS-FRI
NION, NOTIFIER, ONYX and ONYXWorks are registered trademarks and NOTIFIRENET, NOTIFIY-IP, and ONYX FirstVision are trademarks
of Honeywell International Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-5084-1 Rev. 04-10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:27:22 PM
MODBUS-GW
NFN-GW-EM-3.JPG
Modbus Gateway
General
The Modbus Gateway provides a communication link between
networks that use the Modbus/TCP communication protocol and
Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACPs) resident on an XLS-NET
network.
The Modbus Gateway communicates with the XLS-NET network
via the network port on any NCM. The Modbus communication
protocol is consistent with Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b.
The Modbus Gateway is designed to need very little configuration; no separate configuration utility is required. In most applications you will only need to enter the TCP/IP settings for your
network and the nodes you would like to monitor. The gateway
will automatically map all the configured points and supply you
with a user friendly comma-separated value report that defines
the mapping.
Features
Compatible with standard and high speed XLS-NET.
Monitor four compatible XLS-NET or HS-XLS-NET nodes not
including the Modbus Gateway node itself.
Provide data such as event type, active/inactive, enabled/disabled, acknowledged/unacknowledged, device type, analog
value (4-20ma modules only) and system troubles.
Support reads of up to 100 registers at a time. Analog values
can be read 10 registers at a time.
Log diagnostic information.
Send standard Modbus exception responses.
Reduce configuration time by auto-discovering and mapping
points.
MODBUS MASTERS COMPATIBLE

The Modbus Gateway was designed to be compatible with
standard Modbus/TCP masters.
Support one-byte Unit IDs.
Have configurable polling times.
The Modbus Gateway supports one Modbus Master.
CAN/ULC-S559-04: Equipment for Fire Signal Receiving

Centres and Systems, First Edition

UL/ULC Listed: S635
CSFM: 7300-0028:250
FDNY: COA#6047
System Architecture & Requirements

An Internet or Intranet IP network connection is required to configure the Modbus Gateway, and to connect it with Modbus clients. The Internet or Intranet IP network connection must meet
the following requirements.
Private of Business LAN

Static IP address required
Standard 100Base-T connection
Required Ports(s): 502
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
MODBUS-GW-XLS-NET Modbus Embedded Gateway.
Network Control Module
XLS-NET Network - Version 5.0 or above
PANEL COMPATIBLE
NETWORK COMPONENTS
The Modbus Gateway was designed to be compatible with the

following panels:
RJ45 to RJ45 standard Ethernet network cable-customer's

internet or intranet connection to Modbus Gateway
XLS-NET network-version 5.0 or above (sold separately)
High Speed Network Communication Module: HS-NCM-W/
SF/MF board-used to facilitate network communication
between the Modbus Gateway and a High Speed XLS-NET
network or Network Communication Module: NCM-W/F
board-used to facilitate network communication between the
Modbus Gateway and an XLS-NET network.
Cabinet and Hardware (sold separately)
CAB-4 series cabinet.
CHS-4L chassis.
XLS140
XLS140-2
XLS3000
Standards and Codes

The Modbus Gateway is recognized by UL as an ancillary (supplementary) reporting device. It complies with the following UL/
ULC Standards and NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Systems requirements.
UL 864: Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems, Ninth Edition
UL 2017: General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems,
First Edition
CAN/ULC-S527-99: Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm
Systems, Second Edition
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT

Windows XP Professional with Internet Explorer running Java
version 6 or higher
5/18/10 11:27:24 PM
Modbus
Client
Modbus
Client
IP Network
IP Network
MODBUS-GW
MODBUS-GW
NUP
NUP
HS-NCMW/SF/MF
or
NCM-W/F
FACP
Sample System: Modbus Gateway

Direct to Fire Alarm Control Panel
XLS-NET Network
FACP
FACP
FACP
Sample System: Modbus Gateway on XLS-NET

Network
NOTIFIRENET is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc. Modbus is a registered trademark of the Modbus Organization, Inc.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
74-5094 Rev. 03-10

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:27:24 PM
BACNET-GW-3
BACnet Gateway
General
The BACNET-GW-3 can be connected to a stand-alone panel

with an available network port, or it can be connected to XLSNET via the network port on any network control module. Connected to XLS-NET, each BACNET-GW-3 can support a maximum of 14 other nodes or 15,000 objects. Multiple BACNETGW-3s can be used to interface with larger networks.
Features
Compatible with XLS Series panels XLS3000, XLS140-2,
and XLS140.
Compatible with XLS-NET devices: XLS3000, XLS140-2,
XLS140, XLS-NCA, XLS-NCA2, and XLS-DVC-EM.
The BACNET-GW-3 can monitor up to 14 XLS-NET nodes
with a maximum combined object count of 15,000 (object
count includes all detectors, monitor modules, notification
appliance circuits, etc.).
Multiple BACNET-GW-3s can be used for large networks
(more than 15 nodes total).
PC programmable using the BACNET-GW-3 Configuration
Tool, an offline programming utility used to configure the
BACNET-GW-3. The Configuration Tool is used on a compatible computer that is using Windows XP OS.
The BACNET-GW-3 can behave as a foreign device when
communicating with a third-party BBMD (BACnet Broadcast
Management Devices).
Compatible with standard and high-speed XLS-NET
Specifications
Complies with: UL 864 9th Edition; and CAN/ULC-S55904, 1st Edition Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm
Systems.
Complies with NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.
Conforms to BACnet Standard Annex J for IP and Support
Device Objects, Binary Output Objects, Life Safety Points/
Zones, and Multi-State Inputs.
Power supply: 24 VDC @450mA nominal and supervised
battery backup.
Operating temperature: 32F to 120F (0C to 49C).
6877cov.psd
The BACNET-GW-3 provides an interface between Honeywells fire panel network XLS-NET (either the standard or the
high-speed version) and a network using the BACnet/IP communication protocol. BACnet protocol is an American National
Standard (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-1995). With the Gateway interface, devices on XLS-NET fire alarm control panels are represented as BACnet objects to the BACnet client. The user
subscribes to Event Notification objects per FACP, and the
BACnet device receives events from objects on the FACP as a
result of this subscription.
Connections
The BACNET-GW-3 is connected to XLS-NET via the network port on the network control module to the Gateway.
BACNET-GW-3 is connected to the BACnet front end via a
standard RJ45 Ethernet connector (CN2).
The BACNET-GW-3 assembly installs in one row of an XLSCAB-4 Series cabinet using a CHS-4 or CHS-4L chassis.
The PNET-1 surge suppressor is connected to the BACnet
Ethernet via a RJ45 Ethernet connector.

The listings and approvals below apply to the BACNET-GW-3.

The BACNET-GW-3 (ordered as such) includes everything
required to set up an interface to an existing Honeywell system
or network with the exception of a chassis and the Network
Control Module (NCM). It includes:
PC board for the BACNET-GW-3.
Software on CD-ROM (Configuration Tool).
RJ45 to RJ45 Standard Ethernet Network Cable (PN 75585).
NUP to NUP cable (PN 75556).
Additional required components (from other vendors):
IBM-compatible PC with Windows XP.
Standard Ethernet network cable with RJ45 connectors.
PIC Statement/BACnet Information

The BACNET-GW-3 PIC Statement is available from Honeywell. Select products and then network systems. For information on the BACnet protocol, see www.bacnet.org.
5/18/10 11:27:25 PM
System Architecture
NUP
connection
IP connection
over Ethernet
FACP
FACP
BACNET-GW-3
BACnet/IP Client
Single-Panel Diagram
IP connection
over Ethernet
FACP
BACnet/IP Client
IP Network
NUP
to
NUP
XLS-NET Network
FACP
BACNET-GW-3
BACnet/IP Client
Network
Control
Module
FACP
Single XLS-NET Network Diagram
XLS-Net is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc. BACnet is a registered trademark of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

35 Dynamic Drive
www.honeywell.com
85-3067-1 Rev. 06-09

April 2010
Made in the U.S.A.
Page 2 of 2
5/18/10 11:27:26 PM
Notes
9.0 Standards / Approvals and Factory

FM
UL
References
Standards / Approvals
and Factory
ISO Factory Certification
1/1/70 6:00:48 AM
Notes
1/1/70 6:00:50 AM
Electrical Signaling
Electrical protective signaling systems are configurations of components used to produce alarm signals indicative of fire, smoke,
sprinkler waterflow or other emergency and to produce supervisory signals indicative of conditions needing attention with respect to
protection equipment or watch service. System configurations are classified according to where and how the signals are received.
The categories are commonly designated as local, municipal, remote station, proprietary and central station. Auxiliary systems are
either local or proprietary systems interconnected with a municipal system.
This category presents the major system component categories and the integrated system configurations. The selection of
components to form a hybrid system should be made only by those skilled in system design. Also, the suitability of any system
application should be judged on the basis of the hazard(s) being protected.
Local Protective Signaling
Local systems produce alarm and/or supervisory signals within the protected property, which may not be constantly attended. The
systems are electrically supervised, include a secondary power supply having sufficient capacity to operate the system for 24 hours
under maximum normal load and often are primarily for the purpose of providing occupant evacuation signals. Some local systems
also provide for signaling to a constantly attended remote location.
The heart of a signaling system consists of a control unit to which are connected the initiating and signal indicating circuits. The
control unit is usually in a separate enclosure, provides power to its external circuits, and often is of modular design to enable
flexibility in obtaining multiple functions. In a coded signaling system, transmitters may be either separate from or integral to a
control; they transmit to the control or from a control to remote receiving equipment. The equipment listed below, in conjunction
with peripheral devices, may be used to form a complete system or a portion of a multizone system.
XLS3000 Fire Alarm Control Panel

XLS3000 Fire Alarm Control Panel. Control uses firmware revision level #SV11.00.07. Basic system consists of a combination of
XLS3000-CPUD (with keypad/display) or XLS3000-CPUND (without keypad/display), AMPS-24/-24E Power Supply/Battery
Charger with two outputs rated at 24 Vdc, 1.0 A and 24 Vdc, 4.5 A. Control operates in FlashScan, CLIP or Eclipse modes. The
AMPS-24/-24E can mount in a CAB-4 series enclosure or in BB-25, BB-100 or BB-200 Battery Box. Optional modules are:
LCM-320 Loop Control Module, XLS-ELCM-320 Eclipse Loop Control module; LEM-320 loop expander module; XLS-ELEM-320
Eclipse Expander Module, LEM-320 Expander Module, APS-6R(E) Auxiliary Power Supply, ACPS-2406(E) Addressable
Charger/Power Supply, ACPS-610(E) Addressable Charger/Power Supply, XPIQ transponder modules. TM-4 Transmitter Module
is required for auxiliary signaling connections. The XLS3000 is capable of operating with the XPM-10 and XP6 series
transponders. Signaling line circuits can be configured to meet Styles 4, 6, or 7. NCM-W and NCM-F Network Control Modules
may be used to connect an XLS3000 control with other XLS3000, XLS140(E), XLS140-2(E) controls, XLS-NCA-2 or
Q7055B1039 Fire Network Adapter for integration with W7063 or W7064 series workstations which may use the optional
XLS-NCM-EBI-W/-F. Model LCD-160 Annunciator is a 240 x 128 pixel optional display. LCD-160 uses firmware revision
#A160V2.03. The following addressable devices are supported by the LCM/LEM-320 in either CLIP or FlashScan protocols:
TC844A1015 and TC844A1015CDN (Flashscan) photoelectric detector used with 14507371-008 base; TC806B1076,
TC806B1076(CDN) and TC840C1000, Photoelectric Smoke Sensor TC806DNR(CDN) when used with System Sensor Duct
Detector Housing DNR(A), photoelectric smoke detectors, TC806B1084 photoelectric smoke detector w/integral 135 degree F
fixed (57 degree C) temperature heat detection, TC806D1049and TC806D1049(CDN) photoelectric duct smoke detectors,
TC806D1056 and TC806D1056(CDN) photoelectric duct smoke detectors with alarm relay, TC807B1059 and TC807B1059CDN
ionization smoke detectors, TC808B1041 and TC808B1041(CDN) 135 degree F (57 degree C) 25 by 25 ft (7.6m by 7.6m) fixed
temperature sensors, TC808B1058 and TC808B1058CDN fixed temperature and rate of rise thermal sensors 135 degree F (57
degree C): 25 by 25 ft (7.6m by 7.6m), TC808B1066 and TC808B1066CDN fixed temperature sensors 190 degree F (87.8
degree C) 20 by 20 ft (6.1m by 6.1m) maximum spacing, TC840M1021 and TC840M1021CDN combination photoelectric and
thermal temperature sensors 135 degree F (57 degree C) using base model 14507371-001, B501BH/-2 Sounder base,
B501BHT/-2 Temporal Sounder base; 14506414-002 and 14506415-002CDN detector bases; XLS-CM-T telephone module;
XLS-CM-R and XLS-CM-RCDN (Flashscan) relay modules; Releasing Modules TC810S1000 and TC810S1000CDN XLS-CM-N
and XLS-CM-NCDM (Flashscan) control modules; XLS-CM-T and XLS-CM-TCDN Flashscan) telephone modules; XLS-MM-A
and XLS-MM-ACDN (Flashscan) monitor modules; Interface Module TC809C1004; Fire-Phone Modules TC810T1000 and
TC810T1000CDN; XLS-MM-B and XLS-MM-BCDN (Flashscan) mini-monitor modules; XLS-MM-D and XLS-MM-DCN
(Flashscan) dual monitor modules; XLS-MM-Z and XLS-MM-ZCDN (Flashscan) 2 wire detector modules; XLS-MPS
(Flashscan) Addressable Manual Pull Station); TC846A1013 (Flashscan) Laser detector. The following addressable detectors
are available in CLIP protocol: TC846A1005, TC846A1013 and TC846A1005CDN Laser Photoelectric smoke detectors
(sensitivity 0.03%/ft to 1%/ft (0.005 dB/m) used with base models 14507371-001 and 14507371-001CDN, 14506414-002 and
14506414-002CDN, B501BH and B501BHA, B224RB and B224RBA, 14507371-005 and 14507371-005CDN; TC847A1004 and
TC847A1004CDN beam type detectors; TC810R1024 and TC810R1024CDN relay modules; TC809A1067CDN monitor module;
TC844A1007 Hostile smoke detector; S464G1007 Addressable Manual Pull Station; TC809B1008 and TC809B1016CDN
mini-monitor modules; TC809D1004 and TC809D1004CDN dual monitor modules; TC841A1000 and TC841A1000CDN 2 wire
detector modules; TC811A1006 loop isolator module; TC810N1013CDN and TC810N1013CDN control modules; TC809D1004
and TC809D1004CDN dual monitor modules. The following Eclipse devices are compatible with the XLS3000: Photoelectric
smoke detector w/isolator models TC906A1002 and TC906A1002CDN; Photo-thermal detector w/isolator models TC906A1010
and TC906A1010CDN; Heat detector w/isolator models TC908A1000and TC908A1000CDN; Six inch base w/isolator models
50001947-002 and 50001947-002CDN; Monitor module full size Class A/B, models TC909A1009 and TC909A1009CDN; NAC
Module w/isolator models TC910N1007 and TC910N1007CDN; Relay module w/isolator models TC910R1009 and
TC910R1009CDN; Pull station with isolator model S464H1006; Mini-module w/isolator models TC909B1007 and
TC909B1007CDN; Duct housing models 500001949-001 and 50001949-001CDN; Duct sensor head w/isolator models
TC906D1006 and TC906D1006CDN; Ion smoke detector models TC907A1001 and TC907A1001CDN; 4 inch base w/isolator
models 50001947-001 and 50001947-001CDN; EBR Relay base; Standby batteries (24 V dc up to 60 AH) provide 24 or 60 hour
standby operation. (See also CENTRAL STATION SIGNALING SYSTEMS, PROPRIETARY SIGNALING SYSTEMS,
AUTOMATIC RELEASES FOR EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS AND OTHER FIRE PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT, AUTOMATIC
1/1/70 6:00:50 AM
RELEASES FOR PREACTION AND DELUGE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS and EMERGENCY VOICE/ALARM COMMUNICATIONS SY
Company Name: Honeywell International Inc

Company Address: 1500 W Dundee Rd, Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004, USA
Company Website: http://www.honeywell.com
Listing Country: United States of America
Certification Type: FM Approved
1/1/70 6:00:50 AM
Local Protective Signaling
Local systems produce alarm and/or supervisory signals within the protected property, which may not be constantly attended. The
systems are electrically supervised, include a secondary power supply having sufficient capacity to operate the system for 24 hours
under maximum normal load and often are primarily for the purpose of providing occupant evacuation signals. Some local systems
also provide for signaling to a constantly attended remote location.
The heart of a signaling system consists of a control unit to which are connected the initiating and signal indicating circuits. The
control unit is usually in a separate enclosure, provides power to its external circuits, and often is of modular design to enable
flexibility in obtaining multiple functions. In a coded signaling system, transmitters may be either separate from or integral to a
control; they transmit to the control or from a control to remote receiving equipment. The equipment listed below, in conjunction
with peripheral devices, may be used to form a complete system or a portion of a multizone system.
XLS140-2(E) Fire Alarm Control Panel

XLS140-2(E) Fire Alarm Control Panel. Control uses firmware revision level #N62V10.08. Basic system consists of a combination
of XLS140-2CPU(E) Motherboard, KDM-R2 Keyboard Display Module and KAPS-24/E power supply (mounts directly on the
control panel) uses firmware revision level #KAPSV1.1. The KAPS-24/E power supply provides total 3 A in standby and 6 A in
alarm. Model XLS140-2 utilizes KAPS-24 power supply and uses 120 Vac input power. Model XLS140-2E utilizes KAPS-24E
power supply and uses 240 Vac input power. XLS-NCA2 Network Control Annunciator can be used as an optional additional or
primary display (replacing the KDM-R2). The system provides one Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) which can be configured to meet
Class B, Style 4, or Class A, Styles 6 or 7. If an optional LEM-320 Loop Expander Module is installed, the system can support a
second SLC. Each SLC is capable of supporting 159 addressable detectors and 159 addressable modules. The system provides
four Class B, Style Y or four Class A, Style Z notification appliance circuit/releasing circuit outputs rated at 24 V dc 1.5A plus two
24 V dc 1.25 A (total) auxiliary outputs (one resettable and one non-resettable). Optional modules are: LEM-320 Loop Expander
Module. APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply, ACPS-2406 Addressable/Charger Power Supply, FCPS-24S6 Power Supply,
FCPS-24S8 Power Supply, and XPIQ, XLS-DVC/DVC-EM and DAA (See separate listing). TM-4 transmitter module required for
auxiliary signaling connection. XLS140-2(E) is capable of operating with the XP6 and XP10M series transponders. XLS140-2(E)
supports the XLS-NET network consisting of the NCM-W/NCM-F Network Control Modules, XLS-NET for use with XLS-3000,
XLS-140(E), XLS140-2(E) fire alarm control panels, XLS-NCA and XLS-NCA2 Remote Annunciators, XLS-DVC. XLS140-2(E) is
compatible with the following modules and detectors: Laser Photoelectric Smoke detectors TC846A1013 and TC846A1005;
Filtrex detector TC844A1015; Photoelectric Smoke TC840C1000, TC806B1076; Photoelectric Smoke Sensor TC806DNR(CDN)
when used with System Sensor Duct Detector Housing DNR(A), Photoelectric Smoke Sensors with 135F Fixed Temperature
Heat Sensor TC806B1084, TC840M1021; Ionization Smoke Sensor TC807B1059; TC808B1041 135F Fixed Temperature Heat
Sensor; TC808B1066 190F Fixed Temperature Heat Sensor; 135F Fixed Temperature and Rate of Rise Heat Sensor
TC808B1058 used with models B501BH sounder base, B501BHT temporal sounder base, B224RB relay base and B224BI
isolator base. Duct Detectors TC806D1049, TC806D1056; beam detector TC847A1004. Relay Control Modules TC810R1024
and XLS-CM-R, Supervised Control Modules TC810N1013, TC810N1013C and XLS-CM-N, Monitor Modules TC809A1059,
TC809A1059C and XLS-MM-A, Dual Monitor Module TC809D1004 and XLS-MM-D; Mini Modules TC809B1008, TC809B1008C
and XLS-MM-B; Interface Modules TC841A1000 and XLS-MM-Z; TC811A1006 Isolation module; Releasing Modules
TC810S1000 and TC810S1000CDN; S464F1008WP, S464G1007 dual action manual pull station, Fire-Phone Modules
TC810T1000, TC841A1000C and TC810T1000CDN and XLS-MPS addressable pull stations. When required, the following
Remote Annunciators may be used: ACM 8R, ACM 16AT, AEM 16AT, ACM 32A, AEM 32A, AFM-16A, AFM 16AT, ACM-24AT,
ACM-48A, AEM-24AT, AEM-48A, LDM 32, LDM E32, LDM R32, XLS-LCD-80.Models ACM-24AT and ACM-48A uses firmware
revision level #ACM-R1.1 4. Model XLS-LCD-80 uses firmware revision level #LCD80R 2.0. Standby batteries (24 V dc up to
200 AH) provide 24 or 60 hour standby operation. Model PRN-6 auxiliary printer may be used. (See also CENTRAL STATION
SIGNALING SYSTEMS, AUTOMATIC RELEASES FOR EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS AND OTHER FIRE PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT, AUTOMATIC RELEASES FOR PREACTION AND DELUGE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS and EMERGENCY
VOICE/ALARM COMMUNCIATION SYSTEMS listings).

Company Address: 1500 W Dundee Rd, Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004, USA
Company Website: http://www.honeywell.com
1/1/70 6:00:51 AM
Emergency Voice/Alarm Communication Systems
An emergency voice/alarm communication system consists of an Approved local alarm, remote station or proprietary signaling
system incorporating dedicated manual and automatic facilities for the origination, control and transmission of verbal information
and instructions pertaining to a fire alarm emergency to the occupants of a building. These systems meet the requirements of the
NFPA Standard 72.
XLS-DVC, XLS-DVC-EM, XLS-DVC-EMF, XLS-DVC-EMSF

XLS-DVC or XLS-DVC-EM, XLS-DVC-EMF, XLS-DVC-EMSF (extended memory) Digital Voice Command Center. Software
Version #XLS-DVCV2.01 utilized in a single panel configuration (in one enclosure with XLS3000 through the NUP port) or a
networked (XLS-NET) configuration (requires use XLS-NCA2 Network Annunciator). Networks with XLS3000, XLS140, XLS140-2,
XLS-NCA or XLS-NCA2 Network Annunciators. Requires 24 Vdc input power (TB1). Supports up to 32 DAA series digital
amplifiers in Class A (Style 7) or Class B (Style 4) configuration. Uses FFT (Firefighters Telephone Riser), RM-1 Remote
Microphone, TELH-1 telephone handset. The DAA series amplifiers have the following modifications: DAA-5025 series 120 Vac
input, 25 Vrms; DAA-5025E series 240 Vac input, 25 Vrms; DAA-5070, 120 Vac input, 70 Vrms; DAA-5070E series 240
Vac input, 70 Rms. Each DAA has two Class A (Style Z) connections for high level audio output or four Class B (Style Y)
connections. Maximum combined audio output is 50W. The DAA-PS power supply board is rated 120 Vac, 4.5 A max (240 Vac,
2.3 A max for the DAA-PSE version). Supports up to two 12 Volt, 55 AH batteries in series. Optional boards: DVC-AO audio
output board, has four low level audio outputs to connect XPIQ series transponders and AA-30, -100 or -120 audio amplifiers;
DVC-KD keypad.

Company 2 Corporate Center Dr, Suite 100, Box 9040, Melville, New York 11747-9040,
Address: USA
Company
http://www.security.honeywell.com/hsce
Website:
1/1/70 6:00:52 AM
UOJZ.S470
Control Units, System
Page Bottom
Control Units, System

See General Information for Control Units, System
HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC
S470
1500 W DUNDEE RD
ARLINGTON HEIGHTS, IL 60004 USA
Model
FS90/Deltanet*
Type
Type
Service
Type
Signaling
A, M, SS, WF
C, NC
A, M, SS, WF
MX
W7053H Series, 20 EBI System
CS (PPU), P
A, M, SS, WF,
WSS
MX
W7063B EBI System
CS, P
A, M, SS, WF,
WSS
OT
W7064A EBI System
CS, P
A, M, SS, WF,
WSS
OT
W7074A, W7074B EBI System
CS, P
A, M, SS, WF,
WSS
OT
XLS-100#, XLS-100/220#, XLS-100R#, XLS-100R/220#
AUX, L
A, M, WF
NC
CS (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
DAC
RS (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
DAC, NC
P (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
NC
AUX, L
A, M, WF
NC
CS (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
DAC
RS (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
DAC, NC
CS (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
DAC, NC
XLS-1000#
P (RU)
A, M, SS, WF,
WSS
MX
XLS-200#, XLS-200R#, XLS-200-2#, XLS-200R-2#
AUX, L, P, RS
(PPU)
A, M, WF
NC
XLS-3000 (b) (c)
AUX
A, M, WF
NC
RS (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
DAC, OT, Rev

Pol
CS (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
DAC, NC, OT
P (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
NC
P (RU)
A, M, SS, WF
MX, NC
A, M, SS, WF
C, MX, NC
AUX
A, M, WF
NC
RS (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
DAC, OT, Rev

Pol
XLS-100-6#, XLS-100-6R#, XLS-100-6/220#, XLS-1006R/220#
XLS140-2 (a) (c), XLS-140-2E (a)
1/1/70 6:00:53 AM
CS (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
DAC, MX, NC,

OT
P (PPU)
A, M, SS, WF
MX, NC
L - Local System Type

A - Automatic fire alarm: Thermostats, smoke detectors, etc.
M - Manual fire alarm: Manually-operated boxes
SS - Sprinkler Supervisory: Gate valves, water-level switches, temperature switches, carbon monoxide detectors, residential fire alarm control units,
etc.
WF - Waterflow alarm: Waterflow switches
C - Coded
NC - Noncoded
P - Proprietary System Type
MX - Multiplex
CS (PPU) - Central Station System Type (Protected Premises Unit)
WSS - Watchman 's supervisory service
CS - Central Station System Type
OT - Other Transmission Technologies
AUX - Auxiliary System Type
DAC - Digital Alarm Communicator
RS (PPU) - Remote Station System Type (Protected Premises Unit)
P (PPU) - Proporiety System Type (Protected Premises Unit)
P (RU) - Proporiety System Type (Receiving Unit)
Rev Pol - Reverse Polarity
# - Also suitable for Releasing Device Service when used in conjunction with XLS-REL.
(a) - For Coded (C) Type Signaling, see footote +.
(b) - For Digital Alarm Communicator (DAC) and Reverse Polarity Type Signaling, see footnote +.
(c) - When the Type Signaling is Other Technologies, see footnote +.
* - For Local (L) System Type: Provided the indicated type of service when connected to suitably Listed control units as indicated in the installation
wiring diagrams.
+ - Must be employed with additional specific Listed device(s) as indicated in installation instructions and wiring diagrams to provide indicated type
service.
Last Updated on 2009-07-31
Questions?
Notice of Disclaimer
Page Top
Copyright 2010 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1/1/70 6:00:54 AM
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured under
UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Listed and covered under UL's Follow-Up Service. Always
look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide Information,
Designs and/or Listings (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings).
2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from Underwriters Laboratories Inc." must appear adjacent to the
extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the following format: "Copyright 2010 Underwriters
Laboratories Inc."
1/1/70 6:00:54 AM
Notes
1/1/70 6:00:54 AM
UOXX.S470
Control Unit Accessories, System
Page Bottom
Control Unit Accessories, System

See General Information for Control Unit Accessories, System
S470
1500 W DUNDEE RD
9-pin protectors, Model(s) 14507135
Addressable control modules, Model(s) TC810A1056
Amplifiers, Model(s) SIGA-AA30, SIGA-AA50
Annunciators, Model(s) XLS100-3ANN/D, XLS100-6ANN/D
Autosync modules, Model(s) SIGA-CC1S, SIGA-MM1S
Battery boxes, Model(s) XLS-LBB, XLS-LBBR
Card reader controllers, Model(s) XLS-CRC, XLS-CRCXM
Cascade modules, Model(s) 14507726-001
Control modules, Model(s) TC810A1007, TC810A1023, TC810A1031, TC810N1013(f06), TC810R1024(f06), TC810S1000, TC810T1000, XLS-CM-N,
XLS-CM-R, XLS-CM-T
Control unit accessories, Model(s) PT1-P, PT1-S
CRC accessory relays, Model(s) CRCRL
CRC sounders, Model(s) CRSND
CRT monitors, Model(s) 14506792-003, 14507012-001, 14507013-001, 14507669-001
Data gathering panels, Model(s) 1200
Dual monitor modules, Model(s) TC809D1004
Enclosure doors, Model(s) XLS-4ANN/D
Enclosures, Model(s) 14006700-521112, 4ANN/B, 4ANN/B-S
End-of-line diode assemblies, Model(s) 14507020-001
End-of-line relays, Model(s) 14501599-001, R8407A1009, R8407A1017, R8407A1025, R8407A1033, RELA-E0L
End-of-line resistors, Model(s) 14501600-001, 14501600-003, 14501600-004, 14501600-012, 14501600-013, 14501600-022, 14501600-023,
14501600-027, 14501600-028
End-of-line units, Model(s) AMD21974E(f01), AMD2197H(f01), AMD2197J(f01)
Ethernet cards, Model(s) 14507724-001
1/1/70 6:00:54 AM
Fault isolator modules, Model(s) TC811A1006

Fiber cards, Model(s) 14507725-001, 14507725-002
Fiber optic converters, Model(s) 50000898-002, 50000898-003
Ground fault detectors, Model(s) GFD
Hubs, Model(s) 14507743-003
Input/output modules, Model(s) SIGA-IO, SIGA-MIO
Isolator modules, Model(s) SIGA-IM
Keyboard displays, Model(s) XLS-KPDISP
LCD monitors, Model(s) XLS-FRI
Lighting protectors, Model(s) 14502412-005, 14502412-010, 14502412-011, 14502412-012, 14502412-014, 14502412-018, 14502412-019,
14502412-020
Local filter modules, Model(s) W1015A
Monitor modules, Model(s) TC809A1034, TC809A1059, TC809B1008, TC809B1032, TC811A1000, TC909A1009, TC909B1007, XLS-MM-A, XLS-MM-B,
XLS-MM-D, XLS-MM-Z
Mounting plates, Model(s) 14504750-002, 14504750-003, 14504750-004
Network adapters, Model(s) Q7055B1021(BNA-2DN)
Network control annunciators, Model(s) XLS-NCA2
Passive infrared motion detectors with guard tour, Model(s) Q7055B1039(FNA2), XLS-MD(f02), XLS-MDS(f02)
PC speaker assemblies, Model(s) 14507715
Personal computers, Model(s) W7053D, W7053H
Portable Handset, Model(s) 6700-0061, 6830-3
Printers, Model(s) 14507540-006, 14507540-007, 14507540-008, 14507540-009, 3014I, W1014B, XLS-PRN-6
Protocol conversion modules - NIONs and Routers, Model(s) XLS-GW-EM
Receptacles, Model(s) 6833-4
Relay control modules, Model(s) TC810R1024
Relay modules, Model(s) R8450(f04), R8466A1007, SIGA-CR2, TC910R1009
Releasing modules, Model(s) XLS-REL
Remote annunciators, Model(s) 2-SMDN, 2-SMDN-C, 3-ANNCPU3, ENVOY, XLS(FSCS-1), XLS(FSCS-2), XLS(FSCS-3), XLS(FSCS-4), XLS-FDU-80(f5),
XLS-LCD-80(f05), XLS1000
Remote booster power supplies, Model(s) XLS-BPS10A, XLS-BPS10A/230, XLS-BPS6A, XLS-BPS6A/230
Remote phones, Model(s) 6830-4, 6830-5A4, 6830-6A4, 6830-NY-F4, 6830-NY-S4
Remote transponders, Model(s) MFC-AD, SIGA-CC1, SIGA-CC2, SIGA-CR, SIGA-CRR, SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT2, SIGA-MM1, SIGA-UM, SIGA-WTM, XLSIM
Riser monitor modules, Model(s) SIGA-RM1-MRM1
Security bell interfaces, Model(s) 24DC12
1/1/70 6:00:55 AM
Security loop modules, Model(s) XLS-SEC2

Servers, Model(s) 14507789-001, 14507795-001
Supervising control modules, Model(s) TC910N1007
Uninterruptible power supplies, Model(s) SPS-1-240-24
Wiring plate assemblies, Model(s) 14504750
Workstations, Model(s) 14507788-001, 14507788-002
Model(s) Combination manual box and telephone units, Computers, Magnetic discs and disc controllers, Supplementary annunciator units, Telephone
adjunct units, XLS-GW-EM-3
(f01) - Low voltage only
(f02) - For use with Listed control panels
(f04) - For use with Model 14504750-002 and 14504750-003 mounting plates
(f05) - For use with Models XLS140/140E.
(f06) - Modules can be installed in the DNR duct housing.
Questions?
Page Top

Laboratories Inc."
1/1/70 6:00:55 AM
Notes
1/1/70 6:00:56 AM
SYZV.S470
Control Units, Releasing Device
Page Bottom
Control Units, Releasing Device

See General Information for Control Units, Releasing Device
S470
1500 W DUNDEE RD
Control units for use with separately Listed smoke detectors, heat detectors, releasing devices and other electrically operated
controlling appliances to form electrically supervised releasing systems, Model(s) XLS-1000, XLS-140-2, XLS-140-2E, XLS-3000
Questions?
Page Top

Laboratories Inc."
1/1/70 6:00:56 AM
Notes
1/1/70 6:00:56 AM
UROX.S1196
Smoke-automatic Fire Detectors
Page Bottom
Smoke-automatic Fire Detectors

See General Information for Smoke-automatic Fire Detectors
S1196
1500 W DUNDEE RD
Detector
Velocity Range
(fpm)
Compatibility
Model
Application
Type
Restrictions
Min
Max
14506325-002
OAP, RS
D4
300
32002812-005
D(ST)
D4
100
4000
32002812-006
D(ST)
D2
100
4000
50001949-001 (g)
None
6260A-CU
D(ST)
D2
300
4000
HPS-32, HPST-32
OAP, RS
D2
300
None
300
HPSIC-6, HPSIC-12, HPSIC-24, HPSTIC-6, HPSTIC-12, HPSTIC-24

OAP
HPSRC-12, HPSRC-24, HPSS-6, HPSS-12, HPSTRC-12, HPSTRC-24, HPSTS-6, HPSTS-12, TC803A1022, TC803A1030
OAP, RS
None
300
SD-CJ (i)
None
SD-ST (j)
None
SIGA-DH (w/XLS-IPHS)
D(ST)
P/I
D2
300
1000
SIGA-DH (w/XLS-PHS)
D(ST)
D2
300
4000
SIGA-DH (w/XLS-PS)
D(ST)
D2
300
4000
OAP, RS
D2
300
TC804A-1013
OAP, RS
D4
300
TC804C-1001
OAP
D2
3000
TC804C-1019
OAP
P(IHD)
D2
300
TC804D-1009
OAP, D(I)
D2
3000
TC805C-1018
OAP
D2
1200
TC805D-1008
OAP, D(I), RS
D2
1200
TC806A-1037
OAP, D(I)
D4
3000
OAP, D(I)
P(IHD)
D2
4000
TC803B-1004, TC803B-1012, TC803B-1028, TC803B-1038
TC806B-1043, TC806B-1068, TC806B-1084
TC806B-1050 (b), TC806B-1001 (b), TC806B-1076,TC806DNR (b)
1/1/70 6:00:56 AM
OAP, D(I)
D2
4000
TC807B-1042, TC807B-1000
OAP, D(I)
D4
1500
TC807B-1059
OAP
D4
1200
TC840A-1001
OAP, D(I)
P/I
D2
1000
TC840C1000
OAP
P(IHD)
D4
300
OAP, D(I)
I(IHD)
D2
500
TC844A-1015, TC844A-1007
OAP
D2
300
TC846A-1005 (k), TC846A-1013 (k)
OAP
Laser
None
TC847A1004 (h)
OAP
PB
D4
TC906A1002, TC906A1010
OAP, D(I)
None
4000
TC907A1001
OAP
*1
1200
XLS-IPHS (c), XLS-IPHSB (c)
OAP
P/I
D2
500
XLS-IS (b)(c)
OAP
D2
300
XLS-PHS (a)(c)
OAP
P(IHD)
D2
5000
XLS-PS (b)(c)
OAP
D2
5000
TC840M-1013, TC840M-1005, TC840M-1021
Detector
Compatibility
Model
Min
Pressure Differential Between

Sampling Tube
Application
Type
D(ST)
None
500
4000
0.5
D2
300
4000
0.05
D(ST)
D2
300
4000
0.05
32002812-001
D(ST)
D4
500
4000
0.03
1.4
32002812-002
D(ST)
D4
500
4000
0.03
1.4
32002812-004
D(ST)
D2
500
4000
0.03
1.4
TC806D-1011, TC806D-1018
D(ST)
D2
500
4000
0.03
1.4
TC806D-1023
D(ST)
D2
100
4000
0.03
1.4
TC806D-1031
D(ST)
D2
100
4000
0.03
1.4
TC806D-1049
D(ST)
D2
100
4000
0.03
1.4
TC806D-1056
D(ST)
D2
100
4000
0.03
1.4
ESD-2W (d)
D(ST)
D2
100
4000
0.005
SD-4wj (e)(l)
D(ST)
D2
100
4000
0.005
SD-SJ (e)
D(ST)
*3
100
4000
0.005
SD-ST (e)
D(ST)
*4
100
4000
0.005
XLS-SD (d)(l)
D(ST)
D2
100
4000
0.005
5001949-001
Restrictions
Velocity Range
(fpm)
Max
Min
Max
14506873-001 (b)(w.TC806A, -1037 heads)

D(ST)
14506873-001 (b)(w.TC807A, -1036 heads)
Base Model
14506414-001
Related Detector
TC807A-1036, TC806A-1037
Control Unit
Compatibility
Restrictions
B2
1/1/70 6:00:57 AM
14506414-002
TC840C1000, TC806B1076, TC807B1059, TC808B1041, TC808B1066, TC808B1058,

TC840M1021, TC846A1005, TC846A1016, TC806B1084, TC807A-1036, TC806A-1037,
TC806B-1001, TC806B-1043, TC806B-1076, TC806B-1050, TC806B-1068, YC840M-1013
B2
14506587-001

TC808B1058, TC840M1021, TC846A1005, TC846A1013, TC805C-1000, TC804C-1001,
TC805C-1018, TC804C-1019
B2
14506587-004
TC805C-1000, TC804C-1001
B2
14507370-001,
14507370-002
(RS)
TC804D-1009, TC805D-1008
B2
14507370-002

TC808B1058, TC840M1021, TC846A1005, TC846A1013
B2
14507371-001

TC808B1058, TC840M1021, TC846A1005, TC846A1013, TC806B-1001, TC806N-1043,
TC806B-1076, TC806B-1084, TC807B-1042, TC806B-1050, TC806B-1068, TC840M-1013,
TC807B-1000, TC806B-1084
B2, B4
14507371-003
TC807B-1042
B2
14507371-003
(RS), 14507371005
TC806B-1001, TC807B-1000
B2
14507371-005

TC808B1058, TC840M1021, TC846A1005, TC846A1013
B2
14507371-008
TC844A1015, TC844A-1007
B2
50001947-002,
50001947-001
TC906A1002, TC906A1010, TC908A1000
None
B501
TC840C1000
B4
EBR (b)
TC908A1000, TC906A1002, TC906A1010
B2
EBS (b)
TC908A1000, TC906A1002, TC906A1010
B2
SIGA-AB4, SIGA-AB4G, SIGA-SB (b), SIGA-SB4 (b)(f), SIGA-RB (b), SIGA-RB4 (b)(f), SIGA-IB (b), SIGA0IB4 (b)(f)
XLS-IPHS, XLS-IS, XLS-PHS, XLS-PS
B2
B2 - For connection to Listed control units with which compatibility was determined by test or a review of circuit parameters. Interconnection and
compatible models indicated on installation wiring diagram for detector (base) and/or control unit.
B4 - For connection to any manufacturer's Listed compatible control unit.
D2 - For connection to Listed control units with which compatibility was determined by test or a review of circuit parameters. Interconnection and
compatible models indicated on installation wiring diagram for detector (base) and/or control unit.
D4 - For connection to any manufacturer's Listed compatible control unit.
*1 - For connection to Listed Honeywell model XLS 3000 fire alarm control panel.
*3 - Listing limited to use with model SD SJ duct detector subassembly.
*4 - Listing limited to use with model SD CJ duct detector subassembly.
OAP - Open Area Protection
RS - Releasing Service
P - Photoelectric
D(ST) - Duct Detector - Sampling Tubes
D - Duct Detector
P/I - Combination Photoelectric and Ionization
1/1/70 6:00:57 AM
I - Ionization
IHD - Includes Integral Heat Detector
D(I) - Duct Detector - Installation Inside Duct
PB - Projected Beam
(b) - Suitable for use in ambient temperatures of 0-49 C (32-120 F).
(c) - Employs field adjustable sensitivities.
(d) - Suitable for use in ambient temperatures of -29 to 70 C.
(e) - Suitable for use in ambient temperature of -20 to 70 C (-4 to 158 F).
(f) - May employ Model SIGA-TS or SITA-TSB trim skirt.
(g) - Listed model 50001949-001 is only suitable for smoke detecors models TC906D1006.
(h) - Suitable for use in ambient temperatures or -30 c to 55 C (-22 to 131 F) with a max distance of 18 in. below the ceiling.
(i) - Duct detector subassemblies, Model SD-CJ, for connection to model SD-SJ duct smoke detectors.
(J) - Duct detector subassemblies, Model SD-CT, for connection to model SD-ST duct smoke detectors.
(k) - Special application, system sensitivity may be set between 0.02 and 3.66 percent per foot obscuration.
(l) - Consists of a SD SJ (duct smoke detector) and SD CJ (duct detector subassembly).
Questions?
Page Top

Laboratories Inc."
1/1/70 6:00:58 AM
UUMW.S4048
Speakers and Amplifiers for Fire-protective Signaling Systems
Page Bottom
Speakers and Amplifiers for Fire-protective Signaling Systems

See General Information for Speakers and Amplifiers for Fire-protective Signaling Systems
SYSTEM SENSOR UNINCORPORATED, DIV OF HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC
S4048
3825 OHIO AVE

ST CHARLES, IL 60174 USA
SpeakersModels SP200R, SP200W, SP201W, SP201R, SP300W, SP301W, SP301R. For indoor use only.
Model SP201K. For indoor and outdoor use.
Speaker/strobes, Models SP2C2415, SP2C2430, SP2C2475, SP2C2495, SP2C24115, SP2C24177, SP2C241575, SP2R1224MC, SP2R1224MCP,
SP2W1224MC, SP3R1224MC, SP3W1224MC. For indoor use only.
Model SP2R1224MCK. Wall mount. For indoor and outdoor use.
SPECTRALERT ADVANCE SERIES Speakers and Speaker/Strobes
Models with "K" in the suffix are suitable for indoor or outdoor use with an operating temperature rating of -40C to +66C (-40F to +151F) and
have a NEMA 4X and IP 56 enclosure rating only when used with the models PWBB, PWBBW or PWBBCW plastic weatherproof back boxes and outdoor
rated gasket, or when used with models MWBB, MWBBW or MWBBCW metal weatherproof back boxes and its outdoor rated gasket. Suitable for wall or
ceiling mounting.
"K" suffix models may also employ the weatherproof plates in place of the weatherproof back boxes as follows:
Models with "K" in the suffix models are suitable for indoor or outdoor use with an extended operating temperature range of -40 degrees F to 151
degrees F (-40 degrees C to 66 degrees C) rating and are NEMA 3R and IP22 rated only when used with the model WTP-SP (Red) and WTP-SPW
(White) Weatherproof Plates, suitable for wall or ceiling flush mounting. The weatherproof plates can be mounted and sealed to: brick, concrete,
masonry brick, or ceramic tile surfaces.
Models with "-P" in the suffix have plain housings with no lettering on the enclosure. Models not containing "-P", in the suffix have English lettering
reading "FIRE" on the housing. Models with "-SP" or "-PG" in the suffix are denoted as Spanish or Portuguese, respectively, in reference to optional,
alternate language based instruction manuals and nameplates included with the device.
SpectrAlert Advance Speakers - Rectangular enclosure, Models SPR, SPW, SPRV, SPWV. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
SpectrAlert Advance Speakers - Round enclosure, Models SPCW, SPCR, SPCWV, SPCRV. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
SpectrAlert Advance Speaker/Strobes - Rectangular enclosure, Models *SPSR, *SPSRH, *SPSW, SPSW-ALERT, SPSW-CLR-ALERT, *SPSWH,
*SPSRV, *SPSWV. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
SpectrAlert Advance Speaker/Strobes - Round enclosure, Models *SPSCR, *SPSCRH, *SPSCW, SPSCW-CLR-ALERT, *SPSCWH, *SPSCRV,
*SPSCRVH, *SPSCWV, *SPSCWVH. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
SpectrAlert Advance Speaker/Strobes Accessories:
Retrofit plates, Models RFP, RFPW.
Backbox skirts (rectangular), Models SPBBS, SPBBSW for surface mounting.
Backbox skirts (round), Models SPBBSC, SPBBSCW for surface mounting.
Trim rings (rectangular), Models TR, TRW.
Trim rings (round), Models TRC, TRCW.
1/1/70 6:00:58 AM
"*" prefix denotes device that includes "-SP" or "-PG" suffix, representing optional, alternate Spanish or Portuguese language based installation
manuals and nameplates, respectively.
Questions?
Page Top

Laboratories Inc."
1/1/70 6:00:59 AM
ULSZ.S4011
Audible-signal Appliances
Page Bottom
Audible-signal Appliances
See General Information for Audible-signal Appliances
SYSTEM SENSOR UNINCORPORATED, DIV OF HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC
S4011
3825 OHIO AVE

ST CHARLES, IL 60174 USA
Bells, vibrating, Models SSM24-6, SSM24-8, SSM24-10, SSV120-6, SSV120-8, SSV120-10 for outdoor use when used with NEMA 3R weather
resistant back box, Model WBB.
Chimes, Model CH12/24 for indoor use private mode only; Model WBB for outdoor use.
Models CHR, CHW, CHRA and CHWA. For indoor use, private mode use only.
Chimes/strobes, Models CH24MC, CH24MCW. For wall mount, indoor use.
Models CHSR and CHSW, For indoor use only, private mode use only.
Horns, Model APA-451; Models PA400B, -400R, -400W with or without suffix -F. For indoor use only.
Models HR, HW. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
Models MHR, MHW. For indoor use only.
Tones 1,2,3 and 4 are Public Mode at 24V DC/FWR.
Tone 3 is Public Mode at 12V DC.
Tones 1,2 and 4 are Private Mode at 12V DC.
Tones 1,2,3 and 4 are Private Mode at 12V FWR.
Model APA151. For indoor use only. Public mode.
Sounder/strobes, Model P2475RL . May employ "W" or "Z" suffix. For indoor wall mount only.
Model P12015K for indoor or outdoor use.
Directional sounders, Model PF24V for supplemental fire alarm use. Indoor use only.
SPECTRALERT ADVANCE SERIES HORNS, CHIMES AND COMBOS
General - Models with "K" in the suffix are suitable for indoor or outdoor use with an operating temperature rating of -40C to +66C (-40F to +151
F) and have a NEMA Type 3, 3R and 4X enclosure ratings only when used with the Listed models SA-WBB and SA-WBBW (wall) or the models SAWBBC and SA-WBBCW (ceiling) weatherproof back boxes. Models with "-P" in the suffix have plain housings with no lettering on the enclosure. Models
not containing either "-P", in the suffix have English lettering reading "FIRE" on the housing. Models with the "-SP" suffix have Spanish lettering reading
"FUEGO" on the housing. Models with the "-PG" suffix have Portuguese lettering reading "FOGO" on the housing.
Horns - Models HR and HW. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
Chimes - Models CHR and CHW are intended for private mode only. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
Chime/Strobes - Models CHSR and CHSW are intended for private mode only. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
1/1/70 6:00:59 AM
Horn/Strobes - Two-wire type, rectangular enclosure, Models P2R, P2W, P2RH and P2WH. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
Horn/Strobes - Two-wire type, round enclosure, Models PC2R, PC2W, PC2RH and PC2WH. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
Horn/Strobes - Four-wire type, rectangular enclosure, Models P4R, P4W, P4RH and P4WH. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
Horn/Strobes - Four-wire type, round enclosure, Models PC4R, PC4W, PC4RH and PC4WH. Intended for indoor use mounted on the wall or ceiling.
Accessories:
Back box, Model WBBF for indoor/outdoor use.
ModelsSA-WBB, and SA-WBBC (Back boxes for Spectralert Advance Series) for indoor/outdoor use.
Back box skirts, Models BBSC, BBSCW, BBS-CHSW, BBS-CHSR.
Flush mount trim plates, Models MPF2, -2B.
Weatherproof plates, Models WTP, WTPW, WTP-SP, WTP-SPW, with a NEMA Type 3R and IP22 enclosure ratings. May be used in place of the listed
weatherproof back boxes as follows:
Models WTP (Red), WTPW (White) Weatherproof Plates used with horn and horn/strobes models with "K" suffix, suitable for indoor or outdoor flush
mount usage, wall or ceiling, with an extended operating temperature range of -40 degrees F to 151 degrees F (-40 degrees C to 66 degrees C). They
can be mounted to 2 inch by 4 inch or 4 inch by 4 inch back boxes, with a 1-1/2 inch minimum depth.
Models WTP-SP (Red) and WTP-SPW (White) Weatherproof Plates used with speakers and speaker/strobes models with "K" suffix, suitable for indoor or
outdoor use flush mount usage, wall or ceiling, with an operating temperature rating of -40 degrees F to 151 degrees F (-40 degrees C to 66 degrees
C). They can only be mounted to a 4 inch by 4 inch by 2-1/8 inch back box.
Semi-flush mount trim plates, Models D-MP, S-MP. May employ "W" suffix.
Sync modules, Models MDL3R, MDL3W.
Models MDL3R and MDL3W are also Listed under Audible-signal Appliances (ULSZ).
120 VAC adapter mounting plate, Model MP120K may be used with Models P2R, P2RH, P2RK, P2RHK, P2W, P2WH, SR, SRH, SRK, SRHK, SW, SWH,
PC2R, PC2RH, PC2RK, PC2RHK, PC2W, PC2WH, SCR, SCRH, SCRK, SCRHK, SCW, SCWH, HR, HRK, HW, SR-P, SW-P, SRH-P, SWH-P, P2R-P, P2W-P,
P2RH-P, P2WH-P, SCR-P, SCW-P, SCRH-P, SCWH-P, PC2R-P, PC2W-P, PC2RH-P, PC2WH-P, SR-SP, SRH-SP, P2R-SP, P2RH-SP, SCW-SP, SCWH-SP,
PC2W-SP, PC2WH-SP, CHR, CHW, CHSR, CHSW.
Smoke detector audible bases, Models B501BH, B501BHT, B501BH-2, B501BHT-2.
Audible signal appliance accessories, accessory retrofit trim plate, Model RFP, RFPW. Optional with Series H horns, Series CH Chimes, Series
CHS Chime/Strobes, Series P2 Horn/Strobes, Series PC2 Horn/Strobes, Series P4 Horn/Strobes, and Series PC4 Horn/Strobes.
Audible signal appliance accessories, accessory trim ring, Models TR-HS, TRW-HS, TRC-HS and TRCW-HS. Optional with Series H horns, Series
CH Chimes, Series CHS Chime/Strobes, Series P2 Horn/Strobes, Series PC2 Horn/Strobes, Series P4 Horn/Strobes, and Series PC4 Horn/Strobes.
Questions?
Page Top

Laboratories Inc."
1/1/70 6:01:00 AM
1/1/70 6:01:00 AM
Pull
Product Configuration
In Final Cells
Pull
Pull
Sheet Metal Fabrication
PCB Assembly
Core
Core Processes
Processes
600 Total Employees

325 Operations Employees
Operation started in Northford, USA in 1989

Census:
Facility:
- 302K sq.ft. facility (150K sq. ft. factory area)
Customer Order
Factory Operations Snapshot
Pull
HONEYWELL - CONFIDENTIAL
Raw Material
Suppliers
1/1/70 6:01:01 AM
HOS AREA
Raw Final Material

Supermarket in each cell
Sheet Metal Assembly

Board Assembly
Final Cells
FCPS Cell
Sheet Metal
Fabrication
Receiving
Sheet Metal
& Resale
Docks
Sheet Metal
Powder Coat
(Paint)
TH #2
TH #1
(5 Continuous Flow Lines)
PCB
Assembly
(45 Cells)
Final Cells
SMT #3
SMT #2
SMT #1
Finished Goods Warehouse
Factory Layout
Material
Stockroom
Receiving
Electronics
Shipping
Docks
SMT Set-up
1/1/70 6:01:02 AM
1. Solder Paste
2. Panasonic Pick & Place
SMT LINE 3
PCB Assembly
3. Reflow Oven
1/1/70 6:01:03 AM
4. Sequencer
(reels for Axial)
5. Axial (Insertion)
Radial
Axial
6. Radial (Insertion)
PCB Assembly Contd.
1/1/70 6:01:04 AM
8. Wave (Solder)
9. Postwave (Manual)
7. Prewave (Manual)
10. HP (In Circuit Test)
PCB Assembly Contd.
Final Cells
1/1/70 6:01:06 AM
1/1/70 6:01:07 AM
4. Finished Product
1. WK5 (Functional Test)
3. Packaging
2. Mechanical Assembly
Routing Steps
1/1/70 6:01:08 AM
Sheet Metal Fabrication and Paint Areas
1/1/70 6:01:09 AM
FCPS Cell Raw Material
Through Hole (TH) Lines 1-2
FCPS Cell Board Assemblies
Final Cell Supermarkets
Surface Mount (SMT) Lines 1-3
FCPS Sheet Metal
TH & SMT Prewave
Printed Circuit Board Assembly Raw Material Supermarkets
Supermarkets
Notes
1/1/70 6:01:10 AM
REFERENCE PROJECTS
XLS-3000 is a versatile fire detection and alarm system with proven record of large install base in diverse markets.
Below is short list of reference projects:
PROJECT
INDUSTRIAL
Chevron Plant
Specialty Materials - Chemical Plant
Oil Supply Planning and Scheduling (OSPAS), Aramco
Chemical store yard, Aramco
Ethylene transfer facilities, Aramco
Safania Plant, Aramco
Petro Rabigh, Aramco
California, USA
Texas, USA
Dhahran, KSA
Riyadh, KSA
Yanbu, KSA
KSA
KSA
EDUCATION
King Saud University
King Abdulaziz University
Emirates Aviation Training
Dubai Women's College
Riyadh, KSA
Jeddah, KSA
UAE
UAE
RESIDENTIAL & COMMERCIAL TOWERS

National Commercial Bank
Tabreed
Zallaq Resort
Meydan
Burj Khalifa
Marina Mall
Dubai Silicon Oasis
Jumeirah Golf Estates
Yas Island
Shangrila Hotel
Qatar Pearl
Dolphin Tower
Al Bidda Tower
Blom Bank
Societe General Bank
Jeddah, KSA
Bahrain
Bahrain
Dubai, UAE
Dubai, UAE
Dubai, UAE
Dubai, UAE
Dubai, UAE
Abu Dhabi, UAE
Abu Dhabi, UAE
Qatar
Qatar
Qatar
Lebanon
Lebanon
HOSPITALS & OTHERS

Kaiser Permanente Hospital
Tanjeeb Hospital
Ft. Gordon
Ft. Bragg
Ft. Wainwright
Miami Convention Center
Etisalat - Headquarters, Earth station
ZADCO Headquarters
ADNOC FOD Headquarters
California, USA
KSA
USA
USA
USA
USA
UAE
UAE
UAE
LOCATION
1/1/70 6:01:10 AM
Notes
1/1/70 6:01:10 AM
For More Information

Email: industrialfiregas@honeywell.com
www.honeywelllifesafety.com
Honeywell Life Safety
Honeywell Middle East FZE
P.O. Box 18530
Jebel Ali Free Zone, Dubai
United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971 4 807 3200
Fax:+971 4 881 6202
www.honeywell.com
HLS--05-10
May 2010
2010 Honeywell International inc.
Honeywell

Fire Alarm System Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fire Alarm System Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honeywell

XLS 3000 / XLS 140-2 (E)

1.0 Fire Alarm Control Panels

2.0 Voice Control Systems

4.0 Eclipse Intelligent Devices

5.0 Flashscan Intelligent Devices

6.0 Detectors for Hazardous Areas

7.0 Audio / Visual Devices

8.0 Programming, Integration and Graphics

9.0 Standards / Approvals and Factory

Projects and Sales:

Training and Technical Support:

Fire Alarm Control Panel

1.0 Fire Alarm Control Panels

XLS3000s, XLS-DVC audio option at right

TC809C1004 GAS DETECTION MODULE:

The FlashScan protocol incorporates nine levels of pre-alarm

Ion 0.5 to 2.5%/foot obscuration.

Interface to industry-standard linear scale 4-20 mA sensors.

Figure 1 XLS3000 Sample System Options

Page 2 of 8 3/12/2010 74-4034-4

COPTIR 1.0 to 4.0%/foot obscuration.

electric, TC907 Ionization, TC908 Thermal, S464H manual pull

Device Auto-Adressing and Location Identification

Sensitivity Adjust. Nine sensitivity levels are provided for alarm

With the Honeywell System Maintenance and Reporting Tool

Cooperating Multi-Detector Sensing. A patented feature of

Using Verifire Tools, the owner or service company can run

In addition to supporting FlashScan protocol, the XLS3000 also

Autoprogram is a timesaving feature of the XLS3000. It is a

Field Programming Options

Eclipse improves on the patented FlashScan protocol by further

The system will release on any of ten independent hazards.

Eclipse devices (TC900 series) are available in the traditional

74-4034-4 3/12/2010 Page 3 of 8

EMERGENCY VOICE AND FIREFIGHTERS TELEPHONE

The XLS3000 has digital message generation, hard-wired voice

AMPS-24E: Main power supply and battery charger for the

MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Includes CPU, 640

XLS3000-CPUND: XLS3000 without display.

AMPS-24: Main power supply and battery charger for the

Figure 2 XLSNET Block Diagram

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES & BATTERIES

RM-1: Remote paging microphone series. See 85-3053.

PRINTERS, ACS DEVICES & PERIPHERALS

XLS-LBBR: Battery Enclosure, Red. Holds two 60 AH batteries

LCD-160: Remote Annunciator. Mimics the XLS3000 Display.

ACPS-610: 6.0 amp or 10 amp addressable charging power

LCD-80: LCD Remote Annunciator. 80-character, backlit LCD

COMMUNICATORS (DACTS) AND TRANSMITTERS

74-4034-4 3/12/2010 Page 5 of 8

COMPATIBLE INTELLIGENT DEVICES

XP6-MA: FlashScan six-zone interface module; connects

XP6-R: FlashScan six-relay (Form-C) control module. See 853071.

BEAMHK: Heating kit for transmitter/receiver

BEAMLRK: Long-range accessory kit, TC847A1004 below. See

TC806DNR: Low-profile intelligent photoelectric sensor,

XP10-M: FlashScan ten-input monitor module. See 85-3068.

ENCLOSURES, CHASSIS & DRESS PLATES

CHS-4L: Standard Chassis, Low Profile. Used in rows 1 through

AUDIO VISUAL DEVICES (RECOMMENDED)

14507371-001: Low-profile base. Standard U.S. style. See 853043.